COMMITTED TO EXCELLENCE

WARNING
THE FOLLOWING SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS
ARE FOR USE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY.
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, DO NOT
PERFORM ANY SERVICING OTHER THAN THAT
CONTAINED IN OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
UNLESS YOU ARE QUALIFIED TO DO SO. REFER
TO OPERATORS SAFETY SUMMARY AND
SERVICE SAFETY SUMMARY PRIOR TO
PERFORMING ANY SERVICE.

PLEASE CHECK FOR CHANGE INFORMATION

AT THE REAR OF THIS MANUAL.

OSCILLOSCOPE
SERVICE

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Tektronix, Inc.
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, Oregon 97077 Serial Number
070-5011-00
Product Group 38 First Printing OCT 1983
Copyright @ 1983 Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved.
Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any
form without the written permission of Tektronix, Inc.

Products of Tektronix, Inc. and its subsidiaries are covered

by U.S. and foreign patents and/or pending patents.

TEKTRONIX, TEK, SCOPE-MOBILE, and are

registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc. TELEQUIPMENT
is a registered trademark of Tektronix U.K. Limited.

Printed in U S A . Specification and price change privileges

are reserved.

INSTRUMENT SERIAL NUMBERS

Each instrument has a serial number on a panel insert, tag,

or stamped on the chassis. The first number or letter
designates the country of manufacture. The last five digits
of the serial number are assigned sequentially and are
unique to each instrument. Those manufactured in the
United States have six unique digits. The country of
manufacture is identified as follows:
BOO0000 Tektronix, Inc., Beaverton, Oregon, USA
100000 Tektronix Guernsey, Ltd., Channel Islands
200000 Tektronix United Kingdom, Ltd., London
300000 SonyITektronix, Japan
700000 Tektronix Holland, NV, Heerenveen,
The Netherlands
 Hyperlinked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click t o select

2336 Service

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
...
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 SECTION 3 THEORY OF OPERATION
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
OPERATORS SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . vi GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . 3-2
SERVICING SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii DETAILED CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
SECTION 1 SPECIFICATION CHANNEL 1 AND CHANNEL 2
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 ATTENUATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
ACCESSORIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 VERTICAL PREAMPLIFIERS.
AVAILABLE OPTION . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 DIODE GATES. AND DELAY
PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS . . . 1-1 LINE DRIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
VERTICAL OUTPUT
SECTION 2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
PREPARATION FOR USE . . . . . . . . . 2-1 VERTICAL SWITCHING LOGIC
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS. . . . . 2-1 AND CHOP BLANKING . . . . . . . . 3-11
LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION . . . . 2-1 TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
LINE FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
POWER CORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 A A N D BTlMlNG SWITCHES . . . . 3-26
CONTROLS. CONNECTORS. HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIER . . . . . . 3-26
AND INDICATORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 CRT CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
POWER AND DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . 2-3 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY . . 3-33
VERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 FAN CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
HORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 CALIBRATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
ATRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 DELTA TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
BTRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
REAR PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS. . . . 2-9
GRATICULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 SECTION 4 PERFORMANCE CHECK
GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 PROCEDURE
SIGNAL CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . 2-10 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
INPUT COUPLING CAPACITOR TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED . . . 4-1
PRECHARGING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 PERFORMANCE CHECK
INSTRUMENT COOLING . . . . . . . 2-10 INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAYS. . . . . . . . 2-11 LIMITS AND TOLERANCES . . . . . 4-1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 SPECIAL FIXTURES . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
NORMAL SWEEP DISPLAY . . . . . . 2-1 1 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SIGNAL DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1 INDEX TO PERFORMANCE
MAGNIFIED-SWEEP DISPLAY . . . . 2-12 CHECK STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
DELAYED-SWEEP DISPLAY . . . . . 2-12 VERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
DELAYED-SWEEP TRIGGERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 HORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
SINGLE-SWEEP DISPLAY . . . . . . . 2-12 EXTERNAL Z-AXIS AND
X-Y DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 CALIBRATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Hyperlin ked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click t o select

 Hyperlinked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click to select

2336 Service

TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont)

Page Page
SECTION 5 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE CORRECTIVE M.AINTENANCE (cont)
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 TRANSISTORS AND
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED . . . 5-1 INTEGRATED CIRCUITS . . . . . . . 6-14
LIMITS AND TOLERANCES . . . . . 5-1 SOLDERING TECHNIQUES . . . . . . 6-14
PARTIAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . 5-1 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
ADJUSTMENT INTERACTION . . . 5-2 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
PREPARATION FOR Lid Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 A30-Delta Time Logic
INDEX TO ADJUSTMENT Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 B Trigger Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
MAIN POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Delta Time Interconnect Cable. . . 6-17
DISPLAY AND Z.AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Cathode-Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
VERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 A1 5-Vert 0utIH.V. Power
TRIGGERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Supply Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . 6-19
HORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 A1 0-Vert Preamp1L.V. Power
EXTERNAL Z-AXIS AND Supply Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . 6-20
CALIBRATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 A1 I-Negative Regulator
Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
A1 2-Positive Regulator
SECTION 6 MAINTENANCE Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
STATIC-SENSITIVE COMPONENTS . . 6-1 A23-Trigger Circuit Board . . . . . 6-22
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . 6-2 A24-SweepIHoriz Amp/Opt
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
GENERAL CARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Timing Switch Assembly . . . . . . . 6-23
INSPECTION AND CLEANING . . . 6-2 Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 REPACKAGING FOR SHIPMENT . . 6-31
SEMICONDUCTOR CHECKS . . . . . 6-5 SELECTABLE COMPONENTS . . . . . 6-31
PERIODIC READJUSTMENT . . . . . 6-5
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 SECTION 7 OPTIONS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 INTRODUCTION ............. 7-1
TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS . . . . . 6-5 OPTION03 . . . . ............. 7-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION 8 REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS
TECHNIQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . 6-12 SECTION 9 DIAGRAMS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . 6-12 SECTION 10 REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS
OBTAINING REPLACEMENT
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 ACCESSORIES
MAINTENANCE AIDS . . . . . . . . . 6-12
INTERCONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . 6-12 CHANGE INFORMATION

Hyperlinked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click to select

REV NOV 1981

 Hyperlinked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click to select

2336 Service

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Page
...
The 2336 Oscilloscope VIII

LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch. line fuse. and power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Optional power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Power and display controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Vertical controls. connectors. and indicators and calibrator output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Horizontal controls and indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
A TRIGGER controls. connector. and indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
B TRIGGER controls. connector. and LCD readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Rear-panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Graticule measurement markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Basic block diagram of the 2336 Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Channel 1 Vertical Attenuator. simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Vertical Preamplifier. Diode Gate. and Delay Line Driver. simplified block diagram . . . . . . . 3-8
Diode Gate biasing for Channel 1 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Simplified illustration of Multiplexer U215 switching operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Trigger circuitry. detailed block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Trigger signal slow path (low frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Trigger signal fast path (high frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Simplified diagram of the B Trigger Generator and B Source and B Slope
switching circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Sweep operation in the A Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Sweep circuit waveform relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Sweep operation in the B Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Horizontal Amplifier. detailed block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
High-Voltage Oscillator wavefrom relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
DC Restorer circuit. simplified diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Foldover circuit action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Typical waveforms in the Fan Motor three-stage inverter circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Simplified diagram of the Delay Time Switching and Prescaling circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Exclusive-OR gate switching action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Test setup for external trigger and jitter checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Areas affected by h igh-f requency compensation adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Multipin connector orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Attenuator contact pressure check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Attenuator contact alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
SECIDIV switch exploded view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Vertical attenuator exploded view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Hyperlinked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click to select

iii
 Hyperlinked Page - Scroll UP or Down - Left click to select

2336 Service

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

Figure
Color codes for resistors and capacitors.
Semiconductor lead configurations.
Locating components on schematic diagrams and circuit board illustrations.
2336 main block diagram.
2336 Delta Time block diagram.
A19-Attenuator exploded view.
A1 I-Negative Regulator, A1 2-Positive Regulator, and
AlO-Vertical Preamp1L.V. Power Supply boards.
A1 5-Vertical 0utputIH.V. Power Supply board.
A23-Trigger board.
A24-SweepIHorizontal Amplifier/Option board.
A16-B Timing and A1 7-A Timing boards.
Timing Switch exploded view.
A30-Delta Time Logic and A31-B Timing Slope Switch boards.

Hyperlinked Page - Scroll UP or Down - Left click to select

 Hyperlinked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click to select

2336 Service

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page
Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . ........................................ 1-2
Environmental Characteristics . . ........................................ 1-10
Physical Characteristics. . . . . . . ........................................ 1-11
Option Electrical Characteristics. ........................................ 1-11

Line Voltage and Fuse Selection. . . . . . . . ................................. 2-1

Option 03 Line Voltage and Fuse Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

PROM U38 Logic Table .............................................. 3-37

Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

DC Accuracy Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Low-Frequency Compensation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Switch Combinations for A Trigger Checks (CH 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Switch Combinations for B Trigger Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Switch Combinations for A Trigger Checks (CH 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Settings for Timing Accuracy Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
A Time Readout Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Adjustment Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Main Power Supply Tolerances and p-p Ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Vertical DC Accuracy Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Switch Combinations for A Trigger Checks (CH 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Switch Combinations for B Trigger Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Switch Combinations for A Trigger Checks (CH 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
A Time Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Settings for Timing Accuracy Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
A Time Readout Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
A Trigger Holdoff Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Relative Susceptibility to Static-Discharge Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

External Inspection Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Internal Inspection Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Suggested Troubleshooting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Maintenance Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Hyperlinked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click to select

2336 Service

OPERATORS SAFETY SUMMARY

The general safety information in this part of the summary is for both operating and servicing personnel. Specific warnings
and cautions will be found throughout the manual where they apply and do not appear in this summary.

Terms in This Manual Grounding the Product

CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
that could result in damage t o the equipment or other of the power cord. To avoid electrical shock, plug the
property. power cord into a properly wired receptable before con-
necting t o the product input or output terminals. A
WARNING statements identify conditions or practices protective ground connection by way of the grounding
that could result in personal injury or loss of life. conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.

Terms as Marked on Equipment

Danger Arising From Loss of Ground
CAUTION indicates a personal injury hazard not imme-
diately accessible as one reads the markings, or a hazard t o Upon loss of the protective-ground connection, all acces-
property, including the equipment itself. sible conductive parts (including knobs and controls that
may appear to be insulating) can render an electric shock.
DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately
accessible as one reads the marking.

Use the Proper Power Cord

Symbols in This Manual Use only the power cord and connector specified for
your product.
This symbol indicates where applicable
cautionary or other information i s to be Use only a power cord that is in good condition.
found. For maximum input voltage see
Table 1-1. For detailed information on power cords and connectors
see Figure 2-2.
Symbols as Marked on Equipment
Use the Proper Fuse
F DANGER - High voltage.
To avoid fire hazard, use only a fuse of the correct type,
voltage rating and current rating as specified in the parts
Protective ground (earth) terminal. list for your product.

ATTENTION - Refer to manual. Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmospheres

To avoid explosion, do not operate this product in an
explosive atmosphere unless it has been specifically cer-
Power Source tified for such operation.
This product is intended to operate from a power source
that does not apply more than 250 volts rms between the
supply conductors or between either supply conductor and Do Not Remove Covers or Panels
ground. A protective ground connection by way o f the To avoid personal injury, do not remove the product
grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe covers or panels. Do not operate the product without the
operation. covers and panels properly installed.
 2336 Service

SERVICING SAFETY SUMMARY

FOR QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY
Refer also to the preceding Operators Safety Summary.

D o Not Service Alone Disconnect power before removing protective panels,

soldering, or replacing components.
Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this
product unless another person capable of rendering first
aid and resuscitation i s present.
Power Source
This product is intended to operate from a power source
that does not apply more than 250 volts rms between the
Use Care When Servicing With Power On supply conductors or between either supply conductor
Dangerous voltages exist at several points in this product. and ground. A protective ground connection by way of the
To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed connec- grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for
tions or components while power is on. safe operation.
 2336 Service

4118-01
The 2336 Oscilloscope.

viii
 Section 1-2336 Service

SPECIFICATION
This section of the manual contains a general description of instrument features, identifies standard accessories, provides
option information, and l i s t s the instrument specification.

INTRODUCTION AVAILABLE OPTION

The TEKTRONIX 2336 Oscilloscope is a rugged, light- Option 03 (100-Vl200-V Power Transformer) permits
weight, dual-channel, 100-MHz instrument having a com- operation of the instrument from either a 100-V or a 200-V
pact crt that provides a sharply defined trace. Its vertical nominal ac-power-input source at a line frequency from
system supplies calibrated deflection factors from 5 mV per 48 Hz t o 440 Hz.
division to 5 V per division. Sensitivity can be increased t o
at least 2 mV per division by the variable VOLTSIDIV
VAR control. Trigger circuits enable stable triggering over
the full bandwidth of the vertical system. The horizontal PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS
system provides calibrated sweep speeds from 0.5 s per
division to 50 ns per division, along with delayed-sweep
features, thus accommodating accurate relative-time The following electrical characteristics (Table 1-1)
measurements. A X I 0 magnifier circuit extends the maxi- are valid for the 2336 when it has been adjusted at an
mum sweep speed to 5 ns per division when the SECIDIV ambient temperature between +20°c and +30°c, has had
switch is set t o 0.05 ps per division. a warmup period of at least 20 minutes, and is operating
at an ambient temperature between - 1 5 ' ~ and + 5 5 ' ~
(unless otherwise noted).
A 3 112-digit LCD (liqu id-crystal display) readout
enables rapid measurement of time difference between any
two points on the oscilloscope display. Both time measure-
ment points are displayed simultaneously on the crt screen. Items listed in the "Performance Requirements" column
are verifiable qualitative or quantitative limits that may be
checked by procedures contained in the "Performance
Check" section of the manual (see Section 4), except as
ACCESSORIES noted. Performance check procedures for items listed in
the "Supplemental Information" column are not provided;
The instrument is shipped with the following standard items in this column are either explanatory notes, perform-
accessories: ance characteristics for which no absolute limits are
specified, or characteristics that are impractical to check in
Probe packages routine maintenance.
Accessory pouch
Operators manual
Service manual
Accessory pouch, zip lock Environmental characteristics of the 2336 are given in
Crt filter, clear plastic Table 1-2. All environmental tests performed meet the
1.0-A AGC fast-blow fuses requirements of MI L-T-28800B, Type I II, Class 3 equip-
0.5-A AGC fast-blow fuse ment, except where otherwise noted.

For part numbers and further information about acces-

sories, refer t o the "Accessories" page at the back of this Physical characteristics of the instrument are listed in
manual. Your Tektronix representative or local Tektronix Table 1-3, and option electrical characteristics are presented
Field Office can also provide accessories information. in Table 1-4.
Specification-2336 Service

Table 1-1
Electrical Characteristics

Characteristics Performance Requirements Supplemental Information

VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM

Deflection Factor
Range 5 mV per division to 5 V per division in
a 1, 2, 5 sequence.

Accuracy +3% on all ranges when VOLTSIDIV i s

calibrated a t 5 mV per division; add
0.05% per O C deviation from 2 5 ' ~ .

Uncalibrated (VAR) Range Continuously variable between VOLTS1 Reduces deflection factor to a t least
DIV switch settings. Reduces deflection 2 mV per division with VOLTSIDIV
factor at least 2.5 to 1 on all VOLTSIDIV switch set to 5 mV.
switch settings.

Frequency Response 6-division reference signal from a

2542 source; centered vertically, with
VOLTSIDIV VAR control in cali-
brated detent.

Dc t o at least 100 MHz.

Reducesto 88 MHz at 2 mV per d i ~ i s i o n . ~

Dc to a t least 85 MHzma
Reduces to 70 MHz a t 2 mV per d i ~ i s i o n . ~
--

Ac Coupled Lower -3 dB Point

1X Probe

1 OX Probe

Step Response 5-division reference signal, dc coupled

at all deflection factors, from a 25-!2
source; centered vertically with
VOLTSIDIV VAR control in cali-
brated detent. BW LlM IT push button
must be out for full bandwidth
operat ion.

Rise Time (5 mV per division to Rise time is calculated from the

5 V per division) formula:
0.35
3.5 ns or less. Rise Time =
BW (in MHz)

Aberrations
Positive-Going Step
(Excluding ADD Mode)
5 mV per division to 0.2 V +3%, -3%, 3% p-p or less.
per division

a~erformanceRequirement not checked in manual.

 Specification-2336 Service

Table 1-7 (cont)

Characteristics Performance Requirements Supplemental Information

VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM (cont)

Aberrations (cont)
Negative-GoingStep Add 2% to all positive-goingstep
specifications; checked at 5 mV
per division.
- - -

ADD Mode Add 4% to all positive-going step

specifications; checked a t 5 mV per
division.

Position Effect Total aberrations less than +5%, -5%,

5% p-p; checked a t 5 mV per division.

Temperature Effect Add 0.15% per O C deviation to aber-

rations specifications from 2 5 ' ~ .

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio At least 10 t o 1 at 50 MHz for common- VAR control adjusted for best CMRR
mode signals of 6 divisions or less. at 10 mV per division a t 50 kHz;
checked at 10 mV per division.

Channel 2 Invert Trace Shift Less than 0.4 division from center screen
when switching from normal to inverted.

lnput Gate Current

-1 5 ' to
~ +30°c 0.5 nA or less. 0.1-division trace shift when moving
lnput Coupling switch from GND to
AC at 5 mV per division.

0.8-division trace shift when moving

lnput Coupling switch from GND to
AC a t 5 mV per division.
-

Attenuator Isolation (CH 1 t o CH 2) A t least 100 to 1. With one vertical input set at 0.5 V per
division, apply 4-V p-p 25-MHz signal;
set the other vertical input to 10 mV
per division. Check for less than
4 divisions of signal.

POSITION Control Range At least +I 2 and -1 2 divisions from

graticule center.

Step Attenuator Balance Less than or equal to 0.2-division trace Double for each 1O'C deviation
shift when rotated from 5 mV per from 2 5 ' ~ .
division to 5 V per division.

Chop Frequency 275 kHz -t 30%.

lnput Characteristics
Resistance

Capacitance

a~erformanceRequirement not checked in manual.

REV NOV 1981

Specification-2336 Service

Table 1-1 (cont)

Characteristics Performance Requirements supplemental Information

VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM (cont)

Maximum lnput Voltage A

DC Coupled 400 V (dc + peak ac) or
500 V p-p ac at 1 kHz or lessa

AC Coupled 400 V (dc + peak ac) or

500 V p-p ac at 1 kHz or less.a

TRIGGER SYSTEM

Sensitivity With VOLTSIDIV VAR control in

calibrated detent;
In EXT t 10,multiply input require-
ments by 10.

A TRIGGER
AC Coupled Signal 0.3 division internal or 50 mV external
from 20 Hz t o 20 MHz; increasing to
I. 1 divisions internal or 150 mV external
at 100 MHz.

LF REJ Coupled Signal 0.3 division internal or 50 mV external Attenuates signals below 50 kHz
from 50 kHz +I0 kHz to 20 MHz; +I0 kHz (-3 dB at 50 kHz).
increasing to 1.1 divisions internal or
150 mV external at 100 MHz.

HF REJ Coupled Signal 0.3 division internal or 50 mV external Attenuates signals below 20 Hz +4 Hz
from 20 Hz +4 Hz t o 50 kHz 2 10 kHz. and above 50 kHz +I0 kHz (-3 dB a t
20 Hz and 50 kHz).

DC Coupled Signal 0.3 division internal or 50 mV external

from dc to 20 MHz; increasing to
1 .I divisions internal or 150'mV external
a t 100 MHz.

B TRIGGER 0.3 division internal or 50 mV external

(Ac Coupled Signal) from 30 Hz to 20 MHz; increasing to
I .I divisions internal or 150 mV external
a t 100 MHz.

Trigger Jitter 0.2 division or less at 5 ns per division VOLTSIDIV VAR control must be in
( X I0 MAG on) with 100 MHz applied calibrated detent.
and at the rated trigger sensitivity.

External Trigger Inputs

Maximum lnput Voltage
A 400 V (dc + peak ac) or
500 V p-p ac a t 1 kHz or less.a

lnput Resistance

Input Capacitance 1 20 pF

a~erformanceRequirement not checked in manual.

 Specification-2336 Service

Table 1-1 (cont)

Characteristics Performance Requirements Supplemental Information

TRIGGER SYSTEM (cont)

LEVEL Control Range

EXT A t least + 1 V, 2 V p-p.

A t least + 10 V, 20 V p - ~ . ~

Trigger View (A Trigger)

Deflection Factor
EXT 100 mV per division +40%.

EXT + 10 1 V per division +40%.

Centering of Trigger Point Within 1 division of center screen.

Bandwidth To at least 80 MHz. 4-division reference signal from a 2542

source; centered vertically.

Delay Difference 3 ns +2 ns. 5-division signal with 5-ns rise time or

less from 2542 source, centered
vertically; equal cable length from
signal source t o vertical channel and
external trigger inputs, terminated in
50 Sl at each input.

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM

Sweep Rate
Calibrated Range
A Sweep 0.5 s per division t o 0.05 p s per division
in a I,2, 5 sequence. X I 0 MAG extends
maximum sweep speed t o 5 ns per
division.

B Sweep 50 ms per division t o 0.05 ps per

division in a 1, 2, 5 sequence. X I 0 MAG
extends maximum sweep speed t o 5 ns
per division.

Accuracy Unmagnified Magnified Accuracy specification applies over the

full 10 divisions with X I 0 MAG on
+20° c t o +30°c +2% +3% and off. Exclude the first and last
40 ns of the sweep on all sweep speeds
with X I 0 MAG on and off.

Linearity Over any 2-division portion of the full

10 divisions, displayed at all sweep
speeds. Exclude the first and last dis-
played divisions of the 5- and 10-ns
per division sweep speeds with X I 0
MAG on.

a~erformanceRequirement not checked in manual.

Specif ication-2336 Service

Table 1-1 (cont)

Characteristics Performance Requirements Supplemental Information

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM (cont)

Variable Range (VAR) Continuously variable between calibrated Extends maximum A Sweep speed to
settings of the SECIDIV switches. at least 1.25 s per division.

A Sweep Length 10.5 to 11.5 divisions. I Checked a t 1 ms per division.

A Trigger Holdoff (VAR) At least 2.5 times the minimum holdoff

at any sweep speed.a

Magnifier Registration k0.2 division from graticule center ( X I0

MAG on t o X I 0 MAG off).

POSITION Control Range Start of sweep must position to right of Checked at 1 ms per division.
graticule center. End of sweep must
position to left of graticule center.

Differential Time Measurement Exclude delayed operation when

Accuracy knobs are locked at any sweep speed
or when the A SECIDIV switch is a t
f.1% of reading f.1 count. either 0.1 ys per division or 0.05 ys
per division. Exclude the first 0.25
-+2.5%of reading -+I
count.a division on all A Sweep speeds.

Delay Time Jitter f0.005% of 10 times the A SECIDIV

switch setting (less than one part in
20,000) over the full delay time range.

X-Y OPERATION

Deflection Factor Range 1 5 mV per division to 5 V per division I No X-axis variable.

I in a 1, 2, 5 sequence. I
Bandwidth
X-Axis Dc to a t least 2 MHz.

Y-Axis I Dc t o a t least 100 MHz.

I
Input Characteristics
Resistance

Capacitance 1 20pFf.10%.~

a~erformanceRequirement not checked in manual.

 Specification-2336 Service

Table 1-1 (cont)

Characteristics Performance Requirements Supplemental Information

X-Y OPERATION (cont)

Phase Difference Between < 3" from dc t o 200 kHz.

X- and Y-Axis Amplifiers

Accuracy
X-Ax is
0°C t o + 4 0 " ~
-

k8% of indicated def~ection.~

CALIBRATOR

Waveshape Positive-going square wave.

Duty Cycle

Output Voltage
0°C to +40°c

Repetition Rate

Output Impedance

Z-AXIS INPUT

Sensitivity 5 V p-p signal referenced t o ground causes Positive-goingsignal decreases

noticeable modulation of display at intensity; negative-goingsignal
normal intensity. increases intensity.

Usable Frequency Range I Dc t o 2 0 MHz.

l nput Resistance
I 1 10kQ+6%.

lnput Capacitance I Less than 15 pF.

Maximum lnput Voltage +25 V (dc + peak ac) dc to 10 MHz,

derate above 10 M H ~ . ~

Input Coupling Dc.

a~erformanceRequirement not checked in manual.

Specification-2336 Service

Table 1-1 (cont)

Characteristics Performance Requirements Supplemental Information

POWER SOURCE
-
- -

Voltage Ranges, AC rms

115 V Nominal

230 V Nominal 1 200 V t o 250 Vna I

Line Frequency 1 48 Hz to 440 H Z . ~

Power Consumption
Typical 35 Wat l 1 5 V 1 6 0 H z a

Maximum 60 W at 132 V, 48 H z . ~ Measured at worst-case load and

frequency.

V A Maximum 75 V A . ~

CATHODE-RAY TUBE

Display Area 8- by 10-divisionswith 0.8-centimeter

divisions; internal, nonilluminated, rise
time graticu~e.~

Trace Rotation Range Adequate to align trace with horizontal

graticule lines.

Standard Phosphor

Raster Distortion Geometry Less than 0.1 division of bowing or

tilt, horizontal and vertical.

Nominal Accelerating Voltage

Electrode Voltages to Ground

Heater Voltage Between CRT 6.3 Vrms k0.3 V; elevated t o
Pins 1 and 14 -1960 V.

a~erformanceRequirement not checked in manual.

 Specification-2336 Service

Table 1-1 (cont)

Characteristics Supplemental Information

I
High-Voltage Oscillator
Initial Setting Maximum p-p Ripple Frequency, p-p Ripple

INTERNAL POWER SUPPLIES

Low-Voltage Supply Accuracy

(+20° c to +30° C)

-- -

High-Voltage Supply Accuracy

(+20° c t o +30° C)
-1 960 V (cathode)

+I
6 kV (anode)

REV FEB 1982

Specification-2336 Service

Table 1-2
Environmental Characteristics

Characteristics Description

NOTE
All of the environmental tests performed meet the requirements of
MIL- T-288006, Type Ill, Class 3 equipment, except storage tem-
perature and humidity requirements, which are reduced to prevent
potential damage to the LCD readout. All other instrument char-
acteristics in this table meet the full requirement of Class 3 testing.

Temperature
Operating

Nonoperating (Storage)

Altitude
Operating To 15,000 ft. Maximum operating temperature decreased 1°C per 1,000 f t
above 5,000 ft.

Nonoperating (Storage) To 50,000 ft.

Humidity
Operating + 5 5 " ~ 90%
, relative humidity, for a t least 72 hours.

Nonoperating (Storage) +60°C, 90% relative humidity, for a t least 72 hours.

-
-

Vibration (Operating) 15 minutes along each of 3 major axes a t a total displacement of 0.025 inch
p-p (4 g a t 55 Hz), with frequency varied from 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in
l-minute sweeps. Hold 10 minutes a t each major resonance, or if none exists,
hold 10 minutes at 55 Hz (procedure differs from M I L-T-28800B).

Shock (Operating and Nonoperating) 50 g, half-sine, 1l-ms duration, 3 shocks per axis in each direction, for a total
of 18 shocks.
- -- -

Will meet MIL-STD-461A requirements using procedures outlined in MIL-STD-

462, except use 10 VoltsIMeter in place of 1 VoltIMeter for RS-03; use 500 Hz
to 30 kHz in place of 30 Hz to 30 kHz for RE-01.

Transportation Meets the limits of National Safe Transit Association test procedure 1A-B
with a 36-inch drop.

REV NOV 1981

 Specif ication-2336 Service

Table 1-3
Physical Characteristics

Characteristics Description

Weight
With Accessories and Accessory Pouch 8.8 kg (19.5 Ib).

Without Accessories and Accessory Pouch 7.9 kg (17.5 Ib).

Shipping Weight
Domestic 10.9 kg (24.0 Ib).

Export 15.0 kg (33.0 Ib).

Height
With Feet and Pouch 210 mm (8.3 in).

Without Pouch 135 mm (5.3 in).

Width
With Handle 315 mm (12.4 in).

Without Handle 274 mm (10.8 in).

Depth
With Front Cover 432 mm (17.0 in).

With Handle Extended 527 mm (20.8 in).

Table 1-4
Option Electrical Characteristics

Characteristics Performance Requirements Supplemental Information

100-V/200-V POWER T R A N S f ORMER (OPTION 03)

Voltage Ranges, AC rms

100 V Nominal

200 V Nominal 180 V t o 230 V.a

Line Frequency 48 Hz to 440 H Z . ~

Power Consumption
Typical

Maximum Measured at worst-case load and

frequency.

VA Maximum 75 V A . ~

a~erformanceRequirement not checked in manual.

 This Document was scanned from the original
Tektronix Service Manual
For enquiries about high quality technical manuals

[email protected]

This Document is a complete Scan from the original

Tektronix manual
For enquiries about our complete
High quality line of technical Manuals in PDF

mailto : [email protected]
 Section 2-2336 Service

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
This section of the manual provides information on instrument installation and power requirements, and the functions of
controls, connectors, and indicators are described. Operating considerations and procedures intended to familiarize the
operator with obtaining basic oscilloscope displays are included. For more complete operating information, refer t o the 2336
Operators Manual.

PREPARATION FOR USE

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Table 2-1

Line Voltage and Fuse Selection
Refer to the Safety Summary a t the front of this manual
for power source, grounding, and other safety considera- Line Voltage
tions pertaining to the use of the 2336. Before connecting Selector Switch Voltage
the instrument to a power source, read the following infor- Position Range Fuse Data
mation, then verify that the LlNE VOLTAGE SELECTOR
1 I
--

switch is properly set for the ac power source being used 115 V Nominal 100 to 132 V I.0 A, 250 V, Fast-blow
and that the proper power-input fuse is installed.
250 V Nominal 1 200 to 250 V 1 0.5 A, 250 V, Fast-blow
a CAUTION

This instrument may be damaged if operated with

the LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch set for the
Table 2-2
wrong applied ac power input source voltage or if the Option 03 Line Voltage and Fuse Selection
wrong line fuse is installed.
Line Voltage
Selector Switch Voltage
Position Range Fuse Data

LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION 100 V Nominal 90 to 115 V I.0 A, 250 V, Fast-blow

The 2336 operates from either a 115-V or a 230-V

200 V Nominal 1 180 to 230 V 1 0.5 A, 250 V, Fast-blow

nominal ac power input source with a line frequency

ranging from 48 Hz to 440 Hz. Before connecting the
power cord to a power input source, verify that the LlNE
VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch, located on the rear panel
(see Figure 2-I), is set for the correct nominal ac power LlNE FUSE
input source voltage. To convert the instrument for oper-
ation from one line-voltage range to the other, move the
LlNE VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch to the correct To verify that the instrument power-input fuse is of
nominal ac source voltage position (see Table 2-1). If your proper value for the nominal ac source voltage, perform
instrument is equipped with Option 03 (100-Vl200-V the following procedure:
Power Transformer), use Table 2-2. The detachable power
cord may have to be changed to match the power source 1. Press in the fuse holder cap and release it with a
outlet. slight counterclockwise rotation.
Operating Instructions-2336 Service

Figure 2-1. LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch, line fuse, and power cord.

2. Pull the cap (with the attached fuse inside) out of Nominal
the fuse holder. Line- Reference
Configuration Usage Voltage Standards

si.
'lug (AC)

3. Verify proper fuse value (see Tables 2-1 and 2-2). North ANSl ~ 7 3 . lab
1
120. N EMA 5-15-P Standard

1 1
I EC 83'

Universal CEE (71, 11, I V

Eu1-0 240V V I ld
240Vl IEC 83'
POWER CORD 10-16A

This instrument has a detachable, three-wire power cord

with a three-contact plug for connection t o both the power
source and protective ground. I t s power cord is secured to
the rear panel by a cord-set-securing clamp. The plug
protective-ground contact connects (through the power-
cord protective grounding conductor) t o the accessible
metal parts of the instrument. For electrical-shock pro- ANSl ~73.20;
tection, insert this plug into a power source outlet that has NEMA 6-15-P
I EC 83'
a properly grounded protective-ground contact.
aANSI-American National Standards Institute
bNEMA-National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
CIEC-International Electrotechnical Commission
dCEE-International Commission on Rules for the Approval of
Instruments are shipped with the required power cord Electrical Equipment
as ordered by the customer. Available power cord options eBS-British Standards Institution
f ~ ~ - ~ t a n d a rAssociation
ds of Australia 2931-05
are illustrated in Figure 2-2. Contact your Tektronix
representative or local Tektronix Field Office for additional
power-cord information. Figure 2-2. Optional power cords.
 Operating Instructions-2336 Service

CONTROLS, CONNECTORS, A N D INDICATORS

This part of the manual will familiarize the operator INTEN Control-Determines the brightness of the crt
with the location and operation of instrument controls, display (has no effect when BEAM FlND switch is
connectors, and indicators. pressed in).

POWER AND DISPLAY @ BEAM FlND Switch-When held in, compresses the
display to within the graticule area and provides a
visible viewing intensity to aid in locating off-screen
Refer to Figure 2-3 for location of items 1 through 8.
displays.

@ POWER Switch-Turns instrument power on and off.

@ TRACE ROTATION Control-Screwdriver control
Press in for ON; press again for OFF.
used to align the crt trace with the horizontal grati-
cule lines.
@ FOCUS Control-Adjusts for optimum display
definition.
@ Internal Graticule-Eliminates parallax viewing error
between the trace and graticule lines. Rise-time
@ ASTlG Control-Screwdriver control used in con-
amplitude measurement points are indicated at the
left edge of the graticule.
junction with the FOCUS control t o obtain a well-
defined display over the entire graticule area. It does
not require readjustment during normal operation
of the instrument.
@ SERIAL and Mod Slots-The SERIAL slot is imprinted
with the instrument's serial number. The Mod slot
contains the option number that has been installed in
the instrument.

VERTICAL
Refer to Figure 2-4 for location of items 9 through 19.

@ AMPL CAL Connector-Provides a 0.2-V, positive-

going square-wave voltage (at approximately 1 kHz)
that permits the operator t o compensate voltage
probes and t o check oscilloscope vertical operation.
It is not intended to verify time-base calibration.

@ CH 1 OR X and CH 2 OR Y Connectors-Provide for

I POWER
application of external signals to the inputs of the
vertical deflection system or for an X-Y display. In
the X-Y mode, the signal connected to the CH 1 OR
X connector provides horizontal deflection, and the
signal connected t o the CH 2 OR Y connector
provides vertical deflection.

@ Input Coupling Switches (AC-GND-DC)-Select the

method of coupling input signals t o the vertical
deflection system.

AC-Input signal is capacitively coupled to the

Figure 2-3. Power and display controls and indicators. vertical amplifier. The dc component o f the
Operating Instructions-2336 Service

input signal is blocked. Low-frequency limit clockwise out of the detent position. Channel 1
(-3 db point) is approximately 10 Hz. VOLTSIDIV VAR control is inoperative when X-Y
VERTICAL MODE is selected.
GND-The input of the vertical amplifier is
grounded t o provide a zero (ground) reference
voltage display (does not ground the input signal). @ UNCAL lndicator-LED illuminates t o indicate that
Allows precharging the input coupling capacitor. either Channel 1 or Channel 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR
control is out of calibrated detent (vertical deflection
DC-All frequency components of the input signal factor is uncalibrated).
are coupled t o the vertical deflection system.

@ VERTICAL MODE Switches-Five push-button

@ CH 1 VOLTSIDIV and CH 2 VOLTSlDlV Switches- switches that select the mode of operation for the
Select the vertical deflection factor in a 1-2-5 vertical amp1if ier system.
sequence. VAR control must be in detent t o obtain
a calibrated deflection factor. CH l-Selects only the Channel 1 input signal for
display.
1X PROBE-Indicates the deflection factor
selected when using either a 1X probe or coaxial ALT-The display alternates between Channel 1
cable. and Channel 2 vertical input signals. The alter-
nation occurs during retrace at the end of each
10X PROBE-Indicates the deflection factor sweep. This mode i s useful for viewing both
selected when using a 10X probe. vertical input signals at sweep speeds from 0.2
ms per division t o 0.05 ys per division.

@ VAR Controls-Provide continuously variable uncal- CHOP-The display switches between the Chan-
ibrated deflection factors between the calibrated nel 1 and Channel 2 vertical input signals during
settings of the VOLTSIDIV switches when rotated the sweep. The switching rate is approximately
275 kHz. This mode is useful for viewing both
Channel 1 and Channel 2 vertical inputs at sweep
speeds from 0.5 ms per division to 0.5 s per
division.

ADD-Selects the algebraic sum of the Channel 1

and Channel 2 input signals for display.

CH 2-Selects only the Channel 2 input signal

for display.

AUTO-Press in both ALT and CHOP buttons.

The A Sweep circuitry automatically selects the
most useful switching method (ALT or CHOP)
for dual displays.

X-Y-Press in both CH 1 and CH 2 buttons. The

X-signal is applied through the Channel 1 input
connector, and the Y-signal is applied through
the Channel 2 input connector.

@ CH 2 INVERT Switch-Inverts Channel 2 display

when button is pressed in. Push button must be
pressed in a second time to release it and regain a
noninverted display.

@ POSITION Controls-Determine the vertical position

Figure 2-4. Vertical controls, connectors, and indicators and of the displays on the crt. When X-Y VERTICAL
calibrator output. MODE i s selected, the Channel 2 POSITION control

REV NOV 1981

 moves the display vertically (Y-axis), and the Hori-
zontal POSITION control moves the display hori-
zontal ly (X-axis).

@ BW LIMIT Switch-Limits the bandwidth of the

vertical amplifier to approximately 20 MHz when
pressed in. Push button must be pressed a second
time to release it and regain full 100-MHz bandwidth
operation. Provides a method for reducing inter-
ference from unwanted high-frequency signals when
viewing low-frequency signals.

@ TRlG VIEW Switch-Press in and hold this push

button to display a sample of the signal present in
the A Trigger amplifier (for all A TRIGGER
SOURCE switch settings except VERT MODE).
All other signal displays are removed while the
TRIG VIEW push button is held in.

HORIZONTAL
Refer to Figure 2-5 for location of items 20 through 26.

@A
B DELAY TlME POSITION and A TlME POSITION
Controls-Select the amount of delay time between
start of the A Sweep and start of the B Sweep. Delay
time is variable to at least 10 times the A SECIDIV
switch setting. The B DELAY TIME POSITION
(outer knob) controls the reference point when the
B TRIGGER SOURCE switch is set to either A TlME
or RUNS AFTER DLY. The A TlME (inner knob)
controls the time-measurement point only when the
B TRIGGER SOURCE switch i s set t o A TIME. When
the time-measurement point is to the left of the
reference point, the LCD readout indicates a negative
time difference.

AND B SECIDIV Switches-Selects the sweep

speed for the A and B Sweep generators in a 1-2-5
sequence. The A SECIDIV switch sets the time
between the B Sweeps (delay time). For calibrated
sweep rates, the TlME (PULL) VAR control must be
in the calibrated detent (fully clockwise position).

A SECIDIV-The A Sweep speed is shown

between the two black lines on the clear plastic
skirt. This switch also selects the delay time (used
in conjunction with the B DELAY TlME POSI-
TION control) for delayed sweep operation.

B SECIDIV-The B Sweep speed is set by pulling

the inner knob and rotating it to a setting shown
by the white line scribed on the knob. The B
Sweep circuit is used for delayed sweep operation
only.
+Operating Instructions-2336 Service

TlME (PULL) VAR Control-Provides continuously

variable, uncalibrated A Sweep speeds between SECI
DIV switch settings to at least 2.5 times the cali-
brated setting (extends slowest sweep speed to at
least 1.25 s per division). To operate this control, pull
out the VAR knob and rotate it counterclockwise
out of the detent.

@ UNCAL Indicator LED-Illuminates to indicate that

the A Sweep speed is uncalibrated when the TlME
(PULL) VAR control is rotated out of the calibrated
detent.

@ HORlZ MODE Switches-Three push-button switches

that select the mode of operation for the horizontal
deflection system.

A-Horizontal deflection is provided by the A

Sweep generator a t a sweep speed determined by
the setting of the A SECIDIV switch.

A INTEN-Horizontal deflection is provided by

the A Sweep generator at a speed determined by
the A SECIDIV switch. The B Sweep generator
provides an intensified zone on the display. The
length of the intensified zone is determined by

TIME (WLU TRIG HOLDOR (WSH)

B'DELAY TlME
POSITION
ATlME
WSITION
w

Figure 2-5. Horizontal controls and indicator.

Operating Instructions-2336 Service

the setting of the B SECIDIV switch. The location either in the absence of an adequate trigger signal
of the intensified zone i s determined by the setting or when the repetition rate of the trigger signal
of the B DELAY TlME POSITION and A TlME is below approximately 10 Hz.
POSITION controls.
NORM-Sweep is initiated when an adequate
B-Horizontal deflection i s provided by the B trigger signal is applied. In the absence of a trigger
Sweep generator a t a sweep speed determined by signal, no baseline trace will be present.
the setting of the B SECIDIV switch. The start
of the B Sweep is delayed from the start of the A SGL SWP-Press in the spring-return push button
Sweep by a time determined by the settings of the momentarily to arm the A Sweep circuit for a
A SECIDIV switch and the B DELAY TlME single sweep display. This mode operates the same
POSITION and A TlME POSITION controls. as NORM, except only one sweep is displayed for
each trigger signal. Another single sweep cannot be
displayed until the SGL SWP push button is
@) XI0 MAG Switch-When pressed in, increases the momentarily pressed in again t o reset the A Sweep
displayed sweep speed by a factor of 10. Extends circuit. This mode i s useful for displaying and
fastest sweep speed to 5 ns per division. Push button photographing either nonrepetitive signals or
must be pressed in a second time t o release it and signals that cause unstable conventional displays
regain the X I sweep speed. (e.g., signals that vary in amplitude, shape, or
time).

@ POSITION Control-Positions the display hori-

zontally in all modes. Provides both coarse and fine @ TRIG'D-READY Indicator LED-Illuminates when
control action. Reverse the direction of rotation to either AUTO or NORM Trigger Mode is selected to
actuate fine positioning feature. When X-Y VE R- indicate that the A Sweep is triggered (TRIG'D).
TICAL MODE is selected, the Horizontal POSITION When SGL SWP Trigger Mode is selected, the LED
control moves the display horizontally (X-axis). illuminates to indicate that the trigger circuit is
armed (READY) for a single sweep display.

A TRIGGER

Refer to Figure 2-6 for location of items 27 through 34.

@) SLOPE Switch-Selects the slope of the signal that

triggers the sweep.
HORU MODE
+ (plus)-When push button i s released out,
sweep i s triggered from the positive-goingslope of
0
the trigger signal.

COUPLING S O U R 3
- (minus)-When push button is pressed in, sweep
is triggered from the negative-going slope of the
trigger signal.

@ LEVEL Control-Selects the amplitude point on the TlME (WLU TRIG HOLDOR (PUSHI
B DELAY TlME_
+
. A TIME
trigger signal a t which the sweep is triggered. The POSITION POSITION
LEVEL control i s usually adjusted for the desired
display after trigger SLOPE, COUPLING, and
SOURCE switch settings have been selected.

@ Trigger Mode Switches-Three push-button switches

that determine the trigger mode for the A Sweep.

AUTO-Permits triggering on waveforms with

repetition rates down to approximately 10 Hz.
Sweep free runs and provides a baseline trace Figure 2-6. A TRlGGE R controls, connector, and indicator.
 Operating Instructions-2336 Service

SOURCE Switch-Determines the source of the trig- T R I G HOLDOFF (PUSH) VAR Control-Provides
ger signals coupled to the input of the trigger circuit. continuous control of holdoff time between sweeps.
This control improves the ability to trigger on aperi-
VERT MODE-The internal trigger source is odic signals (such as complex digital waveforms)
determined by the signals selected for display by and increases the minimum holdoff time to a t least
the VERTICAL MODE switches. 2.5 times at any sweep speed.

CH I-The signal applied t o the CH 1 input

connector is the source of the trigger signal.
B TRIGGER
CH 2-The signal applied to the CH 2 input
connector is the source of the trigger signal. Refer to Figure 2-7 for location of items 35 through 39.

LINE-Provides a trigger signal from a sample of

the ac-power-sourcewaveform. This trigger source LEVEL Control-Selects the amplitude point on the
is useful when channel input signals are time trigger signal at which the sweep i s triggered. This
related (multiple or submultiple) t o the frequency control is usually adjusted for the desired display
of the power-input source voltage. after Trigger SLOPE and SOURCE switch settings
have been selected.

EXT-Permits triggering on signals applied to the

External Trigger lnput connector (A EXT). SOURCE Switch-Determines the mode of operation
for the B Sweep and the signal source for the B
Trigger.
EXT+lO-External trigger signals are attenuated
by a factor of 10.
A TIME-Provides two intensified zones on the
crt trace for differential time measurements. The
time difference between the two intensified zones
EXT Connector-Provides a means of applying
i s determined by the B DELAY TlME POSITION
external signals t o the trigger circuit.
and A TlME POSITION controls. Time difference
is displayed on the LCD Readout. With the
HORIZ MODE set to A INTEN, alternation of the
COUPLING Switch-Determines the method used t o
reference intensified zone and measurement
couple the trigger signal to the input of the trigger
intensified zone occurs a t the end of each sweep.
circuit.
With the HORIZ MODE set to B, the start of the
B Sweep alternates between the setting of the
AC-Signals above 20 Hz are capacitively coupled,
reference intensified zone and the setting of the
blocking any dc components of the signal. Signals
measurement intensified zone.
below 20 Hz are attenuated.

RUNS AFTER DLY-The B Sweep starts imme-

LF REJ-Signals are capacitively coupled. The
diately after the delay time selected by the B
dc component i s blocked, and signals below
DELAY TIME POSITION control and is inde-
approximately 50 kHz are attenuated. This
pendent of the B Trigger signal.
position i s useful for providing a stable display of
the high-frequency components of a complex
waveform. VERT MODE-Allows the internal trigger source
to be determined by the vertical mode of
operation.
HF REJ-Signals are capacitively coupled. The
dc component is blocked, and signals below
approximately 20 Hz and above approximately CH I-The signal applied to the CH 1 input con-
50 kHz are attenuated. This position is useful for nector is the source of the trigger signal.
providing a stable display of the low-frequency
components of a complex waveform.
CH 2-The signal applied to the CH 2 input
connector is the source of the trigger signal.
DC-All components of the signal are coupled to
the A Trigger circuitry. This position is useful for
displaying low-frequency or low-repetition-rate EXT-Permits triggering on signals applied to the
signals. External Trigger lnput (B EXT) connector.
Operating Instructions-2336 Service

.....
B TRIGGER
L

Figure 2-7. B TRIGGER controls, connector, and LCD readout.

@ SLOPE Switch-Selects the slope of the signal that difference between the two intensified zones on the
triggers the sweep. crt display in seconds (s), milliseconds (ms), micro-
seconds (ps), or nanoseconds (ns).
+ (plus)-Sweep is triggered on the positive-going
portion of the trigger signal.

- (minus)-Sweep is triggered on the negative- REAR PANEL

going portion of the trigger signal.
Refer to Figure 2-8 for location of items 40 and 41.

@ B EXT Connector-Provides a means of introducing

@) GND Connector-Provides direct connection to
external signals into the B Trigger Generator.
instrument chassis ground.

@ Readout-Consists of a 3 112-digit LCD unit which EXT Z AXIS INPUT Connector-Provides a means of
is used when the B TRIGGER SOURCE switch is connecting external signals to the Z-Axis amplifier
set to A TIME. Negative polarity indication is auto- to intensity modulate the crt display. Applied signals
matic for negative time measurements. No polarity do not affect display waveshape. Signals with fast
indication is displayed for positive values. The rise time and fall time provide the most abrupt
decimal point location is controlled by the A SECI intensity change. Positive-going signals decrease
DIV switch, B DELAY TlME POSITION, and A the intensity, and a 5-V p-p signal will produce
TlME POSITION controls. The readout displays noticeable modulation. Z-axis signals must be time-
UNCAL when the TlME (PULL) VAR control related to the display to obtain a stable presentation
is out of calibrated detent. It indicates units of time on the crt.
 Operating Instructions-2336 Service

Figure 2-8. Rear-panel connectors.

OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS

This part contains basic operating information and

techniques that should be considered before attempting 1ST OR L E F T CENTER 1 1 T H OR R I G H T
VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL
any measurements. GRATICULE GRATICULE GRATICULE
LINE LINE L!NE

GRATICULE

The graticule is internally marked on the faceplate of

the crt t o enable accurate measurements without parallax
error (see Figure 2-9). I t is marked with eight vertical and
RISE A N D CENTER
ten horizontal major divisions. In addition, each major FALL TIME HORIZONTAL
division is divided into five subdivisions. The vertical MEASUREMENT GRATICULE
PERCENTAGE LlNE
deflection factors and horizontal timing are calibrated t o MARKERS
the graticule so that accurate measurements can be made
directly from the crt. Also, percentage marks for the
measurement of rise and fall times are located on the left
side of the graticule. Figure 2-9. Graticule measurement markings.

REV JUN 1981

Operating Instructions-2336 Service

GROUNDING transients that may accidentally be generated will not be

appljed to the amplifier input when input coupling is
switched from GND t o AC. The precharging network also
The most reliable signal measurements are made when
provides a measure of protection t o the external circuitry
the 2336 and the unit under test are connected by a
by reducing the current levels that can be drawn from the
common reference (ground lead) in addition to the signal
external circuitry during capacitor charging.
lead or probe. The probe's ground lead provides the best
grounding method for signal interconnection and ensures
the maximum amount of signal-lead shielding in the probe
The following procedure should be used whenever the
cable. A separate ground lead can also be connected from
probe tip is connected t o a signal source having a different
the unit under test t o the oscilloscope GND connector
dc level than that previously applied, especially i f the dc-
located on the rear panel.
level difference i s more than 10 times the VOLTSIDIV
switch setting:

1. Set the AC-GND-DC switch to GN D before connect-

SIGNAL CONNECTIONS ing the probe tip t o a signal source.

Probes
NOTE
Generally, probes offer the most convenient means of
connecting an input signal to the instrument. They are The outer shells o f the A EXT, CH I OR X, and
shielded to prevent pickup of electromagnetic interference, CH 2 OR Y connectors are attached to the 2336
and the supplied 10X probe offers a high input impedance chassis ground.
that minimizes circuit loading. This allows the circuit under
test to operate with a minimum of change from the normal
condition of the circuit when measurements are being 2. Touch the probe tip t o the oscilloscope chassis
made. ground.

Coaxial Cables 3. Wait several seconds for the input coupling capacitor
t o discharge.
Cables may also be used t o connect signals t o the input
connectors, but they may have considerable effect on the
accuracy of a displayed waveform. To maintain the original 4. Connect the probe tip t o the signal source.
frequency characteristics of an applied signal, only high-
qua1ity, low-loss coaxial cables should be used. Coaxial
cables should be terminated a t both ends in their char- 5. Wait several seconds for the input coupling capacitor
acteristic impedance. If this i s not possible, use suitable t o charge.
impedance-matching devices.

6. Set the AC-GND-DC switch to AC. The display will

remain on the screen, and the ac component of the signal
INPUT COUPLING can be measured in the normal manner.
CAPACITOR PRECHARGING

When the input coupling switch i s set t o GND, the input INSTRUMENT COOLING
signal i s connected to ground through the input coupling
capacitor in series with an 800-kQ resistor t o form a pre-
charging network. This network allows the input coupling To maintain adequate instrument cooling, the ventila-
capacitor to charge to the average dc-voltage level of the tion holes on both sides of the equipment cabinet must
signal applied t o the probe. Thus, any large voltage remain free of obstructions.
 Operating Instructions-2336 Service

OSCILLOSCOPE DISPLAYS

INTRODUCTION A Trigger
SLOPE + (push button out)
The procedures in this section will allow you t o set up
LEVEL Midrange
and operate your instrument t o obtain the most commonly
used oscilloscope displays. Before proceeding with these Trigger Mode Select AUTO
instructions, verify that the LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR COUPLING AC
switch i s placed in the proper position and that the correct SOURCE VERT MODE
line fuse is installed for the available ac-power-input source TRIG HOLDOFF
voltage. Refer to the "Preparation for Use" instructions (PUSH) VAR Fully clockwise and pushed in
in this section for this information and for procedures
relating to ac-power-input source voltage and fuse selection.
Verify that the POWER switch is OFF (push button out). B Trigger
SLOPE + (UP)
LEVEL Mid range
NORMAL SWEEP DISPLAY
SOURCE A TlME
Obtain a Normal Sweep Display (baseline trace), using
the following procedure. 2. Press in the POWER switch button (ON) and allow
the instrument to warm up for 20 minutes.
1. Preset the instrument front-panel controls as follows:

Display 3. Adjust the INTEN control for desired display

INTEN Fully counterclockwise brightness.
(minimum)
AST l G Mid range
Midrange 4. Adjust the Vertical and Horizontal POSITION
FOCUS
controls to center the trace on the screen.

Vertical (both CH 1 and CH 2 if applicable)

SIGNAL DISPLAY
AC-G N D-DC AC
VO LTSID IV 50 m ( I X )
1. Obtain a Normal Sweep Display.
VOLTSIDIV VAR Calibrated detent (fully
counterclockwise)
VERTICAL MODE Select CH 1 2. Apply a signal to either vertical-channel input
CH 2 INVERT Off (push button out) connector and set the VERTICAL MODE switch t o display
BW LIMIT Not limited (push button the channel used. To display two time-related input signals,
out) use both vertical-channel input connectors and select either
ALT or CHOP VERTICAL MODE, depending on the
POSITION Midrange
frequency of input signals (or select AUTO VERTICAL
MODE, if automatic selection i s desired).
Horizontal
A AND B SECIDIV Locked together at 0.5 ms 3. Adjust the INTEN control for desired display bright-
TlME (PULL) VAR Pull out the VAR knob and ness. I f the display is not visible with the INTEN control
set it to the calibrated detent at midrange, press the BEAM FIND push button and hold
(fully clockwise), then push it in while adjusting the appropriate VOLTSIDIV switch(es)
in the VAR knob. to reduce the vertical display size. Center the compressed
HORIZ MODE Select A display within the graticule area using the Vertical and
Horizontal POSITION controls; release the BEAM FIND
X I 0 MAG Off (push button out)
push button.
POSITION Midrange
B DELAY TlME
POSITION Fully counterclockwise 4. Adjust the A TR IGGER LEVEL control if necessary
A TIME POSITION Midrange to obtain a stable display.
Operating Instructions-2336 Service

5. Set the appropriate VOLTSIDIV switch(es) and The delayed sweep speed i s indicated by the white stripe
readjust the Vertical and Horizontal POSITION controls on the B SECIDIV knob.
to center the display within the graticule area.

6.SettheASEC/DIVswitchforthedesirednumberof DELAYED-SWEEPMEASUREMENTS
cycles of displayed signal. Then adjust the FOCUS control
(and ASTIG, i f necessary) for the best-defined display.
1. Obtain a Signal Display.

MAGNIFIED-SWEEP DISPLAY 2. Select the A INTEN HORlZ MODE and set the
B SECIDIV switch until the two intensified zones are the
desired length. Adjust the INTEN control as needed to
1. Obtain a Signal Display (see preceding instructions). make the intensified zones distinguishable from the
remainder of the display.

2. Adjust the Horizontal POSITION control to move

the trace area to be magnified t o within the center graticule 3. Adjust the B DELAY TlME POSITION control to
division of the crt (0.5 division on each side of the center move the reference point t o the first pulse of interest.
vertical graticule line). Change the A SECIDIV switch
setting as required.
4. Adjust the A TlME POSITION control to move the
measurement point to the second pulse of interest.
3. Press in the X I 0 MAG push button (on) and adjust
the Horizontal POSITION control for precise positioning
of the magnified display. 5. Select the B HORlZ MODE and adjust the A TlME
POSITION control t o superimpose the waveforms.

4. To calculate the magnified sweep speed, divide the

A SECIDIV switch setting by 10. 6. Read the time difference on the LCD readout.

DELAYED-SWEEP DISPLAY
SINGLE-SWEEP DISPLAY
1. Obtain a Signal Display.
1. Obtain a Signal Display. For random signals, set the
A TRIGGER LEVEL control to trigger the sweep on a
2. Set the B TRIGGER SOURCE SWITCH t o RUN signal that is approximately the same amplitude as the
AFTER DLY. random signal.

3. Select A INTEN HORlZ MODE and set the B SECI 2. Press in the A TRIGGER SGL SWP push button
DIV switch until the intensified zone i s the desired length. momentarily for single-sweep operation. The next trigger
Adjust the INTEN control as needed to make the inten- pulse will initiate the sweep, and a single trace will be
sified zone distinguishable from the remainder of the displayed. I f no trigger signal is present, the TRIG'D-
display. READY light should illuminate t o indicate that the A
Sweep Generator circuit i s set to initiate a sweep when a
trigger signal i s received.
4. Adjust the B DELAY TlME POSITION control to
move the intensified zone t o cover that portion of the
A trace that is t o be displayed on the B trace. 3. When the single sweep has been triggered and the
sweep i s completed, the Sweep-Logic circuitry i s locked
out. Another sweep cannot be generated until the A
5. Select the B HORlZ MODE. The intensified zone TRIGGER SGL SWP push button is again pressed in to
adjusted in steps 3 and 4 i s now displayed as the B trace. set the A Sweep Generator t o the READY condition.
 Operating Instructions-2336 Service

X-Y DISPLAY 4. Advance the INTEN control setting until two dots
are displayed. The display can be positioned horizontally
with the Horizontal POSITION control and vertically with
1. Obtain a Normal Sweep Display. the Channel 2 POSITION control.

2. Use equal length coaxial cables, or the two supplied NOTE

10X probes, t o apply the horizontal signal (X-axis) t o the The display obtained when sinusoidal signals are
CH 1 OR X input connector and the vertical signal (Y-axis) applied to the X- and Y-axis is called a Lissajous
t o the CH 2 OR Y input connector. Figure. This display is commonly used t o compare
the frequency and phase relationship of two input
signals. The frequency relationship of the two input
signals determines the pattern seen. The pattern will
3. Select X-Y VERT MODE by simultaneously pressing be stable only i f a common divisor exists between
in the CH 1 and CH 2 push buttons. the two frequencies.
 This Document was scanned from the original
Tektronix Service Manual
For enquiries about high quality technical manuals

[email protected]

This Document is a complete Scan from the original

Tektronix manual
For enquiries about our complete
High quality line of technical Manuals in PDF

mailto : [email protected]
 Section 3-2336 Service

THEORY OF OPERATION

INTRODUCTION

SECTION ORGANIZATION INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS

This section contains a functional description of the Digital Logic Conventions

2336 Oscilloscope circuitry. The discussion begins with an
Digital logic circuits perform many functions within
overview of instrument functions and continues with
this instrument. The operation of these circuits is
detailed explanations of each major circuit. Reference is
represented by specific logic symbology and terminology.
made to supporting schematic and block diagrams which
Most logic-function descriptions contained in this manual
will facilitate understanding of the text. These diagrams
use the positive-logic convention. Positive logic is a system
show interconnections between parts of the circuitry,
of notation whereby the more positive of two levels is
identify circuit components, list specific component values,
the TRUE (or 1) state; the more negative level is the
and indicate interrelationships with front-panel controls.
FALSE (or 0) state. In the logic descriptions, the TRUE
state is referred to as HI, and the FALSE state is referred
t o as LO. The specific voltages which constitute a HI or
a LO state vary between individual devices. For specific
The detailed block diagram and the schematic diagrams device characteristics, refer t o the manufacturer's data
are located in the tabbed "Diagrams" section at the rear of book.
this manual, while smaller functional diagrams are
contained within this section near their respective text.
The particular schematic diagram associated with each
circuit description is identified in the text, and the diagram
number i s shown (enclosed within a diamond symbol)
on the tab of the appropriate foldout page. For optimum Linear Devices
understanding of the circuit being described, refer t o both The functioning of individual linear integrated circuit
the applicable schematic diagram and the functional block devices is described in this section using waveforms or other
diagram. graphic techniques t o illustrate their operation.
Theory of Operation-2336 Service

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

OVERALL OPERATION frequency-response limit of the vertical deflection system.

Three stages of amplification are contained in the input
In the following overview of the 2336 Oscilloscope amplifier. The vertical portion of the Beam Find circuitry
circuitry, refer t o the basic block diagram shown in Fig- acts on the third stage of amplification in the integrated
ure 3-1 and to the detailed block diagrams located in the circuit. When the Beam Find function i s activated (by
"Diagrams" section of this manual. Each major block in pressing in the BEAM FIND button), the gain of the
the detailed block diagram represents a major circuit within amplifier is reduced t o limit vertical deflection to within
the instrument. In Figure 3-1, the numbered diamond the graticule viewing area. This feature aids the operator
symbol shown inside each block refers t o the appropriate in locating off-screen or overscanned displays. The hori-
schematic diagram number. zontal and intensity portions of the Beam Find circuitry are
discussed in the Horizontal and Z-Axis circuit descriptions
respectively.
Signals to be displayed on the crt may be applied t o
either the CH 1 OR X input connector or the CH 2 OR Y
input connector. Separate input-coupling and deflection- A final hybrid stage in the Vertical Output Amplifier
factor selections are provided for each input signal. These converts the current signal to a voltage signal that is then
input signals are attenuated t o the selected display applied t o the crt vertical deflection plates.
amplitude by precision attenuator circuits. Included in the
attenuator circuitry is a buffer amplifier used to match
impedances between the input high-impedance attenuator The vertical mode of operation is controlled by the
and the output low-impedance attenuator. The attenuated Vertical Switching Logic and Chop Blanking circuit. Front-
input signals are then applied to the Vertical Preamplifier panel VE RTl CAL MODE push-button switches determine
circuit. circuitry operation. Control signals from the Vertical
Switching Logic circuit select either the Channel 1 signal or
the Channel 2 signal for a single-trace display. When either
Each Vertical Preamplifier input stage i s a hybrid circuit ALT or CHOP VERTICAL MODE is selected, both
that provides signal amplification, variable deflection channel signals are displayed; these signals are displayed
factor, and a sample of the input signal for use during either alternately (one complete sweep per channel) or
internal triggering. Succeeding stages of the Vertical Pre- chopped (one sweep switched between channels a t a fixed
amplifier provide for vertical positioning of the display rate). I f ADD VERTICAL MODE i s selected, the two
and additional gain. In the final stage of the Channel 2 channel signals are either algebraically added (when the
Vertical Preamplifier, additional circuitry i s used t o provide CH 2 INVERT feature is not activated) or algebraically
for the selectable Channel 2 Invert feature. This circuit subtracted (when the CH 2 INVERT button i s pressed in).
allows the operator either to invcri the Channel 2 signal
display as seen on the crt (when CH 2 INVERT i s selected)
or to subtract the Channel 2 signal from the Channel 1 The Chop Blanking circuit produces a blanking signal
signal (when ADD VERTICAL MODE is in use). which is fed to the input of the Z-Axis Amplifier. This
signal blanks the transients that occur when switching
between channel signals during the chopped mode of opera-
The outputs of both Vertical Preamplifier circuits are tion. An external Z-Axis signal input i s also provided a t this
applied to a Diode Gate network that, under control of point via the EXT Z-AXIS input connector located on the
the Vertical Switching Logic circuitry, selects appropriate instrument rear panel. External Z-Axis signals are summed
channel signals to be passed to the Vertical Output with all other Z-Axis I
Amplifier. Selected channel signals are applied t o the Delay
Line via the Delay Line Driver stage. When the TRIG VIEW
push button is pressed in, channel signals do not pass
through the Diode Gate; instead, the Trig View signal The A Trigger Generator circuit produces an output gate
(supplied from the A Trigger Generator) is applied t o the that initiates the triggered A Sweep ramp. Input triggering
Delay Line Driver input. signals can be obtained from any of the following sources:
Channel 1 signal, Channel 2 signal, signal(s) displayed on
the crt (VERT MODE), the signal connected t o the A EXT
After passing through the Delay Line, the vertical signal TRIGGER input connector, or a signal derived from
i s applied to the Vertical Output Amplifier input stage. the ac-power source waveform (LINE). The Trigger
Also included a t this point is the Bandwidth Limit circuitry Generator circuit contains level, slope, coupling, and source
that, when BW LIMIT i s selected, reduces the upper control switches for controlling the circuit operation.
 TRIC VIEW ENABLE
VERT TRIC DISABLE
CH 1 SELECT
CH 2 SELECT
Theory of Operation-2336 Service

When the TRIG VIEW switch is activated, the trigger view only one sweep after a triggering signal is received. Fol-
output signal is supplied to the Trigger View Amplifier lowing the single sweep, a reset is held on the Trigger
circuitry in the Vertical Preamplifier circuit for viewing on Generator to disable it until the SGL SWP push button is
the crt. pressed again.

When activated by the A Trigger Generator sweep-gate

The A Gate output from the Sweep Control IC is used to
output, the A Sweep Generator starts an internal linear
produce an Alt Sync signal. This signal synchronizes vertical
A Sweep ramp. Either an A Sweep signal, a Crt Unblanking
switching when ALT VERTICAL MODE is used to display
signal, or both, will be produced as determined by the
both Channel 1 and Channel 2 signals.
selected HORIZ MODE switch. When either the A or
A INTEN HORIZ MODE i s selected, both a Sweep signal
and an Unblanking signal will be produced. In the B HORIZ The Alt Sync signal also drives the switching IC that
MODE, neither an A Sweep output nor an Unblanking selects either the B DELAY TlME POSITION control
signal will be produced, but the A Sweep Generator voltage or the A TlME POSITION control voltage, for
continues operating to establish the B Sweep delay timing. application to the A Sweep Generator Delay Time input
pin. Switching between the two levels occurs only when
the A TlME measurement mode is selected.
The triggered-B Sweep ramps are initiated by an output
gate from the B Trigger Generator. lnput triggering signals
for the B Sweep can be obtained from the same sources Sweep signals from either the A or the B Sweep
that are available for the A Sweep with the exception of Generator are amplified by the Horizontal Amplifier circuit
LINE. Two additional B SOURCE switch positions provide t o produce horizontal deflection on the crt. When the X-Y
the A TlME and RUNS AFTER DLY triggering modes. display feature i s selected (by pressing in both CH 1 and
In these two additional triggering modes, the B Sweep CH 2 VERTICAL MODE push buttons), the A and the B
Generator
- starts an internal B Sweep ramp only when a
Sweeps are disabled, and the Channel 1 signal is supplied
Delayed Gate signal i s generated by the A Sweep Generator. to the Horizontal Amplifier for use as the X-Axis deflection
signal. The Y-Axis deflection signal is supplied from the
CH 2 OR Y input connector.
In A TIME, Delayed Gates are generated from the A
Sweep Generator a t different delay times on alternate
sw,eeps. One Delayed Gate corresponds to the delay time The Horizontal Amplifier contains a X I 0 magnifier
set by the B DELAY TlME POSITION control; the other feature that may be selected t o increase the displayed
corresponds to the delay time set by the A TlME POSI- sweep rate by a factor of 10 for any A or B SECIDIV
TION control. The resulting display appears as either two switch setting. The display i s magnified from the middle of
intensified zones on the A Sweep (A INTEN HORIZ the trace toward both ends. This feature enables the
MODE) or as- separate B Sweeps (B HORIZ MODE) for operator to align the portion of the display to be magnified
each Delayed Gate signal. with the center vertical graticule line prior to pressing the
X I 0 MAG push button; then, when the X I 0 MAG push
button i s pressed in, the centered portion remains near
- the center of the graticule area.
In RUNS AFTER DLY, only one Delayed Gate is gen-
erated, and the delay time is established by the B DELAY
TlME POSITION control only.
The horizontal portion of the Beam Find circuitry acts
to reduce the Horizontal Amplifier gain, limiting the hori-
zontal deflection to within the graticule viewing area.
Several sweep functions are controlled by the Sweep
Control IC. Among these functions are holdoff timing,
trigger mode, and sweep resetting. When AUTO Trigger
Mode is selected, absence of an adequate trigger signal for The Z-Axis Amplifier circuit sets the crt display inten-
about
.-
100 ms after the end of holdoff causes an Auto - ty and blanking levels. lnput current(s) supplied from
Gate signal to the A Sweep Generator. The Auto Gate e~therthe A or the B Sweep Generator (unblanking and
initiates the A Sweep ramp in lieu of the A Gate normally intensity), the Chop Blanking circuit, and the External
produced by the Trigger Generator. When NORM Trigger Z-Axis input connector are summed in the Z w , m r .
Mode i s selected, the Auto Gate is not produced, and an ) The resulting signal level determines crt display intensity.
A Sweep i s generated only if the A Trigger Generator $ The Beam Find circuitry overrides all the other Z-Axis
circuit receives an adequate triggering signal. Pushing the "mplifier input signals to produce a fixed intensity level
SGL SWP push button sets the Sweep Control IC to allow 1\that i s unaffected by the INTENSITY control position.
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

Included in the CRT circuitry are the High-Voltage Fan-drive voltage i s produced by a three-stage switching
Oscillator, the High-Voltage Multiplier, and the High- circuit. The Fan's speed is determined by both the ambient
Voltage Regulator. The regulator controls oscillator drive temperature and the line-voltage level (via the -5-V unreg-
current to maintain a correct level of high-voltage output. ulated voltage source).
Alternating oscillator current flows through the primary
winding of the high-voltage transformer. Transformer
secondary windings supply drive current to the High- The Amplitude Calibrator circuit provides a square-wave
Voltage Multiplier, the DC Restorer circuit, the +102-V output signal with accurate voltage amplitude. This signal i s
power supply, the crt heater, and the crt cathode and focus useful both for checking the instrument vertical calibration
power supply. and compensating voltage probes.

The Delay Time Position and Prescaling circuit performs

the task of switching between the outputs of the B DELAY
The High-Voltage Multiplier, the DC Restorer, and the TlME POSITION control and the A TlME POSITION
cathode and focus voltage supply circuits are contained in control when A TlME measurements are made. In addition,
a sealed high-voltage module. High voltage from the multi- the circuit prescales the voltage difference between the
plier is supplied directly to the crt anode. output of the two controls to match the time setting of
the A SEC/DIV switch.

/ DC restoration is used to raise the dc output level of The Delta Time Logic circuitry is contained in the
instrument's lid along with the B Trigger SOURCE and
[ the Z-Axis Amplifier. This allows the signal to be coupled
to the crt intensity grid. Direct coupling of the Z-Axis SLOPE switching and the B External Trigger Amplifier.
signal to the intensity grid is not possible due to the
$. levated voltage on both the crt cathode and grid.
The Delta Time Logic circuit has an AID Converter
IC that converts the equivalent-time voltage difference
from the B DELAY TlME POSITION and A TIME
POSITION controls into time difference output data. The
Remaining operating voltages for the 2336 are provided digital output of the AID Converter drives the segments of
by the Low-Voltage Power Supply. Power is distributed a 3 112-digit liquid-crystal display (LCD). Scale factors and
throughout the instrument to supply required circuit decimal points for the display are controlled by the
operating voltages. position of the A SECIDIV switch.
Theory of Operation-2336 Service

DETAILED CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

CHANNEL 1 A N D CHANNEL 2 within the graticule area of the crt whenever the input
coupling switch is moved from GND to AC. The GND
ATTENUATORS
position of S2 provides a ground reference without the
need t o disconnect the applied signal from the input
The Vertical Attenuator circuitry is shown on schematic connector.
diagram 1. Since the Channel 1 and Channel 2 circuits are
nearly identical, only the Channel 1 Attenuator is dis-
cussed. A simplified block diagram of the Channel 1 lnput Attenuator
Attenuator circuitry is shown in Figure 3-2. The effective overall deflection factor of each vertical
channel i s determined by the setting of the associated
Channel VO LTSID IV switch. The basic deflection factor
lnput Coupling (with no attenuation) o f the vertical deflection system is
Signals applied to the input connector can be ac 5 mV per division o f crt deflection.
coupled, dc coupled, or internally disconnected from the
attenuator input. When input coupling switch S2 i s set t o
DC, the input signal is coupled directly t o the attenuator For VOLTSIDIV switch settings above 5 mV, frequency-
input via R3. When it is set to AC, the input signal passes compensated voltage-divider sections (precision attenuators)
through input coupling capacitor C15. The coupling are switched into the signal path to produce the vertical
capacitor prevents the dc component of the input signal deflection factors indicated on the instrument front panel.
from passing t o the attenuator input. With switch S2 in Each channel has a 2X, a 4X, and three 10X attenuators
the GND position, the direct signal path is opened and the which may be selected in various combinations. The
input of the attenuator is grounded. The input signal from selected combination provides constant attenuation for all
C15 i s connected t o ground via R2. Resistor R2 has a high frequencies within the bandwidth range of the instrument.
resistance value and is used t o allow precharging o f input The vertical attenuators maintain the same input char-
coupling capacitor C15 when the input coupling switch is acteristics (1 M a and approximately 20 pF) for each
set to GND. With C15 precharged, the trace will remain setting of the VOLTSIDIV switch.

-
I
I
I

HIGH-2 LOW-Z
ATTENUATOR ATTENUATOR CHI
+ -l)-l0 BUFFER -1 ,-2 SIGNAL
-100 -4 ,- 1 0 TO
VERTICAL
PREAMPLIFIER

Figure 3-2. Channel 1 Vertical Attenuator, simplified block diagram.

 'Theory of Operation-2336 Service

Each channel attenuator circuit is composed of an input VERTICAL PREAMPLIFIERS, D I O D E

high-impedance attenuator (two divide-by-ten sections), GATES, A N D DELAY LINE DRIVER
an input buffer amplifier, and a low-impedance output
attenuator (divide-by-two, -four, or -ten). The attenuator
precision components are located on hybrid ceramic chips. Channel 1 and Channel 2 Vertical Preamplifiers are
shown on schematic diagram 2. They are identical with the
exception of the added inverting feature in the Channel 2
The high-impedance input attenuator produces mini- circuitry. Complete Channel 1 circuit operation is described,
mum circuit loading for the signal applied to the vertical along with the Channel 2 differences. A simplified block
input connector. Each channel's input attenuator divide- diagram of the Vertical Preamplifier circuitry i s shown in
by-ten sections may be cascaded t o produce an attenuation Figure 3-3.
factor of 100. For VOLTSIDIV switch settings of 5 mV up
t o 50 mV, the input attenuator is a straight-through signal
path' with no attenuation of the signal. For 100-mV t o
500-mV settings, the signal i s attenuated by ten; and for the lnput Preamplifier
I - V , 2-V, and 5-V settings, the signal is attenuated by 100. Channel 1 lnput Preamplifier U30 is a hybrid amplifier
circuit that produces a differential output signal from the
single-ended input signal. The Channel 1 gain i s adjustable
Buffer Amplifier via R47 to establish the calibrated deflection factors.
The Channel 1 output signal from the input attenuator
i s connected through C900 and R900 t o Source Follower
Q4A. Resistor R900 provides the input resistance, and
resistor R13 (in the attenuator hybrid) acts as a damping A single-ended trigger output signal, available at U30
resistor. Transistors Q4B and QIOA provide a constant- pin 16, supplies the Channel 1 internal trigger signal to the
current source for Q4A. Trigger Generator. Positive-going vertical signals produce
positive-going output trigger signals, amplified by a voltage
gain of six.
In the event that excessively high amplitude signals
are applied to Source Follower Q4A, succeeding circuitry
i s protected by CRI, CR2, CR3, and the gate-source
junction of Q4A (along with CR8) which limit the signal The circuit composed of U41B and Q36 eliminates
amplitude to a safe level. I f excessive negative signal common-mode signals from the differential output signal.
amplitude causes CR1 and C R2 t o become forward biased, Any common-mode signal present appears at the junction
the Q4A gate will be clamped t o about -2 V. Excessive of R42 and R43 (connected between U30 pins 13 and 11)
positive-signal amplitude will forward bias the gate-source and is applied to pin 5 of U41B. Common-mode signals
vary the base voltage on Current Source transistor (336.
junction of Q4A. As soon as gate current flows in Q4A,
Transistor 0 3 6 inverts the common-mode signal and
the gate voltage will cease increasing. Gate current i s limited
produces negative feedback that cancels the common-mode
to a safe value by the high resistance of R900.
output signal from U30.

Source Follower Q4A drives Emitter Follower QIOB.

Attenuator Balance potentiometer R10 (in the Q l OA Compensating networks, connected between U30 pins 4
emitter circuit) is used t o adjust the emitter-follower and 6, provide both high- and low-frequency compensation
output voltage t o zero volts with no signal applied. for square-wave input signals. Variable Balance control
R22 is adjustable to reduce trace shift when the VAR
VOLTS/DIV control is rotated through i t s range.
The low-impedance emitter-follower output drives a
7542 hybrid output attenuator.

The Variable-gain circuit is composed of VAR GAIN

control R902 and FET 049. This circuit increases the
Output Attenuator 5-mV-per-division gain of U30 to obtain a deflection factor
The low-impedance output attenuator is switchable t o of 2 mV per division or less at the fully clockwise rotation
produce attenuation factors of 1, 2, 4, or 10. Since a of R902. The VAR GAIN control provides continuously
portion of R20 (the attenuator voltage divider) remains in variable deflection factors between each calibrated deflec-
the signal path for all attenuation factors, capacitors C15 tion factor setting of the VOLTSIDIV switch.
and C20 compensate the divider network t o maintain a
75-Cl output impedance for all VOLTSIDIV switch settings.
The signal from the Output Attenuator i s fed t o the Gain compensation for U30 over varying ambient tem-
Vertical Preamplifier via a 75-atransmission line. perature is provided by thermistor RT46 and R46.
Theory of Ope rat ion-2336 Service

Channel 1 Positioning feature is used, the output o f the common-base stage is

blocked by a diode gate to prevent the vertical input signal
Hybrid circuit U55 provides balanced current sources
from reaching the Delay Line Driver. -
for producing at least * I 2 divisions of vertical positioning
for the displayed signal. POSITION control R903 varies
the amount of dc-offset current added t o the vertical signal
Channel 2 Invert Operation
current at U55 pins 2 and 6. The sum of the dc-offset
current and the vertical-signal current establishes the The Channel 2 common-base output stage is composed
vertical position of the crt display. Diodes CR53 and CR54, of two transistor pairs. In the noninverting mode, tran-
connected between U55 pins 2 and 6, limit the range of sistors Q132 and Q134 are biased on to carry the signal
the Channel 1 positioning circuit t o prevent it from current. When the INVERT push-button switch is pressed
affecting the horizontal-display position when the X-Y in, Q132 and Q134 become biased off; and Q133 and Q135
feature is in use. Corresponding diodes are not included are biased on. The collectors of 0133 and 0135 are cross-
in the Channel 2 circuitry. connected to the stage output points; consequently, the
Channel 2 signal current becomes inverted.

Channel 1 Common-Base Output Stage

A common-base output stage composed of Q55 and 0 5 7 Diode Gates
provides current-summing nodes for the vertical positioning Channel 1 Diode Gate is composed o f CR55, CR56,
and Channel 1 signal currents. When the TRIG VIEW CR57, and CR58. The Diode Gate acts as a switch that i s

VERTICAL
SIGNAL
TO DELAY
CH 1
PREAMP-
CH 1 LIFIER
'TENUATOR 1 ST
STAGE

CH 1 TRIGGER
SIGNAL TO
TRIGGER PREAMPLIFIER
GENERATOR

FROM
TRIGGER
GENERATOR

VERTICAL
SWITCHING
LOGIC
TRIG VIEW -

(TRIG VIEW ENABLE

VERT MODE TRIGGER ENABLE
1
F
L
I
VERT MODE
TRIGGER
T0
TRIGGER
GENERATOR

4 1 1 6-64

Figure 3-3. Vertical Preamplifier, Diode Gate. and Delay Line Driver, simplified block diagram.
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

controlled by the Vertical Switching Logic circuit. Channel ADD DISPLAY. Both Diode Gates are biased on to pass
2 Diode Gate is identical in operation. the Channel 1 and Channel 2 vertical signals. Both channel-
signal currents are summed at the input to the Delay Line
Driver to produce the ADD display signal.
CHANNEL 1 DISPLAY ONLY. To display only the
Channel 1 signal, the CH 1 Select signal is HI and the CH 2 ALTERNATE AND CHOPPED DISPLAY. The Diode
Select signal is LO. With CH 1 Select HI, diodes CR56 and Gates are switched on and off by the channel select signals
CR58 are reverse biased (see Figure 3-4). Series diodes from the Vertical Switching Logic circuit. When ALT VERTI-
CR55 and CR57 are forward biased, and the Channel 1 CAL MODE is selected, the Diode Gates are switched at the
vertical signal is allowed t o pass t o the Delay Line Driver. end of each sweep. When CHOP VERTICL MODE is select-
In the Channel 2 Diode Gate (with the CH 2 Select signal ed, the Diode Gates are switched at a rate of about 275
LO) CR138 and CR139 are forward biased, and the kHz. See the "Vertical Switching Logic" discussion for a de-
Channel 2 vertical-signal current is shunted away from scription of how the channel selection signals are obtained.
series diodes CR132 and CR134. The series diodes are
reverse biased, and the Channel 2 signal current i s prevented
from reaching the Delay Line Driver. TRlG VlEW DISPLAY. While the TRlG VlEW push
button is pressed in, both Diode Gates are biased off, and
the Trigger View Amplifier (shown in Figure 3-3) is enabled
CHANNEL 2 DISPLAY ONLY. When CH 2 VERTICAL to pass the A Trigger View signal to the Delay Line Driver.
MODE is selected, the CH 1 Select signal goes LO and the
CH 2 Select signal goes HI. The Channel 1 signal i s blocked
by the Diode Gate, and the Channel 2 signal reaches the X-Y DISPLAY. Pressing in both the CH 1 and CH 2
Delay Line Driver. VE RTlCAL MODE push buttons activates the instrument's

CH 1 SELECT
FROM VERTICAL *
CR56

CHANNEL 1
VERTICAL <
SWITCHING LOGIC
I I CHANNEL
'
TO
DELAY
LINE
SIGNAL
DRIVER

CH 2 SELECT
* SIGNAL PATH

CHANNEL
FROM VERTICAL
SWITCHI N G LOGIC
CRl38

CHANNEL
+
*
VERTICA DIODE REVERSE BIASED
SIGNAL GATE DIODE

Figure 3-4. Diode Gate biasing for Channel 1 display.

REV NOV 1981

Theory of Operation-2336 Service

X-Y display feature. The Channel I Diode Gate is held VERTICAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
off, and the Channel 2 Diode Gate is biased on. The
Channel 2 signal is passed to the Delay Line Driver and
ultimately to the crt t o provide the Y-Axis display The Vertical Output Amplifier circuit, shown on
deflection. The X-Axis deflection signal is supplied to the schematic diagram 3, provides the final amplification of
Horizontal Preamplifier from the Channel trigger-signal the vertical deflection signal. This circuit includes the
output of the Channel 1 Vertical Preamplifier (U30j. bandwidth limiting components, part of the Beam Find
circuitry, an input IC amplifier, and a hybrid-circuit crt
driver.

Delay Line Driver

Bandwidth Limiting
The Delay Line Driver is arranged as a cascaded,
common-emitter, feedback amplifier. Differential input-
signal current i s converted to differential voltage a t the The upper-frequency response limit of the Vertical Out-
input to the Delay Line. Feedback elements are R154 put Amplifier may be reduced to eliminate high-frequency
(between 0163 emitter and Q153 base in the negative- interference from a lower-frequency signal display. Pressing
signal path) and R173 (between Q175 emitter and 0170 in the front-panel BW LIMIT switch forward biases a diode
base in the positive-signal path). bridge composed of CR8, CR9, CR24, and CR25. This ac-
tion also connects capacitors C8 and C25 to a low imped-
ance ground through the diode bridge.
A circuit composed of U16O and Q149 supplies negative
feedback from the common-mode point a t the junction
of R168 and Rl76 (in the Delay Line Driver output) to Proper termination for the Delay Line is provided by
the common-mode point at the junction of R148 and R169 R8 and T9 (in the negative-signalside) and by R25 and T24
(in the Delay Line Driver input). The negative feedback (in the positive-signal side). The signal is tapped off T9 and
eliminates common-mode signals from the Delay Line, and T24 a t the correct impedance point to match the input
it balances both sides of the amplifier when ADD impedance of lnput Amplifier U43. Resistors R9 and R24
VERTICAL MODE is selected. The resulting output signal damp the signal slightly to eliminate h igh-frequency
level to the Delay Line i s then centered at zero volts. oscillation.

Components R162 and C162, connected between the lnput Amplifier

base of Q163 and the base of Q175, supply high-frequency lnput Amplifier U43 is a three-stage IC amplifier.
damping of the Delay Line Drjver frequency response. Frequency compensation for the Delay Line and first
amplifier stage is provided by compensating networks
connected between U43 pins 12 and 9. Also connected
between these pins i s Gain adjustment R44 and Vertical
Vert Mode Trigger Pickoff Amplifier Balance adjustment R 18. The Vertical Balance adjustment
centers the vertical POSITION control range to obtain
The trigger signal for the VERT MODE position of equal positive and negative positioning limits.
the SOURCE switch is obtained from emitter-follower
0182. The Vert Mode Trigger Enable signal (-5 V dc) is
applied to the emitter of Q182. This signal is the emitter- Compensating components connected between U43 pins
current source for the transistor, and it i s supplied from the 17 and 18 and between U43 pins 3 and 4 provide for
Vertical Switching Logic circuit (diagram 4). The enabling thermal compensation of the amplifier. Common-mode
voltage is removed when the TRIG VIEW push button is signals are balanced by amplifier U58 controlling the third
pressed in. This action opens the feedback loop that would amp1ifier stage bias current.
otherwise occur between the Vert Mode Trigger output and
the Trig View input. Diode CR180 provides thermal
compensation of the (2182 base-to-emitter junction voltage. The vertical portion of the Beam Find circuit acts on the
third amplifier stage. When BEAM FIND switch S900 is
pressed in, the amplifier gain is reduced by limiting the
Delay Line current available to the third stage.
Delay Line DL900 provides about 90 ns of delay in the
vertical signal. When using internal triggering (VERT MODE,
CH 1, or CH 2) the delay time allows the Sweep Generator
circuits sufficient time to initiate a sweep before the Vertical Output Amplifier
vertical signal reaches the crt deflection plates. This feature Vertical Output Amplifier U54 i s a current-driven,
permits the leading edge of the internal signal that orig- common-base, hybrid-circuit amplifier. The signal current
inates the t r i ~ ~ pulse
e r to be displayed. from U43 pins 2 and 19 is cmverted to a crt deflection

REV FEB 1982

 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

voltage (nominally 3 V per division of deflection). Approx- Vertical Mode Selection

imately 2.5 watts of power is dissipated by this IC, and it
The front-panel VE RTlCAL MODE switches provide the
must be properly heat sinked when operating.
logic levels that control the channel-enabling-signal
selection. Dual Multiplexer U215 switches the channel
Diode Gates on and off by selecting either the Alt Sync
The parallel coil and resistor components (L913 and
L915) a t the output pins of U54 compensate the crt
signal or the outputs from flip-flop U211A. The Q and 5
output levels from U211A are used for selecting CHOP,
deflection-plate capacitance.
ADD, CH 1, or CH 2 VERTIC-AL MODE.

CHANNEL 1 DISPLAY. When only the CH 1 push

VERTICAL SWITCHING LOGIC button is pressed in, the remaining VERTICAL MODE
AND CHOP BLANKING switches are released. The Reset input of U211A (pin 1)
goes LO, and the Set input (pin 4) is pulled HI through
pull-up resistor R203. Flip-flop U211A resets, and the
The Vertical Switching Logic portion of this circuit, 6 output (pin 6) goes HI while the Q output (pin 5) goes
shown on schematic diagram 4, controls the channel LO. The HI is placed on pin 12 of Multiplexer U215, and
switching to obtain the appropriate display for each the LO is placed on pin 4.
selected VERTICAL MODE switch. During chopped
operation, the Chop Blanking portion of the circuit supplies
a blanking signal to the Z-Axis Amplifier. When switching The A and B select inputs of U215 determine the input
between channels, this blanking signal turns off the Z-Axis pins that are switched t o the output pins (see Figure 3-5).
Amplifier t o prevent transients from appearing in the Input A is a permanent LO, and the B input is controlled
display. by the ALT and CHOP VERTICAL MODE switches. When

U215
MULTIPLEXER

U215
SWITCHING LOGIC

ALT SYNC
CH 2
SELECT
%TO CH 2
U211A Q I I DIODE
GATE

ALT SYNC
9 SELECT
--+TO CH 1
U211A 0 DIODE
GATE
M UENABLE
LTIPLEXE~ tp -----I I

U211B Q

Figure 3-5. Simplified illustration of Multiplexer U215 switching operation.

Theory of Operation-2336 Service

CH 1 VERTICAL MODE is selected, the U215 B input U196A output a t pin 3 i s then HI, and C197 charges
(pin 2) will be held HI through pull-up resistor R215. through CR201 and R201 t o make U196A pin 2 HI. A t the
With the A input LO and the B input HI, the 1C2 input moment the CHOP VERTICAL MODE switch is pressed
(from the 0 output of U211A) will be connected to the 1Y in, U196A pin 1 becomes HI, and U196A pin 3 is then
output (CH 2 Select), and the 2C2 input (from the 8 switched LO. Capacitor C197 begins discharging through
output of U211A) will be connected to the 2Y output parallel resistor R197 toward the LO threshold of U196A.
(CH 1 Select). When the LO input threshold i s reached, U196A pin 3 is
switched HI to start charging C197 back to the HI thresh-
old. The selected time constants of the charge and discharge
The output state of flip-flop U211A i s also determined paths, along with the threshold switching levels of U196A,
by the input logic levels set up by the VERTICAL MODE produce an asymmetrical Chop Clock pulse that is HI 20%
switches. For a Channel 1 display, the Reset input of of the time and LO 80% of the time a t U196A pin 3.
U211A (pin 1) will be held LO by a ground connected
through the CH 1 and CH 2 VERTICAL MODE switches.
T h e a output will be reset HI, and the 0 output will be LO. The Chop Clock signal i s applied t o U211A pin 3 (Clock
The HI from U211A pin 6 is applied to U215 pin 12 (2C2 input) t o switch the flip-flop a t the chop rate. Every
input) and is connected through U215 to pin 9 (2Y out- positive-going transistion clocks the level a t U211A pin 2
put). A HI on pin 9 turns on the Channel 1 Diode Gate t o onto the 0 output (pin 5). With the U211A 8 output
allow the Channel 1 signal t o pass to the Delay Line Driver. connected t o pin 2, each Chop Clock pulse causes the
The LO on U211A pin 5 is applied to U215 pin 4 (1C2 U211A outputs to toggle (change state). Each change of
input) and is connected through U215 t o pin 7 (1Y out- the output state of U211A is connected through Multi-
put). A LO on pin 7 turns off the Channel 2 Diode Gate. plexer U215 t o produce the Channel Select signals that
drive the Channel Diode Gates. Thus, the Diode Gates are
switched on and off a t the chop rate t o present a dual-
CHANNEL 2 DISPLAY. When CH 2 VERTICAL MODE channel display.
switch is pressed in, the condition of Multiplexer U215
remains unchanged from the Channel 1 selection previously
discussed. The change occurs in the state of flip-flop The Chop Clock signal is also applied to NAND gate
U211A. With CH 2 push button pressed in, the Set input of U196B pin 4 t o drive Chop Blanking Amplifier 0209.
U211A is grounded for a LO, and the Reset input is pulled Chop blanking is used to prevent display of the switching
HI through pull-up resistor R202. The U211A 0 output transients that occur with chopping. During chop operation,
becomes HI, and the Qoutput becomes LO. The states of U196B pin 5 is held HI by pull-up resistor R196. Positive
the CH 1 Select and CH 2 Select lines are therefore reversed transitions of the Chop Clock signal (corresponding t o the
from the Channel 1 display states, and Channel 2 Diode channel switching time) switch U196B pin 6 to a LO
Gate is biased on while the Channel 1 Diode Gate is biased state. This LO is applied t o the base of 0209, turning it
off. on. Chop Blanking Amplifier 0209 supplies blanking
current to the Z-Axis Amplifier (diagram 9) until the Chop
Clock signal goes LO again. A t that time, U196B pin 6
ADD DISPLAY. Again, the condition of Multiplexer will switch HI, biasing off 0209. The Z-Axis Amplifier then
U215 does not change from the Channel 1 display state i s able to respond t o the remaining Z-Axis signals setting
for an ADD display. The Set and Reset inputs of flip-flop the display intensity. Diode CR209 clips any negative
U211A are both switched LO by pressing in the ADD portion of the blanking waveform.
VERTICAL MODE switch, and both the 0 and 5
outputs
of U211A become HI. The CH 1 and CH 2 Select signals
from U215 are thus both HI, and both channel Diode
Gates are switched on. ALT DISPLAY. During the time that ALT VERTICAL
MODE is selected, the Chop Clock Oscillator is disabled
by a fixed LO on pin 1 of NAND gate U196A. Multiplexer
CHOP DISPLAY. To obtain the required channel U215 is switched by a LO on pin 2 (the B Select input)
switching and chop blanking for the Chop display, the t o select the 1CO and 2C0 inputs (Alt Sync and Alt Sync)
Chop Clock Oscillator must be enabled. In the circuit com- to be connected t o the 1Y and 2Y outputs. The Alt Sync
posed of U196A, U196BI and 0209, an oscillator circuit signal i s supplied from 0108 in the Sweep circuit (diagram
(operating a t a nominal frequency of 500 kHz) i s formed 6) and i s inverted by U196C t o produce the A l t Sync signal
by NAND gate U196A and the associated RC network a t U215 pin 6. A t the end of each sweep, the A l t Sync
connected between pins 2 and 3. signal changes state. The change of state (applied through
U215 to the CH 1 and CH 2 Select lines) switches the
Channel 1 and Channel 2 Diode Gates t o alternately allow
For VERTICAL MODE switch selections other than first one and then the other channel signal to reach the
CHOP, U196A pin 1 is grounded to make it LO. The Delay Line Driver.
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

AUTO ALTICHOP SELECT. By pressing in both the by the CH 2 VERTICAL MODE switch, and the Channel
ALT and CHOP VERTICAL MODE push buttons simul- 2 Diode Gate is biased on. The Channel 2 signal is then
taneously, an automatic AltIChop selection circuit is applied t o the Vertical Output Amplifier to provide Y-Axis
enabled. When in use, the Auto AltIChop feature will (vertical) crt deflection. The X-Axis deflection signal is
automatically switch a dual-channel display mode to either supplied by the Channel 1 input signal via the CH 1 Trigger
ALT or CHOP for the best display presentation. The circuit signal output of Channel 1 Vertical Preamplifier U30.
is composed of Q194 (diagram 4) and a diode-switching
network (diagram 6). The diode switches are under control
of the A SECIDIV switch. The A SECIDIV switch settings A separate section of VERTICAL MODE switch S194
from 0.5 s to 0.5 ms will select CHOP (no diode switches (see diagram 8) applies an X-Y Enable signal to both the
on). The remaining switch positions (0.2 ms to 0.05 p s ) Horizontal Preamplifier (U128 pin 12) and the A Sweep
turn on one of the diode switches to produce an Auto Sel Generator (U43 pin 14, diagram 6). The Horizontal Pre-
signal. amplifier i s switched to amplify the X (Channel I ) signal
for the X-Axis crt deflection, and the A Sweep Generator
i s prevented from producing an output sweep signal.
In the ALT selection range, the Auto Sel signal is applied
through R195 and the CHOP and ALT VERTICAL MODE
switches to bias on 0194. A t the collector of Q194, a LO
i s produced and applied to U215 pin 2 (B Select input) t o TRIGGER
switch the Multiplexer to the Alt Sync inputs. This LO i s
also applied t o U196A pin 1 t o disable the Chop Clock The Trigger circuitry, shown on schematic diagram 5,
Oscillator. i s composed of the A trigger-source and A trigger-coupling
switching stages, the A External Trigger Amplifier, and the
A and B Trigger Generator integrated circuits. Figure 3-6 is
When the A SECIDIV switch is set t o any position in the a detailed block diagram of the A Trigger circuitry.
CHOP select range, the Auto Sel signal is removed. Tran-
sistor Q194 is biased off, and pull-up resistor R215 places
a HI on both U215 pin 2 and U196A pin 1. Multiplexer A Trigger Source
U215 switches to the Q and 5 outputs of U21 I A , and the The A Trigger Generator circuit produces a sweep Gate
Chop Clock Oscillator i s enabled for CHOP operation. signal that is used to initiate the A Sweep from a choice of
five sources of the input trigger signal. A Trigger SOURCE
switches S22A and S22B select trigger signals from the
following sources:
TRIG VIEW DISPLAY. Pressing in the front-panel
TRIG VIEW push button performs three functions:
VERT MODE: Signals displayed on the crt. Obtained
from Vert Mode Trigger Pickoff 0182 following the
1. The -5-V Vert Mode Trig Enable signal is removed
Delay Line Driver (diagram 2).
from Vert Mode Trigger transistor Q182 (diagram 2).
This action disables the pickoff circuit.
CH 1: Channel 1 vertical signals. Obtained from Chan-
nel 1 Vertical Preamplifier U30 (diagram 2).
2. The ground is removed from the base leads of Trigger
CH 2: Channel 2 vertical signals. Obtained from Chan-
View Amplifier transistors 0 141 and Q147 (diagram
nel 2 Vertical Preamplifier U l 00 (diagram 2).
2). Transistor Q142 is biased on, and diodes CR 140
and CR146 are reverse biased. This action allows the
LINE: Ac-power-source waveform. Obtained from the
A Trig View signal t o pass t o the Delay Line Driver.
5-V secondary winding of Power Transformer T900
(diagram 10).
3. A LO i s placed on the Set input of U21 IB, causing
EXT: External trigger signals. Obtained from the signal
pin 9 (Q output) to go HI. This action disables both
applied to the A EXT input connector.
outputs o f Multiplexer U215, and both channel-
select signals become LO (see Figure 3-5). The
EXT-10: External trigger signals attenuated by a factor
Channel 1 and Channel 2 Diode Gates are biased off
of ten.
by the LO signals to prevent either channel signal
from passing to the Delay Line Driver.
The EXT and EXT+lO trigger signals are buffered by an
amplifier circuit composed of Q15, 016, and Q21. Source-
X-Y DISPLAY. To obtain an X-Y display, both CH 1 follower 0 1 5 drives emitter-follower 0 2 1 t o buffer the
and CH 2 VERTICAL MODE push buttons are pressed in trigger signal and to isolate the Trigger Generator IC from
simultaneously. A LO is placed on the Set input of U211A the A EXT input connector.
Theory of Operation-2336 Service

Field-effect transistor 016 acts as a constant-current AC coupling, series capacitor C9 is placed in the trigger
source for 015 and also provides thermal compensation signal path to block the dc component of the input signal.
for the input amplifier. The gate of 015 i s protected from
accidental application of large-amplitude triggering signals
by clamp diodes CRlO and CR14.
A Trigger Switching
Input triggering signals to be applied to A Trigger Gener-
A portion of the A COUPLING switch (S67A) selects ator U81 are selected by the A Trigger SOURCE switch.
either AC or DC coupling to apply the external triggering The frequency range of the applied signals is determined
signal to the A External Trigger Amplifier. When set to DC by the A Trigger COUPLING switch. Signals are applied
coupling, all components of the input signal are passed in to the Trigger Generator via two different signal paths:

I LEVEL I
S22A
S22B
EXT + 10 EXT --hKcl
SLOPE
CTR

dl 5
EXT AND
EXT +10 I SLOW-PATH
SWITCHING

d-# HF REJ
SLOPE

OP AMP
IN

GATE
TO SWEEP
GENERATOR

Ql6
Q 21
LINE OP AMP
TRIGGER OUT Q89
SIGNAL Q95
U8 1 A RESET
FROM SWEEP
CONTROL
LEVEL
IN

RESET

CH 2 TRIGGER SIGNAL TRIGGER

Y INPUT
CH 1 TRIGGER SIGNAL ++ PINS
VERT MODE TRIGGER
SIGNAL
A TRIG

)
I
TRIG -
VIEW
TRIG +
'' VIEW TO
TRIGGER
VIEW
VIEW
INTERNAL AMPLIFIER
TRIGGER SIGNAL
TO THE
B TRIGGER
GENERATOR

Figure 3-6. Trigger circuitry, detailed block diagram.

REV JUN 1981

 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

the fast path (high-frequency) connects directly to the One of the possible trigger signals is selected as an input
trigger input pins of U81; the slow path (low-frequency) signal by a portion of the A Trigger SOURCE switch. This
connects t o U81 pin 19 via the A Trigger SOURCE switch. switch controls the Trigger Generator input pins using
enabling voltages rather than by directly switching trigger
signals. Each signal is applied to a separate internal emitter
SLOW-PATH SWITCHING. Figure 3-7 illustrates the follower in U81. When 0 V is applied t o the input pin (by
trigger signal slow path. As shown, the A Trigger SOURCE grounding out the pull-down voltage) the emitter follower
switch is selecting the CH 1 slow-path signal, and the associated with that pin will conduct, thus passing the
A Trigger COUPLING switch is set for AC coupling. The trigger signal applied t o that pin. The U81 internal emitter
slow-path signal is fed through C67 when either AC or followers are disabled to prevent the signal from passing by
H F REJ coupling i s selected. The DC coupling path is applying a negative voltage (about -2 V) through a pull-
directly connected, and no signal path is established when down resistor.
LF REJ coupling is selected.

Trigger input pin 4 i s not used to apply a trigger signal,

I t is at this point that dc voltage from the A Trigger but it i s biased on whenever none of the other fast-path
LEVEL control (R913) is added to the slow-path trigger inputs are selected. This switching is required because one
signal. The resulting sum is then applied to U81 pin 19, of the U81 internal emitter followers must be conducting
the internal operational amplifier inverting input. to enable proper operation of the internal trigger-level
comparator. Switching of the pin 4 voltage is accomplished
by a portion of the A Trigger COUPLING switch.
The inverted trigger signal (with the added LEVEL
control dc voltage) a t U81 pin 20 is applied from the Op
Amp output to U81 pin 9, the Level input. This signal is In Figure 3-8, note that when HF REJ coupling is
applied to an internal trigger-level comparator (contained selected, pin 4 of U81 is enabled by grounding the pull-
in U81) for use in determining the signal level a t which the down voltage. The remaining contacts (AC, LF REJ, and
Gate output signal will be produced. DC) are open, so none of the other fast-path inputs are
enabled. The trigger signal used for HF REJ coupling is
obtained from the signal selected by the slow-path A Trig-
FAST-PATH SWITCHING. Figure 3-8 illustrates the ger SOURCE switching.
trigger signal fast path (high-frequency). The dc and low-
frequency components of the trigger signal are blocked
by capacitors ((235, C48, C56, and C63) in series with each When the COUPLING switch is set to any other position
signal path. High-frequency components are passed and than HF REJ, pin 4 is disabled by the pull-down voltage
applied to the U81 trigger inputs (pins 5, 1, 7, and 3). applied from R56G. The trigger signal input selected

-5v

S22B S67B

PARTIAL
AC REJ REJ DC U8 1
I I
I I I I I I
I L
EXT AND
EXT + l a
I
1
00 =* OP AMP
IN
I I o i 00
I I
()
C67
I/
VERT
MODE O lib
LINE 00-

Figure 3-7. Trigger signal slow path (low frequency).

Theory of Operat ion-2336 Service

by the A Trigger SOURCE switch is enabled by grounding The LINE trigger signal is a low-frequency signal and
out the pull-down voltage on the selected trigger input i s applied through slow-path switching to U81 pin 19. All
pin via the A Trigger COUPLING switch. of the fast-path inputs are disabled when LINE SOURCE
is selected.

When LlNE SOURCE is selected, a slightly different

switching path is set up, and pin 4 of U81 will be enabled
regardless of the A Trigger COUPLING switch setting. For A Trigger Generator
the AC, L F REJ, and DC positions, pin 4 is enabled by the The A Trigger Generator consists of integrated circuit
ground applied t o R56G through the LINE contacts o f the U81 and associated components. Contained within U81 i s
A Trigger SOURCE switch. In the HF REJ position, a the necessary circuitry t o generate the Gate output signal
ground i s applied to R56G through the HF REJ contacts (at U81 pin 14) that i s used t o start the A Sweep Generator
of the A Trigger COUPLING switch. (diagram 6 ) .

C35
EXT AND EXT AND EXT + 1 0 5
EXT + 1 0 4 t
C48 PARTIAL
CH 2 U81
TRIGGER
SIGNAL
SOURCES CH 1

VERT VERT MODE 3

MODE

SOURCE
EXT
AND VERT
EXT + 10 CH 2 CH 1 MODE LINE

I COUPLING I
K R E J AC R E J DC

Figure 3-8.Trigger signal fast path (high frequency).

 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

External control voltages applied to U81 set the trigger B Trigger Source Switching
level, trigger slope, slope centering, and trigger threshold
In addition to the A Trigger sources (VERT MODE,
level.
CH 1, CH 2, and EXT), the B SOURCE switch has a
A TIME and a RUNS AFTER DLY position. The A TIME
position provides for delta time measurements. The RUNS
The A Gate is generated when the trigger AFTER DLY position enables the B Sweep to commence
signal reaches the amplitude determined by the setting o f
immediately after the delay time established by the
LEVEL control R913. The Gate signal at pin 14 remains
DELAY POS,TION
HI for the duration of one cycle of the A Sweep. When the
A Sweep ends, the A Reset signal at pin 9 of Sweep Control
IC U87 (diagram 6) is applied t o U81 pin 17 t o reset the
The B SOURCE switching circuitry is included in the
Trigger Generator IC internal circuitry. The A Reset signal
components located in the lid of the instrument, A sim-
remains on pin 17 until the end of sweep holdoff time
plified schematic of the SOURCE switching and the
(determined by the Sweep Control IC). When the holdoff
External Trigger Amplifier is shown in Figure 3-9.
time has passed, the A Reset signal i s removed, and Trigger
Generator U81 is enabled to respond to the next triggering
signal.
For each of the triggered sweep selections (VERT
MODE, CH 1, CH 2, and EXT), a portion of the B
The slope of the input signal that triggers the A Sweep SOURCE switch (S2, diagram 11) controls the source
Generator is determined by the setting of SLOPE switch selection voltages t o the B Trigger Generator (U 122,
S219. When the SLOPE switch is set to the + (plus) diagram 5). Switching transistors on the Source Select lines
position, the Gate signal output (U81 pin 14) will switch (U365A, B, C, and D) are forward biased whenever the B
H I only on a positive slope of the input triggering signal. SOURCE associated with that select line i s not selected.
When the SLOPE switch is set to the - (minus) position, The transistors conduct and apply the -5-V emitter voltage
the output Gate signal will switch HI only on a negative to the Trigger lnput pins of the B Trigger Generator (U122,
slope of the input triggering signal. diagram 5). The negative voltage keeps the B Trigger
Generator IC emitter followers reverse biased t o keep the
Trigger lnput pins inactive.

The A Slope Offset adjustment, R82, balances the U81

internal trigger amplifier so that a Gate signal output occurs
at the same level on both the negative and positive slopes When the B SOURCE switch i s set to VERT MODE,
of the triggering signal. The A Hyst adjustment, R106, CH 1, CH 2, or EXT, -10 V i s applied to the base of the
adjusts the built-in hysteresis in the U81 internal threshold associated switching transistor. The negative voltage will
comparator to prevent triggering on low-level noise at the reverse bias the selected transistor to shut it off. The
Trigger Generator inputs. Trigger Select line of the off transistor goes t o 0 V, and the
associated Trigger lnput pin of U 122 becomes active.

Transistors Q89 and Q95 are arranged in a differential

amplifier circuit. The Gate signal is inverted, and the dc
level is shifted t o the correct level for application to the A TIME/RUNS AFTER DLY/SLOPE. A second set of
Sweep Control and A Sweep Generator IC (diagram 6). Contacts on the B SOURCE switch controls the A Time/
After D l ~ / S l o ~signal
e line. The voltage levels applied
Peak-to-peak amplitude of the A Gate output signal is
clamped to about (-0.7 to +0.7 V) by diodes CR90 t o this signal line control the Delay Time Position switch-
ing, the B Reset signal line, and both the Slope and Free
and CR91 in the Q89 collector circuit.
Run inputs of U122 (the B Trigger Generator). Delay
Time Position switching and the B Reset signal are dis-
cussed in the text pertaining t o those circuits.
Transistor 0104 converts the incoming A Reset current
signal (from the Sweep Control IC) back into a voltage
signal of the correct level for application to the Reset A simplified diagram of the Slope and A TimeIRuns
input (pin 17) of Trigger Generator U81. After Dly switching is included in Figure 3-9.

A differential Trig View signal is available at U81 pins 10 In both the A TIME and RUNS AFTER DLY switch
and 11. The Trig View signal is applied to the Trigger View positions, the B Trigger Generator Free Run input (pin 2)
Amplifier (diagram 2). When the front-panel TRIG VIEW is held HI. Selecting RUNS AFTER DLY applies +5 V to
switch is pressed in, the Trigger View Amplifier is enabled the signal line. Diode CR50 (diagram 11) becomes reverse
t o pass the Trig View signal on to the Delay Line Driver for biased, and the SLOPE switch is isolated from the signal
display on the crt. line. Diode CR63 (diagram 6) also becomes reverse biased,
Theory of Operation-2336 Service

-
I
I
INTERNAL
I TRIGGER
- +lOVA I SIGNALS
I
S2 t
B SOURCE

A AFTERVERT \
TIME DLY MODE CH 1 CH 2 EXT SLOPE
U365B 1 R132 VERT MODE 4 CTR
R365
-- I
TRIGGER
-I U365A CH 1 1
) INPUTS

Q'
BGATE
TO B SWEEl
GENERATOR
CH 2 7
R372 lw GATE INVERTER

~3650 IR125
a
/t7 EXT 5 Q13Q
/
lW Rl26
'I B RESET
TP153
I

9
A SWEEP
OR
RESET

U122
B TRIGGER
GENERATOR

B EXT
pq HYST

f+ RC FILTER
LEVEL
IN

FREE
RUN

SLOPE

I
.1 BVE

B RESET
DISABLE
TO R62

DELTA TIME
I

I
SWEEP @ TRIGGER 0

Figure 3-9. Simplified diagram of the B Trigger Generator and B Source and B Slope switching circuitry.
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

and that allows the Free Run input pin of U122 to be emitter circuit of Q92 and fed to the B Trigger Generator
pulled HI from the +lo-V level applied to the signal line (diagram 5), where it is available for selection as the B
via R67. Trigger signal.

B Trigger LEVEL control R94 is connected between the

Selecting the A TlME position of the B SOURCE switch
+lo-V and -10-V supplies of the Trigger Amplifier. The
applies + I 0 V to the signal line. Diode CR63 remains
triggering level of the B Trigger Generator is set by the dc
reverse biased so the added voltage does not change the
level established by the LEVEL control.
conditions at the B Trigger Generator on pins 2 and 8. The
additional voltage serves to control the bias on 0208
(diagram 6). Transistor 0208 controls the enabling voltage B Trigger Generator
on CMOS bilateral switch U216B in the B Delay Time
Position and A Time Position switching circuit. Further B Trigger Generator IC U122 operates in a manner
discussion of this circuit is contained in the description of similar to the A Trigger Generator IC. Integrated circuit
the B Delay Time Position and Prescaling circuit. U122 generates the Gate signal used to control the B Sweep
Generator (U24, diagram 6). When the Gate signal at U122
pin 14 i s LO, the B Sweep Generator will not be enabled
t o produce a sweep signal.
SLOPE switch S1 i s functional when any trigger source
other than A TlME or RUNS AFTER DLY i s selected.
Both the +5 V and the + I 0 V are removed from the signal
When the B sweep is triggered (VERT MODE, CH 1,
line, and the SLOPE switch then either grounds the line
CH 2, or EXT), the first triggering signal that occurs after
(-SLOPE) or leaves it open (+SLOPE). When the signal
the delay time has elapsed will cause the Gate signal a t
line i s grounded, diode CR50 i s forward biased by the
pin 14 to go HI, and the B Sweep Generator will initiate a
-10 V applied via R63. The cathode voltage of CR63 i s
sweep signal. When either the A TlME or RUNS AFTER
then approximately -0.7 V (the drop across CR50), and
DLY B Trigger SOURCE is selected, the Free Run input
diode CR63 is forward biased by the + I 0 V applied via
of U122 i s held HI. In this condition, the Gate signal at
R67. With an additional 0.7 V dropped across CR63, the
pin 14 is also held HI. Inverter circuit 0134 and (2139
voltage applied to the Free Run input of U122 is approx-
i n v a t h e Gate signal to B GATE and applies it to the
imately 0 V. The Trigger Generator does not free run, and
B Gate input pin of U24 (pin 13). With a LO on U24
transistor 0161 i s held off. Pin 8 of U122 is pulled HI by
pin 13, the B Sweep Generator will initiate a B Sweep
the +5 V applied via pull-up resistor R l 6 l . With pin 8 HI,
signal on receipt of a Delayed Gate signal from the A
an output gate from U122 will be produced during the
Sweep Generator (U43).
negative slope of the input trigger signal.

When the SLOPE switch i s set to the + position, the

SWEEP
signal line becomes open through CR50. This allows the The Sweep circuitry, shown on schematic diagram 6,
cathode end of CR63 to be pulled down to -10 V via i s composed of the A and B Sweep Generator IC, the
R63. The anode end of the forward-biased diode also moves Sweep Control IC, the Miller Sweep circuit, and the B
more negative, and 0161 is biased on. Pin 8 of U122 is DELAY TlME POSITION control circuitry. Logic levels
pulled LO, and now an output gate is produced from U122 necessary to control the sequence of events associated with
during the positive slope of the input trigger signal. sweep generation, both A and B Sweep signals, and crt
unblanking signals are produced by the Sweep circuitry.

B External Trigger Amplifier

A trigger signal applied to the B Trigger External INPUT A and B Sweep Generators
connector is ac coupled to the B External Trigger Amplifier The A and B Sweep Generators produce linear sawtooth
via an RC bandwidth filter. The filter response limits the voltages which are amplified by the Horizontal Amplifier
B External Trigger bandwidth to a range of 30 Hz to circuit to produce the crt display horizontal deflection.
20 MHz. Protection diodes CR85 and CR86 prevent Both Sweep Generator integrated circuits also produce
excessive amplitude trigger signals from being accidentally Z-Axis signals that unblank the crt during the appropriate
applied to the gate of sou rce-follower 088. sweep time and establish the display intensity. The A and B
Sweep Generator circuits are contained in two identical
16-pin integrated circuits, U43 and U24 respectively.
The amp1ifier is composed of source-follower Q88,
constant-current source 089, and emitter-follower Q92.
In addition to acting as a constant-current source for Q88, The following is a brief description of the function
FET 089 also provides thermal compensation for the associated with each of the pins of the IC device used for
amplifier stage. The output trigger signal is taken from the U43 and U24.
Theory of Operation-2336 Service

Pin 1: Delay Time In (used in the A Sweep Generator Pin 12: Crt Unblanking Out. Z-Axis unblanking current
IC only). In RUNS AFTER DLY, this pin connects to the supplied from this pin to the Z-Axis Amplifier determines
B DELAY TlME POSITION control. The dc level from this the display intensity during sweep times. During nonsweep
control is used to vary the time between the start of the times, the crt is blanked by the absence of the unblanking
A Sweep and the start of the Delayed Gate output at current.
pin 16. In A TIME, the Delay Time input voltage will
alternate between the level set by the B DELAY TlME -
POSITION control and that set by the A TlME POSITION Pin 13: A Gate In (U43) and B Gate In (U24). The logic
control. For A TlME measurements, either two intensified level on this pin i s used in conjunction with the- logic level
zones ( A INTEN HORlZ MODE) or two alternated B on pin 14 (Sweep Disable on U43; Delayed Gate In on
Sweeps (B HORlZ MODE) will be displayed. U24) to start and stop the sweep. A negative-going gate
pulse applied to pin 13 starts the sweep if pin 14 is LO.
Also, a negative-going gate pulse applied to pin 14 starts the
Pin 2: Miller Out. Connects t o the ramp output signal sweep if pin 13 is LO. When either A TlME or RUNS
from the Miller Sweep circuit. AFTER DLY is selected, pin 13 of B Sweep Generator U24
is held LO by the B Gate signal from B Trigger Generator
U122. In this condition, the Delayed Gate signal on pin 14
Pin 3: Current Source. Sets the internal operating controls the start and stop of the B Sweep. In the triggered
current levels. B Sweep modes (VERT MODE, CH 1, CH 2, or EXT),
after the delay time has elapsed, the Delayed Gate is
applied to U24 pin 14 to enable the next triggering signal
Pin 4: Miller Null Retrace Current. Supplies retrace received at the B Trigger Generator to initiate a B Sweep.
current and feedback to set the sweep-start voltage on the
Miller Sweep circuit. -
Pin 14: Delayed Gate In (U24) or Sweep Disable (U43).
See "Pin 13" discussion for the use of pin 14 in conjunc-
tion with pin 13. In the A Sweep Generator IC, when X-Y
Pin 5: Sweep Out. The sweep output signal i s present VERTICAL MODE i s selected, pin 14 (Sweep Disable) is
on this pin; it is applied to the Horizontal Amplifier circuit. switched HI to prevent any sweep from being generated.
The output can be switched off and on by the logic level Horizontal deflection of the display is accomplished using
on pin 7. the signal applied to the CH 1 OR X input connector. In
the B Sweep Generator IC, the Delayed Gate produced
from pin 16 of the A Sweep Generator IC is applied to this
Pin 6: Start Level Current In. Sets current levels that pin to control the B Sweep as described in the "Pin 13"
determine the Miller Sweep start voltage. discussion.

Pin 15: Vcc. Connects t o the +5-V supply.

Pin 7: Sweep Switch In. Enables the sweep output
signal at pin 5. When pin 7 is LO, a sweep output can occur;
when HI, the sweep output is disabled and pin 5 is held
Pin 16: Delayed G a t e Out (used in the A Sweep Gen-
at -3 V.
erator IC only). A Delayed Gate pulse produced a t this pin
is applied to pin 14 (Delayed Gate In) of the B Sweep
Pin 8: V E E . Connects to the -5-V supply. Generator IC. The delay time between the start of the A
Sweep and the generation of the Delayed Gate i s deter-
mined by the B DELAY TIME POSITION control setting in
Pin 9: Ground. Ground connection point for the IC. RUNS AFTER DLY. In A TlME the delay time is alter-
nated between that set by the B DELAY TlME POSITION
control and that set by the A TlME POSITION control.
Pin 10: Holdoff Start Out. Provides an output pulse to
U87 t o start the holdoff timing ramp when the sweep ramp
reaches its maximum negative level. In addition, the B Reset signal is derived from the logic
level at U43 pin 16. For triggered B Sweep modes, the B
Reset signal coincides with the end of the Delayed Gate.
In RUNS AFTER DLY and A TIME, the B Reset signal is
Pin 11: Intensity In. Current from Q218, controlled by held LO by U365E, and the B Trigger Generator i s not
the front-panel INTEN potentiometer, is supplied to this reset. Thus, the B Gate signal to U24 pin 13 is held LO,
point to establish the level of unblanking current produced and the Delayed Gate from U43 pin 16 controls the start
at pin 12. and stop of the B Sweep.
 Theory o f Operation-2336 Service

B Delay Time Position and A Time Position Circuit reverse biased and the Alt Sync signal applied to U216B
pin 9 via CR208 i s enabled to drive U216B.
The B DELAY TlME POSITION control, R918A, and
the A TlME POSITION control, R9186, set dc levels at
U43 pin 1 (Delay Time In). The voltage levels from these In this condition, the dc level applied to the Delay Time
two controls are multiplexed when the B SOURCE switch
In pin of U43 alternates between the output voltage of
is set to A TIME. Otherwise, only the B DELAY TlME
U197A and the output voltage of U197B. On one A Sweep
POSITION control voltage is used to establish the delay
time. the Delayed Gate to the B Trigger Generator will be
generated a t a delay time set by the B DELAY TlME
POSITION control, and on the next A Sweep the Delayed
The dc level (between +2 V and -2 V ) is compared Gate will be generated a t a delay time set by the A TlME
with the A Sweep ramp level in a delay pickoff comparator POSITION control. The result is either two intensified
within U43. When the A Sweep ramp crosses the dc zones on the A Sweep (if A INTEN HORIZ MODE is
level set by either the B DELAY TlME POSITION control selected) or two alternating B Sweeps (if B HORIZ MODE
or the A TlME POSITION control, a Delayed Gate is is selected).
produced a t U43 pin 16.

+35-V Regulator
The voltage levels applied to the ends of potentiometers
A stable voltage source is required for proper operation
R918A and B are produced by two operational amplifiers,
of the Miller Sweep circuits. Regulator IC U3 develops
U198A and U198B. The two amplifiers are biased to
the +34-V charging voltage that is applied to the Miller
produce stable voltages of +2 V and -2 V respectively
Sweep timing capacitors. The Regulator develops the +34 V
when either A INTEN or B HORIZ MODE is selected.
from the +40-V supply.

Pressing in the A HORIZ MODE push button places

+5 V on the anode end of both CR195 and CR193. Amp- Miller Sweep Generator
lifiers U198A and U198B are then biased to produce Transistors Q80, 081, Q83, and the selected RC timing
outputs of -4 V t o both ends of R918A and B, and the elements (determined by the A SECIDIV switch position)
delay pickoff comparator within U43 is disabled. A make up the A Miller Sweep Generator. Both the A Sweep
Delayed Gate is not generated a t U43 pin 16; therefore, and B Sweep circuits operate in a similar manner. The A
a B Sweep is not started by the B Sweep Generator. Sweep circuit i s discussed to explain circuit operation.
Any differences in circuit operation between the A Sweep
and the B Sweep are also discussed.
Buffer amplifiers U197A and U197B amplify the dc
voltage level from the delay time position controls and
provide the drive level to the Prescaling circuit for use When both pins 13 and 14 of U43 are LO, the minus
when delta time measurements are being made. Further input of the internal Sweep Start Comparator is pulled
discussion of the Prescaling circuit i s located in the "Delta LO, and the Comparator output a t pin 4 of U43 becomes a
Time" circuit description. CMOS switch U216B i s switched high impedance. Timing capacitor C, then begins to charge
when the two dc voltage levels are multiplexed. toward +32 V through R,. The gate of Q80 (connected
to the junction of C, and R,) begins to go positive as it
follows the charge on C,. The resulting increase in current
In all B Trigger Modes except A TIME, 0208 is biased through Q80 decreases the current through 081 to produce
on. With Q208 conducting, +5 V is applied t o U216B pin 9, a positive-going voltage rise a t the base of Q83. The 083
and pin 3 of the bilateral switch is connected to pin 4. collector voltage decreases, and the negative side of C,
Therefore, only the B DELAY TlME POSITION control follows. This action results in a negative-going voltage
voltage level is passed to the A Sweep Generator. When applied across'c, that maintains a constant charging current
the A HORIZ MODE i s selected, +5 V is applied from S218 through C,. The linear charging current produces a linear,
to pin 9 of U216B via CR202 to prevent U216B from rather than exponential, rate of fall to the sawtooth output
switching to the A TlME POSITION control output voltage
signal.
even if A TlME B SOURCE is selected.

The sawtooth output voltage continues to fall until it

When A TlME B SOURCE i s selected, + I 0 V is applied reaches -2.4 V. At that point, the End-of-Sweep Com-
t o the A TimeIRuns After Dly/Slope signal line. This parator contained in U43 initiates the Holdoff Start pulse
voltage level causes 0208 t o become reverse biased, and the a t U43 pin 10. The Holdoff Start pulse starts the sweep
+5 V from 0208 to U216B pin 9 i s removed. If either A - time and resets the A Sweep IC by removing the
holdoff
INTEN or B HORIZ MODE i s also selected, CR202 is A Gate from U43 pin 13.
Theory of Operation-2336 Service
-
When the A Sweep IC resets, the Delayed Gate signal Pin 6: Auto Gate. When in the automatic sweep mode,
from U43 pin 16 goes HI to reset the B Sweep Generator. the gate output from this pin triggers the sweep if a trigger
In the triggered B Sweep modes, the B Trigger Generator signal does not occur within about 100 ms after holdoff
is also reset by U43 pin 16 going HI. When either the ends.
A TIME or RUNS AFTER DLY B Sweep mode is selected,
-
the B Trigger Generator is not reset when the A Sweep
Pin 7: A Gate. The gate provided from this pin synchro-
ends, and the B Gate signal remains LO a t U24 pin 13.
nizes alternate trace switching in the Vertical Switching
Logic circuitry.
In X-Y VERTICAL MODE, the X-Y Enable signal is
applied to U43 pin 14 (Sweep Disable input) to prevent
the A Sweep from being generated. Pin 8: Ground connection for the IC.

Delay Start potentiometer R74 and B Time potenti- Pin 9: Holdoff Out. The gate level present here is LO
ometer R10 permit adjustment of the quiescent current during sweep holdoff time and HI otherwise. This gate i s
levels of Q81 and Q16 in the A and B Sweep circuits used to reset the Trigger Generator circuitry. While this
respectively. These current levels set the starting points pin i s LO, a triggering signal cannot be generated ft-om the
for the sweep output signals. Trigger Generator circuitry.

Pin 10: Holdoff Timing. The RC timing networks

Sweep Control Integrated Circuit selected by the A SECID IV switch are connected between
The Sweep Control integrated circuit is U87. Several this pin and pin 11. The TRIG HOLDOFF (PUSH) VAR
functions are performed in this stage, depending on the control (on diagram 7) may be used to vary the amount
mode of operation of the instrument. The following list is of holdoff time from that produced by the fixed holdoff
a brief explanation of the function associated with each timing components.
pin of the IC.

Pin 11: Holdoff Ramp. A negative-going holdoff ramp

Pin 1: NORM Mode. When this pin i s grounded through is present on this pin. The slope of the ramp determines
the A Trigger Mode switch, S210, the sweep operates in the sweep holdoff time.
the single-sweep mode. When the ground i s removed from
this pin (by pressing in the NORM push button), the sweep
operates in the repetitive mode. Pin 12: Holdoff Start. A positive-going end-of-sweep
pulse is applied to this pin. The pulse terminates any Sweep
Control output gates, starts the holdoff ramp, and initiates
Pin 2: Single Sweep Reset. Pressing in and releasing the the A Reset pulse to the A Trigger Generator.
SGL SWP push button prepares the single-sweep circuitry
to respond to the next triggering event. The READY LED
will illuminate and remain on until a trigger occurs. Pins 13 and 15: Triggered and Ready Light. In NORM
or AUTO Trigger Mode, pin 13 illuminates the TRIG'D-
READY LED to indicate that a triggered gate has occurred.
Pin 3: Auto Timing. With AUTO Trigger Mode selected, In SGL SWP Trigger Mode, pin 15 illuminates the TR IG'D-
RlOO and ClOO determine the amount of time between READY LED to indicate that the Sweep Control IC is
- prepared to generate a single sweep when a triggering
the end of holdoff and the generation of the AUTO Gate
when no triggering signal i s received. If no triggering signal signal occurs.
is received within about 100 ms, the charge on ClOO will
be sufficient to place a HI on pin 3, thus causing the
Auto Gate signal to occur. Pin 14: Light Ground. Provides a ground point for the
TRIG'D-READY LED.

Pin 4: Auto Mode. Grounding this pin through Trigger

Mode switch S210 enables automatic sweep mode Pin 16: The +5-V supply to the IC.
operation.

A Horizontal Mode
-
Pin 5: Logic Gate. The A Gate from the A Trigger When an adequate triggering signal i s applied to the
-
Generator is applied here to prevent an Auto Gate from A Trigger Generator (U81, diagram 5), a gate signal is
occurring and to control the TR IG'D and READY LED. produced a t U81 pin 14 (see Figures 3-10 and 3-1 1). The
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

gate in inverted and i t s level shifted by 089 to become the in the AUTO Trigger Mode if a triggering signal does not
A Gate signal. This signal i s applied via CR87 to U87 pin 5 occur within about 100 ms after holdoff has ended.
(the Logic Gate input of the - Sweep Control IC) and via
CR88 to U43 pin 13 (the A Gate input of the A Sweep
Generator IC). In response to the application of A Gate, When the A Sweep ramp reaches a predetermined level
U43 starts a negative-going A Sweep ramp at U43 pin 5. (within U43), a Holdoff Start signal is produced at U43
pin 10. Holdoff Start is applied to Sweep Control IC U87
a t pin 12 to cause the A Reset signal a t U87 pin 9 to go
In Sweep Control IC U87, application of the A Gate HI. The HI A Reset signal is then applied to Trigger
signal a t pin 5 prevents the generation of an Auto Gate Generator U81 a t pin 17 via (3104 to reset U81, and the
output a t pin 6. Output gates automatically occur at pin 6 A Gate signal (applied to U43 at pin 13) goes HI.

SHOWN I N
-
w +
TO B SWP
SWITCH I N ,
R34
A POSITION

SWP
SWITCH
IN
HO
START

A RESET A CRT

yiV
UNBLANKING AMPLIFIER

U43
RESET SWEEP
IN GENERATOR
LEVEL T0
SWP HORIZ
SWP
OUT OUTPUT
R55 IN

1
- -

AUTO
A
-
;ATE
v I +SWP
TRIG
SIG
m IN I
Ul28
INPUTS HO I HORIZ
START I PREAMP
GATE IN
HO I
OUT
U81 LOGIC I
TRIGGER ALT
GENERATOR
GhTE SYNC I
A 7
GATE
FLIP-
U87 FLOP SWITCHING
SWEEP LOGIC I
CONTROL
HO
RAMP
HORIZ AMPLIFIER

0
TRIGGER I SWEEP

Figure 3-10. Sweep operation in the A Sweep Mode.

Theory of Operation-2336 Service

At that point, Holdoff Start at U43 pin 10 goes LO

A TRIGGER B TRIGGER A TRIGGER and is applied to U87 pin 12. With Holdoff Start LO, the
( POINT / POINT POINT
negative-going Holdoff ramp a t U87 pin 11 starts. When
the ramp level reaches about -2 V, the A Reset signal a t
U87 pin 9 returns LO to remove the reset signal from the
SWEEP GATE I I Trigger Generator. Trigger Generator U81 is now able to
OUTPUT I respond to another triggering signal.
U81 , P I N 14 1 I
I

- I
I The Holdoff ramp at U87 pin 11 stays LO until another
-
triggering signal occurs. When either the A Gate is generated
by U81 or an Auto Gate is generated by U87, the Holdoff
ramp is reset HI in preparation for the next Holdoff timing
period.

I A CRT I I I
UNBLANKING CURRENT I I
- U43 P I N 1 2 , L
I
From U87 pin 7, the A Gate signal is used to clock Alt
Sync Flip-flop U108. The output pulse from U108 pin 13
I , I (the 5 output pin) is applied to the Vertical Switching
I I Logic circuitry to synchronize vertical switching between
A SWEEP OUTPUT I
I I channel displays when ALT VERTICAL MODE is selected.
U43, P I N 5 I

I
HO START I I I I When A TlME is selected, the Alt Sync pulse i s also
applied to CMOS switch U216B via CR208. The Alt Sync
pulse switches the delay time between that set by the
B DELAY TlME POSITION control and that set by the
A TlME POSITION control.

I
When either A or A INTEN HORlZ MODE is selected,
VARIES WITH U43 pin 7 is held LO to enable the A Sweep output signal
I
I I I A TRIGGER at U43 pin 5; and pin 7 of U24 (the B Sweep Generator)
HOLDOFF RAMP HOLDOFF
,
U87 P I N 1 1 + 5 I~ I / SETTING i s held HI t o prevent a B Sweep signal output from occur-
ring. For the A INTEN HORlZ MODE however, the B Crt
-- - I
I

- I I
+O. 6V
Unblanking output signal continues to be provided to the
2-Axis Amplifier to intensify the A Sweep during the
DELAYED I VARIES WITH DELAY
GAfE OUTPUT I / TIME MULTIPLIER B Sweep period.
U43, P I ; ~ CONTROL SETTING
-r TI n
1111 , 1111 In the A INTEN HORlZ MODE, selecting A TlME
B Trigger SOURCE, will present two intensified zones
B SWEEP I I
OUTPUT I alternated on the A Sweep. One corresponds t o the delay
set by the B DELAY TlME POSITION control; the other
corresponds to the delay set by the A TlME POSITION
control.

UNBLANKING CURRENT
U24, P I N 1 2 1
'
1 1 1 B Horizontal Mode
In the B HORlZ MODE (Figure 3-12), the A Sweep
Generator continues to operate much the same as it does in
the A HORlZ MODE. However, both the A Sweep output
a t U43 pin 5 and the Crt Unblanking output a t U43 pin 12
are disabled to prevent any A trace display. The A Sweep
ramp continues to be generated within U43 to control the
delay timing and sweep resetting functions required for the
Figure 3-11. Sweep circuit waveform relationships. B HORlZ MODE.
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

SHOWN I N B S21
POSITION lSyp1- SUP
- SWITCH
IN
U24
B SWEEP
GENERATOR
TO
Z-AXIS
UNBLANKING AMPLIFIER

I RESET

SWP
SW I T C H
IN

HO
START
OUT
A RESET -5V
1
DLY
-
GATE
OUT
RESET

JL2 US3
A SWEEP

-
GENERATOR -SUP
B

I
A
-
AUTO 5WP HORIZ
GATE IN
TRIG ChfE IN
SIG 7 A
HO +SUP
IN DELAY
START
IN T I E Ul28
GATE HO HORIZ
OUT PREAMP
LOGIC
GATE
U87
SWEEP
CONTROL DELAY TIME
HO FROM U2 1 6B
-5v I
I
I RAW

TRIGGER I SWEEP HORIZ AMPLIFIER

Figure 3-12. Sweep operation in the B Sweep Mode.

Theory of Operation-2336 Service

The B Sweep runs only once per A Sweep, and it is X-Y Mode
initiated by one of two gate signals. Both the Delayed Gate
When both CH 1 and CH 2 VERTICAL MODE push
a t U24 pin 14 and the B Gate at U24 pin 13 interact to
buttons are pressed in, the X-Y display is enabled. The X-Y
control the actual sweep start. Enable signal is applied to U43 pin 14 to disable both the
A and B Sweep outputs to the Horizontal Amplifier. How-
ever, the X-Y Enable signal is also supplied to the Intensity
If one of the triggered B Sweep modes is in use, the B
inputs of both Sweep Generators to produce a fixed crt
Sweep is initiated by the first triggering signal that occurs
unblanking output level to the Z-Axis Amplifier. The X-Y
after the delay time set by the B DELAY TlME POSITION
Enable signal i s applied to both Sweep Generators a t pin 11
control has elapsed. When the A Sweep ramp within U43
(via CR29 and R29 to U43; via CR47 and R47 to U24) so
reaches the level set a t U43 pin 1, a Delayed Gate is
that the crt can be unblanked regardless of the Horizontal
generated a t U43 pin 16. This gate signal does two things:
Mode selected. Additional intensity signal current from
first, it sets U24 pin 14 LO to enable the B Sweep Gener-
Q218 (required to set the crt display intensity to the
ator; and second, it removes the B Reset signal from the
desired viewing brightness) is added to the fixed X-Y level
B Trigger Generator to enable the B Trigger Generator
via HORIZ MODE switch S218.
(U122, diagram 5).

The next triggering signal received by U122 will cause

A AND B TIMING SWITCHES
the B Gate signal at U24 pin 13 to go LO and a B Sweep
is initiated. At the end of the A Sweep ramp, the Delayed
-
Gate a t U43 pin 16 goes HI again, and both the B Trigger The switching circuitry shown in schematic diagram 7
Generator and the B Sweep Generator become reset. includes the switching contacts and timing components
for each position of the A and B SECIDIV switches. Also
shown is the Variable Time and Variable Trigger Holdoff
The sequence of events i s altered when either A TlME or control circuitry. Switch contacts for the holdoff timing
RUNS AFTER DLY B Trigger SOURCE i s selected. In are included in diagram 7, but the holdoff timing
either of these cases, the Free Run input of B Trigger components are shown in diagram 6.
Generator U122 is held HI (in the Free Run mode), and the
B Gate signal to the B Sweep Generator is held LO. In this
condition, a B Sweep- will be initiated immediately upon Contacts on the A SECIDIV switch supply setting infor-
mation to both the Prescaling circuit (diagram 6) and the
receipt of the Delayed Gate from U43 pin 16.
Scale Factor Decoding circuit (diagram 11). The position
information sets the Prescaling voltage divider for the
appropriate dividing ratio and determines the scale factor
-At the end of the A Sweep ramp, when the Delayed
to be displayed in the LCD readout when A TlME measure-
Gate goes HI, pin 14 of U24 is allowed to go HI to reset
ments are made.
the B Sweep Generator. However, the B Reset signal i s
held LO by U365E being forward biased, and the B Trigger
Generator is not reset.
HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIER
The crt i s unblanked for the duration of the B Sweep
by a B Crt Unblanking signal produced at U24 pin 12. The Horizontal Amplifier circuit, shown on schematic
When the B Sweep ramp reaches a predetermined level diagram 8, provides the output signals that drive the
within U24, the Crt Unblanking signal current drops horizontal crt deflection plates. The signal that is applied
to zero, and the crt becomes blanked again. The B Sweep t o the Horizontal Preamplifier IC (Ul28) i s determined by
ramp finishes i t s rundown but remains LO until it i s reset the HORIZ MODE and VERTICAL MODE switches.
by the removal of the Delayed G X
signal from U24 pin 14 Horizontal deflection signals can come from either of the
(see Figure 3- 11). Sweep Generators or from the CH 1 OR X input connector
(X-Y display). See Figure 3-13 for a detailed block diagram
of the Horizontal Amplifier.
A INTEN Horizontal Mode
In the A INTEN HORIZ MODE, both the A and B
Sweep Generators operate, but the B Sweep output a t U24
Horizontal Preamplifier
pin 5 i s disabled by a HI placed on U24 pin 7 via the Horizontal Preamplifier IC U128 converts single-ended
HORIZ MODE switch. The B Crt Unblanking signal (pro- input signals into the differential output signals necessary
duced at U24 pin 12 during the B Sweep time) adds t o the for proper crt deflection. Horizontal positioning, magnifier
A Crt Unblanking signal to produce the intensified zone(s) registration, X 10 magnification, and X-Axis signal amp1ifi-
on the crt display trace. cation (X-Y mode) are also accomplished in U128.
 Theory o f Operation-2336 Service

The following is a brief description of the function Pin 2: Horizontal I (-). Negative differential signal
associated with each pin of U128. current at this pin is applied to the Horizontal Output
Amplifier.

Pin 1: Magnifier Registration. This pin is used in con-

junction with pin 8 to provide for registration adjustment Pin 3: Gain Set. The amplifier gain setting circuitry is
between normal and magnified sweeps. The Horizontal connected between this pin and pin 6. Relay K127 is
Beam Find voltage is also applied between pins 1 and 8 to actuated by the front-panel X I 0 MAG push button to
reduce the horizontal deflection of a signal to within the switch either the X I or X I 0 gain-setting components into
graticule area. the circuit.

HORIZONTAL

FROM CH 1
AND CH 2 X Y ENABLE 12
PREAMPLIFIER
Ul28
'7
X I 0 MAG

XY MODE
VERTICAL
l O D E SWITCHES r X I AND

FROM
A AND B
SWEEP
(
A SWEEP

B SWEEP
10

9
A SWP %? [ G A I N SET

;ENERATORS B SWP

FROM
BEAM F I N D

MAGNIFIER
REGISTRATION

FROM L-b
iORIZONTAL
POSITION 14
lPOSITIONi + POS
-I
OUT

TO
FROM X CRT
CH 1 SIG HORIZ
TRIGGER DEFLECTION
X
'ICKOFF
SIG
IN

HORIZ
+ I
OUT 7

Figure 3-13. Horizontal Amplifier, detailed block diagram.

Theory of Operation-2336 Service

Pin 4: VEE. The -5-V supply is applied to the IC a t diagram 2). The CH 1 Trigger signal is thermally compen-
this pin. sated in the Channel 1 Preamplifier. Effects of the thermal
compensation are eliminated from the X-Axis signal by the
RC network composed of R142, C141, and R l 4 l . The net-
Pin 5: Bias. The internal biasing current is supplied to work also supplies the input impedance for U147.
this pin from the +40-V supply via R149.

Horizontal positioning from the Horizontal POSITION

Pin 6: Gain Set. This pin is used in conjunction with control i s added to the X-Axis signal via R139. The result-
pin 3 for connection of the amplifier gain-setting ing signal i s applied to the inverting input of U147 to
components. establish the correct signal polarity for application to
Horizontal Preamplifier U 128.

Pin 7: Horizontal I (+). Positive differential signal

current a t this pin is applied to the Horizontal Output Stage gain of U147 i s approximately two and is set by
Amplifier. both R146 and the input resistance to U147. Capacitor
C146 provides high-frequency compensation for U 147. The
calibrated X-Axis signal gain i s adjustable by X-Y Gain
Pin 8: Magnifier Registration. See Pin 1 discussion. potentiometer R148.

Pin 9: B Sweep. lnput pin for the B Sweep signal.

Horizontal Output Amplifier
The Horizontal Output Amplifier circuit consists of two
Pin 10: A Sweep. lnput pin for the A Sweep signal.
complementary, feedback-amplifier halves. One half
amplifies the negative-going current signal from the Hori-
zontal Preamplifier (U128 pin 2), and the other half
'in 11: Signal. Input pin for the )(-Axis signal from amplifiesthe p ~ s i t i ~ ~ - ~current
o i n g signal a t U128 pin 7.
Channel 1 when the X-Y display feature is in use.

The negative-going signal amplifier is composed of Q160,

Pin 12: X-Y Mode. Switches the amplifier circuitry to Q167, and Q168; the positive-going signal amplifier is
amplify the signal connected t o pin 11. A LO on pin 12 is composed of 0174, 0176, and Q181. Transistor Q155 is
normal for A or B Sweep amplification. a constant-voltage source which is common to both input
transistors (Q160 and Q174).
Pin 13: Frequency Compensation. Connects to fre-
quency compensating capacitor C149.
lnput transistors 0 160 and Q174 are common-emitter,
inverting amplifiers with low input impedance. The base
voltage on the transistors varies only a small amount during
Pin 14: Horizontal Position. lnput pin for the Hori-
the change in signal current. Quiescent base voltages of
zontal POSITION control signal.
0 160 and 0 174 are held to nearly the same dc level by the
action of constant-voltage-source transistor Q155 along
with CR160 and CR175.
Pin 15: VCC. The +5-V supply i s applied to the IC a t
this pin.
The inverted signal current a t the collectors of Q160 and
0174 drive the emitters of a pair of complementary
Pin 16: Ground. This pin provides the ground con-
common-base amp1ifiers. Transistor pair Ql67 and Q168
nection point for the IC.
(driven by Q160) provides the voltage to the right
horizontal deflection plate, and transistor pair Q176 and
0181 (driven by Q174) provides the voltage to the left
X-Signal Amplifier horizontal deflection plate.
A circuit composed of U147 and associated components
performs several signal-processing functions on the X-Axis
signal prior to i t s application to the Horizontal Preamplifier. The transistors in a complementary pair (0167 and
Q168 in the right side, and 0176 and 0181 in the left
side) share a common current path. The pairs are arranged
The X-Axis signal is derived from the CH 1 Trigger so that the signal current has the opposite effect on the
signal output of the Channel 1 Vertical Preamplifier (U30, forward biasing of each transistor in the pair.
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

In the pair of (3167 and 0168, both transistors are

forward biased. The incoming positive-going signal reduces
the forward bias on Q167 and increases the voltage drop
across it. However, a positive-going signal increases the
forward bias on Q168, thereby reducing the voltage drop I 0161
across it. This action continues as the sweep signal rises I OFF
I I
linearly, and the collector voltage of 0167 and Q168 rises CURRENT
toward the +102-V supply level. At the end of the sweep, IN
TI68
the transition back to the sweep quiescent level i s started
quickly by the ac-signal coupling through C167 t o the
emitter of 0168.

The left side transistor pair (Q176 and 0181) operates

in a manner similar to that described for the right side.
Zener diode VR174 in the left side provides the correct
bias level for 0 1 76, and C174 is a fast signal path around
VR174.

Resistors R163 (in the right side) and R19O (in the left
side) dampen the deflection signal slightly to prevent VOLTAGE 100 V
oscillation.
0 v- I I I I

CRT CIRCUIT

The CRT circuit, shown on schematic diagram 9, 0161

BASE
provides the voltage levels and control circuits for operation VOLTAGE
of the cathode-ray tube. The circuitry consists of the
Z-Axis Amplifier, H igh-Voltage Oscillator, High-Voltage I '
Regulator, +102-V Low-Voltage Power Supply, High-
Voltage Rectifier, High-Voltage Multiplier, and the Crt R 161
CURRENT
I I I
I
I , I

1 +
controls. I I

H igh-Voltage Oscillator
Transistors Q l 6 l and Ql63 and associated components
compose a High-Voltage Oscillator that produces drive for -1.0 v-
HighTVoltage Transformer T167. The frequency of oscil-
C183
lation is determined by the resonant frequency of TI67 VOLTAGE
(approximately 38 kHz). Waveform relationships in the
circuit are illustrated in Figure 3-14.

When ac power is applied to the instrument, R176B 0161

supplies start-up current to turn on 0178 and 0184. BASE
Initially, with zero feedback from the -1.96-kV supply, CURRENT
both 0178 and 0184 turn on a t full conduction. Capacitor
C183 becomes positively charged with respect to ground,
and the base of 0161 becomes forward biased and begins
TYPICAL WAVEFORMS
conducting. As 0161 collector current starts flowing FOR INPUT LINE
through T I 6 8 (pins 1 and 2) and TI67 (pins 4 and 5), VOLTAGE AT 115 VAC
a positive-feedback voltage is induced in TI67 between
pins 3 and 6 and in T I 68 between pins 3 and 4. The sum of
the two feedback voltages is applied to the base of 0161 to
quickly turn on 0161 a t full conduction; drive current is
also supplied to the TI67 primary winding (pins 4 and 5). Figure 3-14. High-Voltage Oscillator waveform relationships.
Theory of Operation-2336 Service

Capacitor C183 i s in the base current path for Q161, voltage across C183 at a more negative level. The feed-
and due to the base current flow through it, C183 loses back voltage a t TI67 pin 3 must rise to a higher positive
i t s positive charge and becomes negatively charged with level to overcome the voltage on C183, and Q161 will turn
respect to ground. The voltage level developed across C183 on later in the resonant cycle. The reduction in oscillation
during this cycle determines the point a t which 0 1 61 will amplitude in TI67 will return the -1.96-kV supply t o the
turn on during the next resonant cycle. correct operating level. High voltage is thus regulated by
controlling the amplitude of the -1.96-kV supply.

After the voltage in the T I 67 feedback winding peaks,

it begins to decrease. The base drive to Q161 decreases, Decoupling components C167 and 1167 prevent oscil-
and Q161 starts to turn off. At this point, the current lator current from disturbing the +40-V unregulated supply.
through 0 161 will start to fall. The feedback voltage across
TI68 reverses polarity as the magnetic field begins t o
collapse, and Q161 is rapidly turned off.
High-Voltage Over-Voltage Shutdown Circuit
In the event that a high-voltage over-voltage condition
The reversed polarity voltage across T I 6 8 pins 1 and 2 occurs, a shutdown circuit composed of 0148, Q155,
forward biases CR165 in the base circuit of Q163, and 0 156, and associated components acts to stop drive current
0163 begins to conduct. This action places the inductance to the High-VoltageTransformer.
of TI68 in parallel with the inductance of T167, and the
energy stored in the magnetic field around TI68 is coupled
to TI67 instead of being dissipated as heat in the trans- The +102-V supply level (developed in the High-Voltage
former. Transistor Q163 turns off when the magnetic field Transformer secondary circuit) i s proportional' to both the
of T I 6 8 collapses to a point that no longer sustains the base high voltage (+I6 kV) and the crt cathode voltage (-1.96
current to 0 163. kV). An over-voltage condition of the +102-V supply can
therefore be used to sense a high-voltage over-voltage
condition.
Transistor 0161 remains off until the magnetic field
around TI67 reverses again due to the flywheel effect of
the resonant transformer. When the feedback voltage
induced in TI67 a t pin 3 becomes positive enough with In the base circuit of 0148, the +I02 V is divided down
respect to pin 6 to overcome the negative voltage level by R149 and R150 to provide the 0148 base-bias voltage.
retained on C183 from the previous cycle, 0161 will Reference diode VR 148, in the emitter lead of 0148, holds
become forward biased again. a voltage level on the emitter that must be exceeded by the
base-bias voltage before Q148 can become forward biased.
When an over-voltage condition exists, the 0148 base-bias
The sequence of events just described occurs repetitively voltage becomes high enough to cause Q148 to conduct.
as the circuit continues to oscillate.

Transistor Q155 then becomes forward biased by the

voltage drop across R147 (in the Q148 collector circuit).
Collector current through Q155 supplies base current to
High-Voltage Regulation Q148, and both Q148 and 0155 will be latched on. Tran-
Regulation of the high-voltage supply is controlled by sistor 0 155 also supplies base current to 0 1 56 via R155 to
feedback from the -1.96-kV cri cathode voltage supply. bias 0 156 into conduction. With Q156 on, base current to
When power is first applied, the feedback signal i s zero, 0161 (main oscillator transistor) i s shunted to ground to
and both Q178 and Q184 conduct heavily. As the operating prevent 0161 from being biased into conduction. Drive
level i s reached, the negative feedback applied to the base current to the High-Voltage Transformer is removed, and
of Q178 reduces the forward bias on Q178. Current the over-voltage condition is eliminated.
through Q184, used to charge C183 in a positive direction
(less negative), is also reduced. Thus Q161 turns on later
in the resonant cycle than during start up. Drive current i s To unlatch Q148 and 0155, the instrument power must
supplied to High-Voltage Transformer TI67 for a shorter be turned off.
time during the resonant cycle, and the amplitude of the
sinusoidal oscillation is reduced.
High-Voltage Circuitry
Secondary windings of High-Voltage Transformer T I 67
If the crt cathode voltage becomes more negative due to provide crt heater current, source voltage for the +102-V
less loading of the high-voltage supply, the charging current supply, and three 38-kHz sine-wave voltages: 150 V a t
to C183 through 0184 i s reduced even more t o hold the terminal 7, 980 V a t terminal 8, and 2700 V at terminal 9.
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

The three 38-kHz sine-wave voltages are supplied to no intensity) to approximately 3 mA (for full intensity).
High-Voltage Module U130. This module houses a high- The amplitude of the unblanking signal current i s deter-
voltage multiplier (used to produce the +16-kV crt anode mined by the setting of the front-panel INTEN control
voltage), a dc-restorer circuit (to couple the 2-Axis (R909, diagram 3).
Amplifier output to the crt intensity grid), and a rectifier
and filter circuit used to produce the remaining crt oper-
ating voltages (grid bias, focus, cathode voltage, and mesh Input transistor Q93 also acts as a buffer amplifier for
voltage). two of the remaining Z-Axis Amplifier input signals:
chop blanking and external Z-Axis signals.

Focus voltage is adjustable over a range of approxi-

mately -1400 V to -1700 V by R940, the front-panel When the instrument is operating in the Chop mode
FOCUS control. The grid-bias voltage i s adjusted (by R140) (switching between CH 1 display and CH 2 display), Chop
to set the level a t which the Z-Axis Amplifier output Blanking Amplifier 0209 (diagram 4) i s turned on, and
voltage blanks the crt display. current of opposite polarity to the unblanking signal
current i s drawn through R92. The unblanking signal
current i s completely cancelled, and additional current i s
CRT Control Circuits drawn from the emitter current available to Q93. Less
current flows through Q93, and the collector voltage
Crt focus i s controlled by FOCUS control R940 in
rapidly rises toward the +40-V supply voltage level. This
conjunction with ASTlG adjustment R945. The ASTlG
increase in collector voltage i s limited to +4.9 V plus the
adjustment varies the voltage level on the astigmatism grid forward-bias drop across CR94. Diode CRlOO becomes
and is used to obtain a well-defined display over the face reverse biased, and signal current to QlOO is shut off,
of the crt. Geometry adjustment R202 varies the voltage thereby eliminating chopping swit~hingtransients from the
level on the horizontal deflection-plate shields to control
display.
the overall geometry of the display (minimizes bowing of
the display).
External Z-Axis signals are also applied on the chop
blanking line via R210 (diagram 4). These signals either
Two controls align the trace with the graticule lines.
add or subtract from the unblanking signal current. The
Y-Axis adjustment R203 controls the current through one
algebraic sum of all the signal current inputs determines
of the two coils wound on the crt neck and aligns the
the overall trace intensity on the crt.
vertical display components only. Front-panel TRACE
ROTATION adjustment R942 controls the current through
the other coil. The Trace Rotation coil i s located between
The BEAM FIND switch (diagram 3) acts on the Z-Axis
the crt face and the vertical and horizontal deflection
Amplifier in two ways. First, the unblanking signal current
plates, and it affects both the vertical and horizontal
level i s raised enough t o drive the Q93 emitter positive
display components.
with respect to the base, and 093 becomes reverse biased.
Thus all signal inputs to the Z-Axis Amplifier are over-
ridden. Secondly, the BEAM FlND switch grounds the l e f t
+102-v Supply
end of R91 in the collector circuit of Q93. A fixed level
A secondary winding of TI67 (pin 1 to pin 2) supplies of current flows through R91 into the collector circuit of
drive to a voltage-doubler circuit composed of C197, CIgO, 093 and on through CR100 to the base of 0100. This fixed
CR197, and CR190. Filtering of the +102-V supply is level of current provides a visible trace intensity to aid the
accomplished by L191 and C191. Diode CR191 protects operator in locating the trace position regardless of the
the output load from any negative transients that may I NTEN control setting.
occur during turn on or shut down.

Signal curfent from the collector of 093 is applied

2-Axis Amplifier via CRlOO to the input of a high-speed feedback amplifier
T~~ - z - A ~~ ~ ~~ ~controls
l ithe fcrt intensity
~ ~ level
~ a t the base of Q100. The feedback amplifier i s composed
via several input signal sources. The effect of these input 0100, Q107, 14, 15, and 16- The feedback path
SignalSisto either increaseor decreasethe trace intensity or includes gain-cOntrolling resistors R1011 R1021 and R128,
to completely blank portions of the display. connected between the amplifier output and input a t the
base of 0100.

Unblanking signal current from the Sweep IC (U43 for

A Sweep or U24 for B Sweep, diagram 6) is applied through The combination of resistor values and the feedback
R92 to the emitter of input buffer transistor 093. Signal circuit arrangement have the effect of a single 2042 feed-
cu'rrent flow in the unblanking signal line ranges from 0 (for back resistor. Given the full-intensity input current of 3 mA,
Theory of Operation-2336 Service

the total output-voltage swing may be calculated as 60 V Ac drive t o the DC Restorer circuit is obtained from
(3 mA x 20 k n ) . pin 7 of T167. The voltage on pin 7 i s approximately 150 V
peak at 38 kHz. This sinusoidal voltage is coupled through
C136 and R136 into the DC Restorer circuit. Crt Grid
Transistor 0100 changes the input signal current to a Bias adjustment R140 sets the voltage level on the cathode
signal voltage at the bases of Q107 and 0 1 16. Shunt feed- of CR140 t o approximately + I 0 0 V. When the ac-drive
back resistor R99 (from the collector to the base of Q100) voltage rises t o +I00 V, CR140 becomes forward biased
holds the gain of 0100 low, and there i s minimum collector and clamps the junction of R135, R134, R136, and CRl30
voltage swing. t o approximately +I00 V.

The remaining portion of the Z-Axis Amplifier is divided The Z-Axis Amplifier output signal voltage is applied
into two signal paths: a fast path for the positive-going t o the DC Restorer via R13O and CR130. The Z-Axis signal
leading edges of the unblanking signal, and a fast path for voltage level varies between + I 0 V and +80 V, depending
the negative-going trailing edges. Transistors Q107 and on the setting o f the INTEN control. The ac-drive voltage
Q114 provide the positive-going edge amplification. The ac- will hold CR130 reverse biased until the voltage falls below
coupling capacitor (ClO8) between 0 107 and Q114 the Z-Axis Amplifier output voltage level. A t that point,
produces a rapid turn on of the trace at the high sweep CR130 becomes forward biased and clamps the junction
speed. of CR130, R134, R135, and R136 t o the Z-Axis output
level. The ac-drive voltage is thus clamped on both the
positive and negative peaks t o produce an approximate
Emitter follower 0107 feeds 0114, connected as a square-wave signal with a positive dc offset level.
common-base amplifier. The voltage gain of Q107 i s less
than 1, but it has a large current gain. Common-base output
transistor Q114 produces the large voltage swing necessary The DC Restorer circuit is referenced to the crt cathode
to drive the crt intensity grid. voltage inside U130. Capacitor C, connected to pin 6 of
U130, initially charges t o a level determined by the differ-
ence between the Z-Axis Amplifier output level and the
Transistors 0 1 16 and Q115 provide the fast path for cathode reference voltage. The charging path is from the crt
the negative-going edges of the unblanking signal. The cathode, through the DC Restorer components internal
direct coupling between 0 1 16 and 0 1 15 enables them to t o U130 (diode A, resistor E l and capacitor C) t o U130
also provide the dc and low-frequency amplification of the pin 6; then to R134, CR130, and R130 to the Z-Axis
un blanking signal. Amplifier output. Initially, capacitor D (connected t o U 130
pin 5) will be charged to approximately the same dc level
as on capacitor C.
A clamp circuit composed of CR127, VR123, and C123
limits the Z-Axis positive output voltage to prevent exces-
sive crt intensity. I f the output voltage level reaches 82 V,
When the ac-drive voltage starts i t s positive transition
CR127 begins t o conduct. Reference diode VR123 then
from the lower clamped level ( + I 0 V to +80 V) toward the
k n i t s the output level t o +82 V by shunting additional
higher clamped level 00 the charge on capacitor
current to ground. fast crt surges increases. The additional charge acquired is proportional
around V R123.
t o the amplitude of the positive transition of the clamped
ac-drive voltage.
2-Axis signal voltage is fed t a the crt grid-bias circuit
via R130 and CR130. The signal is coupled to the crt
When the clamped ac-drive voltage starts i t s negative
intensity grid by a dc-restorer circuit that i s housed in
transition from the upper clamped level back to the lower
High-Voltage Module U130.
clamped level, diode A becomes reverse biased. Diode B
becomes forward biased, and the added charge on capacitor
C is transferred to capacitor D through diode B. The added
charge that is transferred depends on the setting of the
DC Restorer INTEN control, since this control sets the lower clamping
The DC Restorer circuit provides crt control-grid bias level for the ac-drive voltage.
and couples both dc and low-frequency components of the
2-Axis Amplifier unblanking signal t o the crt control grid.
This circuit allows the Z-Axis Amplifier output to control The added charge also determines the control-grid bias
the intensity of the crt dispaly. The potential difference voltage with respect to the cathode voltage. I f more charge
between the Z-Axis output and the control grid (about is added to the charge already on capacitor D, the control
2 kV) prevents direct signal coupling. Refer t o Figure 3-15 grid becomes more negative, and less crt writing-beam
during the following circuit description. current flows. Conversely, if less charge is added, the
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

Z-AXIS '-+10~
OUTPUT

GRID .+
CONTROL G-
R I-
D
BIAS N
R140

e CATHODE

Tl67, PIN 7

Figure 3-15. DC Restorer circuit, simplified diagram.

control-grid voltage will become closer t o the same LOW-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
amplitude as the cathode voltage, and more crt writing-
beam current will flow.
The Low-Voltage Power Supply circuit, shown on
schematic diagram 10, includes five regulated supplies to
During periods that capacitor C i s charging, the crt provide the operating power for this instrument. Regulation
control-grid voltage i s held constant by the long time- provides stable, low-ripple output voltages. Two unregu-
constant discharge path of capacitor D through resistor F. lated output voltages are supplied for circuit applications
Any charge that is leaked off capacitor D during the posi- where regulation is unnecessary.
tive transitions of the ac-drive voltage will be replaced by
capacitor C when the ac-drive voltage makes i t s negative
transitions.

The fast-rise and fast-fall transitions of the unblanking

Power Input
pulses are coupled to the crt control grid through capacitor Ac-source power is supplied t o the primary of trans-
D t o U130 pin 9. The fast-path signal starts the crt writing former T900 through Line Fuse F900, POWER switch
beam toward the new intensity level. The DC Restorer S903, and Line Voltage Selector switch S901. LINE
output level then follows the Z-Axis output voltage level VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch S901 connects the split
to set the new bias voltage for the crt control grid. primaries of T900 either in parallel (for 115-V nominal
operation) or in series (for 230-V nominal operation).
Line Fuse F900 value is selected t o provide the protection
Neon lamps DS196 and DS197 prevent arcing in the crt required for each nominal ac-source voltage. Refer to
if the potential on either the control grid or the cathode is "Replaceable Electrical Parts" list of this manual for
lost for any reason. correct fuse values.
Theory of Operation-2336 Service

Secondary Circuits
SUPPLY VOLTAGE ( V 1
The following power supplies are series-regulated
supplies: +5 V, -5 V, + I 0 V, -10 V, and +40 V. Ampli-
fiers U237, U3A, U3B, U8A, and U8B are two-channel,
high-gain amplifier cells with differential inputs. These
amplifiers monitor variations in the output voltages and
supply correction information t o the series-regulating
transistors. The +40-V supply i s the reference voltage
source for the remaining supplies, and i t s output must be
correct to enable the other supplies to operate within their
regulating limits.

Current-limiting circuits provide short-circuit protection

for each of the regulated supplies. The following descrip-
tion applies only t o the +40-V current-limiting circuit; the
other current-limiting circuits operate in a similar manner.

In the +40-V supply, Q239 is normally biased off.

Under normal power-supply-loading conditions, the base
voltage of 0239 is about +40 V. When additional power-
supply loading occurs, the supply current increases, and the
voltage drop across R246 (in the emitter circuit of 0246)
increases. The increasing emitter voltage level is coupled
through the base of Q246 t o a voltage divider (composed
of R244 and R245) thereby causing the base of 0239 t o
go more positive. If the +40-V supply i s loaded down
LOAD CURRENT (MA 1
sufficiently, Q239 will turn on. The collector of Q239
4 1 1 6-75
then moves in the negative direction, and Q244 and Q246
begin turning off to limit the output current. Even though
the supply is limited, transistor Q246 will continue to
conduct current in order to produce enough voltage drop Figure 3-16. Foldover circuit action.
across R246 to keep 0239 biased on. The limited output
voltage can be any value between the supply's regulated
value and zero, depending on the extra load current it is
trying to supply (see Figure 3-16). The current-limiting Figure 3-16 also illustrates the action of the current-
transistors for the other supplies are as follows: limiting (foldover) circuit. At point A, Q239 begins con-
ducting. A t point B, the supply is directly shorted t o
ground through a milliammeter.
On the Positive Regulator circuit board (A12):

Limiting In the event that a power supply problem occurs, service

Supply Transistor jumpers (circuit number prefix i s W) may be removed t o
isolate the supply from the load. In this manner, the
+lo V Q9 problem can be narrowed to either a loading condition or
a malfunction in the supply involved.

Short-circuit protection for each of the power supplies

On the Negative Regulator circuit board (A1I ) : i s also provided by fuses located in each secondary winding
of the power transformer.
Limiting
Supply Transistor
-5 V Q9 The unregulated +40 V i s supplied t o the High-Voltage
Oscillator circuit, and the unregulated -5 V is used in the
Fan Inverter circuit.
 T h e o r y o f Operation-2336 Service

A sample of the ac-voltage waveform (present in the

secondary of T900) i s provided as the Line Trigger signal
from a voltage-divider network composed of R257 and
COLLECTOR
R258 from P714 pin 7 t o ground.

COLLECTOR
FAN CIRCUIT

The Fan motor in this instrument is a three-phase,

brushless motor. A three-phase inverter circuit, shown on
schematic diagram 8, provides drive t o the three motor-
field windings.

Fan motor speed is controlled by the emitter voltage o f

BASE
Darlington transistor 0289. As ambient temperature Q267
changes, a voltage-dividing network (composed of RT295,
R295, and R296) in the base lead of 0289 varies the
amount of forward bias on 0289. A temperature increase
causes the resistance of thermistor RT295 to decrease, EMITTER
thus increasing the forward bias on Q289. The available D267.0281
AND 0 2 8 8
current supply to each of the three inverter stages increases,
causing the switching frequency t o increase and drive the
Fan motor at a faster speed. Conversely, a temperature
decrease will cause the Fan motor to go slower.

The three-phase inverter consists of three basically

identical driver sections. However, resistors R265, R273,
and R284 in each driver input have different resistance
values. Each of these resistors is in parallel with one of
three equal-value capacitors: C265, C273, and C284
respectively. These parallel RC combinations produce a
slightly different time-constant circuit to each of the three
driver circuits t o ensure that the start-up sequence i s in
the correct order for proper direction of Fan rotation.

Only one of the driver sections is on at any one time.

Negative feedback to the other sections holds them off Figure 3-17. Typical waveforms in the Fan Motor three-stage
during the period of time that the conducting stage is inverter circuit.
supplying field current to the Fan motor. As the fan
rotates, a voltage is induced in i t s windings. This voltage i s
fed back t o the "off" sections of the inverter. When the
feedback voltage reaches the "on" switching level of the
next inverter stage to be turned on, the transistor being CALIBRATOR
turned on (0267, Q281, or 0288) causes a voltage drop
on the emitters of the other two transistors on the common
supply bus. This voltage drop completes the turn off o f The Calibrator circuit, shown on schematic diagram 8,
the on transistor and holds the remaining transistor off. produces an accurate 0.2-V peak-to-peak square-wave out-
put that is useful for checking the instrument's vertical
deflection accuracy and for compensating voltage probes.
Typical collector, base, and emitter waveforms of the This circuit consists of a dual-feedback, astable multi-
operating circuit are illustrated in Figure 3-17. vibrator circuit followed by a transistor output amp1ifier.
Theory of Operation-2336 Service
'
Multivibrator the A TIME POSITION control. An AID Converter circuit
The astable multivibrator is composed of U238 and asso- CO"Ve"S the voltage Output the the
ciated components. The basic multivibrator circuit com- digital signal necessary to drive the Liquid-Crystal Display
(LCD). The equivalent time of the voltage difference, with
prises U238D and the parallel arrangement of U238A,
appropriate decimal point and scale factorf will be dis-
U2388, U238C, and U238E. Added components (U238F,
R245 and R239 form a second feedback path that elimi- played in the 3 112 digit readout. Refer to schematic
nates the effect of varying threshold levels found between diagram 8 and detailed block diagram Figure 9-5 during the
following discussion.
CMOS devices of the same type. The duty cycle of the sym-
metrical square-wave signal thus produced is virtually inde-
pendent of variations in threshold levels.
Prescaling Circuit
The voltage levels from the B DELAY TlME POSITION
Nominal frequency of oscillation is 1 kHz, and it is deter- and A TlME POSITION controls are applied to a Prescaling
mined by the RC time constant of feedback components circuit before going to the A I D Converter. This circuit,
R244 and C244. The resistance and capacitance value of shown in Figure 3-18, i s required because the equivalent
R244 and C244 are selected to account for stray and input time of the voltage difference between the two dc levels
capacitance of the circuit. is not the same for each A TIMEIDIV switch setting. In
other words, 10-division spacing between the two inten-
sified zones for a I-ms-per-division setting i s not the same
A second negative-feedback path around U238D is pro- at 2 ms or 5 ms per division. However, the dc-voltage
vided by inverter U238F. The negative-feedback signal is difference of the outputs of U197A and U197B for a 10-
added to the inverted U238F threshold voltage and injected division spacing i s exactly the same in each TIMEIDIV
into U238D through R239. The gain of U238F is set to can- setting.
cel the effect of the U238 threshold level on the duty cycle.

The Prescaling circuit is a switchable voltage divider

Inverters U238A, U2386, U238C, and U238E are con- that produces the correct equivalent-time voltage for each
nected in parallel to supply the output drive to (2250. A TIMEIDIV switch setting. The switching sequence is set fl

up in groups of three positions (see Table 3-1). As an

example of the Prescaling circuit switching, consider the
group of 20 ms, 10 ms, and 5 ms. A full 10-division dif-
CAUTION ference at 20 ms per division is 200 ms, while it is 100 ms
at 10 ms per division and only 50 ms at 5 ms per division.
Integrated circuit U238 is a CMOS device and is sub- To obtain the correct equivalent-time voltage for each range
ject to static discharge damage. See the "Mainte- t o be applied to the AID Converter, the voltage divider
nance" section of this manual for handling of static- must be switched. Enabling voltages from the A TIMEIDIV
sensitive components. switch are applied to CMOS switches U216A and U216C in
the correct order t o select the correct division factor.

Output Amplifier
CMOS switches U216A and U216C are connected across
The square-wave output from the multivibrator switches a resistive voltage divider composed of R214, R216, R215,
output transistor Q250 between cutoff and saturation. Dur- and R210. When one of the "2" sequence positions (0.2 s,
ing the periods that Q250 is cutoff, the highly accurate +40 20 ms, 2 ms, etc.) i s selected, the A TIMEIDIV switch
V collector-supply voltage is divided down by precision re- applies the enabling voltage to U216A a t pin 10. The
sistors R250, R252, and R253 to produce a 0.2-V peak sig- junction of R214 and R216 is then connected t o the
nal amplitude at the front-panel AMPL CAL output terminal. output line to the AID Converter. This point in the divider
When transistor Q250 is conducting, the collector voltage produces a division factor of two.
(and the AMPL CAL output voltage) drops to near 0 V, thus
producing a zero-to-peak calibrator signal of +0.2 V.
The full-scale voltage difference from the B DELAY
TlME POSITION and A TlME POSITION controls is 4 V.
DELTA TIME The Prescaling voltage divider reduces this level to the AID
Converter full-scale input voltage of 2 V.
A Delta Time Logic circuit, contained in the lid of the
instrument, provides the time-measuring capability of the
2336. In the A TlME position of the B Trigger SOURCE A "1" sequence A TIMEIDIV switch position (0.1 s,
switch, two intensified zones will appear on the A INTEN 10 ms, 1 ms, etc.) applies the enabling voltage to CMOS
HORlZ MODE Sweep display. These two zones mark the switch U216C pin 11. CMOS switch U216A has the
timing set by the 6 DELAY TlME POSITION control and enabling voltage removed, so it switches back to internally

3-36 REV NOV 1981

 Theory o f Operation-2336 Service

Table 3-1
PROM U38 Logic Table

U38 Input Address U38 Output Data A SECIDIV Setting

UNCAL

z y x w
Range
I RDP CDP LDP NC NC m p Auto
Range

connect pin 2 to pin 15. With U216C switched, the gate of Q213 to bias it off. This removes the shunting resis-
junction of R216 and R215 i s connected to the output line tance of R212 from across R214 and improves the linearity
via both U216C and U216A. This point in the voltage for the faster time measurements.
divider produces a division factor of four.
AID Converter
The prescaled voltage difference between the B DELAY
TlME POSITION and A TlME POSITION controls is
No enabling voltage i s applied to either U216C or
applied to pins 30 and 31 of U10, a 3 112 digit AID Con-
U216A in the "5" sequence positions (50 ms, 5 ms, 0.5 ms,
verter (diagram 11). The digital output from the AID
etc.) of the A TIMEIDIV switch. CMOS switch U216C
Converter drives the segments of the Liquid-Crystal Display.
internally connects pin 12 to pin 14, and the junction of
R215 and R210 is connected to the output line via U216C
and U216A. This connection point produces a division
factor of eight for the input signal. Positive supply voltage to U10 is developed by Opera-
tional Amplifier U2 which is referenced back to U10
pin 30, the negative input pin. The developed voltage
The circuit composed of Q222, Q213, and associated
maintains a constant difference between the signal voltage
components shunts a small compensating current away applied to pin 30 and pin 1 (the positive supply input pin).
from the voltage divider for sweep speeds from 5 psldivision The action of this circuit reduces linearity errors in the AID
through 0.5 sldivision. When the A SECIDIV switch is set to Converter that would occur if large common-mode voltages
+
.05 ps division through 2 psldivision, 10 V is applied to the were allowed to approach a fixed positive supply voltage
base of Q222 either through R223 or R224. Transistor level. The negative supply is less sensitive to common-mode
(2222 becomes forward biased and -10 V is applied to the voltages and is fixed a t -10 V.

REV NOV 1981

Theory of Operation-2336 Service

-
A TIME ENABLE
FROM Q208

ALT SYNC

A SWP MODE
-
274CR202
N 4b
U2 1 6B

m -
m
-
L

)
DELAY TIME
TO A SWP
R214 GENERATOR
4.0K

R9 18A 4b
U2 1 6A

TO A/D
CONVERTOR

" 1 " SEQUENCE FROM " 2 " SEQUENCE FROM

A SEC/DIV SWITCH A SEC/DIV SWITCH
41 18-43

Figure 3-18. Simplified diagram of the Delay Time Switching and Prescaling circuit.
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

An Auto Ranging circuit selects one of two reference tained from OR gate U23D. The output of U23D is further
voltage levels to apply to the AID Converter HI reference combined with the f, segment through OR gate U23C.
voltage input pin U10 pin 36. Part of the AID Converter
digitizing process compares the reference voltage with the
input voltage being measured. The selected reference
voltage is applied t o U10 pin 36 via U9C, a CMOS switch
controlled by the Auto Range bit. The Auto Range circuit will uprange when the output
from U23A goes LO. This condition occurs when both the b,
and the g, segments are off. These segments are off simul-
Auto Range Bit taneously only when the AID Converter over-ranges. In
overrange, the 1 digit is turned on and the remaining seg-
The Auto Range bit is decoded from the segment drive
ments are turned off.
output data of AID Converter U10. The decoded bit
becomes the A. bit applied t o PROM U38. This PROM is
addressed on i t s remaining input pins by the A TIMEIDIV Downranging occurs when the output of U23C goes LO.
switch to provide the data that drives the scale factors and The output of U23C will go LO when the ,f segment is on
decimal points of the LCD. The A. bit controls the Auto and both the 1 digit and the g, segment are off. This occurs
Range circuit. If the prescaled input voltage to the AID when the second digit displayed is a 0 and the first digit is
Converter i s large (due to a larger time difference between off.
the B DELAY TlME and A TlME control settings), the A.
bit will be decoded as a 0 logic level (LO). From Table 3-1, The decoder output logic levels applied to the + (plus)
it can be seen that whenever A. i s a 1, the O1 output data inputs of U25B and U25C are derived from the floating
from U38 is also a 1 except for the three fastest settings of supply voltage developed by U2, These levels follow the
the A SECIDIV switch. input voltage that is applied to U10 pin 30 to be measured.
Comparators U25B and U25C are used t o compare the logic
levels with the floating supply common level. The output
signals from U25B and U25C are then used to develop the
From the U38 O1 output pin, the logic level is applied proper logic levels for use in the TTL circuits that follow.
to the Auto Range circuitry to control both the integrating
resistors (R15 and R16) and HI reference levels to the AID
Converter. In addition t o auto ranging the AID Converter, The output of comparators U25B and U25C switches
the Auto Range bit addresses data from PROM U38 that between high impedance for a HI input and -10 V for a LO
automatically switches the decimal point in the LCD input. In the output of U25B, a voltage divider composed
readout to the appropriate location in the display. of R25 and R27 reduces the voltage levels at pin 1 of U32A
to TTL logic levels. An output of -10 V from U25B
produces an input to U32A of approximately 0 V. When
the output of U25B i s a high impedance, the input of U32A
is pulled HI through R27 to the +5-V supply. Segment
switching transients are filtered by a capacitor (C25) that
Auto Range Bit Decoder is connected from U32A pin 1 to ground.

Output drive for the b,.g, and f3 segments and the 1 digit
(K segment) from the AID Converter is logically compared to in the output of U25C, added components are used to
determine the necessity to either uprange or downrange the slow down the switching time when downranging occurs.
AID Converter. The particular segments tested are chosen This added time ensures that the output signals from AID
so that when logically compared in the decoder circuitry Converter U10 have all settled and that the Auto Range
(shown in diagram 1I), the overrange and underrange AID circuit will not switch back and forth between uprange and
Converter outputs are detected. downrange during the transistion period.

The drive for the b, and g, segments and the 1 digit are When the output of U25C i s open, CR30 is forward
applied to exclusive-OR gates along with the BP (Back biased and C30 quickly charges t o the U32 HI switching
Plane drive) signal. Whenever the segment drive is 180" out level. Thus, the circuit allows an uprange to occur rapidly.
of phase with the 60-Hz, square-wave BP signal, that seg- However, when the output of U25C switches to -10 V,
ment is illuminated in the display. The f, segment drive is CR30 i s reverse biased and C30 must discharge down to
applied to exclusive-OR gate U22D along with the inverted the LO switching threshold through R30. The high
BP signal (inverted by U40C). The logic combination of the resistance value of R30 produces a longer time constant
b3 and g3 segments is obtained from OR gate U23A, and the for discharging, thereby ensuring that the U10 segment
logic combination of the g3 segment and the 1 digit is ob- output drive signals have settled.

REV FEB 1982

Theory of Operation-2336 Service

Cross-coupled NAND gates U32A and U32D form a selected (0011) may be determined from the logic listing
latch circuit that holds the A. input to PROM U38 a t a for U38 in Table 3-1.
constant potential between uprange and downrange switch-
ing points. Buffer U55E supplies the required drive current
to the U38 A. input pin. Scale Factor Decoder PROM
The A. through A4 bits applied to the input pins of
PROM U38 address memory locations within the PROM.
Scale Factor Switching Matrix Each addressed location produces a different data output
The scale factor for the readout is determined by the on the PROM output pins (see Table 3-1 for the U38
A SECIDIV switch setting. A diode decoding matrix, logic table). The 02, 03, 06, 07, and 0, output bits
shown in diagram 11, uses eight positions of the A SECI drive the LCD scale factors and decimal points. The 0,
DIV switch to produce either a HI or a LO on the matrix output bit controls the Auto Ranging circuit for upranging
output lines (w, x, y, and z). The output of the matrix and downranging AID Converter U10.
forms a four-bit address (part of the five-bit address applied
t o the Scale Factor Decoder PROM, U38).

LCD Scale Factor Driver

In addition to controlling the scale factor, the diode Output data from U38 is first applied to comparators
matrix produces an output to blank the LCD display when- U25D and U39A1 B, C, and D. The comparators convert
ever the X-Y Mode i s selected, whenever the SECIDIV the TTL logic level outputs from U38 back into floating
VAR control is out of i t s detent, and when the HORlZ logic levels required t o drive the LCD. The segment drive
DISPLAY switch is set to A. voltages are referenced to the input voltage being measured
by the AID Converter, and the scale factors and decimal
points must use the same reference level. Therefore, each of
The A SECIDIV switch positions are divided into seven the comparator outputs i s returned to the AID Converter
groups of three positions each and one switch position positive supply voltage level through pull-up resistors. When
(0.5 s) by itself (see diagram 7) t o establish the switching a particular scale factor or decimal point i s selected for
points of the scale-factor display. As an example of the display, a HI is placed on one input pin of the associated
decoder operation, assume that the A SECIDIV switch is exclusive-OR gate. With a HI on one pin, the Back Plane
set to 0.5 ms per division. In this case, + I 0 V is applied signal on the other input produces an inverted, out-of-phase
from the A SECIDIV switch (diagram 7) t o the anodes of output signal (see Figure 3-19). As indicated previously,
CR316 and CR317 in the diode matrix (diagram 11). when the driven segment is 180' out of phase with the BP
Diodes CR316 and CR317 become forward biased. On the signal, that segment is on.
output lines, CR357 (w) and CR354 (x) become reverse
biased. Both the y and z output line diodes (CR360 and
CR362 respectively) remain forward biased from the -5 V When a scale factor or decimal point is not to be dis-
applied to their cathodes through pull-down resistors. played, a LO i s placed on input pin of the associated
exclusive-OR gate. The BP signal then produces an in-phase
output signal, and that scale factor or decimal point is not
With the w and x diodes reverse biased, the signal lines displayed.
connected to their anodes are allowed to go HI through
pull-up resistors R374 and R371 to the +lo-V supply
potential. The four-bit address decoded is therefore 001 1. The "s" i s switched on or off by the z input signal to
The address levels are applied to four additional switching PROM U38. When the z signal line is LO (as i t is except for
diodes in the B SOURCE select line (CR67 for w, CR62 for UNCAL. and blanked conditions), U32C inverts the level
x, CR55 for y, and CR71 for z). Both CR67 and CR62 will to a HI a t pin 5 of comparator U25A. The HI is converted
become forward biased while CR55 and CR71 will remain to the correct voltage level a t the output of U25A to
reverse biased. The additional switching diodes are used to produce a HI on pin 9 of exclusive-OR gate U42C. As
allow the B SOURCE select lines to be bidirectional. The before, when one pin of the gate is held HI, the BP signal
scale-factor information passes in one direction, and the produces an inverted (out-of-phase) signal, and the "s"
B SOURCE select information passes in the opposite in the LCD display is illuminated.
direction on the signal lines.

"UNCAL" is displayed whenever the VAR SECIDIV

The logic levels produced are buffered by U55A, B, C, control is out of the detent position. The z input line to
and D and then applied to the address inputs (A, through PROM U38 is pulled HI from the Scale-Factor Diode
A4) of PROM U38. The output data from the address Switching Matrix. Inverter U32C changes the HI to a LO
 Theory of Operation-2336 Service

that is applied t o U40A pin 2, and the inverted Back Plane The display i s blanked except when a time measurement
signal i s applied t o U40A pin 1. The resulting output signal display mode i s in use. The TRIG MODE control must be
from exclusive-OR gate U40A is in phase with the set t o A TIME, the HORlZ MODE switch must be set t o
signal on pin 1, and "UNCAL" is displayed in the LCD either A INTEN or B, and the X-Y display mode must be
readout. In addition, all of the decimal points and scale disabled before the LCD will be illuminated.
factors will remain unilluminated.

Blanking is accomplished when both the y and z input

lines t o PROM U38 are forced HI. The two signal lines
are connected to a NAND gate (U32B) that controls one
SCALE FACTOR ON section of CMOS switch U9B. When both the y and the z
lines are HI, the output of U32B goes LO, and two things
PROM happen: first, the -10-V supply line to AID Converter U10
OUTPUT 1
i s opened to shut that device off; and second, the -10 V is
HI
applied to the comparators a t the output of PROM U38 t o
ensure that the display is blanked.

BP
INPUT Setting the y and z signal lines HI is accomplished via
different pairs of switching diodes for each of the pre-

OUTPUT
GATE J-Lnm viously mentioned blanked conditions. For each of the
B SOURCE switch positions except A TIME, +5 V i s
applied via CR51 and CR52 t o the y and z signal lines
prior t o the signal-line buffer amplifiers (U55C and U55D).
The +5 V pulls the lines HI to activate NAND gate U32B
and blank the display.

PROM When X-Y display mode i s selected, the X-Y Enable

OUTPUT 0
L0 signal (+5 V) i s applied to a pair of diodes (CR319 and
CR334) in the Scale Factor Diode Switching Matrix. Diodes
BP CR319 and CR334 are forward biased, and the +5 V i s
INPUT
fed t o CR360 on the y signal line and CR362 on the z
signal line. Both CR360 and CR362 are then reverse biased,

GATE
OUTPUT E removing the -5-V pull-down voltage from the y and z
signal lines. The signal lines are then pulled HI by the base
bias voltage of U365B and U365D. As before, with a HI
on both the y and z signal lines, the LCD i s blanked.

Similarly, when the A HORIZ MODE is selected, +5 V is

applied to diodes CR330 and CR323. The +5-V level i s
applied to CR360 and CR323 to reverse bias them as before
Figure 3-19. Exclusive-OR gate switching action. and again the LCD is blanked.
 This Document was scanned from the original
Tektronix Service Manual
For enquiries about high quality technical manuals

[email protected]

This Document is a complete Scan from the original

Tektronix manual
For enquiries about our complete
High quality line of technical Manuals in PDF

mailto : [email protected]
 Section 4-2336 Service

P E R F O R M A N C E CHECK PROCEDURE
INTRODUCTION

The "Performance Check Procedure" i s used t o verify LIMITS A N D TOLERANCES

the instrument's Performance Requirements as listed in
the "Specification" (Section 1) and to determine the need The limits and tolerances given in this procedure are
for readjustment. These checks may also be used as an valid for an instrument that has been calibrated a t an
acceptance test and as a preliminary troubleshooting aid. ambient temperature between + 2 0 ' ~and +30'~, is oper-
ating a t an ambient temperature between - 1 5 ' ~ and
This procedure does not check every facet of instrument + 5 5 ' ~ (unless otherwise noted), and has had a warm-up
operation; rather it is concerned with those portions of the period of a t least 20 minutes. The stated limits and
2336 that are essential to measurement accuracy. Removing tolerances are instrument specifications only i f they are
the instrument's cover is not necessary to perform this listed in the "Performance Requirements" column of the
procedure. All checks are made using the operator- "Specification" (Section 1). Tolerances given are applicable
accessible front- and rear-panel controls and connectors. to the 2336 and do not include test-equipment error.

SPECIAL FIXTURES
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Special fixtures are used only where they simplify the
The test equipment listed in Table 4-1 is a complete test setup and procedure. These fixtures are available from
list of the equipment required to accomplish both the Tektronix, Inc. and can be ordered by part number through
your local Tektronix Field Office or representative.
"Performance Check Procedure" in this section and the
"Adjustment Procedure" in Section 5. Test equipment
specifications described in Table 4-1 are the minimum
necessary to provide accurate results. Therefore, equipment PREPARATION
used must meet or exceed the listed specifications. Detailed
operating instructions for test equipment are not given Test equipment items 1 through 17 in Table 4-1 are
in this procedure. If more operating information is required to accomplish a complete Performance Check.
required, refer to the appropriate t e s t equipment instruc- Specific items of equipment required to perform each
tion manual. subsection in this procedure are listed a t the beginning of
the subsection. The item number shown in parentheses
When equipment other than that recommended is used, with each piece of equipment refers to the equipment item
control settings of the test setup may need to be altered. number presented in Table 4-1.
If the exact item of equipment given as an example in
Table 4-1 is not available, first check the "Purpose" column Before performing this procedure, ensure that the L l NE
to verify use of this item. If it i s used for a check that is VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch is set for the ac-power-input
of little or no importance to your measurement require- source voltage being used (see "Preparation for Use" in
ments, the item and corresponding steps may be deleted. Section 2). Connect the t e s t equipment and the instrument
If the check is important, use the "Minimum Specification" t o be checked to an appropriate ac-power-input source.
column carefully to determine i f any other available test
equipment might suffice. This procedure is structured in subsections to permit
checking individual sections of the instrument whenever a
complete Performance Check i s not required. At the begin-
ning of each subsection is a l i s t of all the front-panel
PERFORMANCE CHECK INTERVAL control settings required to prepare the instrument for
performing Step 1 in that subsection. Each succeeding
To ensure instrument accuracy, check i t s performance step within a subsection should then be performed both in
after every 2000 hours of operation or once each year, if the sequence presented and in i t s entirety to ensure that
used infrequently. control-setting changes will be correct for ensuing steps.
Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

Table 4-1
Test Equipment Required

Item No. and Minimum Examples of Suitable

Description Specification Purpose Test Equipment

1. Test Oscilloscope with Bandwidth: dc to 100 MHz. Power supply ripple check. a. TEKTRONIX 465B
1OX probe and 1X Minimum deflection factor: Crt Z-axis compensation. Oscilloscope with 2
probe (1X probe is 5 mV/div. Accuracy: +3%. Vertical gain adjustment. (included) 10X probes.
optional accessory) Dual trace. Probe: 10X scale- Trigger holdoff check.
factor switching. b. TEKTRONIX P6101
Probe ( I X ) . Part Number
010-6101-03.

2. Calibration Generator Standard-amplitudeaccuracy: Vertical checks and adjust- TEKTRONIX PG 506

f0.25%. Signal amplitude: ments. Trigger view checks Calibration ene era tor.^
2 mV to 50 V. Output signal: and adjustments. X-gain
I-kHz square wave. Fast-rise adjustment. Z-axis check.
repetition rate: 1 to 100 kHz.
Rise time: 1 ns or less. Fast-
rise signal amplitude: 100 mV
t o 1 V. Aberrations: +2%.
Flatness: f 0.5%. High-
amplitude output: variable
to 60 V; supplying at least
10 mA.

3. Sine-Wave Generator Frequency: 350 kHz to above Vertical centering checks and TEKTRONIX SG 503
100 MHz. Output amplitude: adjustments. Bandwidth and Leveled Sine-Wave
variable from 0.5 to 5.5 V p-p. isolation checks. Trigger Generat~r.~
Output impedance: 50 a. checks and adjustments.
Reference frequency: 50 to X-Y phase difference check.
350 kHz. Amplitude accuracy: X-Y bandwidth check.
constant within 3% of refer-
ence frequency as output
frequency changes.

4. Time-Mark Generator Marker outputs: 2 ns to 0.5 s. Crt Y-axis and geometry TEKTRONIX TG 501 Time-
Marker accuracy: f0.1%. adjustments. Horizontal Mark Generat~r.~
Trigger output: 1 ms to timing checks and adjust-
0.1 ps, time-coincident with ments.
markers.

5. 5042 Signal Pickoff Frequency response: 50 kHz Trigger checks and adjust- TEKTRONIX CT-3 Signal
t o 100 MHz. Impedance: 50 ments. Pickoff. Part Number 017-
for signal input, signal output, 006 1-00.
and trigger output.
-

6. Cable (2 required) Impedance: 50 a. Length: Signal interconnection. Tektronix Part Number

42 in. Connectors: bnc. 0 12-0057-01.

7. Adapter Connectors: bnc male-to- Signal interconnection. Tektronix Part Number

miniature probe tip. 0 13-0084-01.

1 ' Tektronix Part Number

8. Dual-Input Coupler Connectors: bnc female-to-
dual-bnc male.
Vertical checks. Trigger
checks and adjustments.
X-Y phase check.
~ 067-0525-01.

a~equiresa TM 500-series power-module mainframe.

4-2
 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

Table 4-1 (cont)

Item No. and Minimum Examples of Suitable

Description Specification Purpose Test Equipment

9. T-Connector Connectors: bnc. Signal interconnection. Tektronix Part Number

103-0030-00.

10. 10X Attenuator Ratio: 1OX. Impedance: Vertical compensation. Vert- Tektronix Part Number
50 a. Connectors: bnc. ical bandwidth check. Trigger 0 11-0059-02.
adjustments.

11. 5X Attenuator II Ratio: 5X. Impedance: 50

Connectors: bnc.
a. 1I Vertical compensation.
Trigger adjustments.
Tektronix Part Number
0 11-0060-02.

12. 2X Attenuator Ratio: 2X. Impedance: 50 a. Vertical compensation. Tektronix Part Number
Connectors: bnc. Trigger adjustments. 0 11-0069-02.

13. Termination Impedance: 50 a. Signal termination. Tektronix Part Number

(2 required) Connectors: bnc. 0 11-0049-01.

14. Precision Cable Impedance: 50 a.

Length: Signal interconnection. Tektronix Part Number
36 in. Connectors: bnc. 0 12-0482-00.

15. Adapter Connectors: G R-to-bnc male. Signal interconnection. Tektronix Part Number
0 17-0064-00.

16. Adapter Connectors: GR-to-bnc Signal interconnection. Tektronix Part Number

female. 0 17-0063-00.

17. Low-Frequency Frequency: 60 Hz to 1 kHz. Low-frequency trigger checks. TEKTRONIX FG 502

Generator Output amplitude: variable Function Generat~r.~
from 30 mV to 4 V p-p.

18. Variable Auto- Capable of supplying 1.5 A Power-supply regulation General Radio W8WT3VM
transformer over a range of I 0 8 to 132 V. check. Variac Autotransformer.
-

19. Digital Voltmeter Range: 0 t o 140 V. Dc voltage Low-voltage power supply TEKTRONIX DM 501A
accuracy: +0.15%. 4 112-digit checks and adjustments. Crt Digital M ~ l t i m e t e r . ~
display. grid bias adjustment. Vertical
and horizontal centering
adjustments.

20. DC Voltmeter Range: 0 to 2500 V, cali- High-voltage power supply Triplett Model 630-NA.
brated to 1% accuracy at check.
-1960 V.

21. Screwdriver Length: 3-in shaft. Adjust variable resistors. Xcelite R-3323.
Bit size: 3/32 in.

22. Shorting Strap Power supply adjustment.

23. Low-Capacitance Length: I - i n shaft. Adjust variable capacitors. J.F.D. Electronics Corp.
Alignment Tool Bit size: 3/32 in. Adjustment Tool Number
5284.

a ~ e q u i r e sa TM 500-series power-module mainframe.

 Hyperlinked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click to select

Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

INDEX TO Triggering Page

PERFORMANCE CHECK STEPS I. Check A and B Internal Triggering . . . . . . . . . . .4.13
2. Check A and B External Triggering and Jitter . . . .4.15
Vertical
Page 3. Check NORM Triggering Mode Operation . . . . . .4.16
1. Check Trace Alignment and Astigmatism . . . . . . . 4-5 4. Check SGL SWP Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4.17
2. Check ALT Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 5. Check A and B External Trigger Ranges. . . . . . . .4.17
3. Check CHOP Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4. Check CH 2 INVERT Trace Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
5. Check CH 1 Attenuator Balance . . . . , . . . . . . . . 4-6
6. Check CH 2 Attenuator Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
7. Check Vertical POSITION Range and Centering . . 4-6
8. Check BEAM FIND Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Horizontal
9. Check CH 1 and CH 2 DC Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
10. Check CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR Range . . 4-7 1. Check A and B Timing Accuracy and Linearity . . .4.18
11. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Input Gate Current . . . . . . 4-7 2. Check A Time Readout Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . .4.19
12. Check ADD Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 3. Check Delay Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.20
13. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Gain Balance . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 4. Check X I 0 MAG Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.20
14. Check Vertical Low-Frequency Compensation . . . 4-8 5. Check A Sweep Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.20
15. Check CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 6. Check A SECIDIV VAR Range . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.21
Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 7. Check A and B Sweep Horizontal POSITION
16. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Transient Response . . . . . . 4-9 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2 1
17. Check Signal Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 8. Check X-Y Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.21
18. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 9. Check X-Y Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.21
19. C h x k Trigger View Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10 10. Check X-Y Phase Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.22
20. Check Trigger View Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10
21 . Check Trigger View Low-Frequency
Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
.
22 . Check Trigger View High-Frequency
Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.
. 11
23 . Check Trigger View Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.11 External 2-Axis and Calibrator
24. Check Common-Mode Rejection Ratio . . . . . . . .4.11 1. Check External Z-Axis Operation . . . . . . . . . . . -4-23
25 . Check Trigger View Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.12 2 . Check AMPL CAL Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.23

Hyperlin ked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click to select

 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

VERTICAL

Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) :

1OX Probe (part of Item 1) 1OX Attenuator (Item 10)
Calibration Generator (Item 2) 5X Attenuator (Item 11)
Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 3) 2X Attenuator (Item 12)
Two 5042 BNC Cables (Item 6) Two 50-!2 BNC Terminations (Item 13)
BNC-to-Probe-TipAdapter (Item 7) Precision 5042 BNC Cable (Item 14)
Dual-Input Coupler (Item 8) Low-Frequency Generator (Item 17)
BNC T-Connector (Item 9)

2336 CONTROL SETTINGS 1. Check Trace Alignment and Astigmatism

a. Position the baseline trace to the center horizontal
POWER ON (button in) graticule line.

CRT
b. CHECK-Trace i s parallel with the center horizontal
INTEN As required for visible graticule line. If necessary, readjust the TRACE ROTA-
trace TION potentiometer (front-panel screwdriver adjustment)
FOCUS Best focused display to align trace exactly with the center horizontal graticule
line.
Vertical (Both Channels)
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
POSITION Midrange c. CHECK-All portions of the trace are well defined
VOLTSID IV 5m and uniform over i t s entire length. If necessary, readjust
VOLTSIDIV VAR Calibrated detent the ASTIG potentiometer (front-panel screwdriver
AC-GND-DC GND adjustment).
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out)
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth (button
out)

Trigger ( A and B, if applicable) 2. Check A L T Mode Operation

COUPLING AC a. Set:
LEVEL Midrange
SLOPE + A and B SECIDIV 50 ms (knobs locked)
SOURCE VERT MODE VERTICAL MODE A LT
Mode AUTO A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT
TRIG HOLDOFF
(PUSH) VAR Off (in detent)
b. Use the CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical POSITION controls
Sweep to separate the two traces about 2 divisions apart.
HORlZ MODE A
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked)
TlME (PULL) VAR Pulled out and in c. CHECK-Sweep alternates in all positions of the A
calibrated detent and B SECIDIV switch.
B DELAY TlME
POSITION Fully counterclockwise
A TlME POSITION Fully counterclockwise NOTE
X I 0 MAG Off (button out) A t sweep speeds o f 2 ms per division or faster, the
POSITION Midrange trace alternations occur t o o rapidly t o be seen..
Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

3. Check CHOP Mode Operation Check CH 2 Attenuator Balance

a. Set: a. Set:

A and B SECIDIV 1P VERTICAL MODE CH 2

VERTICAL MODE CHOP CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 0.1
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE CH 2 AC-GND-DC DC

b. Use the CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical POSITION controls b. Position the trace to the center horizontal graticule
to separate the two traces about 4 divisions apart. line.

c. Adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control for a stable c. Set CH 2 VOLTSIDIV to 50 m.

display of the CHOP frequency.

d. CHECK-For 0.2 division or less trace shift from the

d. CHECK-Period of one cycle is 2.8 to 5.2 ps (approxi- center horizontal graticule line.
mately 4 horizontal divisions).
7. Check Vertical POSITION Range and Centering
a. Set:
4. Check CH 2 I N V E R T Trace Shift CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 10 m
a. Select CH 2 VERTICAL MODE. A TRIGGER LEVEL Fully clockwise

b. Position the trace to the center horizontal graticule b. Connect the leveled sine-wave generator output to
line. the CH 2 OR Y input via a precision 50-G2 cable and a 5042
termination. Set the generator frequency to 50 kHz and
adjust the output for a vertical display of 4.8 divisions.
C. Press in the CH 2 INVERT push button.

c. Set CH 2 VOLTSIDIV to 10 m.
d. CHECK-Trace shift is 0.4 division or less when
switching between normal (button out) and invert (button in).
d. CHECK-Top of display can be positioned down to
the center horizontal graticule line and bottom of the
display can be positioned up to the center horizontal
e. Return the CH 2 INVERT push button to normal graticule line.
(button out).

Move the signal to the CH 1 OR X input.

5. Check CH 1 Attenuator Balance
a. Set:
Select CH 1 VERTICAL MODE.
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.1
CH 1 AC-GND-DC DC Repeat part d for CH 1.
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms

8. Check BEAM F l N D Operation

b. Position the trace t o the center horizontal graticule a. Push in and hold the BEAM FlND push button.
line.

b. CHECK-Compressed display is visible regardless of

c. Set CH 1 VOLTSIDIV to 50 m. the settings of the following controls:

CH 1 POSITION
d. CHECK-For 0.2 division or less trace shift from the INTEN
center horizontal graticule line. Horizontal POSITION

REV NOV 1981

 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

c. Return both the Horizontal POSITION and the Table 4-2

INTEN controls to midrange. DC Accuracy Limits

VOLTSIDIV Standard Vertical

d. Set CH 1 AC-GND-DC switch to GND. Switch Amplitude Deflection 3% Accuracy
Setting Signal (Divisions) (Divisions)

e. While s t i l l holding in the BEAM FlND button, 5m 20 mV 4, 3.88 to 4.12

vertically position the trace to the center horizontal grati-
cule line.

f. Release the BEAM FlND button.

g. CHECK-Trace remains in the graticule area.

h. Return CH 1 AC-GND-DC switch to DC and dis-

connect the test equipment.

9. Check CH 1 and CH 2 DC Accuracy

a. Set CH 1 VOLTSIDIV to 5 m.

b. Connect a 20-mV standard-amplitude signal to the 10. Check CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV VAR
CH 1 OR X input connector via a 5042 cable. Do not use Range
a termination. a. Set:

VOLTSIDIV (both) 5m
AC-GND-DC (both) DC
c. CHECK-CH 1 dc accuracy is within the limits
(Vertical Deflection) given in Table 4-2.
b. Change the generator output to 10 mV.

d. Repeat part c for each CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch

setting and corresponding standard-amplitude signal in c. CHECK-Display increases to at least 5 divisions
Table 4-2. when the CH 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR control is rotated to
i t s extreme clockwise rotation.

e. Select CH 2 VERTICAL MODE and set CH 2

d. Move the signal to the CH 1 OR X input connector
VOLTSIDIV switch to 5.
and select CH 1 VERTICAL MODE.

f. Move the signal to the CH 2 OR Y input connector. e. CHECK-Repeat part c using the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
VAR control.

g. CHECK-CH 2 dc accuracy is within the limits given f. Return both VOLTSIDIV VAR controls to their
in Table 4-2. calibrated detents and disconnect the input signal.

h. Repeat part g for each CH 2 VOLTSIDIV switch

setting and corresponding standard-amplitude signal in
11. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Input Gate Current
Table 4-2. For greater efficiency, reverse the order of a. Set both CH 1 and CH 2 AC-GND-DC switches
checks (from bottom to top). to GND.
Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

b. CHECK-For 0.5 nA or less (0.1 division or less) d. CHECK-Rolloff or overshoot is within 3% (k0.15
vertical shift in display while switching CH 1 AC-GND-DC division) a t each of the generator frequencies and cor-
switch from GND to AC. responding SECID IV switch settings listed in Table 4-3.

c. Select CH 2 VERTICAL MODE. e. Move the signal to the CH 2 OR Y input connector

and select CH 2 VERTICAL MODE.

d. CHECK-For 0.5 nA or less (0.1 division or less)

vertical shift in display while switching CH 2 AC-GND-DC f. CHECK-Repeat part d for CH 2.
switch from GND t o AC.

g. Disconnect the input signal.

12. Check ADD Mode Operation
a. Set:

AC-GND-DC (both) DC Table 4-3

VERTICAL MODE ADD
Low-Frequency Compensation Setup

Calibration Generator SECIDIV

b. Connect a 10-mV standard-amplitude signal to both
Frequency Switch Setting
the CH 1 and CH 2 input connectors via a 50-52 cable and
a dual-input coupler.
1 kHz 0.2 ms

10 kHz I 20 ps
c. CHECK-Displayed signal is approximately 4
divisions in amplitude. 100 kHz 2 PS

13. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Gain Balance

a. Press in CH 2 INVERT push button.
15. Check CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV
Compensation
b. CH ECK-Displayed vertical amplitude is approxi- a. Set both A and B SECIDIV to 0.2 ms (knobs locked).
mately zero division.

b. Connect a 10X probe to the CH 2 OR Y input.

c. Return the CH 2 INVERT push button to normal
(button out) and disconnect the test equipment.
c. Connect a I-kHz high-amplitude, square-wave signal
through a 2X, 5X, or 10X 50-52 attenuator (depending on
14. Check Vertical Low-Frequency generator output amplitude) to a 50-52 termination that is
a. Set: connected to a bnc-to-probe-tip adapter. Insert the probe
tip into the probe-tip adapter.
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
A and B SECIDIV 0.2 ms (knobs locked)
VOLTSIDIV (both) 10 m d. Adjust the generator output and select attenuators
as necessary to obtain a 5-division display.

b. Connect a I-kHz fast-rise, positive-going, square-wave

signal to the CH 1 OR X input connector via a 50-52 cable, e. Adjust probe compensation for the best flat-top
a 10X attenuator, and a 50-52 termination. waveform.

c. Adjust generator output to obtain a 5-division NOTE

display. Adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control for a Do not readjust probe compensation during the
stable triggered display. remainder of this step.
 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

f. CHECK-Rolloff or overshoot of the waveform is 17. Check Signal Isolation

within 3% (k0.15 division) at all settings of the VOLTS1 a. Set:
DIV switch between 5 m and 5. Add or remove attenuators
andlor termination as required and adjust the generator CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.5
output amplitude as necessary to maintain a 5-division CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 10 m
display at each VOLTSIDIV switch setting. VERTICAL MODE CH 1
AC-GND-DC (both) DC
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
g. Move the test setup to the CH 1 OR X input con-
nector and select CH 1 VERTICAL MODE.
h. Repeat part f for CH 1. b. Connect a 25-MHz leveled sine-wave signal to the
CH 1 OR X input connector via a precision 5042 cable
and a 5042 termination.
i. Disconnect the test setup.

16. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Transient Response c. Adjust generator for an &division vertical display.
a. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CH 2 d. Select CH 2 VERTICAL MODE.

A and B SECIDIV 0.5 ps (knobs locked)
VOLTSIDIV (both) 5m
A TRIGGER SLOPE + (button out) e. CHECK-Display amplitude is 4 divisions or less.

b. Connect a 100-kHz fast-rise, positive-going, square-

f. Move the t e s t setup to the CH 2 OR Y input
wave signal via a 5 0 4 cable, a 10X attenuator, and a 5 0 4 connector.
termination to the CH 2 OR Y input connector. Set the gen-
erator output for a !%division vertical display.
g. Set:
c. Vertically center the display using the CH 2
POSITION control. CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 10 m
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 0.5
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
d. CHECK-Flat-top waveform is within 3% (4.85 t o
5.15 divisions).
h. CHECK-Display amplitude is 4 divisions or less.
e. Repeat parts c and d for each of the following CH 2
VOLTS/DIV switch settings: 10 m, 20 m, 50 m, 0.1 and
i. Disconnect the test setup.
0.2. Adjust the generator output and select attenuators as
necessary to maintain a 5-division display a t each VOLTS1
DIV switch setting.

f. Disconnect the test signal from the CH 2 OR Y input 18. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Bandwidth
connector. Re-connect the 1OX attenuator (if previously re- a. Set:
moved) and reduce the generator amplitude to minimum.
A and B SECIDIV 0.2 ms (knobs locked)
g. Set VERTICAL MODE to CH 1 and connect the test A TRIGGER LEVEL Fully clockwise
signal to the CH 1 OR X input connector. Set the generator CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 5m
output amplitude for a 5-division vertical display.

h. Vertically center the display using the CH 1 POSI- b. Connect a 50-kHz leveled sine-wave signal to the
TION control. CH 1 OR X input connector via a precision 5042 cable,
a ?OX attenuator, and a 5042 termination.

i. CHECK-Repeat parts d and e for CH 1.

c. Set generator output for a vertical display of 5
j. Disconnect the test setup. divisions; then change i t s output frequency to 100 MHz.

REV NOV 1981

Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

d. CHECK-Display amplitude is 3.5 divisions or greater. f. CHECK-Display signal amplitude is 2 divisions +40%
(1.2 divisions to 2.8 divisions) while holding in the TRlG
VIEW push button.
NOTE
Attempting to check the VOLTS/DIV settings
g. Disconnect the t e s t signal.
beyond 0.5 will exceed the po wer-handling capability
at the 5042 termination and the output power of the
recommended calibration equipment,
20. Check Trigger View Centering
a. Set the A TRIGGER SOURCE switch to EXT.
e. Repeat parts c and d for all CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
switch settings from 5 m to 0.5. Adjust generator output
amplitude and either add or remove attenuators as b. Connect a I-kHz sine-wave signal to the A E X 1
necessary to maintain a 5-division, 50-kHz reference-signal input connector via a 5042 cable. Use no termination.
display.

c. While holding in the TRlG VlEW push button, set

f. Move the leveled sine-wave signal to the CH 2 OR Y the generator output t o obtain a 4-division vertical display
input connector and select CH 2 VERTICAL MODE. and use the A TRIGGER LEVEL control to vertically
center the displayed signal.

g. Repeat parts c and d for all CH 2 VOLTSIDIV switch

settings from 0.5 to 5 m. Adjust the generator output and
either add or remove attenuators as needed to maintain a d. CHECK-Start of sweep is within & 1 vertical division
5-division, 50-kHz reference-signal display. of the center horizontal graticule line.

h. Disconnect the test setup.

e. Disconnect the test signal.

19. Check Trigger View Gain

a. Set:
21. Check Trigger View Low- Frequency
Compensation
A and B SECIDIV 0.2 ms (knobs locked) a. Set:
A TRIGGER COUPLING DC
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT A and B SECIDIV 0.1 ms (knobs locked)
A TRIGGER LEVEL Midrange A TRIGGER SLOPE + (button out)

b. Connect a 0.2-V standard-amplitude signal t o the A b. Connect a 1-kHz high-amplitude, square-wave signal
EXT input connector via a 50-!2 cable. Use no termination. to the A EXT input connector via a 5 0 4 cable, a 10X
attenuator, and a 5 0 4 termination.

c. While holding in the TRlG VlEW push button, use

the A TRIGGER LEVEL control to vertically center the c. While holding in the TRlG VlEW push button, set
displayed signal. the generator output for a 4-division vertical display and
use the A TRIGGER LEVEL control to vertically center
the displayed signal.
d. CHECK-Display signal amplitude is 2 divisions
f40% (1.2 divisions t o 2.8 divisions) while holding in the
TRlG VlEW push button.
d. CHECK-Square-wave leading edge has less than 20%
rolloff or overshoot (3.2 t o 4.8 divisions), while holding
in the TRIG VIEW push button.
e. Set the A TRIGGER SOURCE switch to EXTtlO
and change the generator output t o 2 V. While holding
in the TRlG VlEW push button, use the A TRIGGER
LEVEL control to vertically center the displayed signal. e. Set the A TRIGGER SOURCE switch to EXTe10.

REV NOV 1981

 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

f. While holding in the TR lG V l EW push button, adjust c. Use the CH 2 POSITION control to vertically center
the generator output for a signal display of 4 vertical the trace on the graticule and use the Horizontal POSITION
divisions and use the A TRIGGER LEVEL control to control to center the rising portion of the signal on the
vertically center the displayed signal. center vertical graticule line.

g. CHECK-Square-wave leading edge has less than 20% d. While holding in the TRIG VIEW push button, adjust
rolloff or overshoot (3.2 to 4.8 divisions) while holding the generator output for a 5-division vertical display of the
in the TRIG VIEW push button. Trigger View signal.

h. Disconnect the test signal. e. Adjust the CH 2 VOLTSIDIV and VAR controls to
match the amplitude of the displayed signal to the
amplitude of the Trigger View signal.
22. Check Trigger V i e w High-Frequency
Compensation
a. Set: f. While holding in the TRIG VIEW push button, use
the A TRIGGER LEVEL control to vertically center the
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT Trigger View display. Use the CH 2 POSITION control to
A and B SECIDIV 0.2 ps (knobs locked) vertically center the CH 2 display.

b. Connect a 100-kHz fast-rise, positive-going, square- g. CHECK-Time difference between the CH 2 and
wave signal to the A EXT input connector via a 50-a Trigger View signals (by alternately pressing in the TRlG
cable and a 50-a termination. VIEW push button and releasing it) is 3 ns f 2 ns (0.2 to 1
horizontal graticule division or less).
c. While holding in the TRlG VlEW push button, adjust
the generator output for a signal display of 2 vertical divi-
sions and use the A TRIGGER LEVEL control to vertically h. Disconnect the test setup.
center the displayed signal.

24. Check Common-Mode Rejection Ratio

d. CHECK-Square-wave front-corner overshoot or
rolloff is less than 20% (1.6 to 2.4 divisions) while holding in a. Set:
the TRlG VlEW push button.
VO LTSID IV (both) 10 m
AC-GND-DC (both) DC
e. Disconnect the test setup. A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
CH 2 INVERT Inverted (button in)

23. Check Trigger V i e w Delay b. Connect a 50-MHz, leveled sine-wave signal to the
a. Set: CH 1 OR X and the CH 2 OR Y input connectors via a
precision 5042 cable, a 1OX attenuator, a 5042 termination,
VERTICAL MODE CH 2 and a dual-input coupler.
A and B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
X I 0 MAG On (button in)
A TRIGGER COUPLING AC c. Set the generator amplitude for a 6-division display.
A TRIGGER SLOPE + (button out)
A TRIGGER LEVEL Midrange
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT d. Select ADD VERTICAL MODE.
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 0.1

e. CHECK-Display amplitude is 0.6 division or less.

b. Connect a 100-kHz fast-rise, positive-going square-
wave signal via a 5 0 4 cable, a 50-Qtermination, and a dual-
input coupler to the CH 2 OR Y and A EXT input f. If the check in part e meets the requirement, skip to
connectors. part m. If it does not, continue with part g.

REV NOV 1981

Per-formance Check Procedure-2336 Service

g. Set VERTICAL MODE t o display CH 1. 25. Check Trigger View Bandwidth

a. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CH 1
h. Change the generator frequency to 50 kHz and
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
adjust the output to obtain a 6-division display.
A and B SECIDIV 50 ps
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT

i. Set VERTICAL MODE to ADD. b. Connect a 50-kHz leveled sine-wave signal to the
A EXT input connector via a precision 50-a cable and
a 50-!2 termination.

j. Adjust CH 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR for minimum display

amplitude (best CM R R). c. Press in the TRIG VIEW push button and adjust
the generator output for a 4-division vertical display.
Vertically center the display using the A TRIGGER LEVEL
control.
k. Change the generator frequency to 50 MHz.

d. Set the generator output frequency to 80 MHz.

I. CHECK-Display amplitude is 0.6 division or less.

e. CHECK-For a display amplitude of 2.8 divisions
or more with the TRIG VIEW button held in.

m. Press the CH 2 INVERT button to release it and

disconnect the t e s t setup. f. Disconnect the t e s t setup.
 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

TRIGGERING

Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) :

Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 3) Two 50-L! Terminations (Item 13)
5042 Signal Pickoff (Item 5) 50-L! Precision Cable (Item 14)
Two 5042 Cables (Item 6) G R-to-BNC Male Adapter (Item 15)
Dual-Input Coupler (Item 8) GR-to-BNC Female Adapter (Item 16)
10X Attenuator (Item 10) Low-Frequency Generator (Item 17)
2X Attenuator (Item 12)

2336 CONTROL SETTINGS I . Check A and B Internal Triggering

a. Connect a low-frequency 60-Hz sine-wave signal to
POWER ON (button in) the CH 1 OR X input connector via a 50-L! cable, a 10X
attenuator, a 2X attenuator, and a 50-L! termination.

CRT
INTEN As required for visible b. Adjust the generator output for a 6-division vertical
trace display.
FOCUS Best focused display

c. Set the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch to 0.2 t o obtain a

Vertical 0.3-division vertical signal display.
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
POSITION (both) Midrange
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 10 m d. CHECK-Stable display can be obtained and the
CH 2 VO LTSID IV 0.2 TRIGID LED is illuminated by adjusting the A TRIGGER
VOLTSID IV VAR (both) Calibrated detent LEVEL control for each of the switch combinations listed
AC-GND-DC (both) DC in Table 4-4, except as noted in Table 4-4 footnotes.
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out)
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth
(button out)

Table 4-4
Trigger ( A and B, if applicable) Switch Combinations for A Trigger Checks (CH 1)
COUPLING AC
A TRIGGER A TRIGGER A TRIGGER
LEVEL Midrange
COUPLING SOURCE SLOPE
SLOPE +
SOURCE VERT MODE
Mode AUTO AC VERT MODE + and -
CH 1 - and +
TRIG HOLDOFF
(PUSH) VAR Off (in detent)
LF R E J ~ + and -
- and +
Sweep
HORlZ MODE
A and B SECIDIV
TIME (PULL) VAR
A
5 ms (knobs locked)
Pulled out and in
1 VERT MODE
CHI
+ and -
- and +

CH 1 + and -
calibrated detent VERT MODE - and +
B DELAY TlME
POSITION Fully counterclockwise
X I 0 MAG Off (button out) l trigger a t 60 Hz in A HORlZ MODE.
a ~ i lnot
POSITION Midrange b ~ i lnot
l trigger at 20 MHz and 100 MHz in A HORlZ MODE.
Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

e. CHECK-Stable display cannot be obtained for any I. CHECK-Stable display cannot be obtained for any
position of the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch excep- position of the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch excep-
tioned in Table 4-4. tioned in Table 4-6.

f. Set the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch to AC and m. Set the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch to AC and
obtain a stable display using the A TRIGGER LEVEL
obtain a stable display using the A TRIGGER LEVEL
control.
control.

g. Set HORlZ MODE to B.

n. Set HORlZ MODE to B.
h. CHECK-Stable display can be obtained by adjusting
the B TRIGGER LEVEL.control for each of the switch
combinations listed in Table 4-5.
o. CHECK-Stable display can be obtained by adjusting
the B TRIGGER LEVEL with B TRIGGER SLOPE a t
Table 4-5 either + or -.
Switch Combinations for B Trigger Checks

B TRIGGER SOURCE B TRIGGER SLOPE p. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.

VERT MODE + and -

q. Set:
CH 1 + and -
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 10 m
i. Move the input signal from the CH 1 OR X input HORlZ MODE A
connector to the CH 2 OR Y input connector. A and B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
B TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
j. Set:

VERTICAL MODE
r. Connect a 10-MHz leveled sine-wave signal to the
HORlZ MODE
CH 1 OR X input connector via a 5042 cable and a 5042
A TRIGGER SOURCE
termination.
B TRIGGER SOURCE

k. CHECK-Stable display can be obtained and the s. Repeat parts b through o for the 20-MHz signal.
TRIG'D LED is illuminated by adjusting the A TRIGGER
LEVEL control for each of the switch combinations listed
in Table 4-6, except as noted in Table 4-6 footnotes.
t. Set:

Table 4-6 VERTICAL MODE CH 1

HORlZ MODE A
Switch Combinations for A Trigger Checks (CH 2)
X I 0 MAG On (button in)
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
AC TRIGGER COUPLING A TRIGGER SLOPE B TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
AC I + and -
LF REJa I - and + u. Set the generator to produce a 100-MHz, 1.1-division
vertical display.
HF R E J ~ + and -
DC I - and + v. Repeat parts d through o for the 100-MHz signal.

l trigger at 60 Hz in A HORlZ MODE.

a ~ i lnot
b ~ i lnot
l trigger at 20 M H z and 100 M H z in A HORlZ MODE. w. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.

@
 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

2. Check A and B External Triggering and Jitter f. Set HORlZ MODE t o B and move the signal from the
A EXT input connector t o the B E X T input connector.
a. Set:

CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 10 m
X I 0 MAG Off (button out) g. CHECK-Stable display can be obtained by adjusting
A and B SECIDIV 5 ms the B TRIGGER LEVEL control with the B TRIGGER
A TRIGGER COUPLING AC SLOPE switch in either + or -.
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT
B TRIGGER SOURCE EXT
h. Remove the 10X attenuator from the test setup and
move the signal from the B EXT input connector t o the
b. Connect a 60-Hz sine-wave signal t o the CH 1 OR X A EXT input connector.
and the A EXT input connectors via a 50-52 cable, a 10X
attenuator, a 2X attenuator, a 5 0 4 termination, and a
dual-input coupler.
i. Set:

c. Set the generator output for a 5-division vertical CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.1

display. HORlZ MODE A
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXTe10

d. Repeat Step 1, parts k and I.

j. Repeat Step 1, parts k and I.
e. Set the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch t o AC and
obtain a stable display using the A TRIGGER LEVEL
control. k. Connect the test setup as shown in Figure 4-1.

LEVELED

1 SINE W A V E
GENERATOR
-
7

TERMINATION RMINATION

TENUATOR
-
-

\
GR TO BNC- CT-3
FEMALE
ADAPTER

Figure 4-1. Test setup for external trigger and jitter checks.
Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

I. Set: x. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CH 2 VERTICAL MODE CH 1

VOLTSIDIV (both) 10 m A and B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
A and B SECIDIV 20 ps X I 0 MAG On (button in)
A TRIGGER COUPLING AC A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE

y. Set the generator t o 100 MHz.

m. Set the leveled sine-wave generator for a 50-kHz,
5-division display.
z. Move the signal from the CH 2 OR Y input connector
t o the A EXT input connector.
n. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CH 1 aa. Repeat Step 1, parts k and I.

A and B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT
ab. Repeat parts e through h of this step.

o. Set the generator t o 20 MHz.

ac. Set:

p. Move the signal from the CH 2 OR Y input connector HORlZ MODE A

t o the A EXT input connector. A TRIGGER SOURCE EXTtlO

ad. Repeat Step 1, parts k and I.

q. Repeat Step 1, parts k and I.

ae. Set the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch t o AC and

r. Repeat parts e through h of this step. adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control for a stable display.

s. Set: af. CHECK-For less than 0.2 division of horizontal

waveform jitter.
HORlZ MODE A
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXTt10
ag. Set the A TRIGGER SOURCE switch t o E X T and
reinsert the 10X attenuator into the test setup.
t. Repeat Step 1, parts k and I.

ah. CHECK-For less than 0.2 division of horizontal

waveform jitter.
u. Reconnect the test setup as shown in Figure 4-1

3. Check NORM Triggering Mode Operation

v. Set: a. Set the A TRIGGER SOURCE switch t o VERT
MODE.
VERTICAL MODE CH 2
VOLTSID IV (both) 50 m
A and B SECIDIV 20 ps b. Adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control for a stable
A TRIGGER COUPLING AC display.
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE

c. Set the A TRIGGER Mode t o NORM.

w. Set the leveled sine-wave generator for a 50-kHz,
3-division display. d. CHECK-Stable display i s visible.
 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

e. Set CH 1 AC-GND-DC switch to GND. Check A and B External Trigger Ranges

a. Set:

f. CHECK-For no visible display.

CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.5
TRIGGER SLOPE (both) +
TRIGGER SOURCE (both) EXT
Check SGL SWP Mode Operation A TRIGGER Mode AUTO

a. Set:
b. Connect a 50-kHz sinewave signal to the CH 1 OR X
CH 1 AC-GND-DC DC and A EXT input connectors via a precision 50-52 cable,
X I 0 MAG Off (button out) a 50-52 termination, and a dual-input coupler.
A and B SECIDIV 20 ps

c. Set the generator output for a 4-division vertical

b. Adjust the output of the leveled sine-wave generator display.
for a 50-kHz, 2-division vertical display.
d. CHECK-Display is triggered along the entire positive
slope of the waveform as the A TRIGGER LEVEL control
c. Adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control until the
i s rotated.
display just triggers.

e. CHECK-Display i s not triggered (free runs) a t either

d. Set the CH 1 AC-GND-DCswitch t o GND.
extreme of rotation.

e. Press in the SGL SWP push button. The READY LED f. Set ATRIGGER SLOPE switch to -.
should illuminate and remain on.

g. CHECK-Display i s triggered along the entire negative

f. Set CH 1 AC-GND-DCswitch t o DC. slope of the waveform as the A TRIGGER LEVEL control
is rotated.

g. CHECK-READY LED goes out and a single sweep

OCCU rs.
h. CHECK-Display is not triggered (free runs) a t either
extreme of rotation.

NOTE i. Move the input signal from the A EXT input

connector to the B EXT input connector.
The INTEN control may require adjustment to
observe the single-sweep trace.
j. Set:

h. Press in the SGL SWP push button several times. A TRIGGER LEVEL Fully counterclockwise
HORlZ MODE B

i. CHECK-Single-sweep trace occurs, and READY

LED illuminates briefly every time the SGL SWP push but- k. Repeat parts d through i for the B Sweep using the
ton is pressed in and released. B TRIGGER LEVEL control and the B TRIGGER SLOPE
switch.

j. Disconnect the test setup. I. Disconnect the t e s t setup.

REV NOV 1981

Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

HORIZONTAL

Equipment Required (see Table 4-1):

Calibration Generator (Item 2) Dual-Input Coupler (Item 8)
Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 3) 5042 Termination (Item 13)
Time-Mark Generator (Item 4) Precision Cable (Item 14)
5042 Cable (Item 6) Low-Frequency Generator (Item 17)

2336 CONTROL SETTINGS 1. Check A and B Timing Accuracy and Linearity

a. Connect 50-ns time markers from the time-mark
generator via a 50-i-2 cable and a 50-i-2 termination to the
POWER ON (button in) CH 1 OR X input connector.

CRT
INTEN As required for
visible display b. Adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control for a stable
FOCUS Best focused display display and vertically center the display using the CH 1
POSITION control.

Vertical (Both Channels)

VERTICAL MODE CH 1
POSITION Midrange
c. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the
VOLTSIDIV 0.2
first time marker with the first vertical graticule line.
VOLTSIDIV VAR Calibrated detent
AC-GND-DC DC
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out)
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth
(button out)
d. CHECK-The SECIDIV timing accuracy is within 2%
(0.2 division at the Il t h time marker), and linearity i s
Trigger (A and B, if applicable) within 5% (0.1 division over any 2-division portion of the
COUPLING AC graticule).
LEVEL As needed for a stable
display
SLOPE +
A SOURCE VERT MODE
B SOURCE VERT MODE e. Repeat part d for A SECIDIV switch settings of
Mode AUTO 0.1 ps to 0.5 s given in Table 4-7. Readjust the A TRIG-
TRIG HOLDOFF GER LEVEL and Horizontal POSITION controls as
(PUSH) VAR Off (in detent) necessary.

Sweep
HORlZ MODE A
A and B SECIDIV 0.05 ps (knobs locked) NOTE
TIME (PULL) VAR Pulled out and in For the A SEC/DI V settings from 50 ms to 0.5 s per
calibrated detent division, watch the time-marker tips only at the 1st
B DELAY TIME and 7 7th graticule lines while adjusting the Hori-
POSITION Fully counterclockwise zontal POSITION control and checking the timing
POSITION Midrange accuracy.
 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

f. Set: h. Set:

X I 0 MAG On (button in) HORlZ MODE B

A TRIGGER Mode AUTO B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
A SECIDIV 0.1 ps
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
g. CHECK-The A Magnified timing accuracy and
A TRIGGER Mode AUTO
linearity using the SECIDIV switch settings and the time-
mark generator settings given in Table 4-7 under the " X I 0
MAG" column. At each setting combination, timing must
be accurate to within 3% (0.3 division at the Il t h time i. Select 50-ns time markers from the time-mark
marker). When checking accuracy, exclude the first and last generator and adjust the A and B TRIGGER LEVEL
40 ns of the sweep. Linearity must be within 5% (0.1 controls (if necessary) for a stable display.
division) over any 2-division portion of the graticule. When
checking linearity, exclude the first- and last-displayed
divisions for the A and B SECIDIV switch settings of j. CHECK-Repeat parts d through g for the B Sweep.
0.05 ps and 0. Ips.

Table 4-7
Settings for Timing Accuracy Checks 2. Check A Time Readout Accuracy
a. Set:
A and B Time-Mark Generator Output
SECIDIV A SECIDIV 0.2 ps
Switch Setting Normal XI 0 MAG B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
HORlZ MODE A INTEN
0.05 ps 50 ns 5 ns
A TRIGGER Mode AUTO
0.1 ps 0.1 p s 10 ns
B TRIGGER SOURCE A TIME
0.2 ps 0.2 ps 20 ns Off (button out)
X I 0 MAG
0.5 p s 0.5 ps 50 ns

1 PS 1 PS 0.1 ps
0.2 ps b. Select 0.2-ps time markers from the time-mark
2 PS 2 I-rs
0.5 ps generator.
5 P-ls 5 PS

c. Use the B DELAY TlME POSITION control t o

position the start of one intensified zone to the left of the
second vertical graticule line. Use the A TlME POSITION
control to position the start of the other intensified zone
just to the left of the tenth vertical graticule line ( A Time
readout should be about 1.600 ps).

d.Set HORlZ MODE to B and use the A TlME

POSITION control to superimpose the time markers.

e. CHECK-A Time readout is within the range of values

specified in Table 4-8 for the SECIDIV switches and time-
marker settings used.
A Sweep Only

f. Repeat part e for the remaining A and B SECIDIV

switch settings and time-marker combinations listed in
Table 4-8. Use the A TlME POSITION control to super-
a ~ o SECIDIV
r switch settingsslowerthan 5 ms, set the A TRIGGER impose the time markers at each SECIDIV switch setting
Mode to NORM. before checking the A Time readout accuracy.
Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

Table 4-8 e. Align the rising edges of the time markers with the
center vertical graticule line using the B DELAY TlME
A Time Readout Accuracy

Is:tch 1 1
POSITION and A TlME POSITION controls.

SECIDIV SECIDIV
f. CHECK-For 1 division or less of horizontal jitter on
Swich Time A Time
the rising edges of the time markers.
Setting Setting Markers Readout

g. Rotate the A TlME POSITION control clockwise t o

bring each succeeding time marker within the graticule
viewing area (up to a h Time readout of 9 ms) and CHECK
for 1 division or less of pulse jitter on the rising edge of
each time marker.

h. Rotate the B DELAY TlME POSITION control

clockwise to bring each succeeding time marker within
the graticule viewing area (down to a A Time readout of
0 ms) and CHECK for 1 division or less of pulse jitter on
the rising edges of the time markers.

4. Check X I 0 MAG Registration

a. Set:

HORlZ MODE A
X I 0 MAG On (button in)

b. Position the time-marker baseline t o the bottom

horizontal graticule line using the CH 1 POSITION control.

a ~ o SECIDIV
r switch settings slower than 5 rns, set the A c. Use the Horizontal POSITION control t o position
TRIGGER Mode t o NORM.
the displayed time marker t o the center vertical graticule
line.

3. Check Delay Jitter

a. Set: d. Release the X I 0 MAG push button (button out).

A SECIDIV
B SECIDIV e. CHECK-Time marker remains centered within 0.2
HORlZ MODE division of the center vertical graticule line.

b. Select I-ms time markers from the time-mark

generator.
5. Check A Sweep Length
a. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to position
c. Align the intensified zones with the second time the third time marker t o the first vertical graticule line.
marker using the B DELAY TlME POSITION and A TlME
POSITION controls.
b. CHECK-Horizontal trace extends a t least 0.5
division, but not more than 1.5 divisions, past the 9th
d. Set HORlZ MODE to B. vertical graticule line.
 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

6. Check A SECIDIV VAR Range f. Repeat parts b through d for the B Sweep.
a. Set:

A and B SECIDIV 2 ms (knobs locked)

TIME (PULL) VAR Pulled out and in g. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.
calibrated detent

b. Select 5-ms time markers from the time-mark

generator.

8. Check X-Y Gain

c. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the a. Set:
first time marker with the first vertical graticule line.
VERTICAL MODE X-Y
VO LTS/D IV (both) 10 m
d. CHECK-At least one time marker per division can CH 2 AC-GND-DC GND
be obtained by rotating the TIME (PULL) VAR control HORlZ MODE A
counterclockwise.

b. Connect a 50-mV standard-amplitude signal from the

e. Return the TIME (PULL) VAR control to i t s calibration generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector
calibrated detent. via a 50-S1cable.

c. CHECK-For a display of 5 divisions k0.25 division

(4.75 to 5.25 divisions).
7. Check A and B Sweep Horizontal POSITION
Range
a. Set: d. Disconnect the test setup.

A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked)

Horizontal POSITION Fully counterclockwise

b. CHECK-Sweep ends to the left of the center vertical

9. Check X-Y Bandwidth
graticule line.
a. Connect a 50 kHz leveled sine-wave signal via a preci-
sion 5 0 4 cable, and a 5 0 4 termination to the CH 1 OR X
input connector.
c. Rotate the Horizontal POSITION control fully
clockwise.
b. Set the generator for a 6-division horizontal display.
d. CHECK-Sweep begins to the right of the center
vertical graticule line.
c. Without changing the generator amplitude, adjust
generator output frequency to 2 MHz.
e. Set:

HORlZ MODE B
Horizontal POSITION Fully counterclockwise d. CHECK-Display i s at least 4.2 divisions in length.

REV NOV 1981

Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

e. Disconnect the t e s t equipment from the instrument. c. Set CH 2 AC-GND-DCswitch to DC.

d. Vertically center the display using the channel 2 POSI-

10. Check X-Y Phase Differential TlON control, and horizontally center the display using the
a. Connect a 200-kHz sine-wave signal to the CH 1 OR
horizontal PoSITloN controlm
X and CH 2 OR Y input connectors via a 50-i-2 cable, a
5042 termination, and a dual-input coupler. e. CHECK-Opening i s 0.3 division or less, measured
horizontally.

b. Adjust the generator output amplitude for 6 divisions

of horizontal deflection. f. Disconnect the t e s t setup.

REV NOV 1981

 Performance Check Procedure-2336 Service

EXTERNAL Z-AXIS A N D CALIBRATOR

I Equipment Required (see Table 4-1):

Calibration Generator (Item 2) T-Connector (Item 9)
Two 50-LI Cables (Item 6)

2336 CONTROL SETTINGS 1. Check External 2-Axis Operation

a. Connect a 5-V standard-amplitude, square-wave
signal to the CH 2 OR Y input connector and to the EXT
POWER ON (button in) Z-AXIS input connector (located on the rear panel) via
a 5042 T-connector and two 5042 cables.

CRT
INTEN As required for visible b. CHECK-For noticeable intensity modulation of the
trace trace when the INTEN control is set for normal-viewing
FOCUS Best focused display brightness. Adjust the TlME (PULL) VAR control, if
necessary, to observe the modulation. Return the TlME
(PULL) VAR control to the calibrated detent.
Vertical (Both Channels)
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
POSITION Midrange
c. Disconnect the t e s t setup.
VOLTSIDIV 2
VOLTSIDIV VAR Calibrated detent
AC-GN D-DC DC
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out)
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth
(button out)
2. Check AMPL CAL Operation
a. Set:
Trigger (A and B, if applicable)
COUPLING AC CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 5m
LEVEL Fully clockwise A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked)
SLOPE + (button out)
SOURCE VERT MODE
Mode AUTO
TRIG HOLDOFF (PUSH) Off (in detent) b. Connect the 10X probe (supplied with the 2336)
t o the CH 1 OR X input connector. Insert the probe tip
into the AMPL CAL connector.
Sweep
HORlZ MODE A c. CHECK-For a 4-division vertical display of the
A and B SECIDIV 2 ms (knobs locked)
AMPL CAL square-wave signal (square-wave period is typi-
TIME (PULL) VAR Pulled out and in
cally 1 ms, within 25%).
calibrated detent
B DELAY TlME
POSITION Fully counterclockwise
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
POSITION Midrange d. Disconnect all t e s t equipment.

REV NOV 1981

 This Document was scanned from the original
Tektronix Service Manual
For enquiries about high quality technical manuals

[email protected]

This Document is a complete Scan from the original

Tektronix manual
For enquiries about our complete
High quality line of technical Manuals in PDF

mailto : [email protected]
 Section 5-2336 Service

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

INTRODUCTION

IMPORTANT-PLEASE READ BEFORE USING THIS PROCEDURE

The "Adjustment Procedure" i s used to return the LIMITS AND TOLERANCES

instrument to conformance with i t s "Performance Require-
ments" as listed in the "Specification" (Section 1). These
adjustments should be performed only after the checks in The limits and tolerances stated in this procedure are
the "Performance Check Procedure" (Section 4) have instrument specifications only if they are listed in the
indicated a need for adjustment of the instrument. "Performance Requirements" column of the "Specifi-
cation" (Section 1). Tolerances given are applicable only t o
the instrument undergoing adjustment and do not include
test equipment error. Adjustment of the instrument must
be accomplished at an ambient temperature between
+20°c and +30°c, and the instrument must have had a
warm-up period of at least 20 minutes.

TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

The t e s t equipment listed in Table 4-1 is a complete

PARTIAL PROCEDURES
l i s t of the equipment required to accomplish both the
"Adjustment Procedure" in this section and the "Per-
formance Check Procedure" in Section 4. Test equipment This procedure is structured in subsections to permit
specifications described in Table 4-1 are the minimum adjustment of individual sections of the instrument (except
necessary to provide accurate results. Therefore, equipment the Power Supply) whenever a complete readjustment is
used must meet or exceed the listed specifications. Detailed not required. For example, if only the Vertical section fails
operating instructions for test equipment are not given in to meet the Performance Requirements (or has had repairs
this procedure. If more operating information i s required, made or components replaced), it can be readjusted with
refer t o the appropriate test equipment instruction manual. little or no effect on other sections of the instrument.
However, if the Power Supply section has undergone
repairs or adjustments that change the absolute value of any
of the supply voltages, a complete readjustment of the
instrument may be required.
When equipment other than that recommended is used,
control settings of the test setup may need to be altered.
I f the exact item of equipment given as an example in
Table 4-1 i s not available, first check the "Purpose" column At the beginning of each subsection is a list of all the
to verify use of this item. I f it i s used for a check or adjust- front-panel control settings required to prepare the instru-
ment that is of little or no importance to your measure- ment for performing Step 1 in that subsection. Each
ment requirements, the item and corresponding steps may succeeding step within a subsection should then be per-
be deleted. I f the check or adjustment i s important, use formed both in the sequence presented and in i t s entirety
the "Minimum Specification" column to determine if any t o ensure that control settings will be correct for ensuing
other available test equipment might suffice. steps.
Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS AND Before performing this procedure, ensure that the LlNE
ADJUSTMENT INTERACTION VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch i s s e t for the ac-power-input
source voltage being used (see "Preparation for Use" in
Section 2). This procedure i s written for the instrument to
Do not preset any internal controls or change the +40-V be operated from a 115-V ac-power-input source. Operating
Power-Supply adjustment, since that will typically neces- from other input-source voltages will require setting the
sitate a complete readjustment of the instrument, when LlNE VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch to the appropriate
only a partial readjustment might otherwise be required. setting for the available ac-power-input source.
To avoid unnecessary readjustment, change an internal
control setting only when a Performance Characteristic
cannot be met with the original setting. When it is necessary All t e s t equipment items described in Table 4-1 are
to change the setting of any internal control, always check required to accomplish a complete Adjustment Procedure.
Table 5-1 for possible interacting adjustments that might The specific items of equipment needed t o perform each
be required. subsection in this procedure are listed at the beginning of
the subsection. The item number shown in parentheses
with each piece of equipment refers to the equipment item
number presented in Table 4-1.
The use of Table 5-1 i s particularly important if only a
partial procedure i s performed or if a circuit requires
readjustment due to a component replacement. To use this Connect the t e s t equipment to an appropriate ac-power-
table, first find the adjustment that was made (extreme input source and connect the 2336 to a variable auto-
left column). Then move to the right, across the row, transformer (Item 18 in Table 4-1) that i s set for 115 V ac.
until you come to a darkened square. From the darkened Apply power and allow a 20-minute warm-up period before
square, move up the table and check the accuracy of the commencing any adjustments.
adjustment found at the heading of that column. Readjust
if necessary.
Display
The most accurate display adjustments are made with a
stable, well-focused, low-intensity display. Unless otherwise
Specific interactions are called out within certain adjust-
ment steps to indicate that the adjustments must be noted, adjust the INTEN, ASTIG, FOCUS, and TRIGGER
repeated until no further improvement i s noted. LEVEL controls as needed to view the display.

Step and Part Titles

Where possible in this procedure, instrument perform-
ance i s checked before an adjustment is made. Steps
PREPARATION FOR ADJUSTMENT containing both checks and adjustments are titled "Check/
Adjust." Those steps with only checks are titled "Check."

It is necessary to remove the instrument cabinet t o

perform the Adjustment Procedure. See the "Cabinet" If a part is titled "CHECK/ADJUST," first perform a
removal instructions located in the "Maintenance" section check t o determine whether the instrument meets the
of the manual. requirement. If it does, the adjustment is not required.
 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

Table 5-1
Adjustment Interactions

Adjustments or Replacements Made Adjustments Affected

TRACE ROTATION
Y-AXIS ALIGNMENT
GEOMETRY
CRT GRID BIAS
Z-AXIS COMP
5ns TIMING
X I HORlZ GAlN
X I 0 HORlZ GAlN
X-Y GAlN
M A G REGISTRATION
A HlGH SPEED TIMING
B HlGH SPEED TIMING

DELAY START
DELAY STOP
A HYSTERESIS
A SLOPE OFFSET
B HYSTERESIS
B SLOPE OFFSET
VERT MODE LEVEL
DC EXT LEVEL
VERTICAL OUTPUT GAlN
VERTICAL BALANCE
CHI GAlN
CH2 GAlN
CHI
VAR BAL
CH2 VAR BAL
CHI AlTENUATOR BAL
CWATTENUATOR BAL
CRT REPLACEMENT
+40-V A D J

REV JUN 1981

 Hyperlinked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click to select

Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

INDEX TO ADJUSTMENT Vertical (cont) Page

PROCEDURE 25 . Check Trigger View High-Frequency
Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
26. Check Trigger View Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Main Power Supply Page
27. Check Trigger View Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.17
1. CheckIAdjust Power Supply DC Levels. 28. Check Channel Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.18
Regulation. and Ripple (R231) . . . . . . ....... 5-5 29 . Check Common-Mode Rejection Ratio . . . . . . . .5.18
2. Check High-Voltage Overdrive . . . . . . . ....... 5-6 30. Check Bandwidth Limit Operation . . . . . . . . . . .5. 18

Display and Z-Axis

1. CheckIAdjust CRT Grid Bias (R140). . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Triggering
2. CheckIAdjust Trace Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 1. Adjust A Trigger Slope Offset (R82) and
3. CheckIAdjust Y-Axis Alignment (R203) . . . . . . . 5-8 A Hysteresis (R 106). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
4. CheckIAdjust Geometry (R202). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 2. Adjust B Trigger Slope Offset (R 127) and
5. CheckIAdjust Z-Axis Compensation B Hysteresis (R163) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
(C101 and C128). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 3. Adjust Vert Mode DC Level (R29) . . . . . . . . . . .5.20
4 . Check A and B Internal Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
Vertical 5. Adjust A External Trigger DC Level (R41) . . . . . .5.22
Check A and B External Triggering and Jitter . . . .5.22
1. Check Input Coupling Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Check NORM Triggering Mode Operation . . . . . .5.23
2. Check ALT Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10
Check SG L SWP Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .5.24
3. Check CHOP Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Check A and B External Trigger Level Ranges. . . .5.24
4. Check AUTO Vertical Mode Operation . . . . . . . .5.10
Check Line Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
5. Check BEAM FIND Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10
6. CheckIAdjust CH 1 VOLTSIDIV VAR Balance
(R22) and UNCAL LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11 Horizontal
7. CheckIAdjust CH 1 Attenuator Balance (R10) . . .5.11
8. CheckIAdjust CH 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR Balance 1. Check A INTEN Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.26
(R83) and UNCAL LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11 2. Adjust A Sweep Start and Sweep Stop
9. CheckIAdjust CH 2 Attenuator Balance (R74) . . .5.12 (R74 and R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27
10. CheckIAdjust CH 1 Vertical Output Gain 3. Check A Time Readout Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . .5.27
(R44) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. 12 4 . Check Delay Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28
11. CheckIAdjust Vertical Balance (R 18) . . . . . . . . .5.12 5. CheckIAdjust X I and X I 0 Horizontal Gain
12. CheckIAdjust CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical Gain (R 126 and R127) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.28
(R47 and R114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 6 . CheckIAdjust X I 0 MAG Registration (R134) . . . .5.29
13. Check CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR 7 . CheckIAdjust B Time (R 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.29
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 8. Check A and B Timing Accuracy and Linearity . . .5.29
14. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Input Gate Current . . . . . .5.13 9. Adjust A and B Timing Accuracy and Linearity
15. Check ADD Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 (C84, C22, C161, and C187) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.30
16. Check Compression and Expansion. . . . . . . . . . .5.13 10. Check A Time Readout Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . .5.31
17. Check Low-Frequency Transient Response. . . . . .5.14 11. Check A and B Sweep Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.32
18. CheckIAdjust CH 1 and CH 2 Low-Frequency 12. Check A SECIDIV VAR Range . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.32
Compensation (R66, R73, R31, and R92) . . . . . .5.14 13. Check A and B Sweep Horizontal POSITION
19. CheckIAdjust Vertical Output High-Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
Compensation (R29, R32, R33, and C36) and 14. Check AUTO Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.33
CH 1 and CH 2 Preamplifier High-Frequency 15. CheckIAdjust X-Y Gain (R148) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.33
Compensation (R33, C33, R95, and C95) . . . . . .5.14 16. Check X-Y Bandwidth and Phasing . . . . . . . . . . .5.33
20. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Transient Response . : . . . .5.15 17. Check A Trigger Holdoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33
21. Check Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
22. Check Trigger View Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
23. Check Trigger View Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16 External 2-Axis and Calibrator
24. Check Trigger View Low-Frequency 1. Check External Z-Axis Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .5.35
Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17 2. Check AMPL CAL Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.36

Hyperlinked Page . Scroll UP or Down .Left click to select

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

MAIN POWER SUPPLY

Equipment Required (see Table 4-1 ):

Test Oscilloscope with 1X Probe (ltem 1) Screwdriver (Item 2 1)
Variable Autotransformer (Item 18) Shorting Strap (Item 22)
Digital Voltmeter (ltem 19)

St%? ADJUSTMENT LOCATlONS 1 and ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS 4

at the back of this manual for test point and adjustment locations.

2336 CONTROL SETTINGS Sweep

HORIZ MODE A
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked)
LINE VOLTAGE TIME (PULL) VAR Pulled out and in
SELECTOR 115 V calibrated detent
POWER ON (button in) B DELAY TIME
POSITION Fully counterclockwise
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
POSITION Midrange

CRT
INTEN Minimum (Fully 1. ChecklAdjust Power Supply DC Levels,
counterclockwise) Regulation, and Ripple (R231)
FOCUS Best focused display
NOTE
Review the information at the beginning of this
section before starting this step.
Vertical (Both Channels)
VERTICAL MODE X-Y (CH 1 and CH 2 a. Connect the digital voltmeter low lead to chassis
buttons in) ground and connect the volts lead to the first test point
POSITION Midrange listed in Table 5-2.
VOLTSIDIV 5m
VOLTS/DIV VAR Calibrated detent
AC-G N D-DC GND b. CHECK-Voltage reading is within the range given in
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out) Table 5-2.
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth
(button out)
c. Repeat parts a and b for each test point in Table 5-2.

d. If all voltages are within tolerance, skip to part g.

Trigger If they are not, continue with part e.
COUPLING AC
LEVEL As required for stable
NOTE
display
SLOPE + (button out) Adjustment of the +40-V Power Supply may require
SOURCE VERT MODE a complete readjustment of the instrument. Do not
Mode AUTO adjust the +40-V Power Supply i f i t is within
TRIG HOLDOFF tolerance, unless a complete adjustment procedure is
(PUSH) VAR Off (in detent) to be performed.

REV FEB 1982

Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

Table 5-2 i. Connect the t e s t oscilloscope to the first t e s t point

Main Power Supply Tolerances and p-p Ripple given in Table 5-2 via a 1X probe and cascaded gain on the
oscilloscope. This will obtain the necessary vertical
Test Typical resolution for measuring ripple amplitude.
Power Point P-P
Supply (+ Lead) Reading Tolerance Ripple
j. CHECK-Ripple amplitude of the dc supply while
varying the autotransformer output voltage between 100 V
and 132 V. Ripple amplitude should be within the typical
value given in Table 5-2.

k. Repeat part j for each t e s t point in Table 5-2.

I. Return the autotransformer output voltage to 115 V

and disconnect the t e s t setup.

2. Check High-Voltage Overdrive

a. Connect the digital voltmeter low lead to chassis

ground and connect the volts lead to TP320 (+I02 V sup-
e. Connect the digital voltmeter low lead to chassis ply). Set the autotransformer to zero output.
ground and connect the volts lead to TP247.

f. ADJUST-+40-V Supply (R231) for +40 V and again b. Connect a shorting strap between TP184 and TP185.
CHECK all power supply dc levels according t o Table 5-2.

c. CHECK-While slowly increasing the autotransformer

g. Disconnect the voltmeter. output, that the voltage level increases to 112 V k 4 V,
then drops to approximately 13 V. Note that a buzzing
h. Set t e s t oscilloscope controls as follows: sound is heard just before the voltage drops. Reset the
autotransformer for a 115 V output.
A and B SecIDiv 5 ms
Ac-Gnd-Dc (both) Ac d. Set POWER switch to OFF, remove the shorting
Trigger controls As required for a stable strap, and disconnect the voltmeter. Set POWER switch
display to ON.

REV FEB 1982

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

DISPLAY A N D Z-AXIS

I Equipment Required (see Table 4-1): 1

Test Oscilloscope with 1OX Probe (Item 1) Digital Voltmeter (Item 19)
Time-Mark Generator (Item 4) Screwdriver (Item 21 )
5042 BNC Cable (Item 6 ) Low-Capacitance Alignment Tool (Item 23)
5042 BNC Termination (Item 13)

See at the back of this manual for test point and adjustment locations.

2336 CONTROL SETTINGS Sweep

HORlZ MODE A
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked)
LINE VOLTAGE TIME (PULL) VAR Pulled out and in
SELECTOR 115V calibrated detent
POWER ON (button in) B DELAY TIME
POSITION Fully counterclockwise
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
POSITION Midrange
,CRT
INTEN As required for visible
trace
FOCUS Best focused display 1. CheckIAdjust CRT Grid Bias (R140)
a. Connect the digital voltmeter low lead t o chassis
ground and the volts lead to TPI 30.

Vertical (Both Channels)

b. Set the INTEN control for a digital voltmeter reading
VERTICAL MODE X-Y (CH 1 and CH 2
of +20 V.
buttons in)
POSITION Midrange
VOLTSID IV 5m
c. CHECK-Display for a well-defined, low-intensity
VOLTSIDIV VAR Calibrated detent
dot. Adjust the FOCUS and ASTlG controls as necessary.
AC-GND-DC GND
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out)
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth (button
d. ADJUST-CRT Grid Bias (R140) for a dot, then
out)
back off the control until the dot i s just visible.

e. Disconnect the test setup.

Trigger
COUPLING AC
LEVEL As required for stable 2. CheckIAdjust Trace Alignment
display a. Set:
SLOPE + (button out)
SOURCE VERT MODE VERTICAL MODE CH 1
- Mode AUTO A and B SECIDIV 0.5 ms
TRIG HOLDOFF INTEN As required for visible
(PUSH) VAR Off (in detent) trace
Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

b. Use the CH 1 POSITION control to move the trace c. ADJUST-Geometry (R202) for minimum bowing of
to the center horizontal graticule line. the time markers across the graticule area (especially a t the
left and right vertical graticule lines).

c. CHECK-Trace is parallel with the center horizontal

graticule line.
d. I NTE RACTION-Y-Axis Alignment adjustment.
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for best display alignment.
d. ADJUST-TRACE ROTATION control (front-panel
screwdriver adjustment) to align the trace parallel with the
center horizontal graticule line. e. Disconnect the t e s t setup from the instrument.

3. CheckIAdjust Y-Axis Alignment (R203)

a. Set:

VERTICAL MODE X-Y (CH 1 and CH 2 5. CheckIAdjust 2-Axis Compensation (Cl01 and
buttons in) C128)
CH 2 AC-GND-DC DC a. Set:
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 0.1
CH 2 POSITION Fully counterclockwise VERTICAL MODE CH 1
A and B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
A TRIGGER LEVEL Fully clockwise
b. Connect 0.5-ms time markers from the time-mark
generator to the CH 2 OR Y input connector via a 5042
cable and a 5042 termination. b. Set t e s t oscilloscope controls as follows:

VoltsIDiv 0.2 V (with 1OX probe)

c. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to move the A and B SecIDiv 0.1ps
display to the center vertical graticule line. AC-Gnd-DC (both) Dc
Trigger controls As required for a stable
display
d. CHECK-Display for 0.1 division of tilt or less when
compared to the center vertical graticule line.
c. Connect the 10X probe from the test oscilloscope to
TP127 and connect the probe ground clip to TP92 (GND 2).
e. ADJUST-Y-Axis Alignment (R203) to align the
display parallel with the center vertical graticule line.
d. Adjust the 2336 INTEN control for a 5-division (5-V)
vertical display (on the t e s t oscilloscope) of the unblanking
f. INTERACTION-TRACE ROTATION adjustment. gate.
Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for best display alignment.

e. ADJUST-2-Axis Compensation (C101), using a low-

Check/Adjust Geometry (R202) capacitance alignment tool, for the best square front corner
a. Set: on the unblanking pulse displayed on the test oscilloscope.
Also adjust C128 for the best flat top just after the front
VERTICAL MODE CH 2 corner.
A TRIGGER SOURCE CH 2
A TRIGGER LEVEL For a stable display
f. CHECK-The p-p aberration is less than -t5% (0.25
division).
b. CHECK-Display for 0.1 division or less of bowing of
the time markers across the graticule area from top to
bottom. g. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument. -

REV NOV 1981

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

VERTICAL

Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) :

Test Oscilloscope with 10X Probe (Item 1) 2X Attenuator (Item 12)
Calibration Generator (Item 2) Two 50-Cl BNC Terminations (Item 13)
Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 3) Precision 5042 BNC Cable (Item 14)
Two 50-Cl BNC Cables (Item 6) Low-Frequency Generator (Item 17)
Bnc-to-Probe-TipAdapter (Item 7 ) Digital Voltmeter (Item 19)
Dual-Input Coupler (Item 8) Screwdriver (Item 2 1)
10X Attenuator (Item 10) Low-CapacitanceAlignment Tool (Item 23)
5X Attenuator (Item 11)

ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS I
and ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS 4 at
See
the back of this manual for test point and adjustment locations.

2336 CONTROL SETTINGS Sweep

HORlZ MODE A
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked)
LINE VOLTAGE TIME (PULL) VAR Pulled out and in
SELECTOR 115V calibrated detent
POWER ON (button in) B DELAY TlME
POSITION Fully counterclockwise
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
POSITION Midrange
CRT
INTEN As required for visible
trace
FOCUS Best focused display

1. Check Input Coupling Switches

a. Connect a 20-mV, standard-amplitude square-wave
Vertical (Both Channels)
signal to the CH 1 OR X input connector via a 50-Cl cable.
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
POSITION Midrange
VOLTSIDIV 5m b. Position the bottom of the display to the center
VOLTS/DIV VAR Calibrated detent horizontal graticule line and set the CH 1 AC-GND-DC
AC-GND-DC DC switch to GND.
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out)
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth
(button out) c. CHECK-Trace is a t the center horizontal graticule
line with no vertical deflection.

Trigger d. Set the CH 1 AC-GND-DC switch to AC.

COUPLING AC
LEVEL As required for stable
display e, CHECK-Display i s centered about the center hori-
SLOPE + (button out) zontal graticule line.
SOURCE VERT MODE
Mode AUTO
TRIG HOLDOFF f. Set VERTICAL MODE t o CH 2 and move the t e s t
(PUSH) VAR Off (in detent) signal to the CH 2 OR Y input connector.

REV NOV 1981

Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

g. Position the bottom of the display to the center b. Vertically spread the CH 1 and CH 2 traces about
horizontal graticule line and set the CH 2 AC-GND-DC 4 divisions apart using the CH 1 and CH 2 POSITION
switch t o GND. controls and adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control for a
stable display.

h. CHECK-Trace i s at the center horizontal graticule

line with no vertical deflection. c. CH ECK-Vertical switching transients are completely
blanked between horizontal chopped segments for normal
viewing intensity.
i. Set CH 2 AC-GND-DC switch to AC.
d. CHECK-Period of one complete square-wave cycle
is 2.8 to 5.2 ps (approximately 4 horizontal divisions).
j. CHECK-Display i s centered about the center hori-
zontal graticule line.
e. Rotate the A TRIGGER LEVEL control fully
clockwise.
k. Disconnect the t e s t equipment from the instrument.

f. CHECK-Two traces are visible for all B SECIDIV

switch settings.
Check ALT Mode Operation
a. Set:
g. Set HORlZ MODE t o A and repeat part f for the
A sweeps.
A and B SECIDIV 50 ms (knobs locked)
VERTICAL MODE ALT
A TRIGGER LEVEL Fully clockwise
4. Check AUTO Vertical Mode Operation
a. Set:
b. Position CH 1 and CH 2 traces about 2 divisions apart.
VERTICAL MODE AUTO ( A L T and CHOP
buttons in)
c. CHECK-Sweeps alternate for all A SECIDIV switch A and B SECIDIV 0.2 ms
settings.

b. Set test oscilloscope controls as follows:

NOTE
VoltsIDiv 1 V (with 10X probe)
At sweep speeds of 2 ms per division or faster,
TimeIDiv 0.5 ms
the trace alternations occur rapidly and cannot be
Ac-Gnd-Dc Dc
observed.
Trigger controls As required for a stable
display
d. Set HORlZ MODE t o B and repeat part c for the
B sweeps.
c. Connect a 10X probe from the test oscilloscope t o
TP61 (CH 1).

d. Verify that the display i s a square-wave signal with

a period of approximately 4.8 ms.
3. Check CHOP Mode Operation
a. Set:
e. Set the A and B SECIDIV controls t o 0.5 ms.
A and B SECIDIV 1 PS
VERTICAL MODE CHOP
AC-GND-DC (both) GND f. CHECK-Display on the t e s t oscilloscope becomes a
A TRIGGER Mode AUTO square-wave signal with a period of approximately 2 ps
A TRIGGER COUPLING AC (adjust the t e s t oscilloscope TimeIDiv control as necessary
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE to view the signal).

REV NOV 1981

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

g. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument. 7. CheckIAdjust CH 1 VOLTSIDIV VAR Balance
(R22) and UNCAL LED
a. Set:
Check BEAM FlND Operation
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked)
a. Push in and hold the BEAM FlND push button.
VOLTS/DIV (both) 10 m
CH 1 AC-GND-DC GND
b. CHECK-Display remains entirely in the graticule
area regardless of the settings of the Vertical and Hori- b. Position the trace t o the center horizontal graticule
zontal POSITION controls, with the XI0 MAG push button line.
both in and out.

c. Rotate the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV VAR control clockwise

c. CHECK-Trace intensity remains constant and out of i t s calibrated detent.
visible regardless of the INTEN control setting.
d. CHECK-UNCAL LED is illuminated.

d. Set VERTICAL MODE t o CH I and center the CH 1

trace both vertically and horizontally while holding in the e. CHECKIADJUST-CH 1 Var Balance (R22) for no
BEAM FlND push button. discernable trace shift when rotating the VOLTSIDIV VAR
control from fully counterclockwise to fully clockwise.

e. Release the BEAM FlND button.

f. Return the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV VAR control to i t s
calibrated detent (fully counterclockwise).
f. CHECK-Trace remains centered within the graticule
area.

8. CheckIAdjust CH 2 Attenuator Balance (W74)

6. CheckIAdjust CH 1 Attenuator Balance (R10)
a. Set:
a. Set:
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 0.1
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.1 CH 2 AC-GND-DC DC
CH 1 AC-GND-DC DC
b. Position the trace to the center horizontal graticule
line.
b. Position the trace to the center horizontal graticule
line.
c. Set the CH 2 VOLTSIDIV control to 50 m.

c. Set the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV control t o 50 m.

NOTE
NOTE CH 2 Attenuator Balance (R74) is adjusted while
CH 1 Attenuator Balance (R7O) is adjusted while the CH 2 VO L TS/DI V control is set to 0.1.
the CH 7 VOL TS/DI V control is set to 0.1,

d. CH ECKIADJUST-CH 1 Attenuator Balance (R10) d. CHECKIADJUST-CH 2 Attenuator Balance (R74j

for no discernable trace shift from the center horizontal for no discernable trace shift from the center horizontal
graticule line when the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV control i s graticule line when the CH 2 VOLTSIDIV control i s
switched between 0.1 and 50 m. switched between 0.1 and 50 m.

REV NOV 1981

Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

9. ChecklAdjust CH 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR Balance 11. CheckIAdjust Vertical Balance (R18)

(R83) and UNCAL LED a. Set the CH 2 AC-GND-DC switch to GND.
a. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CH 2 b. Rotate the channel 2 POSITION control while alter-

VOLTSIDIV (both) 10 m nately pressing in and releasing the CH 2 INVERT button
CH 2 AC-GND-DC GND until a point is reached where there is no trace movement.

b. Position the trace to the center horizontal graticule c. CHECKIADJUST-Vertical Balance (R18) to vertical-
line. ly position the trace within k0.4 division of the center hori-
zontal graaticule line.

c. Rotate the CH 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR control clockwise

out of i t s calibrated detent. d. Repeat parts b and c as necessary.

d. CHECK-UNCAL LED i s illuminated. 12. CheckIAdjust CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical Gain

(R47 and R 1 14)
e. CHECKIADJUST-CH 2 Var Balance (R83) for no a. Set:
discernable trace shift when rotating the CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
VAR control from fully counterclockwise to fully VOLTSIDIV (both) 5m
clockwise. AC-GND-DC (both) DC
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out)

f. Return the CH 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR control to i t s

calibrated detent (fully counterclockwise). b. Connect a 20-mV, standard-amplitude square-wave
signal to the CH 2 OR Y input connector via a 5042 cable.

10. CheckIAdjust Vertical Output Gain (R44)

a. Connect the digital voltmeter leads between TP156 c. CHECKIADJUST-CH 2 Vertical Gain (R114) for
and TP176, set voltmeter scale to 200 mV and adjust the a display amplitude of 4 divisions 33% (3.88 t o 4-12
CH 2 Vertical POSITION control for a voltmeter indication divisions).
of 0 V.

d. CHECK-Dc accuracies are within display limits

b. Adjust Vertical Balance (R18) t o position the trace a t each CH 2 VOLTSIDIV switch setting and standard-
on the center horizontal graticule line. amplitude signal as listed in Table 5-3.

c. Adjust the CH 2 Vertical POSITION control for a e. Set VERTICAL MODE t o CH 1.

voltmeter indication of 150 mV.

f. Set the generator to 20 mV and move the input signal

d. ADJUST-Vertical Output Gain (R44) t o position the the CH OR input
trace 2 divisions above the center horizontal graticule line.

g. CHECKIADJUST-CH 1 Vertical Gain (R47) for dis-

NOTE play amplitude of 4 divisions *3% (3.88 t o 4.12 divisions).
If the trace does not reach exactly 2 full divisions
above the center horizontal graticule line, set R44 to
h. CHECK-Dc accuracies are within display limits a t
maximum or minimum to position the trace as closely
each CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch setting and standard-
as possible to 2 divisions above the center horizontal
amplitude signal as listed in Table 5-3.
graticule line.

e. Disconnect the test.equipment from the instrument. i. Set the generator output for a 10-mV signal.

REV NOV 1981

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

Table 5-3 14. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Input Gate Current

Vertical DC Accuracy Checks a. Set both AC-GND-DC switches to GND.

'OLTSIDIV Standard Deflection for Display

Switch Amplitude 3% Accuracy Limits b. CHECK-For 0.1 division or less vertical shift in
Setting Signal (divisions) (divisions) display (0.5 nA or less input gate current) while alternating
the CH 2 AC-GND-DC switch between AC and GND.
10 m 50 mV 5 4.85 to 5.15

20 m 0.1 V 5 4.85 t o 5.15 c. Set VERTICAL MODE to CH 1.

50 m 0.2 V 4 3.88 to 4.12

0.1 0.5 V 5 4.85 to 5.15 d. CHECK-For 0.1 division or less vertical shift in
display (0.5 nA or less input gate current) while alternating
0.2 1V 5 4.85 t o 5.15 the CH 1 AC-GND-DC switch between AC and GND.
0.5 2V 4 3.88 to 4.12
1 5V 5 4.85 to 5.1 5
2 10 V 5 4.85 t o 5.15
15. Check ADD Mode Operation
5 20 V 4 3.88 to 4.12
a. Set:

VERTICAL MODE ADD

AC-GND-DC (both) DC

13. Check CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTS/DIV VAR

Range b. Connect a 10-mV, standard-amplitude square-wave
a. Set:
signal t o both CH 1 OR X and CH 2 OR Y input connectors
via a 50-a cable and a dual-input coupler.
VOLTSIDIV (both) 5m
AC-GND-DC (both) DC
c. CHECK-Display amplitude i s 4 divisions +3% (3.88
to 4.12 divisions).
b. Rotate the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV VAR control fully
clockwise.
16. Check Compression and Expansion
a. Set:
c. CHECK-Display increases to 5 divisions or more in
amp1itude. CH 2 AC-GND-DC GND
VERTICAL MODE CH 1

d. Move the t e s t signal to the CH 2 OR X input con-

nector and set VERTICAL MODE to CH 2. b. Adjust the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV VAR control (if
necessary) for an exact 2-division vertical display centered
within the graticule area.
e. Rotate the CH 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR control fully
clockwise.
c. Position the top of the display to the top graticule
line.
f. CHECK-Display increases to 5 divisions or more in
amp1itude.
d. CHECK-For display compression or expansion of
0.1 division or less.
g. Return both VAR controls to their calibrated detents.

e. Position the bottom of the display to the bottom

h. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument. graticule line.
Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

f. CHECK-For display compression or expansion of j. Set generator output to minimum amplitude and move
0.1 division or less. the test signal to the CH 2 OR Y input connector.

g. Return the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV VAR control t o i t s k. Set:

calibrated detent. VOLTSIDIV (CH 2) 5m
VERTICAL MODE CH 2
A TRIGGER SOURCE CH 2
h. Disconnect the test setup from the instrument. A TRIGGER LEVEL For a stable display

17. CheckIAdjust CH 1 and CH 2 Low-Frequency

Transient Response and Compensation (R66, R73, I. Vertically center the CH 2 display and repeat parts c
R31 and R92) and e for CH 2. If within tolerance skip to Step 18; if not,
proceed to part m.
a. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CHOP

m. Reduce generator output to minimum, reinstall the
AC-GN D-DC (both) DC
attenuator, and set CH 2 VOLTSIDIV to 10 m.
VOLTSIDIV (both) 5m
A TRIGGER SOURCE CH 1
A SECIDIV 1 ms
A TRIGGER LEVEL
n. ADJUST-Low-frequency compensation (R92) for
For a stable display
the best flat-top square wave on the CH 2 display.

b. Connect a 1-kHz signal from the square-wave gener- o. Repeat all of Step 17 as necessary, then proceed to
ator's fast-rise, positive-going output via a precision 5 0 4 step18.
cable, a X I 0 attenuator, and a 5 0 4 termination to the CH 1
OR X input connector.
18. CheckIAdjust CH 1 and CH 2 20 pf
Compensation (C1 and C62 on A1 0 Board)
c. Adjust the generator output to obtain a 5-division ver-
a. Reduce generator output to minimum and reinstall the
tical display.
attenuator.

d. Position the CH 2 trace on the center horizontal b. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CH2
graticule line, center the CH 1 display, and adjust the A
TRIGGER LEVEL control for a stable display. VOLTSIDIV (both) 10 m
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
A TRIGGER LEVEL For a stable display
e. CHECK-Display overshoot or rounding is within
+3O/0 (4.85 to 5.15 divisions) for each CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
c. Adjust generator output for a 5-division vertical
switch setting from 5 m to 0.2 and waveform flatness is
within +2% (0.1 division) at all settings. Adjust the gener- display and set A TRIGGER LEVEL for a stable display.
ator output andlor remove the attenuator as necessary to
maintain a 5-division vertical display throughout this step. If d. Note shape of displayed waveform.
not within tolerance proceed to part f; if within tolerance
skip to part j. e. Set CH 2 VOLTSIDIV to 0.1 and readjust generator
output for a 5-division vertical display (remove atteuator if
necessary).
f. Set CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTSIDIV to 10 m and adjust
the generator output for a 5-division vertical display.
f. CHECK-Displayed waveform shape matches that
noted in part d. If so skip to part h, if not proceed to part g.
g. Repeat part d.
g. ADJUST-C62 for waveform shape to match the
waveform noted in part d.
h. ADJUST -Low-frequency Compensation (R66 and
R73) for no vertical deflection on the CH 2 trace.
h. Set CH 2 VOLTSIDIV to 0.2 and set generator for a 5-
division display. Check that waveform shape matches that
i. ADJUST-Low-frequency Compensation (R31) for the noted in part d. If not, repeat all of Steps 17 and 18. (If still
best flat-top square wave on the CH 1 display. not correct a circuit malfunction is indicated)

5-14 REV NOV 1981

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

i. Set generator for minimum output. g. ADJUST-Vertical Output Amplifier HF Compensa-

tion (C36) for the best flat-top display (see Figure 5-1).

j. Move the test signal to the CH 1 or X input connector. h. Set the A SECIDIV switch to 0.5 ps.

k. Set VERTICAL MODE to CH 1. i. ADJUST-CH 2 Preamp HF Compensation (R95 and

C95) and Vertical Output Amplifier HF Compsnsation (R39
and C39) for best front corner (see Figure 5-1).
I. Repeat parts c through e for channel 1.

m. CHECK-Displayed waveform shape matches the

waveform noted in part d for channel 1. If so, skip to Step
19, if not, proceed to part n.

n. ADJUST-C1 for waveform shape to match the

waveform noted in part d for channel 1.

o. Repeat part h for channel 1. 100 kHz

SQUARE W A ~ E -

19. CheckIAdjust Vertical Output High-Frequency

Compensation (R29, 832, C33, C36, R39 and C39)
and CH 1 and CH 2 Preamplifier High-Frequency
Compensation (R33, C33, C58, R95, and C95)
a. Set:
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
VOLTSIDIV 10 m Figure 5-1. Areas affected by high-frequency compensation
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE adjustments.
A SECIDIV 1 PS
BW LIMIT Full Bandwidth (button out) j. Set VERTICAL MODE to CH 1 and move the test sig-
nal to the CH 1 OR X input connector.
b. Set generator for minimum output amplitude and con-
nect a fast-rise, postive-going 100 kHz signal from the
k. ADJUST-CH 1 Preamp HF Compensation (R33,
square-wave generator output via a precision 50 Q cable a C33 and C58) for best front corner (see Figure 5-1) NOTE:
10X attenuator and a 50-Q termination to the CH 2 OR Y C58 affects the same area on the waveform as C33 and
input connector. R33 do. C58 is located just to the right of Q57 (see AD-
JUSTMENT LOCATIONS 1 and Figure 9-7).
c. Adjust the generator output for a 5-division vertical
signal display. I. INTERACTION-It may be necessary to compromise
the Vertical Output Amplifier and CH 1 Preamp adjustments
made in part k to obtain the best high-frequency match be-
d. CHECK-Flat-top display aberrations are within tween CH 1 and CH 2.
+3% (0.15 division or less). See Figure 5-1 for a typical
display.
28. Check CH 1 and CH 2 Transient Response
e. ADJUST-Vertical Output Amplifier HF Compensa- a. Set:
tion (R29, R32, and C33) for the best flat-top display (see VERTICAL MODE CH 1
Figure 5-1). VOLTSIDIV 5m

b. Set the generator output for a 5-division vertical

f. Set the A SECIDIV switch to 0.2~s. display.

REV NOV 1981

Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

c. Vertically center the display using the channel 1 POSI- q. Repeat parts I through o for CH 1.
TION control.

r. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.

d. CHECK-Flat-top waveform is within &3% (4.85 to
5.15 divisions).
21. Check Bandwidth
a. Set:
e. Position the top of the display to the bottom horizon-
tal graticule line. VERTICAL MODE CH 1
A SECIDIV 0.2 ms
TRIGGER SLOPE + (button out)
f. CHECK-Flat-top waveform is within +5% (4.75 to
5.25 divisions).
b. Connect the leveled sine-wave generator reference-
g. Repeat parts c and d for each of the following signal frequency (50 kHz) via a precision 5042 cable, a 10X
CH 1VOLTS/DIV switch settings: 10 m, 20 m, 50 m, 0.1 attenuator, and a 5042 termination to the CH 1 OR X
and 0.2. Adjust the generaor output and select attenuators input connector.
as necessary to maintain a 5-division display at each
VOLTSIDIV switch settings. c. Adjust the generator output for a 5-division vertical
display of the generator reference-signal frequency.

h. Reduce the generator output and set VERTICAL

MODE to CH 2 then move the test signal to the CH 2 OR Y d. Set the generator frequency to 100 MHz; do not
input connector. readjust the generator output amplitude.

i. Repeat parts b through g for CH 2. e. CHECK-Display amplitude is 3.5 divisions or more.

j. Set:
f. Repeat parts c, dl and e of this step for the following
VOLTSlDlV (both) 5m positions of the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch: 5 m through 1.
A TRIGGER SLOPE -(button in)

g. Set VERTICAL MODE to CH 2 and move the test

k. Connect a 100 kHz fast-rise, negative-going signal to the CH 2 OR Y input connector.
squarewave signal from the generator via a precision 5 0 4
cable, a 10X attenuator and a 5 0 4 termination to the
CH 2 OR Y input connector, and adjust the generator out- h. Repeat parts c, dl and e for the following positions
put for a 5-division vertical display. of the CH 2 VOLTSIDIV switch: 5 m through 1.

i. Disconnect the t e s t equipment from the instrument.

I. Vertically center the display using the CH 2 POSITION
control.
22. Check Trigger View Gain
a. Set:

m. CHECK-Flat-bottom waveform is within +. 5% (4.75 A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT

to 5.25 divisions). A TRIGGER LEVEL Midrange

b. Connect a 0.2-V standard-amplitude signal to the A

n. Position the bottom of the display to the top horizon- EXT input connector via a 50-!2 cable. Use no termination.
tal graticule line.
c. Hold in the TRIG VIEW push button and use the
o. CHECK-Flat-bottom waveform is within -t- 7% (4.65 A TRIGGER LEVEL control to vertically center the
to 5.35 divisions). display.

d. CHECK-Displayed signal amplitude i s 2 divisions

p. Set VERTICAL MODE to CH 1 and move the test sig- *40% (1.2 divisions to 2.8 divisions) while holding in the
nal to t h e CH 1 OR X input connector. TRIG VIEW push button.

REV NOV 1981

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

e. Set the A TRIGGER SOURCE switch to EXTG10 g. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.
and change the generator output t o 2 V.
25. Check Trigger View High-Frequency
Compensation
f. CH ECK-Repeat parts c and d. a. Set:

A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT

g. Disconnect the t e s t equipment from the instrument. A and B SECIDIV 0.2 p s (knobs locked)

23. Check Trigger View Centering

a. Set the A TRIGGER SOURCE switch to EXT. b. Connect a 100-kHz fast-rise, positive-going square-
wave signal to the A EXT input connector via a 5042
cable and a 5042 termination.
b. Connect a l-kHz, low-frequency sine-wave signal to
the A EXT input connector via a 50-S-2 cable. Use no
termination. c. Hold in the TRlG VlEW push button and adjust
the generator output for a signal display of 4 vertical
divisions. Use the A TRIGGER LEVEL control to vertically
c. Hold in the TRlG VlEW push button and set the center the display.
generator output t o obtain a 4-division vertical display. Use
the A TRIGGER LEVEL control to vertically center the
display. d. CHECK-Square-wave front-corner overshoot or roll-
off i s +20% or less (3.2 to 4.8 divisions) while holding in
the TRIG VIEW push button.
d. CHECK-Start of sweep is within + 1 vertical division
of the center horizontal graticule line.
e. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.
26. Check Trigger View Delay
e. Disconnect the t e s t equipment from the instrument. a. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CH 2
24. Check Trigger View Low-Frequency A and B SECIDIV 0.05 p s
Cornpensation X I 0 MAG On (button in)
a. Set: A TRIGGER COUPLING AC
A TRIGGER SLOPE + (button out)
A and B SECIDIV 0.1ms (knobs locked) A TRIGGER LEVEL Midrange
A TRIGGER SLOPE + (button out) A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT
A TRIG COUPLING DC CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 0.1

b. Connect a 100-kHz fast-rise, positive-going square-

b. Connect a l-kHz, high-amplitude square-wave signal
wave signal via a 50-f2 cable, a 5 0 4 termination and a dual-
to the A EXT input connector via a 5042 cable, a 2X
input coupler to the CH 2 OR Y input connector and the A
attenuator, and a 5042 termination.
EXT input connector.

c. Use the CH 2 POSITION control to vertically center

c. Hold in the TRlG VlEW push button and set the the trace on the graticule and use the Horizontal POSITION
generator output for a 4-division vertical display. Use the control to center the rising portion of the signal on the
A TRIGGER LEVEL control to vertically' center the center vertical graticule line.
display.

d. Hold in the TRlG VlEW push button and adjust the

d. CHECK-Square-wave leading-edge rolloff or over- generator output for a 5-division vertical display of the
shoot i s +20% or less (0.8 division or less) while holding in Trigger View signal. Vertically center the display using the
the TRIG VIEW push button. A TRIGGER LEVEL control.

e. Release the TRlG VlEW push button and adjust the

e. Set the A TRIGGER SOURCE switch to EXTGIO. CH 2 VOLTSIDIV and VAR controls to match the.
amplitude of the displayed signal to the amplitude of the
Trigger View signal. Vertically center the CH 2 display
f. CH ECK-Repeat parts c and d. using the CH 2 POSITION control.

REV NOV 1981

Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

f. CHECK-Time difference between the CH 2 and Trig- e. Move the t e s t signal t o the CH 1 OR X input
ger View signals (by alternately pressing in the TRlG VlEW connector.
push button and releasing it) is 3 ns + 2 ns (0.2 to 1 horizon-
tal graticule division). f. Set:

g. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument. CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.5

CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 10 m
VERTICAL MODE CH 2
27. Check Trigger View Bandwidth A TRIGGER SOURCE CH 1
a. Set: A TRIGGER LEVEL As required for stable
display
A and B SECIDIV 50 ps
X I 0 MAG Off (button out) g. CHECK-CH 2 display amplitude i s 4 divisions or
less.

b. Connect a leveled sine-wave generator's reference h. Disconnect the t e s t equipment from the instrument.
signal frequency via a precision 5042 cable and a 5 0 - a
termination t o the A EXT input connector.
29. Check Common-Mode Rejection Ratio
a. Set:
c. Press in the TRlG VlEW push button and adjust the
VOLTSIDIV (both) 10 m
generator output for a 4-division vertical display. Center
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
the display vertically using the A TRIGGER LEVEL
CH 2 INVERT Inverted (button in)
control.
b. Connect a 20-MHz leveled sine-wave signal via a
precision 5 0 - a cable, a 10X attenuator, a 5 0 - a termination,
d. Set the generator output frequency to 80 MHz; do and a dual-input coupler t o the CH 1 OR X and the CH 2
not readjust the generator output amplitude. OR Y input connectors.

c. Set the generator amplitude for a 6-division vertical

e. CHECK-For a display amplitude of 2.8 divisions or display.
more with the TRIG VIEW button held in.
d. Set VERTICAL MODE t o ADD.

f. Release the TRlG VlEW push button and move the

test signal from the A EXT input connector t o the CH 2 e. CHECK-ADD display amplitude i s 0.6 division or
OR Y input connector. less.

f. Press the CH 2 INVERT button to release it, then dis-

28. Check Channel Isolation
connect the test equipment from the instrument.
a. Set:
30. Check Bandwidth Limit Operation
A and B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 10 m a. Set:
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 0.5
AC-GND-DC (both) DC BW LIMIT Limited bandwidth
(button in)
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
b. Change the generator frequency to 25 MHz and
adjust the generator amplitude for an 8-division vertical b. Connect the leveled sine-wave generator's reference-
display. frequency signal via a precision 5 0 - a cable and a 5 0 - a
termination to the CH 1 OR X input connector.
c. Set: c. Set the generator output amplitude for a 6-division
vertical display.
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
A TRIGGER SOURCE CH 2 d. Increase the generator output frequency until the
A TRIGGER LEVEL As required for stable display decreases to 4.2 vertical divisions.
display
e. CHECK-Generator output frequency is set to
20 MHz, 2 5 MHz.
d. CHECK-CH 1 display amplitude i s 4 divisions or
less. f. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.

REV NOV 1981

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

TRIGGERING

Equipment Required (see Table 4-1 ):

Cali bration Generator (Item 2) Precision 5042 BNC Cable (Item 14)
Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 3) G R-to-BNC-MaleAdapter (Item 15)
50-!2 Signal Pickoff (Item 5) G R-to-BNC-Female Adapter (Item 16)
Two 50-!2 BNC Cables (Item 6) Low-Frequency Generator (Item 17)
Dual-Input Coupler (Item 8) Screwdriver (Item 21 )
10X Attenuator (Item 10) Low-Capacitance Alignment Tool (Item 23)
Two 50-!2 BNC Terminations (Item 13)

See at the back of this manual for test point and adjustment locations.

2336 CONTROL SETTINGS Sweep

HORlZ MODE A
A and B SECIDIV 20 ys (knobs locked)
LINE VOLTAGE TIME (PULL) VAR Pulled out
SELECTOR 115V B DELAY TlME
POWER ON (button in) POSITION Fully counterclockwise
A TIME POSITION Fully counterclockwise
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
CRT POSITION Midrange

INTEN As required for visible

display
FOCUS Best focused display
1. Adjust A Trigger Slope Offset (R82) and
A Hysteresis (R106)
Vertical a. Connect a leveled sine-wave generator via a precision
50-i-2 cable and a 50-!2 termination t o the CH 1 OR X
VERTICAL MODE CH 1 input connector.
POSiiiOi\l (both) Midrange
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 10 m
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV 0.2
VOLTSIDIV VAR (both) Calibrated detent b. Set the leveled sine-wave generator for a 50-kHz
AC-GND-DC (both) DC 4-division display, then switch the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out) control t o 0.2.
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth
(button out)
c. Rotate Hysteresis adjustment R106 fully counter-
clockwise, then adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control
for a stable display.
Trigger ( A and B, if applicable)
COUPLING AC
LEVEL As required for stable
d. Set the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch to 0.5.
display
SLOPE + (button out)
SOU RCE CH 1
A TRIGGER Mode AUTO e. ADJUST-Hysteresis (R 106) clockwise just until
TRIG HOLDOFF any setting of the A TRIGGER LEVEL control will not
(PUSH) VAR Off (in detent) obtain a stable display of a 0.08-division vertical signal.
Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

f. Set the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch to 0.2 and check h. ADJUST-B Trigger Slope Offset (R127) so that the
that adjusting the A TRIGGER LEVEL control will obtain display triggers at the same point on the waveform for both
a stable display on a 0.2-division vertical signal. the + (plus) and - (minus) SLOPE switch positions.

g. Repeat parts e and f until a stable display can be

obtained with a 0.2-division signal, but not with a 0.08-divi-
sion signal. 3. Adjust Vert Mode DC Level (R29)
a. Set:

h. Set the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch to 10 m and set A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
the A and B SECIDIV switches to 10 ys. HORlZ MODE A
A TRIGGER SLOPE + (button out)

i. ADJUST-A Trigger Slope Offset (R82) so that the b. Center the display vertically and use the A TRIGGER
display triggers a t the same point on the waveform for both LEVEL control to obtain a stable display with the wave-
the + (plus) and - (minus) SLOPE switch positions. form starting a t the center horizontal graticule line.

j. Repeat parts e through i until no improvement is

noted. c. Set the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch to DC.

2. Adjust B Trigger Slope Offset (R127) and d. ADJUST-Vert Mode DC Level (R29) for a stable
B Hysteresis (R163) triggered display which s t a r t s a t the center horizontal
graticule line.
a. Set:

A and B SECIDIV 20 ys (knobs locked)

e. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.
HORlZ MODE B
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.2

b. Rotate B Hysteresis adjustment R163 fully counter-

clockwise, then adjust the B TRIGGER LEVEL control
for a stable display. 4. Check A and B Internal Triggering
a. Connect a 60-Hz low-frequency sine-wave signal to
the CH 1 OR X input connector via a 50-i-2 cable, a 10X
c. Set the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch to 0.5. attenuator, a 2X attenuator, and a 5042 termination.

d. ADJUST-B Hysteresis (R163) clockwise just until b. Set the A and B SECIDIV switches to 5 ms.
any setting of the B TRIGGER LEVEL control will not
obtain a stable display of a 0.08-division vertical signal.
c. Adjust the generator output for a 6-division vertical
display. Then set the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch to 0.2 t o
e. Set the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch to 0.2 and check obtain a 0.3-division vertical signal display.
that adjusting the B TRIGGER LEVEL control will obtain
a stable display on a 0.2-division vertical signal.
d. CHECK-Stable display can be obtained and the
TRIG'D LED i s illuminated by adjusting the A TRIGGER
f. Repeat parts b through e until a stable display can LEVEL control for each of the switch combinations listed
be obtained with a 0.2-division signal but not with a in Table 5-4, except as noted in Table 5-4 footnotes.
0.08-division signal.

e. CHECK-Stable display cannot be obtained for any

g. Set the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch to 10 m and set position of the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch excep-
the A and B SECIDIV switches to 10 ys. tioned in Table 5-4.

REV NOV 1981

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

Table 5-4 k. CHECK-Stable display can be obtained, and the

TRIG'D LED i s illuminated by adjusting the A TRIGGER
Switch Combinations for A Trigger Checks (CH 1)
LEVEL control for each of the switch combinations listed
in Table 5-6, except as noted in Table 5-6 footnotes.
A TRIGGER A TRIGGER A
COUPLING SOURCE SLOPE

+ and - I. CHECK-Stable display cannot be obtained for any

AC VERT MODE
position of the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch excep-
CH 1 - and +
tioned in Table 5-6.
LF R E J ~ CH 1 + and -
VERT MODE - and +
Table 5-6
HF R E J ~ VERT MODE + and - Switch Combinations for A Trigger Checks (CH 2)
CH 1 - and +

DC 1 CHI
VERT MODE
+ and -
- and +
AC TRIGGER COUPLING

AC
I A TRIGGER SLOPE

+ and -
LF REJa - and +
a ~ i lnot
l trigger at 60 Hz in A HORIZ MODE.
b ~ i lnot
l trigger at 2 0 MHz and 100 MHz in A HORIZ MODE.
HF R E J ~ I + and -
DC I - and t

f. Set the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch to AC and

obtain a stable display using the A TRIGGER LEVEL a ~ i lnot
l trigger at 6 0 Hz in A HORlZ MODE.
control. l trigger at 20 MHz and 100 MHz in A HORlZ MODE.
b ~ i lnot

g. Set HORlZ MODE to B. m. Set the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch to AC and

obtain a stable display using the A TRIGGER LEVEL
control.
h. CHECK-Stable display can be obtained by adjusting
the B TRIGGER LEVEL control for each of the switch
combinations listed in Table 5-5. n. Set HORlZ MODE t o B.

Table 5-5 o. CH ECK-Stable display can be obtained by adjusting

the B TRIGGER LEVEL with B TRIGGER SLOPE a t
Switch Combinations for B Trigger Checks
either + or -.
B TRIGGER SOURCE B TRIGGER SLOPE

+ and - p. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.

VERT MODE

CH 1 I + and -
q. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CH 1
i. Move the input signal from the CH 1 OR X input CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 10 m
connector to the CH 2 OR Y input connector. HORlZ MODE A
A and B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
j. Set: B TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE

VERTICAL MODE CH 2
HORlZ MODE A r. Connect a 20-MHz leveled sine-wave signal to the
A TRIGGER SOURCE CH 2 CH 1 OR X input connector via a 5042 cable and a 5042
B TRIGGER SOURCE CH 2 termination.
Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

s. Repeat parts b through o for the 20-MHz signal. 6. Check A and B External Triggering and Jitter
a. Set:

t. Set: CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 10 m
A and B SECIDIV 5 ms
VERTICAL MODE CH 1 A TRIGGER COUPLING AC
HORlZ MODE A A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT
X I 0 MAG On (button in) B TRIGGER SOURCE EXT
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
B TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
b. Connect a 60-Hz sine-wave signal to the CH 1 OR X
and the A EXT input connectors via a 50-i-2 cable, a 10X
attenuator, a 2X attenuator, a 50-i-2 termination, and a
u. Set the generator to produce a 100-MHz, 1.1-division dual-input coupler.
vertical display.

c. Set the generator output for a 5-division vertical

v. Repeat parts d through o for the 100-MHz signal. display.

d. Repeat Step 4, parts k and I.

5. Adjust A External Trigger DC Level (R41)

a. Set: e. Set the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch to AC and
obtain a stable display using the A TRIGGER LEVEL
A TRIGGER COUPLING AC control.
A and B SECIDIV 20 p s
X I 0 MAG o f f (button out)
f. Set HORlZ MODE to B and move the signal from the
HORlZ MODE A
A EXT input connector to the B EXT input connector.
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT

g. CH ECK-Stable display can be obtained by adjusting

b. Move the input signal to the A EXT input connector.
the B TRIGGER LEVEL control with the B TRIGGER
SLOPE switch in either + or -.

c. Set the leveled sine-wave generator to 50 kHz. Hold

in the TRIG VIEW push button and adjust the generator
output to obtain a 4-division vertical display. h. Remove the 10X attenuator from the t e s t setup and
move the signal from the B EXT input connector to the
A EXT input connector.

d. Vertically center the display using the A TRIGGER

LEVEL control. Readjust the generator output amplitude
(if necessary) for a 4-division display. i. Set:

CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.1
HORlZ MODE A
e. Set the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch to DC. A TRIGGER SOURCE EXTe10

f. ADJUST-A External Trigger Level (R4 1) to

vertically center the display. j. Repeat Step 4, parts k and I.

g. Disconnect the t e s t equipment from the instrument. k. Connect the t e s t setup as shown in Figure 4-1.
 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

I. Set: x. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CH 2 VERTICAL MODE CH 1

VOLTSIDIV (both) 10 m A and B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
A and B SECIDIV 20 ps X I 0 MAG On (button in)
A TRIGGER COUPLING AC A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE

y. Set the generator to 100 MHz.

m. Set the leveled sine-wave generator for a 50-kHz,
5-division display.
z. Move the signal from the CH 2 OR Y input connector
to the A EXT input connector.
n. Set:

VERTICAL MODE CH 1 aa. Repeat Step 4, parts k and I.

A and B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT
ab. Repeat parts e through h of this step.

o. Set the generator to 20 MHz.

ac. Set:

p. Move the signal from the CH 2 OR Y input connector HORlZ MODE A

t o the A EXT input connector. A TRIGGER SOURCE EXTGI 0

q. Repeat Step 4, parts k and I. ad. Repeat Step 4, parts k and I.

r. Repeat parts e through h of this step. ae. Set the A TRIGGER COUPLING switch to AC and
adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control for a stable display.

s. Set: af. CHECK-For less than 0.2 division horizontal wave-

form jitter.
HORlZ MODE A
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXTG10
ag. Set the A TRIGGER SOURCE switch to EXT and
reinsert the 10X attenuator into the test setup.
t. Repeat Step 4, parts k and I.

ah. CHECK-For less than 0.2 division horizontal

waveform jitter.
u. Reconnect the t e s t setup as shown in Figure 4-1.

7. Check NORM Triggering Mode Operation

a. Set the A TRIGGER SOURCE switch to VERT
v. Set:
MODE.
VERTICAL MODE CH 2
VOLTSID IV (both) 50 m
A and B SECIDIV 20 ps b. Adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control for a stable
A TRIGGER COUPLING AC display.
A TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE

c. Set ATRIGGER Mode to NORM.

w. Set the leveled sine-wave generator for a 50-kHz,

3-division display. d. CHECK-For a visible, stable display.
Adjustment Procedu re-2336 Service

e. Set the CH 1 AC-GND-DC switch t o GND. b. Connect a leveled sine-wave reference-frequency

signal via a precision 5042 cable, a 5042 termination, and
a dual-input coupler t o the CH 1 OR X and A EXT input
f. CHECK-For no visible display. connectors.

8. Check SGL SWP Mode Operation c. Set the generator output for a 4-division vertical
a. Set: display.

CH 1 AC-GND-DC DC
X I 0 MAG Off (button in) d. CHECK-Display is triggered along the entire positive
A and B SECIDIV 20 ps slope of the waveform as the A TRIGGER LEVEL control
i s rotated.

b. Adjust the leveled sine-wave generator output for a

50-kHz, 2-division vertical display. e. CHECK-Display i s not triggered (free runs) at
either extreme of rotation.

c. Adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control until the

display just triggers. f. Set the A TRIGGER SLOPE switch to -.

d. Set the CH 1 AC-GND-DC switch to GND. g. CHECK-Display i s triggered along the entire negative
slope of the waveform as the A TRIGGER LEVEL control
is rotated.
e. Press in the SGL SWP push button. The READY LED
should illuminate and remain on.
h. CHECK-Display is not triggered (free runs) at either
extreme of rotation.
f. Set the CH 1 AC-GND-DC switch to DC.

g. CHECK-READY LED goes out, and a single sweep i. Move the input signal from the A EXT input con-
OCCU rs. nector t o the B EXT input connector.

NOTE j. Set:
The INTEN control may require adjustment t o
A TRIGGER LEVEL Fully counterclockwise
observe the single-sweep trace.
HORlZ MODE B

h. Press in the SGL SWP push button several times.

k. CHECK-Display i s triggered along the entire positive
slope of the waveform as the B TRIGGER LEVEL control
i s rotated.
i. CH ECK-Single-sweep trace occurs, and READY
LED illuminates briefly every time the SGL SWP push
button is pressed in and released. I. CHECK-Display is not triggered (not visible) at
either extreme of rotation.

j. Disconnect the t e s t equipment from the instrument.

m. Set the B TRIGGER SLOPE switch to -.
Check A and B External Trigger Level Ranges
a. Set: n. CHECK-Display is triggered along the entire negative
slope of the waveform as the B TRIGGER LEVEL control
A TRIGGER COUPLING AC i s rotated.
TRIGGER SLOPE (both) +
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.5
A TRIGGER Mode AUTO o. CHECK-Display is not triggered (not visible) at
TRIGGER SOURCE (both) EXT either extreme of rotation.
 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

p. Disconnect the test setup. w. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.

q. Set:

HORlZ DISPLAY A
A TRIGGER SOURCE EXT+10
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 5 10. Check Line Triggers
CH 1 VAR Fully counterclockwise a. Set:
A TRIGGER COUPLING AC
A and B SECIDIV 0.2 m A TRIGGER Mode AUTO
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 10 m
A TRIGGER SOURCE LINE
r. Connect the calibration generator standard-amplitude A TRIGGER SLOPE + (button out)
output to the A EXT input connector via a 50-!2 cable. A SECIDIV 5 ms
Adjust the generator output to 20 volts. CH 1 AC-GND-DC DC

s. Press in and hold the TRIG VIEW push button.

b. Connect a 10X probe to the CH 1 OR X input
connector and place the probe tip next to the line cord.

t. CHECK-Display i s triggered along the entire negative

slope of the waveform as the A TRIGGER LEVEL control c. Set the CH 1 VOLTS/DIV switch to obtain a display
i s rotated. amplitude of about 3 to 4 divisions.

u. Set the A TRIGGER SLOPE switch to +. d. CHECK-A stable display can be obtained by
adjusting the A TRIGGER LEVEL control, with the A
TRIGGER SLOPE switch set to either + or -.
v. CHECK-Display is triggered along the entire positive
slope of the waveform as the A TRIGGER LEVEL control
i s rotated. e. Disconnect the 10X probe from the instrument.
Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

HORIZONTAL

Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) :

Test Oscilloscope with 10X Probe (Item 1) 50-C2 BNC Termination (Item 13)
Calibration Generator (Item 2) Precision 50-C2 BNC Cable (Item 14)
Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 3) Low-Frequency Generator (Item 17)
Time-Mark Generator (Item 4) Screwdriver (Item 2 1)
50-C2 BNC Cable (Item 6) Low-CapacitanceAlignment Tool (Item 23)
Dual-Input Coupler (Item 8)

See at the back of this manual for test point and adjustment locations.

2336 CONTROL SETTINGS Sweep

HORlZ MODE A INTEN
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked)
LINE VOLTAGE TlME (PULL) VAR Pulled out and in
SELECTOR 115V calibrated detent
POWER ON (button in) B DELAY TlME
POSITION Fully counterclockwise
A TlME POSITION Fully clockwise
CRT X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
INTEN As required for visible POSITION Midrange
display
FOCUS Best focused display

Vertical (Both Channels) 1. Check A INTEN Operation

VERTICAL MODE CH 1
a. Vertically center the trace using the CH 1 POSITION
POSITION Midrange
control.
VOLTSIDIV 0.2
VOLTSIDIV VAR Calibrated detent
AC-GND-DC DC
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out)
b. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth
start of the intensified zone with the first (extreme left)
(button out)
vertical graticule line.

Trigger
COUPLING AC c. Set the LCD readout to 10.00 ms using the A TlME
LEVEL As required for stable POSITION control.
display
SLOPE (both) + (button out)
A SOURCE CH 1
B SOURCE A TlME d. CHECK-Intensified portion of the trace decreases
Mode AUTO one graticule division as the B DELAY TlME POSITION
TRIG HOLDOFF dial is rotated clockwise to each whole number LCD
(PUSH) VAR Off (in detent) readout (9.00, 8.00, etc.) down to zero.
 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

2. Adjust A Sweep Start and Sweep Stop b. Select 1-ms time markers from the time-mark gener-
(R74 and R6) ator and use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the
first time marker with the first vertical graticule line. Set the
a. Set: B DELAY TlME POSITION control to place the intensified
zone at the second graticule line. Set the A TlME POSITION
A SECIDIV 2 ms control for a A TlME digital readout of 8.00 ms. Set HORlZ
B SECIDIV 5 PS MODE to B and set the time-mark generator variable timing
B DELAY TlME control to superimpose the displayed time marks. Do not
POSITION Fully Counterclockwise change the time mark generator settings for the remainder
B TRIGGER SOURCE RUNS AFTER DLY
of Step 3.

c. Set HORlZ MODE to A INTEN and align both intensi-

b. Connect 0.1-ms time markers from the time-mark fied zones with the second vertic,\l graticule line using both
generator via a 50-a cable and a 5042 termination to the the B DELAY TlME POSITION and the A TlME POSITION
CH 1 OR X input connector. controls.

d. Set HORlZ MODE to B.

c. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the
start of the trace with the center vertical graticule line. e. Use the A TlME POSITION control to superimpose
the time markers.

d. Press in the X I 0 MAG push button. f. CHECK-A Time readout i s -.001 to ,001 ms.

g. Rotate the A TlME POSITION control clockwise

e. ADJUST-A Sweep Start (R74) so the intensified
until the next time marker that appears is aligned with the
zone is on the third time marker.
reference time marker (positioned by the B DELAY TlME
POSITION control).
f. Set:
h. CHECK-A Time readout is .998 t o 1.002 ms.
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
B SECIDIV 20 ps
B TRIGGER SOURCE A TIME NOTE
The position of the A Time marker with respect to
the reference may be determined by setting HO RIZ
g. Select 2-ms time markers from the time-mark
MODE t o A INTEN. Then return HORIZ MODE t o
generator and use the B DELAY TlME POSITION control
B and align the time markers.
to set the B Delay intensified zone on the second time
marker.
i. Rotate the A TlME POSITION control clockwise,
past the next time marker that appears, and align the suc-
h. Use the A TlME POSITION control to obtain a ceeding time marker with the reference.
A Time readout of 16.00 ms.

j. CHECK-A Time readout i s within the limits shown

i. Set the HORlZ MODE to B and use the Horizontal in Table 5-7, under the column heading "Reference Time
POSITION control to center the display. Marker a t 2nd Vertical Graticule."

j. ADJUST-Sweep Stop (R6) to superimpose the time k. Repeat parts i and j for the 7th, 9th, and Il t h time
markers. markers.

3. Check A Time Readout Linearity I. Set the HORlZ MODE to A INTEN.

a. Set:

A SECIDIV 1 ms m. Rotate the B DELAY TlME POSITION control

B SECIDIV lops clockwise until the two intensified zones are aligned at the
HORlZ MODE A INTEN IIth vertical graticule line.

REV NOV 1981

Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

Table 5-7 c. Align the intensified zones with the second time
marker using the B DELAY TlME POSITION and A TlME
A Time Linearity
POSITION controls.
Time Marker I Reference Time Marker at:
Aligned With
d. Set HORlZ MODE to B.
Vertical 2nd Il t h
Graticule 1 Vertical Graticule / Vertical Graticule
e. Align the rising edges of the time markers with the
center vertical graticule line using the B DELAY TIME
POSITION and A TlME POSITION controls.

f. CHECK-For 1 division or less of horizontal jitter on

the rising edges of the time markers.
n. Rotate the A TlME POSITION control counterclock-
wise until the intensified zone is aligned with the 3rd
vertical graticule line. g. Rotate the A TlME POSITION control clockwise to
bring each succeeding time marker within the graticule
viewing area (up to a A Time readout of 9 ms) and CHECK
for 1 division or less of pulse jitter on the rising edge of
o. Set HORlZ MODE t o B.
each time marker.

p. Use the A TIME POSITION control to superimpose

h. Rotate the B DELAY TlME POSITION control
the time markers.
clockwise to bring each succeeding time marker within the
graticule viewing area (down to a A Time readout of
.000 ms) and CHECK for 1 division or less of pulse jitter
q. CHECK-A Time readout is -7.91 to -8.09 ms.
on the rising edges of the time markers.

r. Rotate the A TlME POSITION control clockwise,

past the next time marker that appears, and align the suc-
ceeding time marker with the reference.
5. CheckIAdjust X I and X I 0 Horizontal Gain
(R126 and R127)
s. CHECK-A Time readout i s within the limits shown
a. Set HORlZ MODE t o A.
in Table 5-7, under the column heading "Reference Time
Marker a t 1I t h Vertical Graticule."

b. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the

t. R~~~~~ parts and for the 7th. gth, and lth time first time marker with the first vertical graticule line
markers. (extreme left edge).

u. Set the time-mark generaor for calibrated time marks

(set variable to off). c. CHECK-For 1 time marker per division across the
full 10 divisions (within 0.2 division a t the 11th time
marker).
4. Check Delay Jitter
a. Set: d. ADJUST-XI Gain (Rl26) for exactly 1 time marker
per division.
A SECIDIV 1 ms
B SECIDIV 0.5 ps
B TRIGGER SOURCE A TIME e. Press in the X I 0 MAG push button and select 0.1-ms
HORlZ MODE A INTEN time markers from the time-mark generator.

b. Select I-ms time markers from the time-mark f. Align the nearest time marker with the first vertical
generator. graticule line.

REV NOV 1981

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

g. CHECK-For 1 time marker per division across the d. CHECK-The B Sweep starts at the center vertical
full 10 divisions (within 0.3 division at the 11th time graticule line.
marker).

e. ADJUST-B Time (R10) to move the start of the

h. ADJUST-XI0 Gain (R127) for exactly 1 time B Sweep to the center vertical graticule line.
marker per division.

6. CheckIAdjust X I 0 MAG Registration (R 134) 8. Check A and B Timing Accuracy and Linearity
a. Position the time-marker baseline t o the bottom a. Set:
horizorital graticule line using the CH 1 POSITION control.
A and B SEC/DIV 0.05 ps (knobs locked)
HORIZ MODE A
b. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to position CH 1 AC-GND-DC DC
the displayed time marker to the center vertical graticule X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
line.

b. Select 50-ns time markers from the time-mark

c. Release the X I 0 MAG push button (button out). generator.

d. CHECK-Time marker remains centered within 0.2 c. Adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control for a stable
division of the center vertical graticule line. display and vertically center the display using the CH 1
POSITION control.

e. Use the Horizontal POSITION control t o position

the trace while switching between X I 0 MAG On and X I 0 d. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the
MAG Off. ( I t i s not necessary to latch the X I 0 MAG first time marker with the first vertical graticule line.
button On. It need only be pressed in enough to display
the magnified sweep.) Position the trace horizontally until
no shift is observed between the center unmagnified time e. CHECK-The SECIDIV timing accuracy is within
marker and the magnified time marker. 2% (0.2 division at the Il t h time marker), and linearity i s
within 5% (0.1 division over any 2-division portion of the
graticule).
f. ADJUST-Mag Registration (R134) t o align the
center unmagnified time marker with the center vertical f. Repeat part e for A SECIDIV switch settings of
graticule line. 0.1 ps to 2 ps in Table 5-8. Readjust the A TRIGGER
LEVEL and Horizontal POSITION control as necessary.
I f the timing accuracy and linearity at any one of these
settings are not within tolerance, perform Step 9 immedi-
7. CheckIAdjust B Time (R10) ately. I f they are all within tolerance, complete the CHECK
a. Set: for the 5-ps to 0.5-s settings of the A SECIDIV switch.

X I 0 MAG On (button in)

B TRIGGER SOURCE RUNS AFTER DLY NOTE
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked) For the A SEC/DI V settings from 50 ms to 0.5 s per
CH 1 AC-GND-DC GND division, watch the time marker tips only at the 1st
and 17th graticule lines while adjusting the Hori-
zontal POSITION control and checking the timing
b. Use the CH 1 POSITION control t o vertically center accuracy.
the trace and use the Horizontal POSITION control to align
the start of the A Sweep with the center vertical graticule
line. g. Set:

X I 0 MAG On (button in)

c. Set HORlZ MODE t o 6. A TRIGGER Mode AUTO
Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

Table 5-8 i. Set:

Settings for Timing Accuracy Checks
HORlZ MODE B
Time-Mark Generator Output
B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
A and B
A SECIDIV 0.1 ps
SECIDIV
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
Switch Setting Normal XI0 MAG
A TRIGGER Mode AUTO

j. Select 50-ns time markers from the time-mark

generator and adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control
(if necessary) for a stable display.

k. CHECK-Repeat parts e through h for the B Sweep.

I. Skip to Step 10 if either the accuracy and linearity

checks are within tolerance or if Step 9 has been previously
completed.

9. Adjust A and B Timing Accuracy and Linearity

(C84, C22, C161, and C187)
a. Set:

A SECIDIV 1 PS
B SECIDIV 0.05 ps
HORlZ MODE A
A Sweep Only X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
B TRIGGER SOURCE A TIME

b. Select I - p s time markers from the time-mark gener-

ator and use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the
a ~ o SECIDIV
r switch settings slowerthan 5 ms, set the A TRIGGER first time marker with the first vertical graticule line.
Mode t o NORM.

c. ADJUST-The A Sweep High-speed Timing (C84)

t o obtain one time marker per division across the graticule
area.

d. Set HORlZ MODE to A INTEN and rotate the B

h. CHECK-The A Magnified timing accuracy and DELAY TlME POSITION control to position one inten-
linearity using the SECIDIV switch settings and the time- sified zone on the second time marker. Use the A TlME
mark generator settings given in Table 5-8 under the " X I 0 POSITION control t o position the other intensified zone
MAG" column. At each setting combination, timing must until the LCD readout i s 8.00 ps.
be accurate to within 3% (0.3 division at the Il t h time
marker). When checking accuracy, exclude the first and last
40 ns of the sweep. Linearity must be within 5% (0.1 e. Set HORlZ MODE t o B.
division) over any 2-division portion of the graticule. When
checking linearity, exclude the first- and last-displayed
divisions for the A and B SECIDIV switch settings of f. ADJUST-The A Sweep High-speed Timing (C84) t o
0.05 ps and 0.1 p s . superimpose the two displayed time markers.
 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

g. Set: d. Set HORlZ MODE to B and use the A TlME

POSITION control to superimpose the time markers.
B SECIDIV 0.2 p s
B TRIGGER SOURCE RUNS AFTER DLY

e. CHECK-A Time readout i s within the range of

h. Select 0.2-ps time markers from the time-mark values specified in Table 5-9 for the SECIDIV switches and
generator. time-marker settings used.

i. ADJUST-The B Sweep High-speed Timing (C22)

to obtain one time marker per division across the graticule f. Repeat part e for the remaining A and B SECIDIV
area. switch settings and time-marker combinations listed in
Table 5-9. Use the A TlME POSITION control to super-
j. Set: impose the time markers at each SECIDIV switch setting
before checking the A Time readout accuracy.
A SECIDIV 0.5 ps
HORlZ MODE A
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.1 V
X I 0 MAG On (button in)

k. Select 10-ns time markers from the time-mark Table 5-9

generator. A Time Readout Accuracy

NOTE
In the next part, keep the adjustment screws for Time A Time
C 161 and C 187as close to the same length as possible. Readout

I. ADJUST-The 5-ns Timing (C161 and C187 alter- 0.2 ,us 0.05 ps 0.2 p s 1.583 ps t o 1.617 ps
-- nately) for one time marker every two divisions over the 0.5 ps 0.05 ps 0.5 ps 3.95 p s t o 4.05 ps
center 10 divisions of the magnified sweep.
1 PS 0.1 ps 1 ,us
m. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 as necessary until all timing 2 PS 0.1 ps 2 ,us
ranges are within tolerance. 5 PS 0.5 ps 5 PS

10 ps 1 PS lops
10. Check A Time Readout Accuracy 20 ps 1 PS 20 ps
a. Set: 50 ps 5~.ls 50 ps

CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 0.2 V 0.1 ms lops O.1ms

A SECIDIV 0.2 ,us 0.2 ms lops 0.2ms
B SECIDIV 0.05 p s 0.5 ms 50ps 0.5 ms
HORlZ MODE A INTEN
A TRIGGER Mode AUTO 1 ms 0.1 ms 1 ms
B TRIGGER SOURCE A TIME 2 ms 0.1 ms 2 ms
X I 0 MAG Off (button out) 5 ms 0.5 ms 5 ms

10 msa 1 ms 10 ms
b. Select 0.2-p~ time markers from the time-mark
20 msa 1 ms 20 ms
generator.
50 msa 5 ms 50 ms

c. Use the B DELAY TlME POSITION control t o 0.1 sa 10ms 0.1s

position the start of one intensified zone t o the left of the 0.2 sa lOms 0.2s
second vertical graticule line. Use the A TlME POSITION 0.5 sa 50 ms 0.5 s
control to position the start of the other intensified zone
just t o the left of the tenth vertical graticule line (A Time a ~ o SECIDIV
r switch settings slower than 5 ms, set the A
readout should be about 1.600 ps). TRIGGER Mode t o NORM.

REV NOV 1981

Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

1 1. Check A and B Sweep Length d. CHECK-At least one time marker per division can be
obtained by rotating the TlME (PULL) VAR control
a. Set:
counterclockwise.
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked)
B TRIGGER SOURCE VERT MODE
e. Return the TlME (PULL) VAR control t o its
B DELAY TlME
calibrated detent.
POSITION Fully counterclockwise
A TRIGGER Mode AUTO

b. Select I-ms time markers from the time-mark

generator.

13. Check A and B Sweep Horizontal POSITION

c. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to position the Range
second time marker to the first vertical graticule line.
a. Set the A and B SECIDIV switches t o 1 ms and rotate
the Horizontal POSITION control fully counterclockwise.

d. CHECK-Horizontal trace extends at least 0.5

division, but not more than 1.5 divisions, past the IIth b. CHECK-Sweep ends t o the left of the center vertical
time marker. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to graticule line.
position the trace farther to the left if necessary.

c. Rotate the Horizontal POSITION control fully

e. Set: clockwise.

A SECIDIV
B SECIDIV d. CHECK-Sweep begins t o the right of the center
HORlZ MODE vertical graticule line.

e. Set:
f. Use the B DELAY TlME POSITION control to align
the nearest time marker with the first vertical graticule line.
HORlZ MODE B
Horizontal POSITION Fully counterclockwise
g. CHECK-Repeat part d for the B Sweep.
f. CHECK-Repeat parts b through d for the B Sweep.

g. Press in the X I 0 MAG push button.

12. Check A SECIDIV VAR Range h. Rotate the Horizontal POSITION control counter-
a. Set: clockwise to position a time marker to the second vertical
graticule line. If the marker moves past the line, continue
HORlZ MODE A rotating counterclockwise until the next time marker
A and B SECIDIV 2 ms (knobs locked) reaches the second vertical graticule line.
TIME (PULL) VAR Pulled out and in
calibrated detent
i. Gently rotate the Horizontal POSITION control
clockwise until the coarse position potentiometer i s
b. Select 5-ms time markers from the time-mark engaged and stop. Note the trace starting point on the
generator. graticu le.

c. Use the Horizontal POSITION control to align the j. CHECK-Trace begins 4 to 9 divisions to the right of
first time marker with the first vertical graticule line. the second vertical graticule line.
 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

14. Check AUTO Recovery 16. Check X-Y Bandwidth and Phasing
a. Set: a. Connect a 50-kHz leveled sine-wave signal via a
precision 5042 cable, a 50-!2 termination, and a dual-input
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked) coupler to the CH 1 OR X and the CH 2 OR Y input
HORlZ MODE A connectors.
Horizontal POSITION Midrange
A TRIGGER Mode AUTO
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
b. Set the generator output amplitude t o obtain a
6-division horizontal display.

b. Select 0.1-s time markers from the time-mark

generator and adjust the A TRIGGER LEVEL control for
a stable display. c. Adjust the generator output frequency to 2 MHz; do
not change the generator output amplitude control setting.

c. Select 0.5-s time markers.

d. CHECK-For 4.2 divisions or more horizontal
deflection a t 2 MHz.
d. CHECK-Display cannot be triggered (free runs).

e. Set the CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTSIDIV t o 0.2.

e. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.

f. Disconnect the leveled sine-wave generator from the

test setup and connect a low-frequency sine-wave generator.
Set the generator output frequency to 200 kHz and adjust
, the output amplitude for 6 divisions of horizontal
deflection.
15. CheckIAdjust X-Y Gain (R148)
a. Set:

A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked) g. Set the CH 2 AC-GND-DC switch to DC.

VERTICAL MODE X-Y (both CH 1 and CH 2
buttons in)
VOLTSIDIV (both) 10 m h. Vertically center the display using the CH 2 .
CH 1 AC-GND-DC DC POSITION control.
CH 2 AC-GND-DC GND
HORlZ MODE A
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
i. CHECK-For a horizontal ellipse opening of 0.3
division or less.
b. Connect a 50-mV standard-amplitude signal from the
calibration generator to the CH 1 OR X input connector
via a 5042 cable.
j. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.

c. CHECK-Spacing between the two dots is 5 divisions

f0.25 division (4.75 to 5.25 divisions).

d. ADJUST-X-Y Gain (R148) for a 5-division hori-

zontal spacing between the dots.
17. Check A Trigger Holdoff
a. Connect the test oscilloscope 10X probe tip to TP55
e. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument. and connect the probe ground lead to TP194.
Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

b. Set test oscilloscope controls initially as follows: Table 5- 10

A Trigger Holdoff Time
VoltsIDiv 2v
SecIDiv 1 I-ls
Trig Mode Norm
A SECIDIV Approximate
Switch Settings Holdoff Time

c. Set VERT MODE t o CH 1 and A TRIGGER

SOURCE t o EXT.

d. CHECK-Trigger holdoff time corresponds approxi-

mately to the times listed in Table 5-10 for each range of
A SECIDIV switch settings. Trigger holdoff is defined as
the +2-V level of the sweep waveform after recovery but
before it starts a negative-going ramp. Set test oscilloscope
SecIDiv control as required to make the time measurements.

e. Set A SECIDIV to 0.5 ms and rotate VAR TRIG f. CHECK-That holdoff time increases by a factor of at
HOLDOFF fully counterclockwise. least 2.5.

REV NOV 1981

 Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

EXTERNAL Z-AXIS AND CALIBRATOR,

I Equipment Required (see Table 4-1) : I

Calibration Generator (Item 2) Two 50-52 BNC Terminations (Item 13)
Leveled Sine-Wave Generator (Item 3) Digital Voltmeter (Item 19)
Two 50-52 BNC Cables (Item 6) Shorting Strap (Item 22)
BNC T-Connector (Item 9)

See at the back o f this manual for test point and adjustment locations.
-
-- -

2336 CONTROL SETTINGS Sweep

HORlZ MODE A
A and B SECIDIV 2 ms (knobs locked)
LINE VOLTAGE TIME (PULL) VAR Pulled out and in
SELECTOR 115V calibrated detent
POWER ON (button in) B DELAY TlME
POSITION Fully counterclockwise
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
POSITION Midrange
CRT
INTEN As required for visible
trace
FOCUS Best focused display

1. Check External 2-Axis Operation

a. Connect a 5-V standard-amplitude square-wave signal
Vertical (Both Channels) to the CH 1 OR X input connector and the EXT Z-AXIS
VERTICAL MODE CH 1 input connector (located on the rear panel) via a 50-52
Midrange T-connector and two 50-52 cables.
POSITION
VOLTSIDIV 2
VOLTSIDIV VAR Calibrated detent
b. CH ECK-For noticeable intensity modulation of the
AC-GN D-DC DC
trace when the INTEN control i s set for normal-viewing
CH 2 INVERT Normal (button out)
brightness. Adjust the TlME (PULL) VAR control, i f neces-
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth
sary, to observe the modulation. Return the TlME (PULL)
(button out)
VAR control to the calibrated detent.

c. Disconnect the test setup.

Trigger
COUPLING AC
LEVEL As required for stable d. Set the A SECIDIV switch to 0.05 ps.
display
SLOPE + (button out)
SOURCE VERT MODE e. Connect a 5-V, 20-MHz leveled sine-wave signal to
Mode AUTO the CH 1 OR X input connector and the EXT Z-AXIS
TRIG HOLDOFF input connector via a 50-52 T-connector, two 50-52 cables,
(PUSH) VAR Off (in detent) and two 50-52 terminations.
Adjustment Procedure-2336 Service

f. CHECK-Repeat part b. c. CHECK-For a 2-division vertical display of the

AMPL CAL square-wave signal with a period of 1 ms +25%
(0.75 to 1.25 ms).
g. Disconnect the t e s t equipment from the instrument.

d. Connect the digital voltmeter LO lead to chassis

ground and connect the HI lead t o the AMPL CAL
connector center pin.
2. Check AMPL CAL Operation
a. Set:
e. Connect a shorting strap between TP246 and TP250.
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV 10 m
A and B SECIDIV 1 ms (knobs locked)
f. CHECK-AMPL CAL output voltage i s 200 mV * I %
(198 t o 202 mV).
b. Connect the 10X probe (supplied with the 2336)
to the CH 1 OR X input connector. Insert the probe t i p
into the AMPL CAL connector. g. Disconnect all t e s t equipment from the instrument.
 Section 6-2336 Service

MAINTENANCE
This section of the manual contains information for conducting preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, and corrective
maintenance on the 2336 Oscilloscope.

STATIC-SENSITIVE COMPONENTS

The following precautions are applicable when per- 5. Keep the component leads shorted together whenever
forming any maintenance involving internal access t o the possible.
instrument.

6. Pick up components by their bodies, never by their

CAUTION leads.

Static discharge can damage any semiconductor

component in this instrument. Table 6-1
Relative Susceptibility to
- Static-Discharge Damage
This instrument contains electrical components that are
susceptible to damage from static discharge. Table 6-1 Relative
l i s t s the relative susceptibility of various classes of semi- Susceptibilitj
conductors. Static voltages of 1 k V t o 30 kV are common Semiconductor Classes Levelsa
in unprotected environments.
VlOS or CMOS microcircuits or
Jiscretes, or linear microcircuits with
When performing maintenance observe the following VlOS inputs (Most Sensitive)
precautions to avoid component damage:
ECL

1. Minimize handling of static-sensitive components. Schottky signal diodes

Schottky TTL
2. Transport and store static-sensitive components or
assemblies in their original containers or on a metal rail. Y igh-frequency bipolar transistors
Label any package that contains static-sensitive components
or assemblies.

Linear microcircuits

3. Discharge the static voltage from your body by Low-power Schottky TTL
wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while handling
these components. Servicing static-sensitive components or TT L (Least Sensitive)
assemblies should be performed only at a static-free work
station by qualified service personnel.
a ~ o l t a g eequivalent for levels (voltage discharged from a 100-pF
capacitor through a resistance o f 1 0 0 a ) :

4. Nothing capable of generating or holding a static

charge should be allowed on the work station surface.
Maintenance-2336 Service

7. Do not slide the components over any surface. 9. Use a soldering iron that is connected t o earth ground.

8. Avoid handling components in areas that have a floor

or work-su rface covering capable of generating a static 10. Use only approved antistatic, vacuum-type desolder-
charge. ing tools for component removal.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTION Exterior
INSPECTION. lnspect the external portions of the
Preventive maintenance consists o f cleaning, visual instrument for damage, wear, and missing parts; use
inspection, lubrication, and checking instrument Table 6-2 as a guide. Instruments that appear to have been
performance. When accomplished regularly, it may prevent dropped or otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly
instrument malfunction and enhance instrument reliability. to verify correct operation and performance. Deficiencies
The severity of the environment in which the instrument is found that could cause personal injury or could lead t o
used determines the required frequency of maintenance. An further damage to the instrument should be repaired
appropriate time to accomplish preventive maintenance i s immediately.
just before instrument adjustment.

GENERAL CARE
D CAUTION

To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument

during external cleaning, use only enough liquid to
The cabinet minimizes accumulation of dust inside the dampen the cloth or applicator.
instrument and should normally be in place when operating
the 2336. The lid provides both dust and damage protec-
tion for the front panel and crt face, and it should be closed
CLEANING. Loose dust on the outside of the instru-
whenever the instrument i s stored or i s being transported.
ment can be removed with a soft cloth or small soft-bristle
brush. The brush i s particularly useful for dislodging dirt
on and around the controls and connectors. Dirt that
INSPECTION AND CLEANING remains can be removed with a soft cloth dampened in a
mild detergent-and-water solution. Do not use abrasive
cleaners.
The 2336 should be visually inspected and cleaned as
often as operating conditions require. Accumulation of dirt
in the instrument can cause overheating and component
breakdown. Dirt on components acts as an insulating Two plastic light filters, one blue and one clear, are
blanket, preventing efficient heat dissipation. It also provided with the oscilloscope. Clean the light filters and
provides an electrical conduction path that could result the crt face with a soft lint-free cloth dampened with either
in instrument failure, especially under high-humidity denatured alcohol or a mild detergent-and-watersolution.
conditions.

a CA U T l O N

Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which

might damage the plastics used in this instrument.
Interior
To gain access to internal portions of the instrument for
inspection and cleaning, refer t o the "Removal and
Replacement Instructions" in the "Corrective Maintenance"
part of this section.
Use a nonresidue-type cleaner, preferably isopropyl
alcohol, denatured ethyl alcohol, or a solution of I %
mild detergent with 99% water. Before using any INSPECTION. lnspect the internal portions of the
other type of cleaner, consult your Tektronix Service 2336 for damage and wear, using Table 6-3 as a guide.
Center or representative. Deficiencies found should be repaired immediately. The
 Maintenance-2336 Service

Table 6-2
External lnspection Checklist
I
Item I Inspect For I Repair Action

Cabinet, Lid, Front Cracks, scratches, deformations, and damaged Touch up paint scratches and replace defective
Panel hardware or gaskets. parts.
-

Front-panel Controls Missing, damaged, or loose knobs, buttons, and Repair or replace missing or defective items.
controls.

Connectors Broken shells, cracked insulation, and deformed Replace defective parts. Clean or wash out dirt.
contacts. Dirt in connectors.

Carrying Handle Correct operation. Replace defective parts.

Accessories Missing items or parts of items, bent pins, Replace damaged or missing items, frayed
broken or frayed cables, and damaged cables, and defective parts.
connectors.

Table 6-3
Internal lnspection Checklist

Item Inspect For Repair Action

Circuit Boards Loose, broken, or corroded solder connections. Clean solder corrosion with an eraser and flush
Burned circuit boards. Burned, broken, or with isopropyl alcohol. Resolder defective
cracked circuit-run plating. connections. Determine cause of burned items
and repair. Repair defective circuit runs.

Resistors Burned, cracked, broken, or blistered. Replace defective resistors. Check for cause of
burned component and repair as necessary.

Solder Connections Cold solder or rosin joints. Resolder joint and clean with isopropyl alcohol.

Capacitors Damaged or leaking cases. Corroded solder on Replace defective capacitors. Clean solder
leads or terminals. connections and flush with isopropyl alcohol.

Semiconductors Loosely inserted in sockets. Distorted pins. Firmly seat loose semiconductors. Remove
devices having distorted pins. Carefully
straighten pins (as required to fit the socket),
using long-nose pliers, and reinsert firmly.
Ensure that straightening action does not crack
pins, causing them to break off.

Wiring and Cables Loose plugs or connectors. Burned, broken, or Firmly seat connectors. Repair or replace
frayed wiring. defective wires or cables.

Chassis Dents, deformations, and damaged hardware. Straighten, repair, or replace defective hardware.
Maintenance-2336 Service

corrective procedure for most visible defects is obvious; 5. Dry all components and assemblies in an oven or
however, particular care must be taken if heat-damaged compartment using low-temperature (125' F t o 150' F)
components are found. Overheating usually indicates other circulating air.
trouble in the instrument; therefore, it i s important that the
cause of overheating be corrected to prevent recurrence
of the damage.
6. Lubricate the circuit-board-mounted switch contacts
for the A and B SECIDIV switches and the TRIGGER
I f any electrical component i s replaced, conduct a COUPLING and SOURCE switches. Use only a light film
Performance Check for the affected circuit and for other of No-Noise lubricant.
closely related circuits (see Section 4). If repair or replace-
ment work is done on any of the power supplies, conduct
a complete Performance Check and, if so indicated, an
instrument readjustment (see Sections 4 and 5). SWITCH CONTACTS. Most of the switches in the 2336
are circuit-board mounted with cam-actuated contacts.
Care must be exercised t o preserve the high-frequency
characteristics of these switches. Switch maintenance is
seldom necessary, but i f it is required, use the following
cleaning methods and observe the stated precautions.
To prevent damage from electrical arcing, ensure
that circuit boards and components are dry before
applying power to the instrument.

CLEANING. To clean the interior, blow off dust with

EZlCAUTION

The A and B SEC/DlV and the TRIGGER

dry, low-pressure air (approximately 9 psi). Remove any
remaining dust with a soft brush or a cloth dampened with COUPLING and SOURCE switches are factory
a solution of mild detergent and water. A cotton-tipped lubricated with No-Noise spray cleaner. I f dis-
applicator is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces and on assembly, repair, or cleaning of these switches is
circuit boards. necessary, do not o verlubricate them before
reassembly. Only lubricate the contact surfaces
on the circuit board with a very light film of No-
Noise cleaner (or one with similar characteristics).
I f these methods do not remove all the dust or dirt,
the instrument may be spray washed using a solution
of 5% mild detergent and 95% water as follows:
1. Clean switch contacts only with isopropyl alcohol
or denatured ethyl alcohol, especially in the area of the
1. Gain access to the parts t o be cleaned by removing vertical attenuator boards.
easily accessible shields and panels.

2. Spray wash dirty parts with the detergent-and-water 2. Apply the cleaning solution with a camel-hair brush.
solution; then use clean water t o thoroughly rinse them. Do not use cotton-tipped applicators, since they tend t o
snag on contacts and could possibly cause damage. Strands
of cotton caught by the contacts may cause intermittent
electrical contact.
3. Dry all parts with low-pressure air.

NOTE Some film deposits may not be completely removed by

Refer t o "Switch Contacts" (next paragraph) prior the preceding procedure. For these cases, use an Eberhard
to performing step 4. Fabre "Pink Pearl" eraser to gently remove remaining
film from switch contacts. Do not use typewriter or fiber-
glass erasers, since they are too abrasive and will remove
excessive amounts of the gold plating. After removing
4. Clean switch contacts with lsopropanol or Fotocol film with an eraser, clean the contacts again with alcohol
and wait for 60 seconds. Then dry with low-pressure air. and a soft brush t o assure removal of all contamination.
 Maintenance-2336 Service

LUBRICATION PERIODIC READJUSTMENT

The fan motor and most of the potentiometers used in To ensure accurate measurements, check the perform-
the 2336 are permanently sealed and generally do not ance of this instrument after every 2000 hours of operation,
require periodic lubrication. The switches used in the 2336, or if used infrequently, once each year. In addition, replace-
both cam- and lever-type, are installed with proper lubrica- ment of components may necessitate readjustment of the
tion applied where necessary and will rarely require any affected circuits.
additional lubrication. A regular periodic lubrication
program for the instrument is not recommended.
Complete Performance Check and Adjustment instruc-
tions are given in Sections 4 and 5. The Performance
SEMICONDUCTOR CHECKS Check Procedure can also be helpful in localizing certain
trouble in the instrument. In some cases, minor troubles
Periodic checks of the transistors and other semi- may be revealed or corrected by readjustment. If only a
conductors in the oscilloscope are not recommended. partial adjustment is performed, see the interaction chart,
The best check of semiconductor performance i s actual Table 5-1, for possible interactions with circuits not
operation in the instrument. adjusted.

TROUBLESHOOTING

INTRODUCTION Circuit Board Illustrations

Circuit board illustrations (showing the physical location
Preventive maintenance performed on a regular basis o f each component) are provided for use in conjunction
should reveal most potential problems before an instrument with each schematic diagram. Each board illustration is
malfunctions. However, should troubleshooting be required, found in the "Diagrams" section on the back of a foldout
the following information i s provided t o facilitate location page, preceding the schematic diagram(s) t o which it
of a fault. In addition, the material presented in the relates. If more than one schematic diagram is associated
"Theory of Operation" and "Diagrams" sections o f this with a particular circuit board, the board illustration is
manual may be helpful while troubleshooting. located on a left-hand page that precedes the diagram with
which the board i s first associated.

TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS
Waveform test-point locations are also identified on the
circuit board illustration by hexagonal-outlined numbers
Schematic Diagrams
that correspond to the waveform numbers appearing on
Complete schematic diagrams are located on tabbed both the schematic diagram and the waveform illustration.
foldout pages in the "Diagrams" section. The portions of
circuitry that are mounted on each circuit board are
enclosed within heavy black lines. Also within the black
Circuit Board Locations
lines, near either the top or the bottom edge, are the
assembly number and name of the circuit board. The location of a circuit board within the instrument i s
shown on the foldout page along with the circuit board
illustration.
Component numbers and electrical values of compo-
nents in this instrument are shown on the schematic
diagrams. Refer t o the first page of the "Diagrams" section Circuit Board Interconnection Diagram
for definitions of the reference designators and symbols A circuit board interconnection diagram is provided in
used t o identify components. Important voltages and wave- the "Diagrams" section to aid in tracing a signal path or
form reference numbers (enclosed in hexagonal-shaped power source between boards. The entire oscilloscope is
boxes) are also shown on each diagram. Waveform illus- illustrated, with plug and jack numbers shown along with
trations are located adjacent t o their respective schematic associated pin numbers. The off-board components are also
diagram, and the physical location o f each waveform test shown, and the schematic diagram numbers on which
point is shown on the appropriate circuit board illustration. components are located are identified.
Maintenance-2336 Service

Power Distribution Diagram Some malfunctions, especially those involving multiple

simultaneous failures, may require more elaborate trouble-
A Power Distribution diagram is also provided in the
shooting approaches with references to circuit descriptions
"Diagrams" section t o aid in troubleshooting power-supply
in the "Theory of Operation" section of this manual.
problems. This diagram shows service jumpers used to
remove power from the various circuit boards. Excessive
loading on a power supply by a circuit board can be
Component Color Coding
isolated t o the faulty board by disconnecting appropriate
service jumpers. Information regarding color codes and markings of
resistors and capacitors is located in the color-coding
illustration (Figure 9-1) at the beginning of the "Diagrams"
section.
Grid Coordinate System
Each schematic diagram and circuit board illustration
has a grid border along i t s left and top edges. A table RESISTOR COLOR CODE. Resistors used in this instru-
located adjacent to each schematic diagram lists the grid ment are carbon-film, composition, or precision metal-film
coordinates of each component shown on that diagram. To types. They are color coded with the EIA color code;
however, some metal-film resistors may have the value
aid in physically locating a component on the circuit board,
printed on the body. The color code is interpreted starting
this table also lists the grid coordinates of each component
on the circuit board illustration. with the stripe that i s nearest to one end of the resistor.
Composition resistors have four stripes; these represent two
significant figures, a multiplier, and a tolerance value.
Adjacent to each circuit board illustration is an alpha- Metal-film resistors have five stripes which represent three
numeric listing of every component mounted on that significant figures, a multiplier, and a tolerance value.
board. A second column in this listing identifies the
schematic diagram in which each component can be found.
These component-locator tables are especially useful when CAPACITOR MARKINGS. Capacitance values of
more than one schematic diagram is associated with a common disc capacitors and small electrolyti~sare marked
particular circuit board. on the side of the capacitor body. White ceramic capacitors
are color coded in picofarads, using a modified EIA code.

Troubleshooting Charts Dipped tantalum capacitors are color coded in micro-

farads. The color dot indicates both the positive lead and
The troubleshooting charts contained in the "Diagrams" the voltage rating. Since these capacitors are easily
section are to be used as an aid in locating malfunctioning destroyed by reversed or excessive voltage, be careful to
circuitry. To use the charts, begin with the Troubleshooting observe the polarity and voltage rating.
Index. This index chart will help identify a particular
problem area and will direct you to other appropriate
charts for further trou bleshooing of that area.
DIODE COLOR CODE. The cathode end of each glass-
encased diode is indicated by either a stripe, a series of
stripes, or a dot. For most silicon or germanium diodes
Note that some troubleshooting-procedure boxes on marked with a series of stripes, the color combination of
each chart contain numbers along their lower edges. These the stripes identifies three digits of the Tektronix Part
numbers identify the applicable schematic diagram(s) and Number, using the resistor color-code system (e.g., a diode
circuit board illustration(s) to be used when performing the having either a pink or a blue stripe a t the cathode end,
action specified in the box (see Troubleshooting Index then a brown-gray-green stripe com bination, indicates
chart, General Notes). The diagram and illustration iden- Tektronix Part Number 152-0185-00). The cathode and
tified a t the start of a troubleshooting path remain applic- anode ends of a metal-encased diode can be identified by
able to downstream steps in the path until a different the diode symbol marked on i t s body.
diagram or illustration is specified.

Both General and Specific notes may be called out in Semiconductor Lead Configurations
the troubleshooting-procedure boxes. These notes are Figure 9-2 in the "Diagrams" section shows the lead
located on the inner panels of the foldout pages. Specific configurations for semiconductor devices used in the
Notes contain procedures or additional information to be instrument. These lead configurations and case styles are
used in performing the particular troubleshooting step typical of those available at completion of the design of
called for in that box. General Notes contain information the instrument. Vendor changes and performance improve-
t h a t pertains t o the overall troubleshooting procedure. ment changes may result in changes in case styles or lead
 Maintenance-2336 Service

D
configurations. I f the device in question does not appear t o
match the configuration in Figure 9-2, examine the CAUTION
associated circuitry or consult a semiconductor manu-
facturer's data sheet. Before using any test equipment t o make measure-
ments o n static-sensitive, current-sensitive, o r voltage-
sensitive components or assemblies, ensure that any
Multipin Connectors voltage o r current supplied b y the test equipment
does n o t exceed the limits o f the component t o be
Multipin connector orientation i s indicated by two tested.
triangles: one on the holder and one on the circuit board.
Slot numbers are usually molded into the holder. When a
connection is made t o circuit-board pins, ensure that the 1. Check Control Settings
triangle on the holder and the triangle on the circuit board
are aligned with each other (see Figure 6-1). Incorrect control settings can give a false indication of
instrument malfunction. I f there is any question about the
correct function or operation of any control, refer to
either the "Operating Instructions" (Section 2) in this
manual or t o the 2336 Operators Manual.

2. Check Associated Equipment

Before proceeding, ensure that any equipment used
with the 2336 is operating correctly. Verify that input
signals are properly connected and that the interconnecting
cables are not defective. Check the power input source
voltages.

3. Visual Check
Perform a visual inspection. This check may reveal
broken connections or wires, damaged components, semi-
conductors not firmly mounted, damaged circuit boards,
or other clues.

4. Check Instrument Performance and Adjustment

Figure 6-1. Multipin connector orientation.
Check the performance of either those circuits where
trouble appears to exist or the entire instrument. The
apparent trouble may be the result of misadjustment.
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT Complete performance check and adjustment instructions
are given in Sections 4 and 5 of this manual.

The equipment listed in Table 6-4 and in Table 4-1,

or equivalent equipment, may be useful when trouble-
5. Isolate Trouble to a Circuit
shooting this instrument.
To isolate problems t o a particular area, use the trouble
symptom t o help identify the circuit in which the trouble
is located Refer t o the troubleshooting charts in the
"Diagrams" section as an aid in locating a faulty circuit.
TROUBLESHOOTING TECHNIQUES

The following procedure is arranged in an order that

enables checking simple trouble possibilities before When trouble symptoms appear in more than one
requiring more extensive troubleshooting. The first four circuit, first check the power supplies; then check the
checks ensure proper control settings, connections, affected circuits by taking voltage and waveform readings.
operation, and adjustment. I f the trouble i s not located by Check first for the correct output voltage of each individual
these checks, the remaining steps will aid in locating the supply. These voltages are measured between the power-
defective component. When the defective component is supply test points and ground (see schematic diagrams 9
located, replace it, using the appropriate replacement and 10 and associated circuit board illustrations in the
procedure given under "Corrective Maintenance" in this "Diagrams" section). I f power-supply voltages and ripple
section. are within the listed ranges, the supply can be assumed t o
Maintenance-2336 Service

be working correctly. If they are outside the range, the 6. Check Circuit Board Interconnections
supply may be either misadjusted or operating incorrectly. After the trouble has been isolated to a particular
circuit, again check for loose or broken connections,
improperly seated semiconductors, and heat-damaged
If the trouble has been isolated to a power supply,
components.
follow the troubleshooting chart for that supply. The
Low-Voltage Power Supply levels are interdependent. All
the low-voltage supplies depend on the +40-V supply for
a reference. If more than one of the low-voltage supplies
appears defective, repair them in the following order:
+40 V, +I 0 V, +5 V, -10 V, -5 V, then +I02 V. To adjust
the +40-V Power Supply, refer to the "Adjustment 7. Check Voltages and Waveforms
Procedure" (Section 5). Often the defective component can be located by
checking the appropriate voltage or waveform in the circuit.
Typical voltages are listed on the schematic diagrams.
A defective component elsewhere in the instrument can Waveforms are shown adjacent to the diagrams, and wave-
create the appearance of a power-supply problem and may form test points are indicated on the schematic and circuit
also affect the operation of other circuits. board illustrations by a hexagonal-outlinednumber.

Table 6-4
Suggested Troubleshooting Equipment

Equipment Minimum Specification Usage Examples

1. Test Oscilloscope with Frequency response: dc t o 100 Check operating wave- TEKTRON lX 465B Oscillo-
1OX Voltage Pro be MHz. Deflection factor: 20 mV forms. scope with included P6105
to 100 Vldiv. A IOX, 10-Ma Probes.
probe should be used to reduce
circuit loading.

2. Signal Generator Repetition rate: 250 kHz to Check bandwidth. TEKTRONIX SG 503 Signal
100 MHz with 50 kHz reference. Generat~r.~

3. Calibration Generator Rise time: 1 ns or less. Output Check rise time and gain. TEKTRONIX PG 506 Cali-
amplitude: 0 to 10 V. bration Generat~r.~

4. Digital Multimeter Voltmeter: input impedance, Measure voltages and TEKTRONIX DM 501A
10 Ma; range, 0 to 200 V dc; resistances. Digital M ~ l t i m e t e r . ~
voltage accuracy, within 0.1 5%;
display, 4 112 digits. Ohmmeter:
0 to 20 M a . Test probes should
be insulated to prevent accidental
shorting.

5. Variable Auto- Variable ac output from 0 to Vary input line voltage General Radio W8MT3VM or
transformer 140 V, 1.2 A. Equipped with when troubleshooting W1OMT3W Metered Variac
3-wire power cord, plug, and power supply. Autotransformer.
receptacle.

6. Semiconductor Tester Dynamic-type tester. Measure Test semiconductors. TEKTRONIX 576 Curve
reverse breakdown voltages up Tracer.
to a t least 400 V.

a ~ e q u i r e sa TM 500-Series power module.

 Maintenance-2336 Service

NOTE Some of these voltages are predictable. The emitter-

to-base voltage for a conducting silicon transistor will
Voltages and waveforms given on the schematic
,
normally range from 0.6 t o 0.8 V, and the emitter-to-
diagrams are not absolute and may vary slightly
base voltage for a conducting germanium transistor ranges
between instruments. To establish operating con-
from 0.2 to 0.4 V. The emitter-to-collector voltage for a
ditions similar t o those used t o obtain these readings,
saturated transistor i s about 0.2 V. Because these values
see the voltage and waveform setup conditions in the
are small, the best way to check them is by connecting a
"Diagrams" section for the preliminary equipment
sensitive voltmeter across the junction rather than com-
setup, Note the recommended test equipment,
paring two voltages taken with respect to ground. I f the
front-panel control settings, voltage and waveform
former method is used, both leads of the voltmeter must be
conditions, and cable-connection instructions. The
isolated from ground.
oscilloscope control settings required to obtain the
given waveforms and voltages are located adjacent to
the waveform diagrams, Changes to the control
settings from the preliminary setup, other than those I f values less than these are obtained, either the device
given, are usually not required. i s shorted or no current is flowing in the external circuit.
I f values exceed the emitter-to-base values given, either the
junction i s reverse biased or the device i s defective. Voltages
exceeding those given for typical emitter-to-collector values
8. Check Individual Components could indicate either a nonsaturated device operating
The following procedures describe methods of checking normally or a defective (open-circuited) transistor. I f the
individual components. Two-lead components that are device is conducting, voltage will be developed across the
soldered in place are most accurately checked by first resistors in series with it; if it is open, no voltage will be
disconnecting one end from the circuit board. This isolates developed across the resistors in series with it, unless
the measurement from the effects of surrounding circuitry. current is being supplied by a parallel path.
See Figure 9-1 for value identification or Figure 9-2for

E I
semiconductor lead configuration.
CAUTION

I WARNING ) When checking emitter-to-base junctions, do not use

an ohmmeter range that has a high internal current.
To avoid electric shock, always disconnect the instru- High current can damage the transistor. Reverse
ment from the power input source before removing biasing the emitter-to-base junction with a high
or replacing components. current may degrade the transistor's curren t-transfer
ratio (Beta).

A transistor emitter-to-base junction also can be checked

When checking semiconductors, observe the static- for an open or shorted condition by measuring the
sensitivity precautions located at the beginning o f resistance between terminals with an ohmmeter set to a
this section. range having a low internal source current, such as the
R X I kC2 range. The junction resistance should be very
high in one direction and very low when the meter leads
TRANSISTORS. A good check o f transistor operation are reversed.
actual performance under operating conditions. A tran-
sistor can most effectively be checked by substituting a
known good component. However, be sure that circuit When troubleshooting a field-effect transistor, the
conditions are not such that a replacement transistor might voltage across i t s elements can be checked in the same
also be damaged. I f substitute transistors are not available, manner as previously described for other transistors.
use a dynamic tester. Static-type testers are not recom- However, remember that in the normal depletion mode of
mended, since they do not check operation under simulated operation, the gate-to-source junction is reverse biased;
operating conditions. in the enhanced mode, the junction i s forward biased.

When troubleshooting transistors in the circuit with a I N T E G R A T E D CIRCUITS. An integrated circuit (IC)
voltmeter, measure both the emitter-to-base and emitter- can be checked with a voltmeter, test oscilloscope, or by
to-collector voltages to determine whether they are con- direct substitution. A good understanding of circuit
sistant with normal circuit voltages. Voltages across a operation is essential to troubleshooting a circuit having
transistor may vary with the type o f device and i t s circuit an IC. Use care when checking voltages and waveforms
- function. around the IC so that adjacent leads are not shorted
Maintenance-2336 Service

together. An IC t e s t clip provides a convenient means of with the attenuator from the other channel and recheck
clipping a t e s t probe to an IC. instrument operation. I f proper operation results, either
order a new attenuator or replace the defective contact
set or hybrid circuit in the malfunctioning attenuator as
described in the "Removal and Replacement Instructions"
of this section.

When checking a diode, do not use an ohmmeter Improper contact pressure on a contact pad can either
scale that has a high internal current. High current cause or contribute t o attenuator switch failure. Contact
can damage a diode. Checks on diodes can be pressure can be determined by visually inspecting cam-to-
performed in much the same manner as on transistor contact-arm height and contact-arm shape. Sometimes a '
emitter-to-basejunctions. Do not check tunnel diodes previously defective switch contact will operate satisfac-
or back diodes with an ohmmeter; use a dynamic torily after it is installed on either a new or freshly cleaned
tester, such as the TEKTRONIX 576 Curve Tracer. hybrid circuit board. Make visual inspections of switch
contacts by rotating the switch shaft and observing all
contacts in both their open and closed positions. Also
DIODES. A diode can be checked for either an open or check that the contacts are correctly aligned with each
a shorted condition by measuring the resistance between other. Refer t o Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3.
terminals with an ohmmeter set to a range having a low
internal source current, such as the R X 1 kS2 range. The
diode resistance should be very high in one direction and When a contact is open, i t s lobe should ride on the cam.
very low when the meter leads are reversed. A gap means either a defective contact arm or excessive
cam clearance. Contact-to-pad gaps should be even.
Variations may indicate defective contacts or actuator
problems.
Silicon diodes should have 0.6 t o 0.8 V across their
junctions when conducting. Higher readings indicate that
they are either reverse biased or defective, depending on
As a contact closes, contact should be made while the
polarity.
contact lobe is still on the cam ramp (before the logic
lobe is over the contact lobe). Excessive cam clearance or
RESISTORS. Check resistors with an ohmmeter. Refer a defective contact arm can cause improper contact closure.
to the "Replaceable Electrical Parts" list for the tolerances All contact fingers on any arm should touch the pads at
of resistors used in this instrument. A resistor normally the same time. I f they do not, either the contact arm or
does not require replacement unless its measured value the fingers are defective.
varies widely from i t s specified value and tolerance.

When contacts are closed, their fingers should be

INDUCTORS. Check for open inductors by checking centered squarely on their respective pads. I f they are not,
continuity with an ohmmeter. Shorted or partially shorted either the contact arms or fingers are defective. I f the cam
inductors can usually be found by checking the waveform does not supply sufficient pressure on the arm t o produce
response when high-frequency signals are passed through good finger-to-pad contact, an intermittent connection can
the circuit. result. This condition can be produced by either a defective
contact arm or actuator problems.

CAPACITORS. A leaky or shorted capacitor can best

be detected by checking resistance with an ohmmeter set 9. Repair and Adjust the Circuit
t o one of the highest ranges. Do not exceed the voltage I f any defective parts are located, follow the replace-
rating of the capacitor. The resistance reading should be ment procedures given under "Corrective Maintenance"
high after the capacitor i s charged to the output voltage in this section. After any electrical component has been
of the ohmmeter. An open capacitor can be detected with replaced, the performance for that particular circuit should
a capacitance meter or by checking whether the capacitor be checked, as well as the performance of other closely
passes ac signals. related circuits. Since the power supplies affect all circuits,
performance of the entire instrument should be checked i f
work has been done in the power supplies or i f the power
ATTENUATORS. The thick-film attenuators are best transformer has been replaced. Readjustment of the
checked by substitution. If only one channel of the 2336 affected circuitry may be necessary. Refer t o the "Per-
is not operating properly and there i s reason t o believe the formance Check" and "Adjustment Procedure" (Sections
attenuator is defective, replace the suspected attenuator 4 and 5) and t o Table 5-1 (Adjustment Interactions).
 Maintenance-2336 Service

WlTH CONTACTS OPEN

LOGIC

CONTACT

CONTACT

EXCESSIVE CLEARANCE PROPER PRELOAD

AS CONTACTS CLOSE WlTH CONTACTS CLOSED

\ CAM RAMP K5-4

IMPROPER FUNCTION PROPER FUNCTION IMPROPER FUNCTION PROPER FUNCTION

Figure 6-2. Attenuator contact pressure check.

LOGIC CAM

BENT
CONTACTS EFORMED
FINGERS

TYPICAL MISALIGNMENT PROBLEMS PROPER ALIGNMENT

Figure 6-3. Attenuator contact alignment.

Maintenance-2336 Service

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTION The various manufacturers can be identified by referring

to the "Cross Index-Manufacturer's Code Number t o
Corrective maintenance consists of component replace- Manufacturer" at the beginning of the "Replaceable
ment and instrument repair. This part of the manual Electrical Parts" list. Most of the mechanical parts used
describes special techniques and procedures required to in this instrument were manufactured by Tektronix, Inc.
replace components in this instrument. I f it i s necessary t o Order all special parts directly from your local Tektronix
ship your instrument to a Tektronix Service Center for Field Office or representative.
repair or service, refer t o the "lnstrument Repackaging
Instructions" at the end of this section.
Ordering Parts
When ordering replacement parts from Tektronix, Inc.,
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS be sure t o include all of the following information:

1. lnstrument type (include modification or option

To reduce the possibility of personal injury or instru-
numbers).
ment damage, observe the following precautions.
2. lnstrument serial number.
1. Disconnect the instrument from the ac power input
source before removing or installing components.
3. A description of the part (if electrical, include its
component number).
2. Use care not t o interconnect instrument grounds
4. Tektronix part number.
which may be at different potentials (cross grounding).

3. When soldering on circuit boards or small insulated MAINTENANCE AIDS

wires, use only a 15-watt, pencil-type soldering iron.
The maintenance aids listed in Table 6-5 include items
required for performing most of the maintenance pro-
cedures in this instrument. Equivalent products may be
OBTAINING REPLACEMENT PARTS substituted for the examples given, provided their char-
acteristics are similar.
Most electrical and mechanical parts can be obtained
through your local Tektronix Field Office or representative.
However, many of the standard electronic components can
usually be obtained from a local commercial source. Before INTERCONNECTIONS
purchasing or ordering a part from a source other than
Tektronix, Inc., please check the "Replaceable Electrical Two methods of interconnection are used in this instru-
Parts" list for the proper value, rating, tolerance, and ment t o connect the circuit boards with other boards and
description. components. When the interconnection is made with a
coaxial cable, a special end-lead connector plugs into a
socket on the board. Other interconnections are made with
NOTE pins soldered onto the board. Several types of mating
Physical size and shape of a component may affect connectors are used for these interconnecting pins. The
instrument performance, particularly at high fre- following information provides the replacement procedures
quencies. Always use direct-replacement components, for the various interconnecting methods.
unless it is known that a substitute will not degrade
instrument performance.
Coaxial-Type End-Lead Connectors
Replacement of the coaxial-type end-lead connectors
Special Parts requires special tools and techniques; only maintenance
In addition to the standard electronic components, personnel familiar with the specialized techniques should
some special parts are used in the 2336. These components attempt replacement of these connectors. It i s recom-
are manufactured or selected by Tektronix, Inc. t o meet mended that the cable or wiring harness and connector be
specific performance requirements, or are manufactured replaced as a unit. For cable or wiring harness part num-
for Tektronix, Inc. in accordance with our specifications. bers, see the "Replaceable Mechanical Parts" list. An
 Maintenance-2336 Service

Table 6-5
Maintenance Aids

Description Specifications Usage Example

1. Soldering Iron General soldering and Antex Precision Model C.

unsoldering.

2. Phillips Screwdrivers #I tip, #2 tip. Assembly and disassembly. Xcelite Models X I 08 and
X102.

3. Flat-bit Screwdriver 3-inch shaft, 3132-inch bit. Assembly and disassembly. Xcelite Model R3323.

4. Torque Screwdriver 3 inch-pounds. Assembly of crt and SECI Stu rtevant-Richmont Torque
DIV and VOLTSIDIV Products Model PM-5 Roto-
switches. Torq.

5. Nutdrivers 3/16 inch, 114 inch. Assembly and disassembly. Xcelite #6 and #8.
- --

6. Open-end Wrenches 114 inch, 5116 inch, 7116 inch. Assembly and disassembly.

7. Allen Wrenches 0.050 inch, 1/16 inch, Assembly and disassembly.

118 inch.

8. Long-nose Pliers Component removal and

replacement.

9. Diagonal Cutters Component removal and

replacement.

10. Vacuum Solder No static charge retention. Unsoldering static-sensitive Pace Model PC-10.
Extractor devices and components on
multilayer boards.

11. Lubricant Versilu be (silicone grease). Switch lubrication. Tektronix Part Number
006-1353-01.

12. Spray Cleaner No-Noise. Switch pad cleaning. Tektronix Part Number
006-0442-02.

13. Pin-replacement Kit Replace circuit board Tektronix Part Number

connector pins. 040-0542-00.

14. IC-Removal Tool Removing DIP IC packages. Augat T I 14-1.

alternative solution i s to refer the replacement of the Multipin Connectors

defective connector t o your local Tektronix Field Office or
When pin connectors are grouped together and mounted
representative.
in a plastic holder, they are removed, reinstalled, or
replaced as a unit. If any individual wire or connector
in the assembly i s faulty, the entire cable assembly should
End-Lead Pin Connectors be replaced. To provide correct orientation of this multipin
Pin connectors used t o connect the wires to the inter- connector when it i s reconnected to i t s mating pins, an
connecting pins are factory assembled. They consist of arrow is stamped on the circuit board, and a matching
machine-inserted pin connectors mounted in plastic arrow is molded into the plastic housing of the multipin
holders. If the connectors are faulty, the entire wire connector. Be sure these arrows are aligned with each other
assembly should be replaced. when the multipin connector is reinstalled.
Maintenance-2336 Service

TRANSISTORS AND INTEGRATED

CIRCUITS
To avoid an electric-shock hazard, observe the follow-
Transistors and integrated circuits should not be
ing precautions before attempting any soldering:
replaced unless they are actually defective. If removed from
turn the instrument off, disconnect it from the ac
their sockets or unsoldered from the circuit board during
power source, and allow approximately three minutes
routine maintenance, return them to their original sockets
for the po wer-supply capacitors t o discharge.
or board locations. Unnecessary replacement or transposing
of semiconductor devices may affect the adjustment of the
instrument. When a semiconductor is replaced, check the
performance of any instrument circuit that may be affected.
Use rosin-core wire solder containing 63% tin and 37%
lead. Contact your local Tektronix Field Office or repre-
Any replacement component should be of the original sentative t o obtain the names of approved solder types.
type or a direct replacement. Bend transistor leads to f i t
their circuit board holes and cut the leads to the same
length as the original component. See Figure 9-2 for lead- When soldering on circuit boards or small insulated
configuration illustrations. wires, use only a 15-watt, pencil-type soldering iron. A
higher wattage soldering iron can cause etched circuit
conductors to separate from the board base material and
To remove socketed dual-in4 ine packaged (DIP) inte- melt the insulation on small wires. Always keep the
grated circuits, pull slowly and evenly on both ends of soldering-iron tip properly tinned to ensure best heat trans-
the device. Avoid disengaging one end of the integrated fer from the iron tip to the solder joint. To protect heat-
circuit from the socket before the other, since this may sensitive components, either hold the component lead with
damage the pins. long-nose pliers or place a heat block between the com-
ponent body and the solder joint. Apply only enough
solder t o make a firm joint. After soldering, clean the area
around the solder connection with an approved flux-
To remove a soldered DIP IC, do not heat adjacent
removing solvent (such as isopropyl alcohol) and allow i t t o
conductors consecutively. Apply heat to pins at alternate air dry.
sides and ends of the IC as solder is removed. Allow a
moment for the circuit board t o cool before proceeding t o
the next pin. Circuit boards in this instrument may have as many as
three conductive layers. Conductive paths between the
top and bottom board layers may connect to one or more
The heat-sink-mounted power supply transistors are inner layers. I f any inner-layer conductive path becomes
insulated from the heat sink. In addition, a heat-sink broken due to poor soldering practices, the board becomes
compound is used t o increase heat transfer capabilities. unusable and must be replaced. Damage of this nature can
Reinstall the insulators and replace the heat-sink compound void the instrument warranty.
when replacing these transistors. The compound should be
applied to both sides of the insulators and should be
applied to the bottom side of the transistor where it comes
in contact with the insulator. a CAUTION

Only an experienced maintenance person, proficient

in the use of vacuum-type desoldering equipment,
NOTE
should attempt repair of any circuit board in this
After replacing a power transistor, check that the instrument, The following multilayer board
collector is not shorted to the heat sink before assemblies are particularly susceptible to heat
applying power to the instrument. damage: A23- Trigger, A 16- B Timing Switch, and
A 17-A Timing Switch.

SOLDERING TECHNIQUES Desoldering parts from multilayer circuit boards i s

especially critical. Many of the integrated circuits are static
The reliability and accuracy of this instrument can sensitive and can be damaged by a static charge that can be
be maintained only i f proper soldering techniques are generated by some types of solder extractors. Perform
used to remove or replace parts. General soldering work involving static-sensitive devices only at a static-free
techniques, which apply to maintenance of any precision work station while wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap
electronic equipment, should be used when working on this and use on1y an antistatic vacuum-ty pe solder extractor
instrument. approved by a Tektronix Service Center.
 Maintenance-2336 Service

m CAUTION

Attempts to unsolder, remove, and resolder leads

4. Insert the leads into the holes of the board so that
the replacement component is positioned the same as the
original component. Most components should be firmly
seated against the circuit board.
from the component side of a circuit board may
cause damage to the reverse side of the circuit board.

The following techniques should be used to replace a

component on any of the circuit boards:
a CAUTION

Do not allow either solder or flux to flow beneath

etched circuit board switches. The etched switch
contacts on the circuit board are an integral part of
1. Touch the vacuum desoldering tool t o the lead at the switch, and intermittent operation can occur if
the solder connection. Never place the iron directly on the the contacts become contaminated.
board; doing this may damage the board.

5. Touch the soldering iron t o the connection and apply

NOTE enough solder to make a firm solder joint. Do not move the
Some components are difficult to remove from the component while the solder hardens.
circuit board due to a bend placed in each lead during
machine insertion of the component. The purpose of
the bent leads is to hold the component in place 6. Cut off any excess lead protruding through the circuit
during a solder-flu w manufacturing process that board (if not clipped t o size in step 3).
solders all the components at once. To make removal
of machine-inserted components easier, straighten
the component leads on the reverse side of the circuit 7. Clean the area around the solder connection with an
board with a small screwdriver or pliers. It may be approved flux-removing solvent. Be careful not t o remove
necessary to remove the circuit board to gain access any of the printed information from the circuit board.
to the component leads on the reverse side of the
circuit board. Circuit-board remo val and reinstallation
procedures are discussed later in this section. When soldering t o the ceramic strips in the instrument, a
slightly larger soldering iron can be used. It is recommended
that a solder containing about 3% silver be used when
2. When removing a multipin component, especially an soldering to these strips to avoid destroying the bond t o the
IC, do not heat adjacent pins consecutively. Apply heat t o ceramic material. This bond can be broken by repeated use
pins at alternate sides and ends of the IC as solder is of ordinary tin-lead solder or by the application of too
removed. Allow a moment for the circuit board t o cool much heat; however, occasional use of ordinary solder will
before proceeding t o the next pin. not break the bond, provided excessive heat is not applied.

I f it becomes necessary to solder in the general area

a CAUTION

Excessive heat can cause the etched circuit con-

ductors to separate from the circuit board. Never
of any of the high-frequency contacts of this instrument,
clean the contacts immediately upon completion of
soldering. Refer to the "Switch Contacts" paragraph in
the "Preventive Maintenance" part of this section for the
recommended cleaners and procedures.

allow the solder extractor tip to remain at one place

on the board for more than three seconds. Solder
wick, spring-actuated or squeeze-bulb solder suckers, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
and heat blocks (for desoldering multipin com- INSTRUCTIONS
ponents) must not be used. Damage caused by poor
soldering techniques can void the instrument
warranty. 1 WARNING I
To avoid electric shock, disconnect the instrument
3. Bend the leads of the replacement component t o from the power input source before removing or
f i t the holes in the circuit board. I f the component is replacing any component or assembly.
replaced while the board is installed in the instrument,
cut the leads so they protrude only a small amount through
the reverse side of the circuit board. Excess lead length The exploded view drawings in the "Replaceable
may cause shorting to other conductive parts. Mechanical Parts" list may be helpful during the removal
Maintenance-2336 Service

and reinstallation of individual components or sub- Lid Cover

assemblies. Circuit board and component locations are Removal and reinstallation of the lid cover is accom-
shown in the "Diagrams" section. plished by the following steps:

1. Shut and latch the lid; set the instrument vertically,

Read these instructions completely before attempting itsrear feet, on a flatworking surface.
any corrective maintenance.

2. Remove two Phillips-head screws a t the end of the

Cabinet two rubber bumper strips (one for each bumper strip).
Removal and reinstallation of the instrument cabinet
i s accomplished by the following steps:
3. Remove two Phillips-head screws under each bumper
1. Remove one Phillips-head screw holding the power- strip (on the top of the lid cover).
cord securing clamp. Remove the clamp and disconnect
the power cord.
4. Note the orientation of the lid cover and pull it free
from the lid assembly.
2. Remove two Phillips-head retaining screws from the
rear of the cabinet assembly (one near each of the bottom
feet). To reinstall the lid cover:

5. Slide the cover over the lid assembly, oriented as

3. Loosen six Phillips-head retaining screws on the rim noted in step 4.
band around the front panel (three across the top and three
across the bottom).
6. Reinstall four Phillips-head screws, two under each
bumper strip (removed in step 3).
4. Close and latch the lid, place the cabinet handle
against the bottom of the cabinet, and set the instrument
face down on a flat surface. 7. Reinstall two Phillips-head screws retaining the
bumper strips (removed in step 2).

5. Carefully lift up on the cabinet until the ground

lug, ac-power-input jack, and fuse holder are free of the
perforations in the rear of the cabinet; then slide the A30-Delta Time Logic Circuit Board
cabinet up off of the instrument chassis.
Removal and reinstallation of the Delta Time Logic
circuit board is accomplished by the following steps:
To reinstall the cabinet:
1. Remove the lid cover, using the preceding procedure.
6. Place the instrument face down on a flat surface
(with the lid latched).
2. Disconnect J780 from P780 on the Delta Time Logic
circuit board.
7. Align the cabinet to allow the ground lug, ac-power-
input jack, and fuse holder t o pass through the perforation
in the rear of the cabinet and carefully slide the cabinet 3. Use a 1116-inch Allen wrench to loosen the set screw
down over the instrument chassis to i t s original position. in the B TRIGGER LEVEL knob and remove the knob.

8. Open the lid and tighten six retaining screws around 4. Use a 114-inch nutdriver to remove. four hexagonal
the rim band (loosened in step 3). standoffs retaining the Delta Time Logic circuit board and
lift out the board.

9. Reinstall two Phill ips-head screws (removed in

step 2). To reinstall the Delta Time Logic circuit board:

10. Reconnect the power cord and reinstall the securing 5. Set the circuit board into .place in the lid and secure
clamp and screw removed in step 1. it with four hexagonal standoffs (removed in step 4).
 Maintenance-2336 Service

6. Reinstall the B TRIGGER LEVEL knob (removed 2. Remove six Phillips-head screws retaining the gray
in step 3). rim band around the instrument front panel. Remove the
gray rim band from the instrument.

7. Reconnect J780 to P780 (disconnected in step 2).

3. Remove four Phillips-head screws retaining the now-
blackrim but do not the blackrim
8. Reinstall the lid cover. using the preceding procedure.
band from the instrument.

B Trigger Panel
Removal and reinstallation of the B Trigger panel is 4. Disconnect the Delta Time Interconnect cable from
accomplished by the following steps: P751 on the SweepIHoriz AmpIOpt circuit board.

1. Remove both the lid cover and the Delta Time Logic
circuit board, using the preceding procedures. 5. Use a flat-bit screwdriver to lift the black rim band
away from the front casting in the area of the Delta Time
lnterconnect cable and remove the right-angle edge of the
2. Use a 114-inch nutdriver to remove two nuts retaining boot from the notch in the casting.
the flange which holds down the Delta Time lnterconnect
cable boot. Lift the flange off of the two mounting studs.

6. Gently pull forward on the Delta Time lnterconnect

3. Use a 7116-inch open-end wrench to remove the nut cable (along with i t s boot and flex ground strap) until the
and flat washer retaining the flex ground tab and carefully complete cable assembly is clear of the it--~strument.
lift the tab off of i t s grounding stud.

To install a new Delta Time lnterconnect cable:

4. Remove six Phillips-head screws retaining the B
Trigger panel and lift out the panel.
7. Use a flat-bit screwdriver to lift up the black rim
band in the area of the notch in the edge of the front
casting. Insert the cable assembly (J751 towards the Sweep1
To reinstall the B Trigger panel:
Horiz AmpIOpt circuit board) between the black rim band
and the casting.
5. Set the panel into place in the lid and secure it with
six Phillips-head screws (removed in step 4).

8. Insert the right-angle edge of the boot into the notch

6. Place the flex ground tab onto i t s grounding stud (facing towards the top of the instrument) and insert the
and use a 7116-inch open-end wrench to reinstall the nut flex ground over the edge of the casting (facing towards
and flat washer removed in step 3. the bottom of the instrument).

7. Reinstall the flange which holds down the Delta Time

interconnect cable boot and secure it with two nuts 9. Connect J751 and P751 on the SweepIHoriz Amp1
(removed in step 2). Opt circuit board.

8. Reinstall the Delta Time Logic circuit board and the 10, Reinstall four screws securing the black rim band
lid cover, using the preceding procedures. to the front casting (removed in step 3).

Delta Time lnterconnect Cable 11. Reinstall the gray rim band (with the hinge edge
Removal and reinstallation of the Delta Time Inter- along the bottom edge of the instrument) and secure it with
connect cable is accomplished by the following steps: six screws (removed in step 2).

1. Remove the lid cover, the Delta Time Logic circuit

board, and the B Trigger panel (in that order), using the 12. Reinstall the B Trigger panel, the Delta Time Logic
preceding procedures. circuit board, and the lid cover (in that order).
Maintenance-2336 Service

NOTE 6. Disconnect the Delay Line electrical connector from

For all o f the following procedures, the cabinet J878 on the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply circuit board.
must first be removed in accordance with the fore-
going removal and replacement instructions.
7. Pull the Delay Line cable free from the two retaining
clips on the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply circuit board.
Cathode-Ray Tube
I WARNING )
8. Remove three Phillips-head screws retaining the
Use care when handling a crt. Breaking the crt can Delay Line assembly.
cause high-velocity scattering of glass fragments.
Protective clothing and safety glasses should be worn.
Avoid striking the crt on any object which might
9. Lift the Delay Line assembly up and set it on top of
cause i t to crack or implode. When storing a crt,
the Vert Preamp1L.V Power Supply circuit board.
either place i t in a protective carton or set it face
down on a smooth surface in a protected location
with a soft mat under the faceplate.
10. Remove the Phillips-head screw retaining the ground
lug t o the bottom rear of the crt shield.
Removal and replacement of the crt is accomplished by
the following steps:

1. Disconnect P768 from the Vert 0utIH.V. Power 11. Support the crt with one hand and use a 118-inch
Supply circuit board. Allen wrench t o loosen one of four set screws (located at
each corner of the crt face), counting the turns, until the
tip of the screw is flush with i t s mounting tab. Then loosen
2. Use long-nose pliers t o disconnect the two vertical the remaining three set screws the same number of turns
deflection connectors from the pins on the neck of the crt as the first one.
(these wires come from the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply
circuit board). Pull straight out on these connectors t o
NOTE
prevent placing strain on the metal-to-glass seal. Note wire
colors and positions for reinstallation reference. It may be necessary to remove some o f the rear
panel screws in the area of the crt and t o pull back
slightly on the rear chassis panel when performing
3. Raise the front of the instrument and disconnect the next step.
the two horizontal deflection pin connectors from the
neck of the crt (these wires come from the SweepIHoriz
AmpIOpt circuit board). Pull straight out on these con-
12. Slide the crt and the surrounding metal shield back
nectors t o prevent placing strain on the metal-to-glass seal.
and lift them out of the instrument. The implosion shield
Note wire color and location for reinstallation reference.
will remain in the front casting. Note the alignment of the
graticule for reinstallation reference.
I WARNING )
13. Remove the metal mask and EM1 gasket from
The crt anode and the outptrt terminal of the High-
around the front of the crt.
Voltage Multiplier will retain a high-voltage charge
after the instrument is turned o f f To avoid electrical
shock, ground both the output terminal and the crt
high-voltage lead t o the main instrument chassis. 14. Remove the metal shield from the crt by sliding
the shield to the rear. Exercise care not t o damage the
high-voltage lead, neck pins, and cable connecting t o the
4. Disconnect the crt anode lead from the High-Voltage two coils.
Multiplier lead by carefully pulling the anode plug out of
the jack. Discharge the plug tip to the chassis.
NOTE
It may be necessary to remove the rubber grommet
5. Disconnect the socket from the base of the crt, from the metal shield before sliding the shield o f f of
gripping the tabs on the socket cover to pull it free. the crt.
 Maintenance-2336 Service

To install a replacement crt:

I WARNING I
15. Insert the crt into i t s metal shield (removed in
step 14), passing the high-voltage lead and the cable The High-Voltage Multiplier can again build up a
connected t o the two coils through the appropriate holes high-voltage charge after i t is first discharged to
in the shield. Reinstall the rubber grommet, if it was ground. To avoid electrical shock, ground its output
previously removed. terminal t o the main instrument chassis before
reconnecting the crt anode lead.

Ex CAUTION

The EM1 gasket must be installed correctly to ensure

24. Reconnect the crt anode-lead plug to the jack from
the High-Voltage Multiplier.

both a proper ground to the shield and a cushion for

the front of the crt. 25. Reinstall the screw securing the ground lug to the
crt shield (removed in step 10).

16. Set the metal mask (removed in step 13) on a flat

surface with i t s back edges facing upward. 26. Reinstall the Delay Line assembly (removed in
step 9), using three retaining screws (removed in step 8).

17. Drape the EM1 gasket over the edges of the mask 27. Press the Delay Line cable into i t s two retaining
so that the gasket material i s partially inside and partially clips on the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply circuit board.
outside the mask.

28. Reconnect the Delay Line electrical connector t o

J878 (disconnected in step 6).
18. Press the front of the crt into the mask.

29. Raise the front of the instrument and use long-nose

pliers t o reconnect the two horizontal deflection pin
19. Verify that the EM1 gasket makes even contact
connectors (from the SweepIHoriz AmpIOpt circuit board)
with the mask and the crt shield on all four sides when
to the neck of the crt at the positions noted in step 3.
viewed from the rear.

30. Reconnect the two vertical deflection pin con-

20. Verify that the EM1 gasket also makes even conract nectors (from the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply circuit
between the mask and the front of the crt on all four board) t o the neck of the crt at the positions noted in
sides when viewed from the front (graticule). step 2.

31. Reconnect P768 (disconnected in step 1) to the

21. Carefully place the assembled crt and mask into the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply circuit board.
instrument, ensuring that the index guide and graticule
are aligned as noted in step 12.
A1 5-Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply Circuit Board
Removal and reinstallation of the Vert 0utIH.V. Power
Supply circuit board is accomplished by the following
22. Support the crt with one hand and use a 118-inch
steps:
Allen wrench to alternately tighten each of the four
retaining screws about one to two turns less than counted
1. Use a 1116-inch Allen wrench to loosen the set screw
in step 11. Then use a torque screwdriver to alternately
on the FOCUS control knob. Note i t s position for reinstal-
torque each screw t o 1.5 inch-pounds.
lation reference and remove the knob from the instrument.

23. Align the index slot of the crt socket with the 2. Use a 5116-inch open-end wrench to remove the
index. guide on the crt base and press the socket firmly retaining nut from the FOCUS control shaft and push the
into place. control shaft through the front panel until i t hangs free.
Maintenance-2336 Service

3. Disconnect P763, P759, and P765 at the front edge 16. Reconnect P756, P768, and P758 at the rear of the
of the circuit board. circuit board (disconnected in step 6).

4. Disconnect the Delay Line electrical connector from

17. Reconnect the Delay Line electrical connector t o
J878.
J878 (disconnected in step 4).

5. Pull the Delay Line cable free from the two retaining
clips on the circuit board. 18. Reconnect P763, P759, and P765 at the front edge
of the circuit board (disconnected in step 3).

6. Disconnect P756, P768, and P758 at the rear of the

circuit board.
19. Insert the FOCUS control shaft through the front
panel and reinstall the retaining nut (removed in step 2).
7. Disconnect the socket from the base of the crt,
gripping the tabs on the socket cover to pull it free.
20. Reinstall the FOCUS control knob, noting i t s
position in step 1, and tighten the set screw.
8. Use long-nose pliers to disconnect the two vertical
deflection pin connectors from the neck of the crt (these
wires come from the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply circuit
board). Pull straight out on these connectors t o prevent
AlO-Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply Circuit
placing strain on the metal-to-glass seal. Note their positions
for reinstallation reference.
Board
Removal and reinstallation of the Vert Preamp1L.V.
Power Supply circuit board is accomplished by the follow-
9. Remove five Phillips-head screws retaining the circuit ing steps:
board (four around the outer edges and one near the center
of the board).
1. Use a 1116-inch Allen wrench t o loosen both VOLTS1
DIV VAR control-knob set screws. Note their positions for
reinstallation reference and remove the knobs.
10. Remove the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply circuit
board from the instrument, taking care not to damage
L 9 l 3 and L915.
2. Pull both VOLTSIDIV control knobs from their
shafts, noting their positions for reinstallation references.
To reinstall the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply circuit
board:

11. Carefully reposition the board into place, taking 3. Disconnect P703 and P704, located near the middle
care not to damage L913 and L915. of the circuit board. These lead to the CH 1 and CH 2
POSITION controls respectively.

12. Reinstall five retaining screws (removed in step 9).

4. Disconnect P733 from the Trigger circuit board
(from the LEVEL control) and remove i t s rubber grommet
13. use long-nose pliers t o reconnect the two vertical from the slot in the edge of the Vert Prearnp1L.V. Power
deflection pin connectors t o the neck of the crt at the supply circuitboard.
positions noted in step 8.

5. Disconnect P730 and P732 from the Trigger circuit

14. Align the index slot of the crt socket with the board.
index guide on the crt base and press the socket firmly
into place.
6. Disconnect the two miniature coaxial connectors
(P830 for Channel 1 and P831 for Channel 2) from the
15. Press the Delay Line cable into i t s two retaining Trigger circuit board. Note the color and location of each
clips. for reinstallation reference.
 Maintenance-2336 Service

7. Disconnect the following connectors from the Vert 13. Remove the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit
Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit board, noting their board from the instrument by lifting the rear of the board
locations for reinstallation reference: and pulling it toward the rear of the instrument.

a. P710 (from the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply circuit

board). NOTE
The attenuators are now accessible for servicing.
b. P7 I 4 (from the transformer).
Their contacts are factory lubricated. If preventive-
maintenance cleaning is to be performed, lubricate
c. P702 (from the EXT Z AXIS connector).
the switch contacts after cleaning with a thin film
of No-Noise lubricant, or the equivalent. Lubricate
only the gold-plated contact surfaces of the hybrid
C____:i
CAUTION

Exercise care not to damage the center conductors

circuit boards, not the cam-switch assembly. Attenu-
ator disassembly and reassembly instructions are
presented later in this section of the manual.
of the miniature coaxial connectors while performing
the next step.
Power-supply pass transistors Q246, 0253, Q264,
Q252, and 0256 are mounted on a heat sink.
8. Tip the instrument up, exposing the bottom, and use Thermal-transfer compound is used on the insulator
long-nose pliers to disconnect the miniature coaxial con- between each transistor and the heat sink. If any
of these transistors are replaced, be sure to replace
nectors from the CH 1 and CH 2 input bnc connectors.
both the insulator and the thermal-transfer
compound.
9. Remove two Phillips-head screws retaining the
attenuators (one for each attenuator).
To reinstall the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit
board :

10. Remove the following nine Phillips-head retaining

screws from the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit 14. Press the Delay Line cable back into i t s retaining
board and the preamplifier circuit shield: clip and reconnect i t s electrical connector (disconnected
in step 12).
a. One near each end of the Negative Regulator board
(A1I).
15. Position the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit
b. Two connecting the preamplifier circuit shield to
board into the instrument, aligning all the extension shafts
the front casting (do not remove the four screws
with their respective holes in the front panel and aligning
securing the hexagonal standoffs).
the pins of J808 with connector P808. Carefully press
P808 onto the pins of J808 until the board is firmly seated.
c. One on the edge o f the board, adjacent t o Q194.

d. Two under the preamplifier circuit shield.

16. Reinstall nine Phillips-head screws (removed in
Step 10).
e. One toward the rear o f the circuit board, adjacent to
U215 and t o which the grounding lug is attached.

f. One toward the rear of the circuit board, located

between C225 and C250.
Ex2CAUTION

Exercise care not to damage the center conductors

of the miniature coaxial connectors while performing
the next step.
11. Gently lift up on the rear of the Vert Preamp1L.V.
Power Supply circuit board t o disengage it from the pins
of P808 on the Trigger circuit board. 17. Place the instrument on i t s side, exposing the rear
of the input bnc connectors, and use long-nose pliers to
insert the miniature coaxial connectors into the CH 1 and
12. With the rear of the circuit board raised approxi- CH 2 input bnc connectors.
mately one inch, use long-nose pliers t o disconnect the
Delay Line electrical connector from the bottom of the
board. Use a screwdriver t o carefully pry the Delay Line 18. Reinstall two Phill ips-head screws retaining the
cable from i t s retaining clip. attenuators (removed in step 9).
Maintenance-2336 Service

19. Place the instrument right side up and reconnect A 1 2-Positive Regulator Circuit Board
the following cables and connectors (disconnected in Removal and replacement of the Positive Regulator
steps 7, 6, 5,4, and 3). circuit board is accomplished by the following steps:

a. P702 (from the EXT Z AX IS connector).

b. P714 (from the transformer). K ICAUTION

The following procedure destroys the circuit board

c. P710 (from the Vert 0utIH.V. Power Supply circuit being removed. Perform this procedure only i f a
board).
new board is available for replacement.
d. P830 (for Channel 1) and P831 (for Channel 2) (from
the Trigger circuit board).
1. Note board orientation and cut four pins at J801 and
four pins at J802 on the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply
e. P730 and P732 (from the Trigger circuit board).
circuit board and remove the Positive Regulator circuit
board.
f. P733 (from the Trigger circuit board). Reinstall the
rubber grommet removed in step 4.
2. Use a vacuum-type desoldering tool t o clean the 8
g. P703 and P704 (from the CH 1 and CH 2 POSITION pin holes.
controls respective1y ).

3. Orient the replacement Positive Regulator board as

20. Reinstall both VOLTS/DIV control knobs onto noted in step 1 and insert the pins of the replacement
their shafts in the positions noted in step 2. Positive Regulator circuit board into the appropriate holes
on the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit board. Hold
the Positive Regulator board in place and solder the 8 pins.
21. Reinstall both VOLTSIDIV VAR control knobs in
the positions noted in step 1 and tighten their set screws.

A23-Trigger Circuit Board

Removal and reinstallation of the Trigger circuit board
A1 I-Negative Regulator Circuit Board is accomplished by the following steps:
Removal and replacement of the Negative Regulator
circuit board is accomplished by the following steps: 1. Disconnect the following connectors and cables
from the Trigger circuit board (note colors and locations
for reinstallation reference):

a. P733 (from the LEVEL control).

The following procedure destroys the circuit board b. Two miniature coaxial connectors, J830 and J831.
being removed. Perform this procedure only if a Note their color and position for reinstallation
new board is available for replacement. reference.

c. P732 (from the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply

1. Cut five pins a t J803 and six pins a t J804 on the Vert circuit board).
Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit board and remove the
Negative Regulator circuit board. d. Miniature coaxial connector P829 (from the Sweep/
Horiz Amp/Opt circuit board).

2. Use a vacuum-type desoldering tool to clean the

11 pin holes. 2. Loosen, but do not completely remove, nine Phillips-
head screws retaining the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply
circuit board.
3. Insert the pins of P803 and P804 into the appropriate
holes on the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit board.
Hold the Negative Regulator board in place and solder the 3. Remove four Phillips-head screws retaining the
IIpins. Trigger circuit board.
 Maintenance-2336 Service

4. Gently pry up on the rear of the Vert Preamp1L.V. 2. Remove six Phillips-head screws retaining the Sweep/
Power Supply circuit board until the top edge-connector Horiz Amp/Opt circuit board.
receptacle of J808 disengages from P808 pins on the
Trigger circuit board. Then gently pull the Trigger circuit
board away from the instrument until the bottom edge- 3. Gently pull the circuit board away from the instru-
connector pins of P840, on the Sweep/Horiz Amp/Opt ment until connectors J871 and J876 (from the A and B
circuit board, disengage from J840. Timing Switch circuit boards) are disengaged.

5. Remove the Trigger circuit board from the instru- To reinstall the Sweep/Horiz Amp/Opt circuit board:
ment, taking care not to damage the COUPLING and
SOURCE switch control levers and the pins of P808 and 4. Position the board into place, aligning J871 and J876
P840. with pins P871 and P876 on the A and B Timing Switch
circuit boards.

To reinstall the Trigger circuit board:

5. Press gently on the Sweep/Horiz Amp/Opt circuit
6. Position the board into place, inserting the board until P871 and P876 are fully engaged with J871 and
COUPLING and SOURCE switch levers into their J876.
respective slots in the front panel and aligning the pins
of P808 with J808 and the pins of P840 with 3840.
6. Reinstall six Phillips-head screws (removed in step 2).

7. Gently press J840 (on the Trigger board) onto the

pins of P840 (on the SweepIHoriz Amp/Opt board); then 7. Reconnect the four cables and connectors that were
press J808 (on the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply board) disconnected in step 1.
onto the pins of P808 (on the Trigger board).

8. Reinstall four Phillips-head screws (removed in

step 3). Timing Switch Assembly
The Timing Switch assembly i s a unit consisting of the
A and B Timing switches, the VAR potentiometer, the A
9. Tighten nine screws on the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power ~~~i~~switch circuit board ( ~ 1 7 and ) ~ the T~~~~~
Supply circuit board (loosened in step 2). Switch circuit board (A16). Replacing a complete Timing
Switch assembly with a new or rebuilt unit is the recom-
mended procedure. However, should it become necessary
lo. Reconnect the five cables and connectors that were t o disassemble and repair the assembly, replacement parts
disconnected in step 1. (as well as complete replacement units) can be ordered
from your local Tektronix Field Office or representative.

A24-Sweep/Horiz Amp/Opt Circuit Board The following procedure not only describes removal
Removal and reinstallation of the Sweep/Horiz Amp/ and replacement of the Timing Switch assembly as a
Opt circuit board i s accomplished by the following steps: complete unit, but also explains how to disassemble and
reassemble the unit to facilitate repair and cleaning. Both
1. Place the instrument on its side so that the Sweep/ Figure 6-4 and the exploded view drawings in the "Replace-
Horiz AmpIOpt circuit board is accessible and disconnect able Mechanical Parts" list (Section 10) are useful in
the following cables and connectors from the board: performing switch disassembly and reassembly.

a. P842 (from the Trigger circuit board).

It is recommended that this procedure be read com-
b. P745 (from the Vert Out/H.V. Power Supply circuit pletely before starting any disassembly.
board).

c. P750 (from the B DELAY TIME POSITION control). 1. Remove the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit
board using the procedure previously described in this
d. P751 (the Delta Time Interconnect cable). part of the manual.
Maintenance-2336 Service

POTENTIOMETER

REAR
BEARING

DETENT

9 \
B TIMING

\ ROTOR

LUBRICATE W I T H VERSILUBE
T E K T R O N I X PART NUMBER
006-1353-01 (OR E Q U I V A L E N T )

Figure 6-4. SEC/DIV switch exploded view.

 Maintenance-2336 Service

2. Rotate the A and B SECIDIV switch fully counter- 10. Remove the mounting screw from the potenti-
clockwise. ometer (A).

3. Use a 0.050-inch Allen wrench to loosen the s e t screw

on the SECIDIV VAR control knob. Note i t s position for 1 1. Rotate the extension shaft (V) counterclockwise
reinstallation reference and remove the knob. until the set screws in the coupling (C) line up with the
slot in the clear plastic mounting bracket.

4. Use a 1116-inch Allen wrench to loosen the set

screws on the control knobs for the A and B SECIDIV 12. Use a 0.050-inch Allen wrench to loosen the rear-
switches. Note their positions for reinstallation reference most set screw in the coupling (C).
and remove the knobs.

5. Use a 7116-inch open-end wrench to remove the 13. Unscrew the potentiometer from i t s mounting
retaining nut for the control-shaft housing of the A and B bracket (B).
SECIDIV switches. Note i t s position for reinstallation
reference.
14. If only the potentiometer is being replaced, proceed
t o step 45.
6. Pull up on the Timing Switch assembly until the pins
on the A and B Timing Switch circuit boards disengage
from connectors 3871 and J876 on the Sweep/Horiz Amp/
Opt circuit board. CAUTION

The knurled rotary shaft (U) is spring loaded and

7. Continue lifting up on the Timing Switch assembly must be held in place while performing steps 15
while guiding it to the rear of the instrument until the through 21 to prevent possible damage to the
assembly is clear. electrical contacts. Two of the ways that this can be
accomplished are: (I)placing the shaft in a vise, or
(2) temporarily reinstalling the VAR knob and
NOTE gripping i t to hold the shaft in place,
As this point resistors, capacitors, diodes and tran-
sistors may be replaced on the Timing Switch circuit
boards without further disassembly. A fter replacing 15. Remove three Phillips-head screws (D) retaining
circuit-board components, proceed t o step 50 for the mounting bracket (6).
reinstallation instructions.

16. Pull the coupling (C), with extension shaft (V)

8. If mechanical or electrical components of the Timing attached, out through the rear of the assembly.
Switch assembly are to be replaced, proceed to step 9. If
the entire assembly is to be replaced, proceed t o step 50.
17. Remove the rear bearing (E).

9. Disconnect P774 from the A Timing Switch circuit

board, A1 7.

NOTE Contact holders are mechanically, but not electrically,

In steps 10 through 48, the capital letters enclosed interchangeable.
within parentheses refer to the like-lettered com-
ponents in Figure 6-4. Do not touch switch contacts and their corresponding
circuit-board runs with your hands. This will avoid
Before each component is removed, note its position contamination, preserve high-frequency character-
and/or orientation for reinstallation reference. To istics, and avoid possible damage.
facilitate reassembly, it is recommended that all
parts be laid out in the order in which they are
removed. 18. Remove the rear contact holder (F).

Steps 10 through 14 are necessary only i f the

potentiometer (A) requires replacement. 19. Remove the B Timing Switch circuit board (G).
Maintenance-2336 Service

20. Remove the detent (I) along with the front contact To reassemble the Timing Switch assembly (refer to
holder (H). Separate them both from the B Timing Switch Figure 6-4):
circuit board and from each other.
31. Install the front contact holder (Q) on the rotary
shaft (R).
21. Gradually release the knurled rotary shaft (U)
from the tension of the helical spring (K). Remove the
VAR knob (if it was reinstalled for holding), then remove 32. Reinstall the rotary shaft (R), with contact holder
the shaft through the' rear of the assembly. (Q), facing the component side of the A Timing Switch
circuit board (P).

22. Remove three Ph illips-headscrews (T) while holding

both the front bearing (S) and the center bearing housing 33. Reinstall the front bearing housing (S).
(J) between your thumb and forefinger.

34. Reinstall the stop (M) and retaining spring (L) on

23. Remove the center bearing housing (J). the rotor (N).

NOTE 35. Reinstall the rotor assembly.

Steps 24 through 26 should be performed only if
the rotor, stop, and/or retaining spring parts are
worn and require replacement. Otherwise proceed 36. Reinstall the center bearing housing (J) and front
t o step 27. bearing (S); hold them in place with your thumb and fore-
finger.

24. Remove rotor (N), stop (M), and retaining spring

(L) together. 37. Reinstall the three screws (T) removed in step 22.

25. Carefully remove the retaining spring (stretch it

as little as possible) from the rotor.
Ez2
CAUTION

The knurled rotary shaft (U) is spring loaded. To

prevent possible damage to the electrical contacts,
it must be held in place while performing steps 38
26. Remove the stop (M) from the rotor.
through 44 (see CAU T I 0N preceding step 7 5).

27. Remove the front bearing housing (S).

38. Reinstall the knurled rotary shaft (U), with helical
spring (K), through the rear of the assembly.
28. Remove the rear contact holder ( 0 ) .
39. Reinsert detent (I) into front contact holder (H)
and insert them both into the center bearing housing (J).
29. Remove the rotary shaft with detent (R) and the
front contact holder (0).
40. Reinstall the B Timing Switch circuit board, A16.

30. Separate the front contact holder from the rotary

shaft. 41. Reinstall the rear contact holder (F).
NOTE
During reassembly, i f any cleaning has been done or 42. Reinstall the rear bearing (E).
i f the switch assembly was previously difficult to
rotate, lubricate the points indicated by a triangle
symbol on Figure 6-4 with a very small amount 43. Reinstall the extension shaft (V), with coupling (C),
of Versilube (or equivalent) silicone grease. All through the rear of the assembly.
places indicated may not require lubrication. A
general guide is to lubricate only the mechanical
parts that rub together. See "Switch Contacts" 44. Reinstall bracket (B) using the three Phillips-head
in the "Preventive Maintenance" part o f this section. screws (D).
 Maintenance-2336 Service

45. If applicable, screw the replacement potentiometer The following procedure not only describes removal
(A) into the rear of the mounting bracket (B) while insert- and reinstallation of an Attenuator as a complete unit,
ing i t s shaft into the coupling (C). but also explains how t o disassemble and reassemble the
unit t o facilitate repair and cleaning. Both Figure 6-5 and
the exploded view drawing in the "Replaceable Mechanical
46. Rotate the extension shaft (V) t o align the rear- Parts" list (Section 10) are useful when performing
most set screw on coupling (C) with the slot in the clear attenuator disassembly and reassembly.
plastic bracket (B).

It is recommended that this procedure be read com-

47. Tighten the set screw using a 0.050-inch Allen pletely before starting any disassembly.
wrench.

1. Remove the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit

48. Rotate the Potentiometer (A) clockwise t o i t s board using the procedure previously described in this
proper orientation and reinstall i t s mounting screw. part of the manual.

49. Reconnect P774 t o the A Timing Switch circuit 2. Disconnect the following connectors from the Vert
board, A17. Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit board:

a. J700 (from the rear of the Chanqel 1 Attenuator).

50. Position the Timing Switch assembly into the
instrument by first inserting the control shaft (with b. J705 (from the rear of the Channel 2 Attenuator).
housing) through the front panel.

3. Unsolder the wire connecting the two potentiometers

51. Align the edge-connector pins of the A and B
at the rear of the attenuators and unsolder the wire from
Timing Switch circuit boards with connectors J871 and
the Channel potentiometer which leads to J712 on the
J876 on the SweepIHoriz AmpIOpt circuit board and press Vert Power Supply circuit Note wire
- them firmly into place.
color and location for reinstallation reference.

52. Reinstall the control-shaft housing for the A and B

SECIDIV switches at the position noted in step 5 and
tighten the retaining nut with a 7116-inch open-end wrench.

If the Channel I Attenuator is to be replaced or

53. Reinstall the control knobs for the A and B SECI
repaired, the Channel 2 Attenuator must first be
DIV switches in the positions noted in step 4 and tighten
removed. Attempting to unsolder the resistor-
the set screws with a 1/I6-inch Allen wrench.
capacitor network from the Channel I Attenuator
without first removing the Channel 2 Attenuator can
result in heat damage to both attenuators.
54. Reinstall the VAR control knob in the position
noted in step 3 and tighten i t s set screw with a 0.050-inch
Allen wrench.
NOTE
In the remainder of this procedure, the capital
55. Reinstall the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply letters enclosed within parentheses refer to the like-
circuit board using the procedure previously described. lettered components in Figure 6-5.

4. Unsolder the resistor-capacitor network (adjacent

Attenuators t o the Channel 2 Attenuator) from the shielded hybrid
Replacing a complete Attenuator assembly with a new circuit board (E) in the Channel 2 Attenuator assembly.
or rebuilt unit is the recommended procedure. However,
should it become necessary t o disassemble and repair an
Attenuator, replacement parts (as well as complete replace- 5. On the component side of the circuit board, use a
ment units) can be ordered from your local Tektronix Field 3116-inch nutdriver t o remove the two hexagonal standoffs
Office or representative. retaining the Channel 2 Attenuator.
Maintenance-2336 Service

Figure 6-5. Vertical attenuator exploded view.

 Maintenance-2336 Service

6. Gently pull the Channel 2 Attenuator straight away 15. If no other components are t o be replaced, proceed
from the circuit board to avoid damaging the rear hybrid t o step 39 for reinstallation instructions.
circuit module (M) that plugs into the circuit board.

NOTE
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the Channel 1 To ensure proper grounding after reinstallation, note
Attenuator, if it is t o be removed. the positioning of the ground contact spring against
the shaft before removing it in the next step.

8. If a replacement Attenuator assembly i s to be

installed as a complete unit, proceed to step 45. 16. Remove the screw (H)and ground contact spring (I).
Unsolder the ground contact (J) in two places and remove
it (if not previously unsoldered in step 12).
NOTE
Steps 9 through 44 describe how to disassemble and
17. Remove the side retaining plate (L).
reassemble an attenuator to accomplish replacement
of one or more of the following parts: shielded
hybrid (E) and its associated contact sets, rear hybrid 18. Remove the rear hybrid (M). Note i t s exact location
(M) and its associated contact sets, and the potenti- and orientation t o prevent damage during reinstallation.
ometer (U).

Before any component is remo ved during disassembly, 19. Remove both the left contact set (N) and the right
carefully note its position and/or orientation for contact set (0).
reinstallation reference. To facilitate reassembly, it
is recommended that all parts be laid out in the
order in which they are removed. 20. If no other components are to be replaced, proceed
to step 32 for reinstallation instructions.

9. If the shielded hybrid (E) or i t s associated contact

sets require replacement, proceed t o step 10. To replace 21. Use a 0.050-inch Allen wrench and loosen, but do
the rear hybrid (M) or i t s associated contact sets, go to not remove, the two set screws on the coupling (P) which
step 16. To replace the potentiometer (U), go to step 21. are nearest to the potentiometer (U).

10. Remove the two screws (A) and the upper retainer 22. Remove the screw ( 0 )and remove the bracket (R),
plate (6). with the potentiometer attached, from the Attenuator
cam-switch assembly.

11. Remove the two screws (C) and the lower retainer
plate (D). 23. Use a 5116-inch open-end wrench to remove the
nut (S) and the lockwasher (T) retaining the potentiometer.

r___3
CAUTION 24. Remove the potentiometer (U) from the bracket.

Prior to performing the next step, note the exact

location and orientation of the shielded hybrid (El 25. Unsolder the wires connected to the potentiometer,
to prevent damage during reinstallation. noting their color and location for reinstallation reference.

12. Unsolder the shielded hybrid (two places) from the 26. To install a replacement potentiometer, resolder
ground contact (J) and remove the shielded hybrid. the wires (removed in step 25) at the locations noted.

13. Remove the outer contact set (F); it has five 27. Insert the potentiometer into the bracket (R) and
contacts and a ground tab. orient it as noted in step 24.

14. Remove the inner contact set (G); it has four 28. Reinstall the nut and lockwasher (removed in
contacts and a ground tab. step 23).
Maintenance-2336 Service

29. Mount the bracket (R) to the cam-switch assembly 42. Reinstall the upper retaining plate (B) with the two
with the screw (Q) removed in step 22. Use a torque screws (A) removed in step 10. Use a torque screwdriver
screwdriver to tighten it to 3 inch-pounds. to tighten the screws to 3 inch-pounds.

30. Use a 0.050-inch Allen wrench to tighten the two 43. Check contact pressure and alignment (refer to
set screws (loosened in step 21) on the coupling (P). Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3).

31. If no other parts require reassembly, proceed to 44. Solder the ground contact (J) to the shielded hybrid
step 45. (E) in two places.

32. To reinstall the rear hybrid (M) and i t s associated 45. Reinstall the Channel 1 Attenuator (if applicable)
Contact Sets, first insert the left contact set (N) into the by carefully plugging the pins of the rear hybrid (M) into
cam-switch assembly. Then insert the right contact set (0). the Vert Preamp/L.V. Power supply circuit board.
Position them both as noted in step 19.

33. Place the rear hybrid (M) in the exact location and 46. Use a 3116-inch nutdriver to reinstall the two
orientation noted in step 18. hexagonal standoffs securing the Channel 1 Attenuator
(if removed in step 5).

34. Place the side retaining plate (L) over the hybrid.
47. Resolder the resistor-capacitor network lead (un-
soldered in step 4) to the shielded hybrid (E) on the Chan-
35. Place the ground contact (J) over the side retaining nel 1 Attenuator (if applicable).
plate. Insert the ground contact spring (I) through the hole
in the ground contact so that the end of the spring is
against the same side of the shaft. 48. Repeat steps 45 through 47 for the Channel 2
Attenuator.

36. Reinstall the screw (H) removed in step 16; use a

torque screwdriver to tighten it to 3 inch-pounds. 49. Resolder the wire connecting the two potenti-
ometers and resolder the wire leading t o J712 (unsoldered
in step 3).
37. Check contact pressure and alignment (refer to
Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3).
50. Reconnect the following connectors to the Vert
Preamp1L.V. Power Supply circuit board (disconnected
38. If no other components are to be reinstalled, in step 2):
proceed t o step 44.
a. J700 (from the Channel 1 Attenuator).

39. To reinstall the shielded hybrid (E), insert the

b. J705 (from the Channel 2 Attenuator).
inner contact set ( G ) into the cam-switch assembly. Then
insert the outer contact set (F). Position them as noted
in steps 14 and 13.
51. Reinstall the Vert Preamp1L.V. Power Supply
circuit board.

40. Reinstall the shielded hybrid (E) a t the exact

location and orientation noted in step 12.

41. Reinstall the lower retaining plate (D) with the two
screws (C) removed in step 11. Use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the screws to 3 inch-pounds.
 Maintenance-2336 Service

REPACKAGING FOR SHIPMENT The carton test strength for your instrument is 275
pounds.
If the Tektronix instrument is to be shipped t o a
Tektronix Service Center for service or repair, attach a SELECTABLE COMPONENTS
tag showing: owner (with address) and the name of an
individual at your firm that can be contacted. Include
complete instrument serial number and a description of
the service required.

If U55 or U125 is replaced, the position pots may no

Save and reuse the package in which your instrument longer have sufficient range (+ and -12 div), in which case
was shipped. If the original packaging i s unfit for use or R50 or R122 respectively will need to be removed by clip-
not available, repackage the instrument as follows: ping the leads.

Surround the instrument with polyethylene sheeting

to protect the finish of the instrument. Obtain a carton of
corrugated cardboard of the correct carton strength and
having inside dimensions of no less than six inches more If the transient response is too large for the External Trig-
than the instrument dimensions. Cushion the instrument ger View when in t 10 mode, R11 may be changed to a
by tightly packing three inches of dunnage or urethane higher value. The nominal value is 43 Q and selected values
foam between carton and instrument, on all sides. Seal are: 51 Q, 62 Q, 75 Q, or 910 Q which are all 0.125W, 5%
carton with shipping tape or industrial stapler. resistors.

REV NOV 1981

 This Document was scanned from the original
Tektronix Service Manual
For enquiries about high quality technical manuals

[email protected]

This Document is a complete Scan from the original

Tektronix manual
For enquiries about our complete
High quality line of technical Manuals in PDF

mailto : [email protected]
 Section 7 -2336 Service

OPTIONS

INTRODUCTION OPTION 03

There is presently only one option available for the Option 03 (100-V/200-V Power Transformer) permits
2336. A brief description of this option is given in the operation of the instrument from either a 100-V or a 200-V
following paragraph. For further information about instru- nominal ac-power-input source a t a line frequency from
ment options, see your Tektronix Catalog or contact your 48 Hz to 440 Hz. This option does not affect the basic
Tektronix Field Office or representative. instrument operating and servicing information presented
in this manual.
 This Document was scanned from the original
Tektronix Service Manual
For enquiries about high quality technical manuals

[email protected]

This Document is a complete Scan from the original

Tektronix manual
For enquiries about our complete
High quality line of technical Manuals in PDF

mailto : [email protected]
 Section 8-2336 Service

PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION

Replacement parts are available from or through your local Only the circuit number will appear on the diagrams and
Tektronix, Inc. Field Office or representative. circuit board illustrations. Each diagram and circuit board
illustration is clearly marked with the assembly number.
Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to Assembly numbers are also marked on the mechanical exploded
accommodate improved components as they become available, views located in the Mechanical Parts List. The component
and to give you the benefit of the latest circuit improvements number is obtained by adding the assembly number prefix to the
developed i n our engineering department. It is therefore impor- circuit number.
tant, when ordering parts, t o includethe following information in
your order: Part number, instrument type or number, serial The Electrical Parts List is divided and arranged by
number, and modification number if applicable. assemblies in numerical sequence (e.g., assembly A1 with its
subassemblies and parts, precedes assembly A2 with its sub-
If a part you have ordered has been replaced with a new or assem blies and parts).
improved part, your local Tektronix, I nc. Field Office or represen-
tative will contact you concerning any change in part number. Chassis-mounted parts have no assembly number prefix
and are located at the end of the Electrical Parts List.
Change information, if any, is located at the rear of this
manual.

LIST OF ASSEMBLIES TEKTRONlX PART NO. (column two of the

Electrical Parts List)
A list of assemblies can be found at the beginning of the
Electrical Parts List. The assemblies are listed i n numerical order. lndicates part number to be used when ordering replace-
When thecomplete component number of a part is known, this list ment part from Tektronix.
will identify the assembly in which the part is located.

CROSS INDEX-MFR. CODE NUMBER TO SERIALIMODEL NO. (columns three and four
MANUFACTURER of the Electrical Parts List)
The Mfr. Code Number to Manufacturer index for the Column three (3) indicates the serial number at which the
Electrical Parts List is located immediately after this page. The part was first used. Column four (4) indicates theserial number at
Cross Index provides codes, names and addresses of manufac- which the part was removed. No serial number entered indicates
turers of components listed i n the Electrical Parts List. part is good for all serial numbers.

Abbreviations conform to American National Standard Y1.l NAME & DESCRIPTION (column five of the
Electrical Parts List)
COMPONENT NUMBER (column one of the I n the Parts List, an ltem Name is separated from the
description by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an ltem
Electrical Parts List)
Name may sometimes appear as incomplete. For further ltem
A numbering method has been used t o identify assemblies, Name identification, the U.S. Federal Cataloging Handbook H6-1
subassemblies and parts. Examples of this numbering method can be utilized where possible.
and typical expansions are illustrated by the following:
Example a. component num ber
m MFR. CODE (column six of the Electrical Parts
A23R1234 A23 R1234
Assembly number Circuit number
List)
Indicates the code number of the actual manufacturer of the
Read: Resistor 1234 of Assembly 23 part. (Code t o name and address cross reference can be found
immediately after this page.)
Example b. component number

MFR. PART NUMBER (column seven of the

Electrical Parts List)
Read: Resistor 1234 of Subassembly 2 of Assembly 23 Indicates actual manufacturers part number.
Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

CROSS INDEX-MFR. CODE N U M B E R TO M A N U F A C T U R E R

Mfr. Code Manufacturer Address City, State, Zip

OOOAX BUEHLER PRODUCTS I N C . P O BOX A,HIGHWAY 7 0 E A S T K I N G S T O N , NC 2 8 5 0 1
OOOFJ MARCOM S W I T C H E S I N C . 6 7 ALBANY S T R E E T C A Z E N O V I A , N . Y . 13035
OOOHX SAN-0 I N D U S T R I A L C O R P . 1 7 0 WILBER PLACE BOHEMIA, LONG I S L A N D , NY. 117
01121 ALLEN-BRADLEY COMPANY 1 2 0 1 2ND S T R E E T SOUTH MILWAUKEE, W I 5 3 2 0 4
01295 TEXAS I N S T R U M E N T S , I N C . , SEMICONDUCTOR P 0 BOX 5 0 1 2 , 1 3 5 0 0 N CENTRAL
GROUP EXPRESSWAY DALLAS, T X 7 5 2 2 2
0 2 11 1 S P E C T R O L E L E C T R O N I C S CORPORATION 1 7 0 7 0 E A S T GALE AVENUE C I T Y O F I N D U S T R Y , CA 9 1 7 4 5
0 2 1 14 FERROXCUBE CORPORATION P O BOX 3 5 9 , MARION ROAD S A U G E R T I E S , NY 1 2 4 7 7
02735 RCA C O R P O R A T I O N , S O L I D S T A T E D I V I S I O N ROUTE 2 0 2 S O M E R V I L L E , NY 0 8 8 7 6
03508 GENERAL E L E C T R I C COMPANY, SEMI-CONDUCTOR
PRODUCTS DEPARTMENT E L E C T R O N I C S PARK S Y R A C U S E , NY 1 3 2 0 1
04222 AVX C E R A M I C S , D I V I S I O N O F AVX C O R P . P 0 BOX 8 6 7 , 1 9 T H AVE. SOUTH MYRTLE BEACH, S C 2 9 5 7 7
0 4 7 13 MOTOROLA, I N C . , SEMICONDUCTOR PROD. D I V . 5005 E MCDOWELL R D , P O BOX 2 0 9 2 3 P H O E N I X , AZ 8 5 0 3 6
05245 CORCOM I N C . 2 6 3 5 N K I L D A R E AVENUE CHICAGO, I L 6 0 6 3 9
07263 F A I R C H I L D SEMICONDUCTOR, A D I V . O F
F A I R C H I L D CAMERA AND INSTRUMENT C O R P . 4 6 4 E L L I S STREET MOUNTAIN V I E W , CA 9 4 0 4 2
07716 TRW E L E C T R O N I C COMPONENTS, I R C F I X E D
R E S I S T O R S , BURLINGTON D I V . 2 8 5 0 MT. P L E A S A N T BURLINGTON, I A 5 2 6 0 1
12697 CLAROSTAT MFG. C O . , I N C . LOWER WASHINGTON S T R E E T DOVER, NH 0 3 8 2 0
12969 UNITRODE CORPORATION 5 8 0 PLEASANT STREET WATERTOWN, MA 0 2 1 7 2
14193 CAL-R, I N C . 1 6 0 1 O L Y M P I C BLVD. SANTA MONICA, C A 9 0 4 0 4
14433 I T T SEMICONDUCTORS 3301 E L E C T R O N I C S WAY
P 0 BOX 3 0 4 9 WEST PALM BEACH, F L 3 3 4 0 2
14552 MICRO SEMICONDUCTOR C O R P . 2 8 3 0 E FAIRVIEW S T . SANTA ANA, CA 9 2 7 0 4
14936 GENERAL INSTRUMENT C O R P . , SEMICONDUCTOR
PRODUCTS GROUP P.O. BOX 6 0 0 , 6 0 0 W. J O H N S T . H I C K S V I L L E , NY 1 1 8 0 2
15238 I T T SEMICONDUCTORS, A D I V I S I O N O F I N T E R
NATIONAL TELEPHONE AND T E L E G R A P H C O R P . P.O. BOX 1 6 8 , 5 0 0 BROADWAY LAWRENCE, MA 01841
18324 S I G N E T I C S CORP. 811 E . ARQUES SUNNYVALE, CA 9 4 0 8 6
19396 I L L I N O I S TOOL WORKS, I N C . PAKTRON D I V . 9 0 0 F O L L I N LANE, S E V I E N N A , VA 2 2 1 8 0
20932 EMCON D I V O F I L L I N O I S TOOL WORKS I N C . 1 1 6 2 0 SORRENTO VALLEY RD
P 0 BOX 8 1 5 4 2 SAN D I E G O , CA 9 2 1 2 1
22229 SOLITRON DEVICES, I N C . ,
SEMICONDUCTOR GROUP 8808 BALBOA AVENUE SAN D I E G O O P E R S , CA 9 2 1 2 3
24546 CORNING G L A S S WORKS, E L E C T R O N I C
COMPONENTS D I V I S I O N 5 5 0 HIGH STREET BRADFORD, P A 1 6 7 0 1
27014 NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR C O R P . 2 9 0 0 SEMICONDUCTOR D R . SANTA CLARA, CA 9 5 0 5 1
31918 IEE~SCHADOWINC. 8081 WALLACE ROAD EDEN P R A I R I E , MN 55343
32293 INTERSIL , INC . 1 0 9 0 0 N. TANTAU AVE. C U P E R T I N O , CA 9 5 0 1 4
32997 BOURNS, I N C . , T R I M P O T PRODUCTS D I V . 1 2 0 0 COLUMBIA AVE. R I V E R S I D E , CA 9 2 5 0 7
50157 MIDWEST COMPONENTS I N C . P . 0 . BOX 7 8 7
1 9 8 1 P O R T C I T Y BLVD. MUSKEGON, M I 4 9 4 4 3
50434 HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY 6 4 0 PAGE M I L L ROAD P A L 0 A L T O , CA 9 4 3 0 4
51642 CENTRE E N G I N E E R I N G I N C . 2 8 2 0 E COLLEGE AVENUE STATE COLLEGE, P A 1 6 8 0 1
52306 H I G H VOLTAGE D E V I C E S , I N C . 7 4 8 5 AVENUE 304 V I S A L I A , CA 9 3 2 7 7
52648 P L E S S E Y SEMICONDUCTORS 1 6 4 1 KAISER I R V I N E , CA 9 2 7 1 4
54473 M A T S U S H I T A E L E C T R I C , C O R P . O F AMERICA 1 P A N A S O N I C WAY SECAUCUS, N J 0 7 0 9 4
55210 G E T T I G ENG. AND MFG. COMPANY P O BOX 8 5 , O F F ROUTE 45 SPRING MILLS, P A 1 6 8 7 5
56289 SPRAGUE E L E C T R I C C O . 8 7 MARSHALL S T . NORTH ADAMS, MA 0 1 2 4 7
59660 TUSONIX I N C . 2 1 5 5 N F O R B E S BLVD TUCSON, AZ 8 5 7 0 5
71400 BUSSMAN M F G . , D I V I S I O N O F MCGRAW-
EDISON CO. 2 5 3 6 W. U N I V E R S I T Y S T . S T . L O U I S , MO 6 3 1 0 7
72619 D I A L I G H T , D I V . AMPEREX E L E C T R O N I C 2 0 3 HARRISON PLACE BROOKLYN, NY 1 1 2 3 7
72982 E R I E TECHNOLOGICAL PRODUCTS, I N C . 6 4 4 W. 1 2 T H S T . ERIE, PA 1 6 5 1 2
73138 BECKMAN I N S T R U M E N T S , I N C . , H E L I P O T D I V . 2 5 0 0 HARBOR BLVD. F U L L E R T O N , CA 9 2 6 3 4
73899 J F D E L E C T R O N I C S COMPONENTS C O R P . P I N E T R E E ROAD OXFORD, NC 2 7 5 6 5
74276 S I G N A L I T E D I V . , GENERAL INSTRUMENT C O R P . 1 9 3 3 HECK A V E . NEPTUNE, N J 0 7 7 5 3
74970 J O H N S O N , E . F . , CO. 2 9 9 l O T H AVE. S . W. WASECA, MN 5 6 0 9 3
75042 TRW E L E C T R O N I C COMPONENTS, I R C F I X E D
RESISTORS, PHILADELPHIA DIVISION 401 N . BROAD S T . PHILADELPHIA, PA 1 9 1 0 8
75915 LITTELFUSE, INC. 800 E . NORTHWEST HWY DES PLAINES, I L 6 0 0 1 6
76493 BELL I N D U S T R I E S , I N C . ,
MILLER, J. W., DIV. 1 9 0 7 0 REYES A V E . , P 0 BOX 5 8 2 5 COMPTON, CA 9 0 2 2 4
78488 STACKPOLE CARBON CO. S T . MARYS, P A 1 5 8 5 7
80009 TEKTRONIX, INC . P 0 BOX 500 BEAVERTON, OR 9 7 0 7 7
82104 STANDARD G R I G S B Y C O . , D I V . O F SUN
CHEMICAL CORPORATION 9 2 0 RATHBONE AVENUE AURORA, I L 6 0 5 0 7
90201 MALLORY C A P A C I T O R C O . , D I V . O F 3 0 2 9 E . WASHINGTON S T R E E T
P . R . MALLORY AND C O . , I N C . P . 0 . BOX 3 7 2 INDIANAPOLIS, I N 4 6 2 0 6
91 6 3 7 DALE E L E C T R O N I C S , I N C . P . 0 . BOX 609 COLUMBUS, NE 6 8 6 0 1
9 53 4 8 GORDOS CORPORATION 2 5 0 GLENWOOD AVENUE BLOOMFIELD, N J 0 7 0 0 3

8-2 REV DEC 1981

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number

CKT BOARD ASSY:VERT PREAMP/LV POWER

CKT BOARD ASSY:NEGATiVE RGLTR
CKT BOARD ASSY:POSITIVE RGLTR
CKT BOARD ASSY:VERT OUT/HV POWER
CKT BOARD ASSY:B TIMING SWITCH
CKT BOARD ASSY:A TIMING SWITCH

ATTENUATORYVAR:5MV TO 5V,1 MEG OHM HYBRID

CKT BOARD ASSY:A & B TRIGGER
CKT BOARD ASSY:SWEEP/HORIZ AMP
CKT BOARD ASSY:DELTA TIME LOGIC
CKT BOARD ASSY:B TRIGGER SWITCH

A1 0 CKT BOARD ASSY:VERT PREAMP/LV POWER

AlOCl CAP.,VAR,CER D1:l-3PF,100V
A10C3 CAP. ,FXD,CER DI:150PF,10%,100V
A10C6 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.OOlUF,+80-20%,1OOV
A10C7 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.O01UF,+80-20%,1OOV
AlOClO CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.O01UF,+80-20%,1OOV

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.O01UF,+80-20%,1OOV
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:150PF,10%,100V
CAP. ,FXD,CER DI:4.7PFY5%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:4.7PFY5%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.027UFY20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:2.2UFY20%,25V

REV FEB 1982

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mf r

Com~onentNo. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
A10C181
A10C182
A10C183
A10C197
A10C224
A10C225

A10C226 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.O1UF,10%,10OV

A10C231 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:lOOPF,10%,100V
A10C232 CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:2.7UFy20%,5OV
A10C237 CAP. ,FXD CER DI:O.O47UF,20%,50V
A10C238 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.O1UF,10%,100V
A10C246 CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:10UF,+50-10%,100V

A10C248
A10C249
A10C250
AlOC25 1
A10C252
A10C253

A10C257
A10C258
AlOC259
A10C260
A10C264
A10C265

AlOCRl COMPONENT ASSY:(~) DIODES

AlOCR2 COMPONENT ASSY:(2) DIODES
AlOCR3 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
AlOCR8 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
A10CR53 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
A10CR54 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

A10CR55 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

A10CR56 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
A10CR57 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
A10CR58 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONY30V,150MA
A10CR62 COMPONENT AssY:(~) DIODES
A10CR63 COMPONENT ASSy:(2) DIODES

A10CR64 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONy30V,150MA

A10CR69 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
AlOCR132 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONy30V,150MA
AlOCR134 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
AlOCRl38 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONy30V,150MA
AlOCR139 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONY30V,150MA

AlOCR140 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30VY150MA

AlOCR142 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
A10CR146 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30VY150MA
AlOCR149 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
AlOCRl8O SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
AlOCR20 1 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

AlOCR209 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA 1N4152R

AlOCR225 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,200Vy1500MA 3N55 FAMILY
AlOCR237 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA 1N4152R
AlOCR239 SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA 1N4152R
AlOCR250 SEMICOND DEVICE:RECT,SIy200V,2.5A SDA10228
AlOCR259 SEMICOND DEVICE:RECT,SIy200V,2.5A SDA10228
AlOE6 SHIELDING BEAD,:
A10E7 SHIELDING BEAD,:
AlOEll SHIELDING BEAD,:

REV FEB 1982

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
SHIELDING BEAD,: 02114 56-590-651486
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5.2 X 20MMY0.75A,125V OOOHX TSC.75
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5 X 20MMy1.25A,125V OOOHX TSC 1.25
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5 X 20MMy1.25A,125V OOOHX TSC 1.25
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5.2 X 20MM,1.5A9125V OOOHX TSC 1.5
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5.2 X 20MMy1.5A,125V OOOHX TSC 1.5

COMPONENT ASSY:SHIELDING BEAD/BARE WIRE 80009 119-1486-00

COMPONENT ASSY:SHIELDING BEADIBARE WIRE 80009 119-1486-00
COMPONENT ASSY:SHIELDING BEADIBARE WIRE 80009 119-1486-00
COMPONENT ASSY:SHIELDING BEADIBARE WIRE 80009 119-1486-00
TRANSISTOR:MONOLITHIC,DUAL,E'IELD,EFEECT 32293 OBD
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN,DUAL 52648 SL36OC

04713 SPS8223
22229 F2942
04713 SPS8223
04713 SPS8223
32293 OBD
52648 SL36OC

04713
22229
04713
04713
04713
04713

04713
80009
04713
80009
01295
80009

01295
80009
04713
80009
80009
80009

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN,PRESTRESSED 80009
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN,PRESTRESSED 80009
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 02735
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN,SEL FROM MJE521 04713
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN,SEL FROM MJE521 04713
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP 04713

04713
01121
01121
01121
01 121
01121

A10R8 01121
A10R9 01121
AlORlO 73 138
AlORll 01121
A10R13 01121
A10R14 01121

01121
01121
91637

REV DEC 1981

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
RES. ,VAR,NONWIR:50 OHM,10% ,0.50W
RES.,FXD,FILM:105 OHMY1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,FILM:105 OHMY1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:430 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,FILM:105 OHMY1%,0.125W
RES. ,FXD,FILM:105 OHM,1%,0.125W

RES. ,FXD,CMPSN:220 OHM,5%,O .l25W

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:300 OHMY5%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,FILM:4.02K OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:470 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHMY5%,0.25W

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:TRMR,lOO OHMY10%,0.5W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lO OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:360 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:1.3K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,FXD,CMPSN:16 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,FILM:619 OHM,1%,0.125W

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:50 OHM,10%,0.50W
RES.,FXD,FILM:105 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,FILM:105 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:430 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,FXD,CMPSN:560 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,FILM:105 OHMY1%,0.125W

RES.,FXD,FILM:lO5 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES. ,VAR,NONWIR:2K OHM,10% ,O.5OW
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:50 OHMY10%,0.50W
RES.,FXD,FILM:32.4 OHMY1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:13 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHMY5%,0.25W

RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3.3K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3.3K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,VAR,NONWLR:250 OHM,10%,0.50W
RES. ,FXDYCMPSN:2.7K OHM,5% ,0.125W

REV FEB 1982

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:39 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYFILM:3.24K OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXDYFILM:2.49K OHMY1%,0.125W
RES.,FXDJFILM:3.24K OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:39 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,FXD,FILM:4.O2K OHM,l% ,0.125W

RES.,FXDYFILM:4.02K OHM,1%,0.125W
RES. ,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,FILM:255 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXDYFILM:2.43K OHM,1%,0.125W
RES. ,FXD,CMPSN:750 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:56 OHMY5%,0.125W

RES.,FXD,FILM:255 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES. ,FXD ,FILM:2.43K OHM,1% ,0.125W
RES.,FXD,FILM:634 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:750 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,FXD,FILM:301 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,FILM:549 OHM,1%,0.125W

RES. ,FXD,FILM:127 OHM,1%,0.125W

RES.,FXDYFILM:2.49K OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHMJ5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,FILM:113 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:430 OHMY5%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,FILM:78.7 OHM,1%,0.125W

REV FEB 1982

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix Seria.I/Model No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number

RES.,FXDYFILM:1.82K OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:6.8K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3.9KOHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lK OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,FXD,CMPSN:5.1 OHM,5%,O .25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:51KOHMY5%,0.25W

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:9,1K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:510 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:200KOHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,FXD,FILM:634 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES. ,FXDYFLLM:31.6KOHM,l% ,0.125W

RES. ,FXD,WW:40 OHMY1%,3W RS2B4ROOF

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHM,5%,0.25W CB1035
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHMY5%,0.25W CB1035
RES.,FXD,WW:1.8 OHM,5%,2W BWH- 1r800J
RES.,FXD,WW:l OHM,5%,2W BWH-1ROOO J
RES. ,FXDYCMPSN:39KOHM,5% ,0.25W CB3935

CB1025
CB2725
CB2725
BWH- 1r000J
BWH-1R800J
1013-10000K

RES.,THERMAL:lK OHM,~O%,~MW/DEG C
SWITCH,PUSH:DPDT,l BUTTON,2 POLE
SWITCH,PUSH:SGL BUTTON,2 PLE
SWITCH,PUSH:5 BUTTON,2 POLE,VERT MODE
SWITCH,PUSH:3 BUTTON,IL & MR 2 POLE
SWITCH,PUSH:2 BUTTON,2 POLE

SWITCH,PUSH:3 STA,2 POLE,W/O MTG EARS OBD

SWITCH,PUSH:SGL BUTTON,2 PLE 260-2018-00
TERM,TEST P0INT:BRS CD PL 214-0579-00
TERM,TEST P0INT:BRS CD PL 214-0579-00
TERM,TEST P0INT:BRS CD PL 214-0579-00
TERM,TEST P0INT:BRS CD PL 214-0579-00

REV FEB 1982

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mf r

Com~onentNo. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICAL PREAMP 80009 155-0220-00
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL OPNL AMPL,CHK 80009 156-0158-03
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICAL PREAMP 80009 155-0231-00
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICAL PREAMP 80009 155-0220-00
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICAL PREAMP 80009 155-0231-00
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER 04713 MC1741CU

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2-IN NAND SCHMITT TRI 04713 SN74LS132NDS

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL D FLIP-FLOP 07263 74LS74A
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL 14 TO 1 LINE SELIMUX 01295 SN74LS153
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER 04713 MC1741CU
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.25Wy9V,5% 04713 SZ12483KRL
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,1Wy15V,5% 80009 152-0405-00

SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4Wy33V,5% 80009 152-0241-00

SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,SIy47V,5%,1W 04713 1N4756A
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,lW,l2V,5% 14433 1N4742A
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,SIy6.2V,5%,lW 04713 1N4735A
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,SIy6.2V,5%,1W 04713 1N4735A
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,1Wy12V,5% 14433 1N4742A

AlOWl 131-0566-00 BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1

A10W2 131-0566-00 BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
A10W143 131-0566-00 BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
A10W146 131-0566-00 BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
A10W2 11 131-0566-00 BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
A10W215 131-0566-00 BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1

BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1

BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1

BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1

BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG 55210 L-2007-1

REV DEC 1981

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Descri~tion Code Mfr Part Number
A1 1 CKT BOARD ASSY:NEGATIVE REG
AllCl CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
A1 lC2 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
A1 lC8 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PFJ5%,100V
A1 lC9 CAP. ,FXD,CER DI:0.1UFY20%,50V
AllC15 CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,100V

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
SEMICOND DEVLCE:SILICON,30VJ150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30VJ150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONJ30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILLCONJ30V,150MA
TRANSLSTOR:SILICON,PNP,SEL

RES.,FXD,FILM:lOK OHMJ0.25%,0.125W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:5.1K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDJCMPSN:1.3K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDJFILM:1.13K OHMY1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,FILM:lOK OHMJ1%,0.125W
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL OPNL AMPL,CHK

SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,5.lVy5%
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,O.4W,9.1VJ5%

REV FEB 1982

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr

C o m ~ o n e n tNo. Part No, Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
CKT BOARD ASSY:POSITIVE REG
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:lOOPF,5%,100V
CAP. ,FXD,CEK DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:lOOPF,5%,10OV
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

SEMICOND DEVTCE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:200 OHMS5%,0.25W 01121 CB2015

RES. ,FXDYFILM:35K OHM,0.25%,0.125W 91637 MFF1816D35001C
RES. ,FXDYFILM:5K OHMYO.25% ,0.125W 91637 MFF1816D50000C
RES.,FXDYFTLM:16.7K OHM,0.25%,0.125W 91637 MFF1816D16701C
RES.,FXDYFTLM:16.7K OHM,0.25%,0.125W 91637 MFF1816D16701C
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:15K OHMY5%,0.25W 01121 CBli35

MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL OPNL AMPL,CHK 80009 156-0158-03

SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4Wy5.1V,5% 04713 SZ11755

REV FEB 1982

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
CKT BOARD ASSY:VERT OUT/HV POWER
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:1UFy20%,5OV
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:2.2UFy20%,2OV
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:4.7UFy20%,1OV
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:200PF,5%,100V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.O1UF,l0%,100V

CAP.,VAR,PLSTC:0.4-1.2PFy600V
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.005UF,0.1%,200V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP. ,FXD,CER DI:O.O1UF,10%,100V

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.1UF,20%,100V
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

REV FEB 1982

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA 01295
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA 01295
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,I50MA 01295
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON9175Vy100MA 07263
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONy30V,150MA 01295
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V3150MA 01295

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175V3100MA 07263

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175V~lOOMA 07263
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175V9100MA 07263
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175Vy100MA 07263
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA 01295
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175Vy100MA 07263

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30Vy150MA 01295

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,400Vy400MAySEL 14936
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175Vy100MA 07263
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA 01295
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON3400V,400MA,SEL 14936
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,200VylA 04713

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175V,lOOMA 07263

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V9150MA 01295
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA 01295
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA 01295
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175V~lOOMA 07263
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONy400V,750MA 14433

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,175Vy100MA 07263 FDH2161

LAMP,GLOW:NEON,T-2,60 TO 90 VOLTS 74276 NE2V-T
LAMP,GLOW:NEON,T-2,60 TO 90 VOLTS 74276 NE 2V-T
LAMP,GLOW:NEON,T-2,60 TO 90 VOLTS 74276 NE2V-T
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5.2 X 20MM,0.25AY125V OOOHX TSC .25
COIL,RF:8UH,TOROIDAL INDUCTOR 80009 108-0440-00

COILYRF:80UH 80009
COILYRF:1.8MH 76493
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 80009
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP,SEL 80009
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 80009
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI PRESTRESSED & TESTED 80009

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN,PRESTRESSED 80009
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP,PRESTRESSED 80009
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN,PRESTRESSED 80009
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI PRESTRESSED & TESTED 80009
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 80009
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN 80009

80009
80009
80009
91637
01121
01121

01121
73138
91637
91637
01121
91637

01121
73 138
01 121
Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOO OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:TRMRy500 OHMY0.5W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:180 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:180 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,VAR,NONWIR.:TRMR,200 OHMYO.5W
RES.,FXD,FILM:124 OHMY1%,0.125W

RES.,VAR,NONWIR:50 OHM,10%,0.50W
RES.,FXD,FILM:422 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,FILM:71.5 OHM,1%,0.125W
RES. ,FXD,FILM:71.5 OHMY1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,FILM:422 OHMY1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHMY5%,0.25W

REV DEC 1981

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
RES.,VARYNONWIR:50K OHM,20%
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:20K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:20K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYFILM:450K OHM,1%,0.125W
RES. ,FXDYFILM:50K OHM, 1%,0.125W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:47K OHMY5%,0.25W

RES,NTWK,FXD F1:HIGH VOLTAGE DIVIDER

RES.,FXDYCMPSN:39K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:470K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:12K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOO OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOO OHMY5%,0.25W

RES. ,FXDYCMPSN:8.2K OHM,5% ,0.25W

RES. ,FXD,CMPSN:lOO OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:lOOK OHM,20%,0.50W
RES.,VARYNONWIR:5K OHM,20%,0.50W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:62K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOOK OHMY5%,0.25W

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOO OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOO OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,VARYNONWIR:PNL,5M OHMY20%,0.5W
COILYRF:75NH
COILYRF:75NH
XFMR,PWR,STU:HIGH VOLTAGE

COILyRF:FIXED,95UH
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICAL OUTPUT AMPL
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VERTICAL OUTPUT DR
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
SEMICOND DEV1CE:HV MULTRySI,8KV PP INP
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,O.4Wy4.3V,5%

SEMICOND DEVICE:ZEN,SIy82V,5%,5W
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,47Vy5%
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,10Vyl%
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENERy0.4W,6.2V,5%
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4W,15OV,5%
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG

BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG

BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG

REV DEC 1981

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mfr

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Wlfr Part Number
CKT BOARD ASSY:B TIMING SWITCH

CAP SET,MATCHED:10UF,1UFy0.0099UFy900PF 80009 295-0193-00

(FURN. AS A MATCHED SET WITH ~P7~1,62,C3)

RES,NTWK,FXD F1:TIMING 80009 307-0693-00

CKT BOARD ASSY:A TIMING SWITCH

CAP SET,MATCHED:1OUF,lUF,O.O099UF~900PF 80009 295-0193-00

(FURN. AS A MATCHED SET WITH Al6Cl9C2,C3,64)
TRANSLSTOR:SILICON,NPN 80009 151-0190-05

RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3.3K OHMy5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:4.7K OHM95%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:7.5K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,FXD,CMPSN:l5K OHM,5% ,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:27K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:56K OHMY5%,0.25W

ATTENUATOR3VAR:5MV TO 5V,1 MEG OHM

RES,NTWK,FXD F1:ATTENUATOR
RES,NTWK,FXD F1:ATTENUATOR
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:PNL,lOK OHMy20%,0.5W
(CHANNEL 1 ONLY)
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:PNL,lOK OHMY20%,0.5W
(CHANNEL 2 ONLY)

SW CAM ACTR AS:ATTENUATOR

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mf r

Com~onentNo. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
CKT BOARD ASSY:A & B TRIGGER
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:lOF,5%,500V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:lOF,5%,500V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:2.2PF95%,500V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:91PF,5%,100V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,500V

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:1.5UFy10%,1OV
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP. ,FXD,CER DI:15PF,10%,100V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:1000PF,10%,100V

COMPONENT ASSY:CAPACLTOR/RESISTOR
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,5OV
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:3.3UFY1O%,15V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
BOlOlOO B010512X CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:3.3UFY1O%,15V
XB010513 COMPONENT ASSY:CAPACITOR/RESISTOR
(ALSO SEE A23R13lYA23~145)

BOlOlOO B010512X CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:3.3UFY1O%,15V

XB010513 COMPONENT ASSY:CAPACITOR/RESISTOR
(ALSO SEE A23R13lYA23~145)
COMPONENT ASSY:CAPACITOR/RESISTOR
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONy30V,l50MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,15V,HOT CARRIER

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DVC SE:MATCHED PAIR FET

REV FEB 1982:

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix Serial/Model No. Mfr

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number

RES.,FXD,FILM:lOK OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOOK OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:47K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,VARYNONWLR:TRMR,20K OHM,10%,0.5W
RES,NTWK,FXD F1:TRIGGER PICK-OFF
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3OO OHMY5%,0.25W

COMPONENT ASSY:CAPACITOR/RESLSTOR
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:5.1 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,VAR,NONWIR:TRMR,lOK OHMY1%,0.5W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:62 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:2.2K OHMY5%,0.25W

RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,VARYNONWLR:5K OHM,20%,0.50W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:1.3K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:4.7K OHM,5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:2.4K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:56 OHMY5%,0.25W

REV FEB 1982

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
311-2102-00 RES.,VAR,NONWLR:TRMR,lOK OHMY1%,0.5W
315-0222-00 RES.,FXDYCMPSN:2.2K OHM,5%,0.25W
290-0246-00 BOlOlOO B010512X CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:3.3UFY1O%,15V
119-1485-00 XB010513 COMPONENT ASSY:CAPACITOR/RESISTOR
----- ----- (ALSO SEE A23C133,A23C147)
315-0302-00 RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3K OHMY5%,0.25W

315-0101-00 RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOO OHM,5%,0.25W

290-0246-00 BOlOlOO B010512X CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:3.3UF,10%,15V
119-1485-00 XB010513 COMPONENT ASSY:CAPACITOR/RESLSTOR
----- ----- (ALSO A23C133,A23C147)
315-0302-00 RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3K OHMY5%,0.25W
315-0302-00 RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3K OHM,5%,0.25W

RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3K OHM,5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3K OHMY5%,0.25W
COMPONENT ASSY:CAPACITOR/RESISTOR
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:3K OHM,5%,0.25W
RES. ,FXD ,CMPSN:1.3K OHM,5% ,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:22K OHM,5%,0.25W

RES.,FXD,FILM:lK OHM,1%,0.125W
SW LEVER ASSY:4 POSN,14 DEG,A COUPLING
SW LEVER ASSY:A SOURCE
MICROCKT,LNTFC:TRLGGER
MICROCKT,INTFC:TRLGGER

REV FEE3 1982

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
CKT BOARD ASSY:SWEEP/HORIZ AMP
CAP.,FXD,ELCTLT:2.2UF,20%,20V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:200PF,5%,100V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF920%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:lOPF,lO%,lOOV

REV DEC 1981

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriaVModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30VY150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,l5OMA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONY30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONy30Vy150MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,3OV,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONY30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONy30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONY30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,3OV,150MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONY30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,3OV,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONy30V,150MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30VY150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONY3OV,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,3OV,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30Vy150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,3OV,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

REV DEC 1989

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVTCE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,l5OMA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICONY30V,150MA
COMPONENT ASSY:SHIELDING BEAD~BAREWIRE
COMPONENT ASSY:SHIELDING BEAD/BARE WIRE

SHIELDING BEAD,:FERRITE
RELAY,REED:l FORM A,5V,0.25A,lOOV
COMPONENT ASSY:SHIELDING BEAD/BARE WIRE
COMPONENT ASSY:SHIELDING BEAD/BARE WIRE
SEMICOND DVC SE:MATCHED PAIR FET

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP,SEL
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP,SEL
SEMICOND DVC SE:MATCHED PAIR FET

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP,SEL
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP,SEL
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN,PRESTRESSED
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI PRESTRESSED & TESTED

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN,PRESTRESSED
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI PRESTRESSED & TESTED
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,PNP,SEL
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,JFE,N-CHANNEL
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN

TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI PRESTRESSED & TESTED
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI PRESTRESSED & TESTED
TRANSISTOR:SILICON,NPN
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI PRESTRESSED & TESTED

REV DEC 1981

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mf r

Com~onentNo. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:IOM OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3.3K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:5.1K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lK OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,FXDYCMPSN:3K OHMY5%,0.25W

RES.,FXDYCMPSN:4.7K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:15K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:820K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:68K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,VAR,NONWIR:1OK OHM,10%,0.50W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:20K OHMY5%,0.25W

B010513 RES.,FXD,CMPSN:240 OHMY5%,0.25W

RES.,FXDYCMPSN:3K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lK OHMY5%,0.25W
RES. ,FXDYCMPSN:4.7K OHM,5% ,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lK OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lO OHMY5%,0.25W

CB2025
CB2425
MFF 18 1 6 G I ?OROF

REV DEC 1981

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont N a r m & Description Code Mfr Part Number

RES.,FXDYCMPSN:43K OHM,5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:47 OHM95%,0.25W
RES. ,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHM95%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,FILM:lK OHMY0.1%,0.125W

EV DEC 1981
 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mf r

C o m p o n e n t No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
RES. ,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHM,5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOK OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYFILM:22.6K OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXDYFILM:22.6K OHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOO OHMY5%,0.25W

RES. ,FXDYCMPSN:22K OHMY5%,0.25W

RES.,FXDYCMPSN:39K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOOK OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:680 OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:16K OHMY5%,0.25W
RES.,FXDYCMPSN:22K OHMY5%,0.25W

REV DEG 1981

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix SeriaVModel No. Mf r

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number

MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VOLTAGE REGULATOR
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:A AND B SWP/PICKOFF
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:A AND B SWP/PICKOFF
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:A & B LOGIC
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:DUAL J-K FF,BURN IN
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:HORIZOWTAL PREAMPL

MICROCIRCUIT,LI:OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL OPNL AMPL,CHK
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:DUAL OPNL AMPL,CHK
BOlOlOO B010274 MICROCIRCUIT,DI:TPL 2 CHAN MUX,SCR
B010275 MICROCIRCUIT,DI:TRIPLE 3-CHANMUX,SEL
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:HEX INV/BUFF,SELECTED

MICROCIRCUIT,LI:5-TRANSISTOR ARRAY
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4WYlOV,5%
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER,0.4Wy8.2V,5%
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG

BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG

BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG
BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG

BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG

BUS CONDUCT0R:DUMMY RES,2.375,22 AWG

REV DEC 1981

 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix Serial/Model No. Mfr

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number

CKT BOARD ASSY:DELTA TIME LOGIC

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.OlUF,10%,10OV
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:100PF,10%,100V
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:lUF,l0%,5OV
CAP.,FXD,PLSTC:0.22UFy10%y80V

CAP.,FXD,CER DI:47PF,10%,100V
CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
' CAP.,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SW,SI,40V,200MA

SEMICOND DEVICE:SW,SI,40V,200MA 03508 DE140

SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA 01295 1N4152R
LT EMITTING DIO:GREENY565NM,20MA 50434 HLMP 1502
BOlOlOO B010536 SEMICOND DVC SE:MATCHED PAIR FET 80009 151-1042-02

B010537 SEMICOND DVC SE:MATCHED PAIR FET

RES.,FXDYFILM:2.26KOHM,1%,0.125W
RES.,FXD,FILM:lK OHM & 9K OHM,5% EA,O.lW
RES.,FXD,FILM:lOOK OHMY1%,0.125W
RES.,FXDYFILM:475KOHM,1%,0.125W
RES. ,FXD,FILM:47.5K OHM,1% ,0.125W
RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lOOK OHMY5%,0.25W

REV DEC 1981

Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Seniice

Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mfr

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number

RES.,FXD,CMPSN:lK OHM95%,0.25W
RES.,VARYNONWIR:20K OHM,20%,0.5W
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:OPER AMPL,JFET,BURN-IN
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:VOLTAGE REFERENCE
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:TRIPLE 3-CHANMUX,SEL
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:A/D CONVERTER

MICROCIRCULT,DI:QUAD EXCLUSIVE OR GATE 156-0786-02

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD 2-INP ORGATE CD4G71BFX
MICROCIRCUIT,LI:QUAD COMPARATOR,SEL LM339JDS
:QUAD 2-INP NAND ST,BURN-IN 80009
.5 DIGIT 73138
:32 X 8 PROM,PRGM 80009

MICROCIRCUIT,LI:QUAD COMPARATOR,SEL 04713

MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD EXCLUSIVE OR GATE 80009
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:QUAD EXCLUSIVE OR GATE 80009
MICROCIRCUIT,DI:HEX BUFFER 04713
SEMICOND DEVICE:ZENER90.4W,4.3V,5% 14552

CKT BOARD ASSY:B TRIGGER SWITCH

SWITCH,SL ASSY:B TRIGGER SLOPE
SWITCH,SL ASSY:B TRIGGER SOURCE
 Replaceable Electrical Parts-2336 Service

Tektronix Serial /Model No. M fr

Component No. Part No. Eff Dscont Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
CHASSIS PARTS

FANyTUBEAXIAL:12VDC,2.4W,5250 RPM OOOAX OBD

SEMICOND DEVICE:SiLICON,30V,150MA
SEMICOND DEVICE:SILICON,30V,150MA

DELAY LINEyELEC:90NS,75 OHM

LT EMITTING DIO:GREENy560NM,35MA MAX

LT EMITTING DIO:REDY655NM 50MA MAX
LT EMITTING DIO:REDY655NM 50MA MAX

FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,1A~250VyFAST-BLOW 71400 AGC 1

FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5 X 20MM,0.5A,250V,30 MIN 75915 212-500
(OPTION Al,A2 & A3 ONLY)
FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,0.5Ay250VyFAST-BLOW 71400 AGC 112
(OPTION A4 ONLY)

COMPONENT ASSY:RF COLL,W/CONNECTOR

COMPONENT ASSY:RF CO~L,W/CONNECTOR

ELECTRON TUBE:CRT,T2330

REV FEB 1982

 This Document was scanned from the original
Tektronix Service Manual
For enquiries about high quality technical manuals

[email protected]

This Document is a complete Scan from the original

Tektronix manual
For enquiries about our complete
High quality line of technical Manuals in PDF

mailto : [email protected]
 DIAGRAMS AND CIRCUIT BOARD ILLUSTRATIONS
Symbols
Graphic symbols and class designation letters are Y14.15, 1966 Drafting Practices.
based on ANSl Standard Y32.2-1975. Y14.2, 1973 Line Conventions and Lettering.
Y10.5, 1968 Letter Symbols for Quantities Used in
Logic symbology is based on ANSl Y32.14-1973 in Electrical Science and Electrical
terms of positive logic. Logic symbols depict the logic Engineering.
function ~erformedand mav differ from the manufac-
turer's data. American National Standard l nstitute
1430 Broadway
New York, New ~ork-10018
The overline on a signal name indicates that the signal
performs its intended function when it is i n the low state. Component Values
Electrical components shown on the diagrams are in
the following units unless noted otherwise:
Abbreviations are based on ANSl Y1 .l-1972. Capacitors = Values one or greater are in picofarads (pF).
Values less than one are in microfarads
Other ANSI standards that are used in the preparation (Y F)
of diagrams by Tektronix, Inc. are: Resistors = Ohms (0).

The information and special symbols below may appear in this manual..

Assembly Numbers and Grid Coordinates

The schematic diagram and circuit board component
Each assembly in the instrument is assigned an location illustration have grids. A lookup table with the
assembly number (e.g., A20). The assembly number grid coordinates is provided for ease of locating the
appears on the circuit board outline on the diagram, in the component. Only the components illustrated on the facing
title for the circuit board component location illustration, diagram are listed in the lookup table. When more than
and in the lookup table for the schematic diagram and one schematic diagram is used t o illustrate the circuitryon
corres'ponding component locator illustration. The a circuit board, the circuit board illustration may only
Replaceable Electrical Parts list is arranged by assemblies appear opposite the first diagram on which it was il-
i n numerical sequence; the components are listed by lustrated; the lookup table will list thediagram number of
component number *(see following illustration for other diagrams that the circuitry of the circuit board
constructing a component number). appears on.

D
f, - - Modified Component
Funct~onBlock T ~ t l e ---2
I-" , f-- (Depicted in Grey, or With
Grey Outline) - See Parts List.
Internal
Screwdriver Strap or Link
Adjustment

Cam Switch
Closure Chart
(Dot indicates
switch closure) Plug to E.C. Board
Etched Circuit Board
Outlined in Black
Indicators
Refer t o Waveform
Coaxial connectors:
Function Block male
Outline female
IC type Plug Index; signifies p i n No. 1
'nal Screwdriver Adj.
Test Voltage
Shielding
Heat Sink
Selected value, see Parts List
Board Name and Maintenance Section for
Selection Criteria

P/O-Part of
circuit board Decoupled or Filtered
;,// Voltage
Assembly Number 670-xXxx-xx -_--.... ..... . . .."..---- Refer to Diagram Number
Tektronix Part No. 1
//pT * COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
for circuit boards SYNC GENERATOR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . ." Schematic Name
Numbr 81 und) and Number
C n m l m0unlldmmmnentr hare n o * n m Y y N v m b l
~ l t l l x - ~ ( end 01 RedanaUe t l e c l l l O l Palls Llfl
 Section 9-2336 Service

COLOR CODE

TYPICAL DUAL

\
CASE
OMPOSITION S M A L L DISC
CAPACITORS

I M E T A L CASE I
TRANSISTORS
TRANSISTOR

LARGE SINGLE
-
DUAL

DIPPED
TANTALUM
ELECTROLYTICS
CATHODE
METAL-FILM IS F L A T
RESISTORS SIDE W I T H
B SHORT L E A D

CERAMIC
I J
a@ @ - 1st. 2nd. and 3 r d significarit figures
and
CAPACITORS

INDEX
FLATPACK
TRANSISTOR
LLEDJ

@ -multiplier @ -tolerance IS 21

-temperature coefficient
@ and/or @ color code may n o t be present 5 INDEX I INDEX I
@ -polarity and voltage rating on some capacitors IND
20

COLOR SIGNIFICANT RESISTORS CAPACITORS DIPPED

MULTIPLIER TOLERANCE MULTIPLIER TOLERANCE TANTALUM
VOLTAGE
over 10 p F under 1 0 p F RATING
1
---
BLACK
BROWN
0
1
1
10 +%
I
1
10
50%
fl%
3.2 PF
k0.3 p F
4 VDC
6 VDC
L L l O U I D C R Y S T A L DISPLAY
1
4

RED 2 lo2 or 100 +2% Io2 or I00 +2% --- IOVDC

ORANGE 3 l o 3 or I K 3% Io3 or I000 %i% --- 15VDC
INDEX INDEX
YELLOW 4 lo4 or 1 0 K a% Io4 or I0,000 + l o o % -9% --- 20 VDC
GREEN 5 1050r100K *%% 1o5 or 100,000 5% k0.5 p F 2 5 VDC
BLUE 6 lo6 or1 M *A% 1o6 or 1,000,000 --A --- 3 5 VDC
VIOLET 7 --A
+11
I 0% --- --- --- 5 0 VDC
GRAY 8 --- --- or 0.01 +80%-20% kO.25pF ---
WHITE 9 --- --- I0-' or 0.1 +0%
I ?I pF 3 VDC
GOLD 1 0 - I or 0.1 *5% --- --- --- ---
SILVER I - I or 0.01 I +lo% I --- I --- I --- I ---
NONE I - I --- I f20% I --- I &lo% I *Ip F I --- I INTEGRATED CIRCUITS I
LEAD CONFIGURATIONS A N D CASE STYLES ARE TYPICAL, BUT M A Y V A R Y DUE TO VENDOR CHANGES OR
INSTRUMENT MODIFICATIONS. 41 18-70A

Figure 9-1. Color codes for resistors and capacitors.

REV FEB I 9 8 2 Figure 9-2. Semiconductor lead configurations.

2336 Service
To identify any component
mounted on a circuit board and
to locate that component in the a. In the instrument identify the Assembly Number of the a. Compare the circuit board with its illustration and locate a. Locate and pull out tabbed page whose number and title c. Under the SCHEM LOCATION column, read the grid
appropriate schematic diagram circuit boardin question.TheAssembly Number isusually thedesired component by area and shape on the illustra- correspond with the Schematic Diagram Number just coordinates for the desired component.
printed on the upper left corner of the circuit board on the determined in the table. Schematicdiagram nomenclature

b.
component side.

In the manual locate and pull out tabbed pagewhosetitle

I b. ScanthetableadjacenttotheCircuit Boardlllustrationand
find the Circuit Number of the desired component.
and numbers are printed on the front side of the tabs
(facing the front of the manual). d. Using the Circuit Number and gridcoordinates, locatethe
component on the schematic diagram.
corresponds with the Assembly Number of the circuit
b. Scan the Component Location Table adjacent to the
board. Circuit board assembly numbers and board
schematic diagram and find the Circuit Number of the
nomenclature are printed on the back side of the tabs
(facing the rear of the manual).
c. Determine the Schematic Diagram Number in whlchthe
component is located.
I A 6 CRT BOARD
I
desired component.

I
COMPDNENTS LOCATED ON SCHEMATI
PULLOUT
---.-
PAGE TABS
FOR SCHEMATIC

COMPONENTS LOCATE0 ON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

\ ; \
ASSEMBLY NUMBER ILL~STRATIONFOR
BOARD ILLUSTRATION AND CIRCUIT INSTRUMENT CIRCUIT
BOARD NAME BOARD LOCATION \
I PARTIAL A6 GRT CIRCUIT BOARD

CRT CIRCUIT
5. Locate the Component on the Circuit Board 4. Determine the Circuit Board Illustration qnd Component
Location
a. In the manual, locate and pull out the tabbedpage whose
title and Assembly Number correspond with the desired $J a, From the schematic diagram, determine the Assembly
circuit board. This information is on the back side of the Number of the circuit board on which:the component is
tabs. mounted. This information is boxed andlocatedin a corner SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
of the heavy line that distinguishes the board outline. NAME AND NUMBER

b. Using the Circuit Number and grid coordinates, locatethe

component on the Circuit Board Illustration. b. Scan the Component Location Table for the Assembly To identify any component in a
NumberjustdeterminedandfindtheCircuit Numberofthe schematic diagram and to locate
desired component. that component on its respective
c. In the circuit board location illustration, determine the circuit board.
location of the circuit board in the instrument.
c. Under the BOARD LOCATION column, read the grid
coordinates for the desired component.
d. Find the circuit board i n the instrument and compare it
with its illustration in the manual to locate the desired
component on the board. Figure 9.3. Locating components on schematic diagrams and circuit board illustrations.
 l--+ivG&&\--7 CH 2 INVERT
2336 Service
I

VERTICAL
I
I
--
1
PREAMP
GATES DELAY DELAY LINE + BY LIMIT L VERTICAL VERTICAL
OUTPUT
- + VERTICAL OUTPUT
-
L

LINE VERTICAL - CR8 I CRB PREAMP

- - VERTICAL OUTPUT

1
DRIVER DLQ00 --) CR24 CR25 --' U43
057 1 U30
U41B CRS6 US4
81 49 LINE TRIGGER b

I
0153

n VERTICAL
C H
PREAMP
2 t
CR132
jcRl38
CR13g
CR143
0163
9170
0175
Ul60
VERTICAL PREAMPLIFIER 1
CHANNEL SVITCH 1 AND
DELAY LINE DRIVER
VERTICAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
0 3
TO A TRIGGER
GENERATOR

QlIQ,Q132 CH2-
0133, 0134

H
AC-POVER
DISPLAY TRIGGER DISABLE SOURCE
INPUT
POYER
INPUT
AND
TRANSFORMER
0246 I U237 CALIBRATOR AND FAN
0l
8

1 SB01 REGULATOR
I I SO02
PO, 010

I 1
5803
TRIC VIEV ENABLE TB00 P I 8 1 Q20
Q252 I 4253

TRIC VIEW -
REGULATOR -10V
QQI Q l 0 -5V
Q21 I Q22
CH 2 SELECT 0264 I 0255 -5 UNREG

{ALT CHOP OSC

-
TkEER
FROM tI/ FROM
A TIMING
SWITCH
CHOP
AUTO SELECT
* AND AUTO

+ olg41
SELECT
0209
Ul Q6A IB ID
p-+
C
LOV VOLTAGE POVER SUPPLY
0I 10

< CHOP BLANKING

w
L

1 HOLOOFF START I

Figure 9-4. 2336 main block diagram.

 2336 Service

FROV
DELAY TIME B DELAY TIME POSITION R1 2-20
POSITION INPUT . 21 -25 1 SEGMENTS LCD READOUT
AND! A T I M E POSITION /2 4 U37
PRESCALER

36
AUTO RANGE
DECODER
f rrL
POINT
SCALE
AUTO 21 BACK PLANE DRIVE AND LATCH FACTOR
RANGE U22A ,B PC )D
U9C ,
U23A ,C ,D
U9A 2 8 U25B )C
BUFFER U32A )D
27* INT ,
U40C U55E

A/D
,CONVERTER
U10

1 - 2 6 I-V
REFERENCE LO (COMMON I
A I
I
I 7

- LCD BLANKING SIGNAL Y 8

SCALE FACTOR
< t i
LCD
t I.
-
-
DIODE DECODER SCALE FACTOR
B SOURCE EXT SELECT m SWITCHING "a . . .-. 1 0, DRIVER
CH 2 SELECT X AND BUFFER U38 02, AND LOGIC XY ENABLE
S2 , a
w
7
FROM CH 1 AND CH 2

-
03 U25A ,D
CH 1 SELECT
VERT MODE SELECT
06
07
08
* U39A ,B )C )D
U40A )B ,D
U42A )B PCA l
SCALE FACTOR
DIODE DECODING
MATRIX
.- VAR UNCAL I
VERTICAL PIOOE SWITCHES
FRfM
. . .-. .
A SEC/DIV
SWITCH POSITION SWITCH
I f f - Q327

A HORIZ MOM: FROM HORIZ

UNCAL H O E SWITCH
1 1 1 1 -
+1 0 v U32C

ATIME/RUNS AFTER DLY/SLOPE

\\\\

E
=fs'l: @
A- - \

\
- -
A

-
-
7
-
A

a
- - B SOURCE
EXT SELECT
CH 2 SELECT

cH 1 SELECT
SWITCHING
TRANSISTORS
u365A tB tC
'

.
EXT

CH
CH 1
VERT MODE
TOGENERATOR
,
B TRIGGER

Figure 9-5. 2336 Delta Time block diagram.

 +\OVA-
- HOR\Z BU4VI FIND '
IMENSITY

t SWEEP RIGHT

- SWEEP LEFT

'
2 1 4 1

CIRCUIT BOARD INTERCONNLCTIQNS

 CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS

CIRCUIT SCHEM SCHEM . CIRCUIT SCHEM SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM SCHEM

NUMBER NUMBER LOCATION NUMBER NUMBER LOCATION NUMBER NUMBER LOCATION

8924 8 J915 1 7A R9l3

J920 4 7E R9l8A
C900 1 J935 5 2A R9l8B
C901 1 J954 8 8F R930
C911 5 R931
L9l3 3 3J R935A
CR931 7 L915 3 4l. R935B
CR932 7 R940
P708 2 8E R942
DL900 2 P800 2 4E R945
P829 5 88
DS195 9 P830 5 48 S900
DS196 9 P83 1 5 48 S901
DS197 9 S902
DS900 6 R900 1 2G S903
DS902 7 R901 1 7G S906
DS910 2 R902 2 3G S930
R903 2 3G S934
F900 10 R904 2 3G
R905 2 7G T900
FL900 10 R906 2 7G
R907 2 7G
J900 10 R909 3 6A
J9l4 1 R91 1 5 2A
 2336 Service

TEST WAVEFORM AND VOLTAGE SETUPS

O n t h e left-hand pages preceding the schematic diagrams are illustrations of test waveforms that are intended to aid i n Horizontal CALIBRATION GENERATOR
troubleshooting the instrument. To test the instrument for these waveforms, make the initial control settings and connect the
POSITION Midrange
INITIAL CONTROL SETTINGS
initial test setup as specified in these setup instructions.
X I 0 MAG Off (button out)
HORlZ MODE A Std Ampl-Fast Rise-High Ampl Std Ampl
A and B SEC/DIV .5 ms Period 0.1 ms
RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT VAR Calibrated detent Pulse Amplitude 5 0 mV
B DELAY TIME
POSITION Fully counterclockwise
Item Specification Example

Test Oscilloscope with 1OX Frequency response: Dc to 100 MHz. a. TEKTRONIX 465B Oscilloscope w i t h INITIAL TEST SETUP
probe and 1X probe (I X Deflection factor: 5 0 mV to 5 0 V/div t w o (included) 1OX probes. Trigger
probe is optional accessory). (to 5 V/div w i t h 1X probe). lnput
impedance: I M n , 2 0 pF. b. TEKTRONIX P 6 l O l Probe (1X), SLOPE + (button out)
Part Number 0 10-61 0 1 -03. On the 2336, align the Channel 1 and Channel 2 baseline
LEVEL Midrange traces with the center horizontal graticule line. For
Standard-amplitude accuracy: f0.3%. TEKTRONIX PG 506 Calibration Mode AUTO waveforms on schematic diagrams 1,2,3, and 5, connect a
Calibration Generator
Signal amplitude: at least 5 0 mV. Generat~r.~ 50-mV pp standard-amplitude square-wave signal to the
COUPLING DC 2336 CH 1 OR X and CH 2 OR Y input connectors via a dual
Output signal: Square wave. Repe-
tition rate: l to 1 0 0 kHz. Rise time: SOURCE VERT MODE , input coupler and 5 0 4 cable. A n input signal is not
1 ns or less. required for waveforms on schematic diagrams 4 and 6
through 11. Connect a 10X probe to the test oscilloscope
Dua I-input Coupler Connectors: Bnc female-to-dual- Tektronix Part Number 067-0525-01 Channel 1 input.
bnc male.
TEST OSCILLOSCOPE If applicable, make control-setting changes to the test
Cable Impedance: 5 0 n. Connectors: bnc. Tektronix Part Number 01 2-0057-01. INITIAL CONTROL SETTINGS oscilloscope as indicated on each specific waveform. If
Length: 4 2 in.
applicable, make control setting changes to the 2336 as
Digital Multimeter (for dc Range: 0 to 1 kV. TEKTRONIX D M 501A indicated near the top of the waveform illustration page.
voltages u p t o 1 kV) Input impedance: 1 0 M n . Digital Multimeter. NOTE Apply the probe tip to the component lead or test point
indicated on both the schematic diagram and the circuit
Range: 0 to 1500 V. Triplett Model 630NA board illustration associated with that schematic. The
DC Voltmeter (for dc voltages
Input impedance: 2 0 k W V . Changes to test oscilloscope initial control waveforms illustrated are typical for troubleshooting
above 1 kV)
settings applicable to specific waveforms are purposes only.
a Requires TM 500 power-module mainframe. listed on the respective waveform illustration.

All controls as needed for best display, except as follows:

D C VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS

2336 INITIAL CONTROL SETTINGS Vertical (Both Channels, if applicable) Volts/Division (Channel 1) As specified on each
waveform illustration. Typical voltage measurements were obtained w i t h the
BW LIMIT Full bandwidth (button out) Ac-Gnd-Dc (Channel 1) Dc 2336 operating under the conditions specified i n the
NOTE Position (Channel 1) Midrange preceding setups, w i t h control-setting changes noted on
VERTICAL MODE Set to channel being each waveform page. These measurements were taken
measured; change Vertical Mode Channel 1 with reference to chassis ground and are rounded to the
setting as indicated Time/D ivision As specified on each nearest ?5%.
Changes to 2336 initial control settings for specific waveforms waveform illustration.
applicable to specific waveforms or sets of
CH 2 INVERT Off (button out) Trigger Mode Auto
waveforms are identified near the top of the
page on which the waveforms are located. VOLTS/DIV 1 0 mV Source Normal
Coupling Dc
VAR Calibrated detent
Slope + (plus)
AC-GND-DC DC
Level Midrange
POSITION A s required to center
the baseline trace

REV JUL 1981

 2336 Service

w
LOWER

I R E T A I N E R PLATE

Figure 9-6. A 1 9-Attenuator exploded view.

 A19 - ATTENUATORS ARE SHOWN I N SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
0.
1

TEST WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM

0
1

A1 9 (CH 1 ) ATTENUATOR

A1 9 (CH 2) ATTENUATOR
 C H I & CH2 ATTENUATORS DIAGRAM
0
I ASSEMBLY A10

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER -0CATION -0CATION NUMBER LOCATION .OCATION

C1 2G 5C J806 1J 4D R13 4H 40
C3 2H 4C J806 3N 4D R14 5H 5C
C10 41 4D J807 5J 6D A15 31 40
C14 1I 5C J807 7N 6D R16 21 4C
C15 1J 40 R62 6G 60
C16 21 4C Q4A 2H 4C R63 6H 6C
C20 1J 4D 040 3H 4C R67 6H 6C
C62 6G 6C Q l OA 4H 40 R68 7H 5C
C67 6H 6C Q l OB 31 40 R69 7H 5C
C75 91 6D Q68A 7H 6C R70 8H 5D
C76 71 5C 0688 8H 6C R72 . 91 50
C77 5J 6D Q74A 8H 5D R73 81 50
C81 65 6D 0740 71 5D R74 91 40
R75 9H 6C
CRl 2H 4C R1 2G 5D R76 71 5C
CR2 2H 50 R2 2H 5C R77 81 50
CR3 2H 5C R3 2H 4C R78 9H 50
CR8 3H 4C R4 3H 4C
CR62 7H 6C R7 41 4D TPl 2G 5D
CR63 6H 6D R8 3H 4C
CR64 6H 6C R9 4H 40 W1 1I 6C
CR69 8H 5C R10 41 30 W2 1I 6B
R11 41 30

I Panial A 10 also shown m diagrams 2, 3, 4, 6, 6 . 8 and 10.

ASSEMBLY

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION -0CATION

C1 P807 7M .. R10 2F
......
C1
C2 R1 28 .... R10
R11
6F
1F
....
C2
C3
R1
R2
78
2C .... R11
R12
6F
2F
....
C3
C4
C4
R2
R3
R3
6C
28
68
..
....
R12
R13
7F
2F
....
R13 7F
C5
C5
R4
R4
2E
6E .. R20
R20
1K
6K ....
C6
C6
R5
R5
1D
60 ....
0.
R30
R30
3E
7E ..
C7
C7
R6
R6
2E
6E .... S1A 4E ....
.... ......
C15 R7 2E SlA 9E
C15 R7 6E S1B 4L

P806
R8
R8
2F
6F .... S1B
S2
9L
3C
..
P806
P807
R9
R9
1F
6F .. S2 8C

I CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

C900 2G CHASSIS J914 2A CHASSIS R900 2G CHASSIS

C901 7G CHASSIS J915 7A CHASSIS R901 7G CHASSIS
INPUT

'"I J%y
lI I I I
I I I I
I I I I I I
AC I I I I I I
1 2 3 4 5 6
S2 5mv
lomv
20m v
5orn v
'ES: I O O ~ V
I. ALL COMPONENTS EXCEPT -*nV BALANCE
ATTENUATOR
S W I T C H CONTACTS ARE
LOCATED ON A U Y B R I D S C R~~ ~ 3 ' ) ~ ~ QlOA
IV
2v
5v
S IA

3. A19 ASSEMBLY INCLUDES VAR I HIGH Z ATTENUATOR I

CONTROL R902 (SEE DIAGRRM @)

-1ovB PARTIAL AIO VERT PREAMP/

L V POWER S U R Y m R D

A19 ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY

4 4
SUB SUB

INPUT

-w
I I I
1 2 A
52 5mv
lomv 5mv
X I
20mv lomv
5omv 20mv
NOTES:
I. A L L COMPONENTS EXCEPT
IOOYnV
200111V X I0
somv
100m v
mmv
8 Static Sensitive Devices
See Maintenance Section
??~~~~~~~~c~%&$kS~RZO~R30)500~~
500mV COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
2v X loo Iv
5v 2v I Component Number I
c7 51A 5v
R7J
ASSEMBLY .YNCLUDESVAR
3. A19 ( LOWz ATTENUATOR]
CONTROL R906(SEE DIAGRAM @) SIB
I I
NUMERAL AND LETTER ATSIGNALLINESTO OR Chassismunted componentshave no Assembly Numbel
PARTIAL AIO VERT PREAMP/ FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATES THE GRID
COORDINATE O N ANOTHER SCHEMATIC (FOR prellx-see end 01 Replaceable Electrical Parts L~st.
L V POWER 3 J T L Y BOPRD EXAMPLE: 4E)

I A19 ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY

2336 11
4118-
REV 3UL 1981
CH l Ccl2 ATTENUATORS @
2336 Service

?ADDED COMPONENT WITH ONE END POINT ELEVATED FROM CIRCUIT BOARD.

* CLOCKWISE

t
All

Static Sensitive Devices

See Maintenance Section

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

-I
Component Number

A23A2R1234
Assembly
Number
TTT~k
Subassembly Circuit
Number (if used)

Chassis-mountedcomponents have no Assembly Number

prefix-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List.

Figure 9-7. A1 I-Negative Regulator, A1 2-Positive Regulator, and A 1 O-Vertical Preamp/L.V. Power Supply boards.

REV NOV 1983

 AlO-VERT PREAMP/L.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM
NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER

A1 0-VERTICAL PREAMP
L.V. POWER SUPPLY

Static Sensitive Devices

See Maintenance Section

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

-1
Component Number

A23 A2 R1234
Assembly
Number
TT T S c h e m a k
Subassembly Circurt
Number (if used)
Chassis-mounted components have no Assembly Number
A L L COMPONENTS MOUNTED O N A l l - N E G A T I V E REGULATOR
prefix-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List. A N D A.12-POSITIVE REGULATOR CIRCUIT BOARDS ARE SHOWN
IN SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM @.
 2336 Service

TEST WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 2

0

I
OX. ... . . . . . . Input c o u p l i n g : ~ d. . . ... . ....
.L
2336 Service

0
TEST WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 2 (CONT)

I I 1 1
1OOmV 500,~s
I I

100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 C H I & CH2 VERT PREAMP & DELAY LINE DRIVER DIAGRAM
0
ASSEMBLY A 1 0

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER -0CATION -0CATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

8B 5F R37 20 4F R147 61 3G
88 6F R42 3D 4F R148 4M 5H
9B 5F R43 3D 4F R149 1M 6H
9B 6F R45' 3E 3F R153 2M 5H
R46 3E 3F R154 2M 5H
BE 5F R47 3E 3F R155 1N 5H
4E 3F R48 3E 3F R156 2N 51
2N 51 R49 3F 4F R160 1N 61
5N 51 R50 3H 4F R161 5M 5H
8N 51 R53 3F 5G R162 5M 5H
R54 2C 4E R163 3N 51
3F 5G R56 31 3G R167 5N 61
3H 4G R57 3J 3G R168 4N 51
6H 6G R58 3J 4G R169 5M 5H
7F 5G R60 41 3G Rl7O 8M 4H
3K 31 R61 3J 31 R173 9M 4H
8N 31 R82 6A 5E R174 9M 4H
4F 70 R83 6A 5E R175 7M 41
4E 6D R84 7A 5E R176 5N 41
R85 6A 5E Rl8O 8N 41
2D 4F R88 78 6E R181 8N 41
3F 4F R89 78 6E R182 8N 41
2J 4G R90 78 6E Rl83 9N 41
4
J.
50
6F
2
6F
R91
R92
6B
78
5E
6E
R187
Rl88
R189
9N
51
41
31
4H
4H
R95 7C 6E
5J 5G R96 7C 6E R193 4F 70
6J 6G R106 50 6F
8J 6G R107 5D 6F RT46 3E 3F
7J 5G R112 6D 5F RT115 6E 6F
4L 4G R113 7D 6F
5L 4H R114 6E 6F S134 91 6B
6L 4H R115 7E 6F
1M 6H R116' 6E 6F TP30 2C 3F
2M 5H R118 7E 6F TP6 1 3K 4G
2M 5H R119 7F 5F TP62 8M 4H
8M 5H R120 6F 5G TP139 7K 4G
8M 4H R121 6C 6E TP156 2N 61
8N 31 R122 7H 5F TP176 8N 41
R126 51 6G
3A 3E R127 61 6G U30 4D 4F
3A 3E R128 6J 6G U41A 50 5F
4A 4E R132 6J 6G U41B 2D 5F
3A 3E R133 7J 6G U55 21 4G
38 4E R134 81 6G Uloo 8C 6F
48 5E R135 81 6H Ul25 51 5G
3B 4E R139 7J 31 U160 1N 6H
38 4E R140 4L 3H
38 40 R141 4L 3G W143 8A 61
3C 4E R142 5L 3H W146 8A 6H
3C 4E R145 6L 4H
2D 4F R146 6L 3H

Partial A 10 also shown on diagrams 1, 3, 4. 5, 6, 8 and 10

CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS

BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

CHASSIS 4E CHASSIS R905 7G CHASSIS S906 6G CHASSIS

R906 7G CHASSIS
CHASSIS CHASSIS R907 7G CHASSIS
CHASSIS
CHASSIS CHASSIS S902 3G CHASSIS

"See Parts List for

serial number ranges.
 U 55
(+> 14
OUT

.OOIuF

' -="A

R140
ZS5 TRIG
VIEW
ENABLE
FROM

U125
Q142 ,169
(+> I4 634
OUT

NWB: R906 VAR CONTROL IS

PART OF T H E A19 ASSY
(SEE DIAGRAM@)

FPR
7O3M
0
7~ <
P712-I
FROM
4F ON .6V
ON 4.3'
' ON 2.4V
! VIEW ON .-I5

8 Static Sensitive Devices

See Maintenance Section

-
I
u I
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

~ssembly
Number
Component Number

,A23,,AZR1234
1 L
IfiE;zed,
circuit
Number
NUMERAL AND LETTER ATSIGNALLINESTOOR
FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATES THEGRID
COORDINATE ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC (FOR
EXAMPLE: 4EI
VERT
FROM
MODE

Chassis-mountedcomponents have no Assembly Number -- -

prelix-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts L~sl.
I I PARTIAL AIO VERT PREAMP/L v POWER SUPPLY BOARD
4 1 18- 12
REV NOV 1 9 8 3 CH I 6 CH 2 VERTICAL PREAMPS DELAY LINE DRIVER @
2336 Service

Static Sensitive Devices

See Maintenance Section

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

Component Number

A23 A2 R1234
Assembly T 1 ~ k C h e m a t i
Number Subassembly Circuit
Number (if used) Number
I I
Chassis-mountedcomponents have no Assembly Number
refix-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List.

1 * CLOCKWISE Figure 9-8. A1 5-Vertical Output/H.V. Power Supply board.

A1 5-VERT OUTPUT/H.V. POWER SUPPL

CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM
NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBEF NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER

CR191 9 R26 3 RlOO 9 R185

CR197 9 R29 3 R101 9 r191
E53 3 R30 3 R102 9 r192
E55 3 R3 1 3 RlO6 9 R202
F89 9 R32 3 RlO7 9 R203
J878 3 R37 3 RlO8 9 R204
L54 3 R38 3 R109 9 R205
L167 9 R39 3 R113 9 R210
Ll9l 9 R43 3 Rll4 9 R211
P756 3 R44 3 Rll5 9 T9
P756 9 R50 3 Rll6 9 T24
P758 3 R51 3 R120 9 T I 67
P758 9 R52 3 R121 9 TI 68
P759 3 R53 3 R122 9 TP25
P761 9 R57 3 Rl23 9 TP92
P763 9 R58 3 R127 9 TP127
P765 9 R59 3 Rl28 9 TP130
P768 9 R60 3 Rl3O 9 TP148
093 9 R64 3 R134 9 TP161
0 100 9 R65 3 R135 9 TP184
0107 9 R66 3 Rl36 9 TP185
0114 9 R67 3 Rl4O 9 TP320
0115 9 R71 3 R147 9 U43
0116 9 R72 3 R148 9 U54
0 148 9 R73 3 R149 9 U58
0 1 55 9 R74 3 Rl5O 9 U130
0156 9 R75 3 R154 9 VR51
0 1 61 9 R78 3 R155 9 vr123
0163 9 R79 3 Rl56 9 VR140
0 178 9 R80 3 R157 9 VR148
0 184 9 R85 9 Rl6l 9 VR155
R8 3 R86 9 R163 9 VR198
R9 3 R87 9 R168 9 W1
R10 3 R90 3 R176 9 W88
R17 3 R9 1 9 R177 9 W163
R18 3 R92 9 Rl78 9 W209
R22 3 R93 9 R182 9
R23 3 R94 9 R183 9
REV NOV 1983 R24 3 R99 9 R184 9
R25 3
- -
 TEST WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 3
0
For waveforms 25 through 28, center the 2335 trace about the center horizontal graticule line.

OX. . . . . . . . . . . Input Coupling:AC . . . . . . . . . . .

1-

0%.
I ....... ... Input Coupling:AC . . . . . . . . . . .

ov
 VERTICAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER DIAGRAM
0
ASSEMBLY A 1 0

I-
CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

P710 2B 3M S211B 1A

Partial A 10 also shown on diagrams 1 , 2, 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10.

ASSEMBLY A1 6
--

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATIOC LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATlOh LOCATION

P756 88 1H R59 5F
P758 8C 4G R60 6E
P759 68 2K R64 6F
R65 7F
R8 2C 21 R66 5E
R9 20 21 R67 6E
R10 2G 3H R71 5E
R17 40 4
J R72 6E
R18 3E 21 R73 6E
R22 3E 21 R74 7E
R23 4E 2J R75 6E
R24 5D 41 R78 7E
R25 5C 41 R79 70
R26 2C 2J R80 70
R29 3E 41 R90 7C
R30 3E 41
R31 4E 4J T9 2C
R32 3E 4J T24 5C
R37 3F 21
R38 4F 31 TP25 5C
R39 4F 3J
R43 4G 31 U43 1H
R44 3F 3J U54 41
R50 2H 21 U58 5F
R51 2H 31
R52 3H 31 VR51 21
R53 3H 41
R57 5G 3H W1 21
R58 5F 3H

Parfbl A 15 also shown on diagram 9.

CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS

CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM I
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
I ClRCUlT
NUMBER
1 SCHEM I BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
I I I I
CHASSIS 6A 1 CHASSIS I I
CHASSIS
5A CHASSIS
 2ND
STAGE
SUPPLY
1 ST
STAGE
COLLECTOF
SUPPL'r

1
PARTIAL AIO VERT PREAMP/
L V POWER SUPPLY BOARD

R37 % IOU TO 38v

reo
1ST
STAGE
EMITTER
VERTlCAl
SIGNAL
.O O b F CURRENT
SOURCE
FROM
C36
9-45 VE~~~ICAL
CURRENl PLATES
DEFLECTION
COMP DRIVER
BALANCE

+
INPUT

3RD
STAGE
BIAS Static Sensitive Devices
See Maintenance Section

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

Com~onentNumber

3RD
STAGE
CURRENT
SQURCE
Assembly
Number
J I L
Subassembly Circuit
Number (if used) Number
L
Cha~ssis-mounted
pref~x-see end of
components
Replaceable
have
Electr~cal
no Assemblv
Parts Number
L~st

NUMERAL AND LETTER ATSIGNAL LINESTO OR

FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATES THE GRID
COORDINATE ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC (FOR
EXAMPLE: 4E)

INTENSITY UORIZ UNBLANKING

TO BEAM FIND FROM
P710- I TO P745-7

VERTICAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER @

4\\8-\3
REV N O V 1983
2336 Service

TEST WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 4

0
For waveforms 29, 30. 32, 33, and 34. set the 2335 VERTICAL MODE to CHOP. For waveforms 31, 35, and 36,
set the 2335 VERTICAL MODE to ALT and the SEC/DIV to .5ms.
VERT SWITCHING LOGIC & CHOP BLANKING DIAGRAM
@
ASSEMBLY A 1 0

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION -0CATION NUMBER -0CATION LOCATION

6E 3K R194 2C 48
78 3L R195 7C 51
R196 60
6E 3L R197 60 3L
7G 3M R201 6E 3L
R202 3F 3L
1H 91 R203 3F 3L
R208 6G 3K
7F 3M R209 6G 3K
7K 3M R210 7G 3J'
R2ll 4H
2C 38 R215 2F 41
6G 3L R224 78 31
R227* 4G

Parrial A 10 also shown on diagrams 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8 and 10.

ASSEMBLY A 2 3

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

J840 1G 31 P808 1H 1I

Parrial A23 also shown on diagrams 5, 6 and 8

ASSEMBLY A24

CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
I
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION

Pa40 1G 1G

Partial A24 also shown on diagrams 6, 7, 8 and 11

CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION
I I 1 I I I I I

J920 7E CHASSIS
I
*See Parts List for
serial number ranges.
 l
PARTIAL A 2 3
TRlUjER -Dl l
CH I ALT CHOP ADDCH2
L~
194-
ALT SYNC A
2'

IC d CHOP ON i Z 2 V
TRIG V\EW S 0 . W
CH \ ON -t 4.ZV
C H 2ON i.bV
ICI

IC 2

IC3

2c#

2C

-
TRIG VIEW
2C 2
+ ENABLE t49V
2C3

IG

2G

AUTO SEL
FROM

Static Sensitive.Devices I

-1
See Maintenance Section
CHOP BLANKING
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE -
Component Number IOK

L&,A21,R12341
I L
...
NUMERAL AND LETTER ATSIGNALLINESTO OR
FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATES THE GRID
COORDINATE ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC (FOR
L
Assembly
Number
JSubassembly
Number (if used) I
Chassis-mountedcomponents have no Assembly Number
EXAMPLE: 4E) prefix-see end of Replaceable Electr~calParts List.

4\\8-\4
R E V N O V 1903 VERTICAL SWITCHING LOGIC 6 CHOP BLANKING @
2336 Service

* CLOCKWISE

Figure 9-9. A23-Trigger board.

Static Sensitive Devices
See Maintenance Section

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

-- -- -

-1
Component Number

A23 A2 R1234
A23-TRIGGER BOARD
Assembly T T ' T ~ c h e m a f i c
Number Subassembly c'nu't
Number (I, used)

CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT Chassis-mountedcomponents have no Assembly Number
SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM prefix-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts L~st.
NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER

REV DEC 1981

 TEST WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM
0
For waveforms 37 through 45, connect a 1X probe to the test oscilloscope External Trigger input and set the test scope
Trigger Source switch to External. Apply the tip of the 1X probe to TP56 and set the 2336 SEC/DIV t o .2ms. For
waveforms 39, 42, and 43, the 0-V level is determined by the 2336 A TRIGGER LEVEL control.

I
10 input c o u p l i n g : ~ c
0%. ... . . . . Trig Coupling:HF Reject . . . . . . . .
 TRIGGER DIAGRAM
0
ASSEMBLY A 1 0

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATlON
-
J808 1J 91 S219

Partial A1 0 also shown on diagrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 and 10.

ASSEMBLY A 2 3

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATlOh LOCATION

C2 28 J840 88 31 R41 R121 61 3G

C3 2B J840 8M 31 R56A R122 6J 1G
C4 2B R56B R124 8C 3G
C8 28 P730 4M 1D R56C R125 8C 2F
C9 2C P732 48 2F R56D R126 8D 2F
C15 2D P733 1I 3D R56E Rl27 6K 31
C21 3D P808 1J 1I R56F Rl28 6K 1G
C27 6G P808 38 II R56G R131' 3F
C35 2E R56H R132 6C 2F
C36 2E Q15 2D 2C R561 R133 60 2F
C48 4D Q16 2D 2C R56J R134 7K 2G
C56 4D Q2 1 2D 2D R56K R135 7K 2G
C63 4D 089 3K 1C R56L R139 71 2G
C67 31 095 3L 1D R56M R140 71 1G
C70 21 Q104 4L 2D R56N R141 71 1G
C74 21 0 13 4 7K 2H R560 R142 7K 2G
C77 31 0 1 39 7L 2H R61 R145' 3F
C80 51 0 1 53 8K 3H R67 R146 7C 3F
C81 2J 0161 91 1G R7 0 R147 7C 3F
C82 2K R7 4 R148 7C 1F
C91 3K R2 28 3B R75 R149 7C 1F
C106 4K R3 28 3B R76 R150 6C 1F
C114 5J R4 28 3C R77 R153 8K 2G
C122 6J R7 38 4C R80' R154 8L 3G
Cl25 8C R8 38 3C R81 R155 81 3G
C127 6K R9 2C 1B R82 R156 81 3G
C133 6D R10 2C 2C I R83 R160 81 3G
C147 7C R11 2B 38 R8 4 R162 9J 2F
C149 6C R14 2C 2C R88 Rl63 8K 31
CIS6 81 R15 2D 2C R89 R164 9K 3H
Cl62 9J R16 2D 2C R9 0
Cl63 8K R20 30 3C R91 S22A 1C 1A
R21 2D 2C R95 S22B 1G 1A
CRlO 2D R22 3F 1K R96 S67A 1C 2A
CR14 2D R23 3F 2E R103 S67B 1H 2A
CR15 2D R24 2D 1D R104
CR90 3L R27 6G 2H R106 TP48 4C 3F
CR91 3L R28 6G 2H RlO7 TP56 4D 1F
R29 6G 21 R111 TP59 2D 2B
J829 88 R30 3F 3E R112 TP61 4D 2F
J830 48 R34 3F 1E R113 TP62 2D 2K
J831 48 R35 2E 2E R114 TP153 8K 3H
J840 4M R36 2E 2H R118
J840 6B R37 2E 2H R119 U81 5K 2E
R120 U122 9K 2G

Partial A23 also shown on diagrams 4, 6 and 8.

CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION

CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS

CHASSIS R913 CHASSIS
CHASSIS CHASSIS

*See Parts List for

serial number ranges.
 VERT MODE

LlNE
HF REJ
+lovA
I I I I

+OVA

TRIGGER < LlNE TRIG

,
I I I I I I I l l 1
I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I - A RESET
I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I l l 1

I I I I I I I I I I 3-
I I I I (- 1

RSCG (+
6K
-
-I I
c. 3-
I I
I I

1 1

FROM J8 4 0
-9 VERT MODE
'VVL-- VERT MODE
R 132

I
,_l3l.-.........
K "\

ws:
47
FROM R\48 CH I
P840-I0 -10 Ctl l 3K
R149

FROM
P840- 7 I -7 CHZ
C147
3.3,uF 3Y

P629
% J829
EXT €3 T R I G R!E:
j7;~~-
.I25
EXT 6 T R I G '

J840
J840 SEE PARTS LIST FOR EARLIEW FROM
FROM C12 (2) VALUES ARD SERIAL NUMBER - B RESET -4 P840-4
Pa40 -8 > -8 1,
A

'"10
R125 R126
RANGES OF PAW88 OUTLINED R154
OR DEPBGTLD IN GREY. 1.3K
3 K 3K R160
LEVEL R155
2ZK '5vA
FROM
P840-2 > -2 LEVEL 100 g LI NE V E L B

0'" Static Sensitive Devices

See Maintenance Section
2 FREE
RUN COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

I Component Number
I
I
-5 A TIME/RUNS AFTER D E L A Y / S L O P E SLOPE A23 A2 R1234
K22
,
' '
FROM -8
P840-5
Ql6 1 ,v, NUMERAL AND LETTER ATslGNALLlNEsTo OR
FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATESTHEGRID Assembly ~ - ~ ' ~ ~ c / m a t i c

@ m R1$22
COORDINATE ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC (FOR
EXAMPLE: 4E)
Number Subassembly
Number (if used)
Circuit
Number
I I
2
' 0.!A-F Chassis.mountedcomponents have no Assembly Number
-5v~ PARTIAL A23 TR\GGER BOARD prefix-see end ol Replaceable Electrical Parts List.

2336 4 1 18-15
REV N b V \9a3
TRIGGER @
2336 Service

Figure 9-10. A24-Sweep/Horizontal Amplifier/Option board.

 A24-SWEEP/HORIZ AMP/OPT BOARD

CIRCUIT SCHEM ClRCUlT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM CIRCUIT SCHEM
NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER

C1 6 R37 6 R174 8 R345 6

C2 7 R38 6 R175 8 R347 6
C6 8 R41 6 R176 8 R349 6
C15 6 R42 6 Rl8O 8 R350 6
C19 8 R43 6 R181 8 R351 6
C20 8 R47 6 Rl82 8 R353 6
C21 6 R49 6 Rl83 8 R355 6
C22 6 R53 6 Rl87 8 R357 11
C23 8 R54 6 Rl9O 8 R359 11
C54 11 R55 6 R193 6 R360 11
C68 8 R56 6 R194 6 R362 11
C76 4 R61 6 R195 6 R364 11
C80 6 R62 6 R196 6 R365 11
C82 8 R63 6 R197 6 R368 11
C83 11 R67 6 Rl98 6 R369 11
C84 6 R68 6 R201 6 R371 11
C87 6 R73 6 R203 6 R372 11
C89 6 R74 6 R204 6 R374 11
C90 6 R75 6 R205 6 R375 11
C100 6 R76 6 R206 6 RT295 8
ClO8 6 R77 6 R208 6 TP2 6
Cl28 6 R81 6 R209 6 TP3 6
C140 6 R82 6 R210 6 TP9 6
Cl4l 6 R83 6 R212 6 TP27 6
C145 8 R85 6 R213 6 TP49 6
Cl46 8 R88 6 R214 6 TP55 6
C147 8 R89 6 R215 6 TP85 6
C148 8 R90 6 R216 6 TP86 6
C149 8 RlOO 6 R219 6 TP87 6
C153 8 R104 6 R220 6 TP89 6
C155 8 R105 6 R221 6 TP106 6
C159 8 RlO6 6 R222 6 TP127 8
C160 6 R107 6 R223 6 TPl9O 8
Cl6l 6 RlO8 6 R224 6 TP194 6
Cl67 6 R109 6 R226 6 TP196 6
Cl69 8 R110 8 R238 8 TP210 6
C173 8 R111 8 R239 8 TP216 6
C174 8 R112 8 R240 8 TP246 8
C180 8 R124 8 R243 8 TP250 8
Cl82 8 Rl25 8 R244 8 TP327 11
C187 8 Rl26 8 R245 8 U3 6
Cl9O 8 Rl27 8 R246 8 U24 6
C194 8 ' R128 8 R250 8 U43 6
C197 11 Rl32 8 R251 8 U87 6
C200 6 R133 8 R252 8 U108 6
C201 6 R134 8 R253 8 U128 8
C205 6 R135 8 R264 8 U147 8
C206 6 R139 8 R265 8 U197 6
C209 6 R140 8 R266 8 U198 6
C240 6 R141 8 R267 8 U216 6
C244 6 R142 8 R271 8 U238 8
C250 6 R146 8 R272 8 U365 6
C265 6 R147 8 R273 8 U365 11
C266 6 R148 8 R274 8 VR111 8
C267 6 R149 8 R281 8 VR174 8
C273 6 R153 8 R282 8 W5 6
C28 1 6 R154 8 R283 8 W6 6
C282 6 R155 8 R284 8 W7 6
C284 6 R156 8 R287 8 W8 6
C288 6 R160 8 R288 8 W9 6
C290 6 Rl6l 8 R289 8 W85 6
C340 6 Rl63 8 R290 8 W88 6
C343 6 Rl67 8 R294 8 WlO9 6
C345 6 R168 8 R295 8 W208 6
C347 6 R169 8 R296 8 W235 6
C349 6 R170 8 R326 11 W240 8
C351 6 R173 8 R327 11
R340 6
R343 6
 2336 Service

TEST WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 6

0
For waveforms 4 6 through 53, set 2336 SEC/DIV to 1 ms. For waveforms 52 and 53, set 2336 HORlZ
M O D E to B.
2336 Service

SWEEP DIAGRAM

ASSEMBLY A 1 0

CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
I
1BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD CIRCUIT

Partial A10 also shown on diagrams 1. 2, 3. 4, 5, 8 and 10.

ASSEMBLY A 2 3

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

C170 6C 1H J840 1C 31 P742 48 4E

C171 6C 1H J840 2C 31 P808 PC 1I
P808 5C 1I

Partial A23 also shown on diagrams 4, 5 and 8

TABLE (CONT)
 SWEEP DIAGRAM

I ASSEMBLY A 2 4

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

C1 8J CR345 4E 3E R28 5M 3F R215 5H 5C

C2 7J CR346 4F 4D R29 6L 2G R216 4H 6C
C6 8J CR347 4E 3E R30 5K 2G R219 5H 4D
C15 8K CR348 4F 4D R34 5K 1G R220 5H 3C
C19 7L CR349 4E 3E R35 5K 2G R221 51 3C
C20 8L CR350 5F 40 R36 6L 2G R222 3G 70
C2 1 7M CR351 5E 3E R37 6K 1G R223 3G 30
C22 8L CR353 3E 3F R38 4K 5G R224 3G 30
C23 8N CR358 5F 4D R41 4L 5G R226 51 5D
C54 3N R42 5N 4F R340 4F 3E
C68 2N E36 7N 3H R43 4N 4F R343 4F 3E
C76 4K E54 3N 5G R47 6L 2G R345 4F 3E
C80 3L E85 3L 5F R49 4N 4F R347 4F 30
C82 3L J871 9K 4F R53 4N 1F R349 4F 3E
C83 2L J876 1K 5E R54 3N 6F R350 5E 2E
C84 3L J876 3G 5E R55 3N 4G R351 5F 3E
C87 2D J876 5H 5E R56 5N 1E R353 3F 4F
C89 4K J876 9J 5E R61 5N 1C R355 5F 3D
C90 3D R62 5N 1C
Cl00 40 P745 7D 7G R63 5N 1B TP2 7J 7G
ClO8 3E P745 7N 7G R67 5N 1A TP3 7K 6F
C194 8E P750 7G 6D R68 2N 4F TP9 6L 3F
C197 8F P750 8G 6D R73 3J 5F TP27 8N 4G
C200 9F P75 1 4J 3A R74 3J 5F TP49 5M 3F
C201 8H P840 1C 1G R75 3K 5F TP55 2N 4G
C205 91 P840 2C 1G R76 4K 5F TP85 40 2E
C206 81 P840 4N 1G R77 3K 5F TP86 2E 3F
C209 9H R81 3K 5G TP87 1E 2E
C340 4E 016 8L 4H R82 4L 5F TP89 3E 2E
C343 4E 020 8L 4H A83 2L 5G TP 106 3D 2E
C345 4E 0 21 7M 4G R85 3L 5F TP194 9F 5E
C347 4E 024 8M 3G R88 1E .4F TP210 41 5C
C349 4E 028 5M 2G R89 2C 1E TP216 41 5C
C351 5E 080 3L 5F R90 2D 1E
C355 4E 0 81 3K 5F RlOO 30 20 U3 8J 6F
083 3L 5F R104 4C 1H U24 7N 3G
CR21 7L 0 1 08 3F 2G R105 4D 1H u43 3N 4F
CR28 5N 0208 51 38 R106 3D 3E U87 4D 2E
CR29 6L 0213 31 70 A107 3C 2E U108 3E 2F
CR45 7N 0222 2H 7D R108 3E 2G U197A 8H 7D
CR47 6L R109 2F 2G U197B 9H 7D
CR63 5N R1 7J 6G R193 8F 7E U198A 7F 6E
CR83 3L R3 7J 7F R 194 7E 7E U198B 9F 6E
CR87 2D R4 7K 6G R195 7F 7E U216A 41 5D
CR88 1D R6 8K 6G R196 8F 7E U216B 81 50
CR193 8E R8 8K 6G R197 8F 7E U216C 4H 5D
CR195 7E R10 8K 3G R198 7F 6E U365E 6N 2D
CR202 71 R14 8K 3G R201 8H 6D
CR208 61 R15 8K 3H R203 51 38 W5 8D 7F
CR300 3G R16 8K 3H R204 51 38 W6 9D 7F
CR301 4G A1 7 7L 3G R205 9H 6C W7 ED 7G
CR302 4G R20 8L 3H R206 8H 6D W8 80 7G
CR303 4G R2 1 7L 4G R208 51 2C W9 7D 1F
CR340 3E R23 8N 4G R209 9H 6D W85 4K 6H
CR341 3F R24 8M 3G R210 5H 5C W88 1C 1F
CR342 4F R25 8M 3G R212 21 7C W109 2F 1G
CR343 4E R26 7M 4G R213 31 6D W208 41 38
CR344 4F R27 8N 4G R214 4H 7C W235 8C 66

+
Partlal A24 also shown on dlagrsmr 4, 7, 8 and 1 1 .

I CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS

BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT

LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER

CHASSIS R918A 8G CHASSIS

R918B 9G CHASSIS
 -1

KSiE2
FROM
CR91
3M @

=e%3 4
-a -I-

.I0 -15
A
RESn
T O 2

z3@l,

- t5VA

-24

S
RESET
TO
S4c-4
"@
TIME/
RUNS.
=808
7
4
-1
-14
tfY
i:q
SLOPE
TO
J840-5
$132 PAW.% LiST POW EARLDBR 9B@
VALUES AND OERlWL NUMBER
RANGES OF PARTS OUTLINED
OR DLBIGTED litl GREY.
3 -1: 13

FROM
\z
5s JQIJIF
ALT SYNC CR2C8

I
YZ!E
T -\ \I

BGWE -:
FROG- '74 5
Q134
7~ @
5 -1: %o
P758-7
18 -2E
+-A

1% -2s

l4 p
t40-

I3 r-22
17 p y
1
6 r-%
-20 -3C
NUMERAL AND LETTER ATSIGNALLINESTOOR
FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATESTHE GRID
~~$~It$ ONt ANOTHER
&~ SCHEMATIC (FOR

PAFCIAL AID VERT PREAMP/

L V POWER B A R D
@ Static Sensitive Devices
see Maintenance section
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

Assembly
Circurt
IPmT'AL A23 TR\GGER BOARD
I
Chass~smountedcomponentshave no Assembly Number
4 118- 1 6 prefix-see end of ~eplaceableElectrical Parts List.
REV DEC 1 9 8 1
SWEEP @ -
 POTENTIOMETER

REAR
BEARING
"\
\
\
MOUNTING
DETENT

9 B TIMING

REAR
CONTACT
HOLDER

\ ROTOR

ROTARY
EXTENSION SHAFT
SHAFT

SCREWS (3)

LUBRICATE WITH VERSILUBE

TEKTRONIX PART NUMBER
006-1353-01 (OR EQUIVALENT)

Figure 9-12. Timing Switch exploded view.

2336 Service

41 18-67
Static Sensitive Devices

-
See Maintenance Section

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

Component Number
1
A23 A2 R1234
Figure 9-1 1. A1 6-B Timing and A 1 7-A Timing boards. Assembly
Number
JT
- T m e m a t i c
Subassembly Circuit
Number (if used) Number

Chassls-mountedcomponents have no Assembly Number

pref~x-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts Llst I

ALL COMPONENTS MOUNTED ON A16-B TIMING AND

A17-A TIMING CIRCUIT BOARDS ARE SHOWN I N SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM@.
 A B B TIMING SWITCHES DIAGRAM
@
ASSEMBLY A1 6

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION

C1 5K 2C RIA 9L 2C 1A
C2 6K 28 R1B 9L 2C 1A
C3 8K 2A R lC 9L 2C 2A
R1D 9L 2C 2A
P871 2K 3A RlE 8L 2C 2A
P871 3N 3A R1F EL 2C
P871 8K 3A R lG 8L 2C 2C
P871 9N 3A R2 3N 1A

ASSEMBLY A 1 7

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION -0CATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

56 P876 8A 6D 4D
66 6D 4D
78 0 10 1G 7D 40
86 8E 50
R\I A 3C 8E 50
1F R1B 3C 8E 5D
3D R lC 4C 1F 48
1F R1D 4C
1G RlE 4C 30 5E
3A R lF 4C
3G R lG 5C

ASSEMBLY A24

CIRCUIT CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

J87 1 5E
J871 5E
J871

Partial A24 also shown on diagrams 4, 6, 8 and 1 I

CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS

SCHEM
LOCATION

CR931 20
CR932 CHASSIS 1E CHASSIS

DS902 I 1 1 CHASSIS I S930 3F I CHASSIS I I I

 RI FOR ATIMING A N D FOR BTlMlNG
40K 40K B O K 240K 400K BOOK 2.4M

O Static Sensitive Devices

@
-
see Maintenance Section

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

Component Number

A23 A2 R1234
NOTE:
f CAPS ARE53.
MATCHED
Assembly
Number
T T T h i;,Lr
emtic
I I
Chassismunted componentshave no Assembly Number
prefix-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List.

COORDINATE ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC (FOR

RIA EXAMPLE: 4E)
PARTIAL A24 SWEEP/HORIZ AMP/OW BOARD 1
416 B T I M I N G BOARD I
2336 41e-n
@
2336 Service

TEST W A v w o R M s FOR D ~ A G R A M@
For waveforms 57 and 58, set 2336 SEC/DIV to 1 ms.
 HORIZONTAL, PROBE COMP AND FAN DIAGRAM
@
ASSEMBLY A 1 0

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD BOARD
NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

JB08 1B 91 P715 3A 6E R184 38 78

J808 58 91 P716 3A 6D R185 38 48
R186 38

Partial A 10 also shown on diagrams 1. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 10.

ASSEMBLY A 2 3

SCHEM BOARD BOARD BOARD

LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION

9N 31 5C 1E

1C 1I

Partial A23 also shown on diagrams 4, 5 and 6.

 HORIZONTAL, PROBE COMP AND FAN DIAGRAM

ASSEMBLY A 2 4

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATlOh LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATIOh LOCATION

C128 K127 2G 5G R139 4D R265

C140 R140 4D R266
C141 P745 30 7G R141 4D R267
C145 P745 4N 7G R142 5D R271
Cl46 P747 7N 21 R146 4E R272
C147 P75 1 7F 3A R147 5D R273
C148 P754 8F 6A R148 5E R274
C149 P840 1D 1G R149 5E R281
C153 P840 40 1G R153 6F R282
C155 P840 66 1G R 154 3G R283
C159 P840 9M 1G R155 4G R284
C160 R156 4G R287
C161 0 1 11 1G 2H R160 3H R288
C167 ' 0 1 55 4H 8J R 161 21 R289
C169 0160 3H 71 R163 3K R290
C173 0 1 67 3J 71 R167 3J R294
C174 0 1 68 3K 7H R168 4K R295
C180 0174 6H 81 R169 3K R296
C182 0176 6J 81 R170 3L
C187 0 1 81 5K 8H R173 5G RT295
C190 0250 8E 5A R174 6H
C240 0267 91 2J R175 5H TPl27
C244 0271 9J 1J R176 6J TP190
C250 0281 9K 4J R180 5J TP246
C265 0282 9K 4J Rl8l 5K TP250
C266 0288 9L 6J R182 5K
C267 0289 7L 1J R183 5K Ul28
C273 0290 9L 51 R187 61 U147
C281 R190 6K U238A
C282 RllO 1G 2H R238 9A U238B
C284 Rlll 1E 2H R239 96 U238C
C288 R112 2E 2H R240 86 U238D
C290 R124 3G 5H R243 98 U238E
R125 2F 5H R244 9C U238F
CRl 1 1 Rl26 3F 51 R245 9A
CRl28 R127 3G 5H R246 ED VRlll'
CR133 R128 1F 41 R250 8E VR174
CR135 R1 32 30 7F R251 8E
CRl6O R133 3E 5H R252 8E W240
CR161 R134 3E 6H R253 8E
CR175 R135 3E 6H R264 81

Partial A24 also shown on diagrams 4, 6, 7 and 1 1

CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

8924 1 7N I CHASSIS J954 8F CHASSIS R935A

R935B
3A
4A
CHASSIS
CHASSIS
 115
%c

XY M O D E

t5ve
CH l t CH2 = XY MODE
-5v~ I
- -
A 5WEEP +.\V
€3 SWEEP - -3V
A SWP
GAIN
-1OV FROM
P&O-26 C c -\OVA
-
XY OV SET I Bc

- -
A SWEEP -3V
5 - -3V
XYSWEEP-
t.lV

CR133 -am
T V I
Rlb3
47 + SWEEP RIGHT

U128
HORIZONTAL
PREAMPLIFIER

- SWEEP LEFT CRT

(LEFT)
R!? I DEFLECT
HORIZ ION
PLATE
3K @

1 PARTIAL A24 SWEEPIHORIZ

A M P / O ~WARC

8924
FAN

I I

8 Static Sensitive Devices

-
see &intenme section

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE

Component Number

Chassismunted components have no Assembly Number

preflx-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts L~st.

NUMERAL AND LETTER ATSIGNALLINESTOOR

FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATESTHE GRID
COORDINATE ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC (FOR
EXAMPLE: 4E)

I
HORIZONTAL, PROBE COMP AND FAN @
2336 Service

TEST WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM @

 HIGH VOLTAGE & CRT DIAGRAM

ASSEMBLY A1 6

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION -0CATION NUMBER LOCATION .OCATION

C3 1B 4H CR191
C5 2A 2H CR197
C86 2B 3F
C87 2B 2F F89
C94 2C 4G
Cloo 2D 4F L167
C l 01 40 3F L191
C108 2E 4E
Clog 1E 4E P756
CllO 1D 4E P756
C116 3E 4F P758
C121 2F 3E P758
C122 1F 3D P758
Cl23 2G 3E P761
Cl28 3F 3F P761
Cl36 5G 4C P761
Cl4O 4F 5E P763
$1 48 7A 4C P765
C150 78 4C P768
Cl56 70 3A P768
Cl67 5D 48
C168 5C 30 093
C174 91 28 Q l OO
C175 9J 2C 0107
Cl82 9H 1B 0114
C183 9F 38 0115
Cl85 9G 1B Qll6
C190 7H 48 0148
Cl9l 71 4C 0 155
Cl96 4J 3D 0156
C197 7G 48 0 161
Cl98 2J 2C 0163
C202 2M 20 0 1 78
C205 3M 1D 0 184
C209 4M 3C
C210 4M 20 R85
C211 5M 2C R86
R87
26 4G R91
38 2G R92
3C 4F R93
3C 4F R94
2F 3E R99
2F 3E RlOO
4G 40 R101
4F 50 R102
78 3C R106
78 4D R107
7E 4A R108
6E 3A R109
6E 3A Rll3
60 38 Rll4
6C 2A Rll5
5C 38 Rll6
5C 2A R120
91 1B R121
91 1C R122
9H 1C Rl23
7H 56 R127

Partial A1 5 also shown on diagram 3.

CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD

NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

DS195 CHASSIS
DS196 CHASSIS
DS197 R945

*See Parts List for

serial number ranges.
 U130
NOTE:
#INDICATES CAPACITOR
HAS BEEN B U I L T
I N T O THE BOARD.

VRl23

Ri23 CRl23 I H.V.

MODULE
O.l*F

Z AXIS

Z-AXIS COMP

CR130

P75E
FROM +A? -IOUF

I:
W88

"" - N.C.

FROM
P710
P756
2 t 4 0 V UNREG ,- RL3b
220K

~ 1 7 6 Static Sensitive Devices

u
A
-
@ See Mamtenance Section
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
B C

I ,I ,I,s A(

NUMERALANDLETTERATSIGNALLINESTOOR
FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS lNDlCATESTHEGRlD
COORDINATE ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC (FOR
EXAMPLE: 4El
I
-IOVF PARTIAL A 1 5 V E R T OUT/H V POWER SUPPLY BOARD

2336
4\8-12
REV NOV 1963 HIGH VOLTAGE $ CRT @
 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM

ASSEMBLY A 1 0

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

C225 1D 7L F257 7C R225 6K TP265 8L

C226 1C 5K F259 6C R229 9C TP266 8C
C231' 2G 9D R230 8C
C232 2F 80 J801 3E R231 80 U237 1F
C237 1F 9D J801 4J R232 9C
C238 1G 9E J801 5E R236 8E VR229 1E
C246 21 9C J802 5E R237 90 VR236 2F
C248 4C 5K J802 5E R238 9E VR238 1G
C249 3C 5K J802 5J R239 9F VR246 21
C250 30 7J J803 7E R243 9F VR252 5J
C251 4D 8H J803 8E R244 9F VR253 6J
C252 5J 7G J803 8E R245 8F VR264 6K
C253 6J 7G J803 8J R246 8G VR265 8K
C257 7C 5J J804 7E R250 7G
C258 7C 5J J804 7E R251 9K W244 1I
C259 7D 81 J804 7J R252 80 W246 1I
C260 7D 6J J808 8C R253 8F W247 2J
C264 6K 8G J808 9K R257 8K W248 21
C265 8K 7C R258 9K W251 4D
P7lO 1M R259 8K W252 5K
CR225 1D 6K P7l4 1B R260 61 W253 6K
CR237 1F 9D R264 8E W255 6K
CR239 2H 9F 0239 2H R265 8C W263 6L
CR250 30 7K 0244 1H W264 7K
CR259 6D 7K 0246 2J TP247 9J W265 8K
0252 4K TP252 9J
F225 1C 5K 0253 5K TP254 8F
F250 3C 5K 0264 7K TP255 91
F251 3C 4K 0265 8K TP264 91

Partial A 1 0 also shown on diagrams 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 a n d 8 .

ASSEMBLY A1 1

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

C1 7F 28 P803 7E 2A R1 7F 28 R22 8H 1A
C2 8F 28 P803 8E 2A R2 8F 28 R23 8H 1A
C8 8G 1C P803 8E 2A R3 7F 2C
C9 7H 1C P803 8J 2A R4 8F 1C
C15 9G 18 P804 7E 2C R8 8G 1B
C21 8H 18 P804 7E 2C R9 81 1C
P804 7J PC R10 7H 1C
18 R14 7H 1D
1C 09 71 1C R15 9F 2A
18 010 71 1C R16 9F 1A
1A 0 21 81 1A R20 9G 18
0 22 91 18 R21 91 1A

ASSEMBLY A12

BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
I
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
I SCHEM I BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION

C15

*See Parts List for

CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS serial nurnljbr ranges.

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRQJIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM ' BOARD
NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION

5900 66 CHASSIS S903 56 CHASSIS

FL9OO 1 6A I CHASSIS S901 1 38 1 CHASSIS I T900 I 18 I CHASSIS I

 SEE PARTS LIST FOR EARLIER
VALUES AND SERIAL NUMBER
RAHGES
OR DEPICTED
OF PARTS
!H GREY.
OUTLINED

8 Static Sensitive Devices

See Maintenance Section

-
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
Component Number
I

Chassis-mounted components have no Assembly Number

preflx-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts Llst.

NUMERAL AND LETTER ATSIGNALLINESTO OR

FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATESTHE GRID
COORDINATE ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC (FOR
EXAMPLE: 4E)

LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY @

2336 Service

A
T
B
1
C
T
D
1
e= 1
F
1
G
'I.
H
v I
1
J
1
K
1
L
1

Static Sensitive Devices

See Maintenance Section
I A31 -B TRIGGER SLOPE SWITCH

Figure 9-13. A3O-Delta Time Logic and A31 -B Timing Slope Switch/boards.

A L L COMPONENTS MOUNTED ON A30-DELTA TlME A N D

I
Assembly
Number
-
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
Component Number

A23 A2 R1234
TI F c h e m a t i c
Subassembly Circuit
I
I
A3O-DELTA TlME LOGIC

A31-B TRIGGER SLOPE SWITCH CIRCUIT BOARDS ARE SHOWN Number (if used)

0.
I N SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 11 Chassis-mountedcomponents have no Assembly Number
prefix-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List.

REV NOV 1983

 TEST WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM
0

Static Sensitive Devices

See Maintenance Section A31 -B TRIGGER SLOPE SWITCH

COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE I

A3O-DELTA TIME LOGIC

-1
Component Number

A23 A2 R1234
Assembly T I ' ~ k h e m a t ~ c
Number Subassembly Circuit
Number (if used)

Chassis-mountedcomponents have no Assembly Numbt

prefix-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts List.

REV NOV 1983

 DELTA TIME LOGIC DIAGRAM
0
ASSEMBLY

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER I,OCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION -0CATION

CR00308 3C CR327 6L 40 R369 8N 2C

CR311 40 CR329 7L 3C R371 8N 2C
CR313 3C CR330 6M 4D R372 8N 2C
CR314 3C CR334 6M 4C R374 8N 1C
CR315 2C CR336 7M 38 R375 8N 1C
CR316 3C CR357 7K 2B
CR317 3C CR359 7L 2B TP327 71 2A
CR318 3C CR360 7M 28
CR319 4C CR362 7M 2C U365A 8N 2D
CR32 1 3C U365B 7N 20
CR322 2C J842 9J 2A U365C 8N 2D
CR323 40 U365D 8N 2D
CR324 40 P751 71 3A
CR325 4D P840 7N 1G

I Partial A24 also shown on diagrams 4, 6, 7 and 8

ASSEMBLY

CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD CIRCUIT SCHEM BOARD
NUMBER ILOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION LOCATION NUMBER LOCATION -0CATION NUMBER LOCATION .OCATION

C2 1D 7G J895 9B 5K R45 4M
C4 2C 6H R46 4M
C11 3D 5F P780 1B 71 R48 4M
C12 3D 6G P780 7H 71 R49 4M
C15 3D 6G R51 5M
C16 40 7G 088 9E 6J R52 5M
C20 5E 7H 089 9E 61 R53 4K
C2 5 3J 4E Q9 2 9E 6J R55 6F
C30 4J 4E R57 6F
C80 9C 51 R1 1D 7G R62 6F
C8 1 9C 51 R2 1D 7G R64 6F
C83 9D 51 R4 2C 5F R67 6F
C9 1 9F 61 R5 2C 5F R69 6F
C92 9F 61 R7 2C 5G R71 7F
R8A 2C 5F R73 7F
CR30 3J 4E R8B 2C 5F R80 9C
CR50 5C 5J R9' 2C 5F RBI 9C
CR51 70 .4G R11 30 5F RB3 9D
CR52 70 4G R15 4D 6G R85 9D
CR55 6D 4H R16 40 7G R88 9E
CR62 6D 4H R18 5C 5H RE9 9E
CR67 6D 4H R2 1 5E 5C R90 9E
CR71 70 4G R25 3J 4E R92 9E
CR85 9D 61 R27 3J 4E R94 9F
CR86 9E 61 R28 3J 4E
CR89 9E 61 R29 3J 4E TP88 8G
R30 3J 3E TP89 8G
DS40 78 6C R31 3K 4E TP90 8G
DS41 78 6E R34 3L 4E TP92 8G
R35 3M 4A
J890 48 6J R36 3M 4A U2 1C
J890 50 6J R37 4E U9A 40
J890 78 6J R38 :lA 4A U9B 5E
J892 6B 5K R39 3M 4A U9C 2D
J892 78 5K R40 78 4J U10 1E
J894 5B 7K R41 78 7E U22A 3H
J894 6B 7K R42 3M 4A U22B 3H
R43 4M 4A

I ASSEMBLY A31

BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
I SCHEM IBOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION

38 6B 1A
38
38

*See Parts List for

serial number ranges.
 @ INDICATES COMMON
POINT,9 PLACES.

BLANK 4dl" I

RIR

EXT
INPUl

2336
 POWER SUPPLY ISOLATION PROCEDURE

Each regulated supply has numerous feed points to external loads throughout the instrument. The power
distribution diagram is used in conjunction with the schematic diagrams to determine those loads that can be
isolated by removing service jumpers and those that cannot.

The power distribution diagram is divided into circuit boards. Each power supply feed to a circuit board is
indicated by the schematic diagram number on which the voltage appears. The schematic diagram grid
location of a service jumper or component is given adjacent to the component number on the power
distribution diagram.

If a power supply comes up after lifting a service jumper or other component to isolate a circuit, it is very
probable that the problem is in that circuit. This can sometimes, however, lead to erroneous conclusions. A
supply may pass through one circuit to another circuit. For instance, the +5Ve supply goes through both the
CH 1 and CH 2 VERT MODE switches (for XY MODE), across the A1 3 Trigger board from P808-11 t o J840-
21, and onto the A14 Sweep/Horiz Amp board. It is no longer identified as +5Ve, but is now labeled XY
Enable. The XY Enable signal appears on both diagram 8 and on diagram 6. Watch for this type of condition
when trying to localize a loading problem.

Typical resistance values to ground from the regulated supplies output as measured at the supply test
points are:

Resistance values significantly lower may indicate shorted components in the load. Values will vary between
instruments.

Always set the POWER switch to OFF before. soldering or unsoldering service jumpers or other
components and before attempting to measure component resistance values.
 6
+lOVA
y$&] HOLDOFF
AND

361A l i A TlMiNG BOARD

'871
I1 CONTROLS

,410 VERT PREAMPIL V POWER SUPPLY B O A R D

a 7 A16 6 TIMING BOARD

A31 B TR\GGER SLOPE SWITCH BOARD

POWER DISTRIBUTION@
 2336 Service

TPl76
POS INPUT
C33 R10-CHI AllENUATOR R22-VOLTS/DIV TP30 R47 TP62 TO
CHI H.F. COMP BALANCE BALANCE GND C H I GAIN GND DELAY LINE

CHI

R3
CHI H.F.

R74-CH2 AlTENUATOR
BALANCE

C1
CHI 2 0 pf COMP
- r

R83
- TP156
NEG INPUT
TO
DELAY LlNE
CH2 'JOLTS/DIV
BALANCE

C95
CH2 H.F. COMP.
-
C62
CH2 2 0 pf COMP /
TP266
GND

R92 ~$31 ~ 9 5 ~l'14

CH2 L.F. COMP +40V ADJ CH2 H.F. COMP CH2 GAIN

AlO-VERTICAL PREAMP/LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY, ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

@
 2336 Service

R82
TP6 1 TP56 R106 A SLOPE
DISPLAY C H I INPUT

R41
/ EXT LEVEL

TP62
GND

TP59 TP48 VERT MODE TP153 R163 B SLOPE

GND CH2 INPUT LEVEL B RESET B HYST OFFSET

A23-TRIGGER, ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

 2336 Service

A24-SWEEP/HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIER, ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

@
 2336 Service

R18 R44
TP185 TP184 TP148 R202 C128 C l 01 R66 VERTICAL VERTICAL R203
OVER VOLTAGE OVER VOLTAGE GND 1 GEOMETRY Z AXlS COMP Z AXIS COMP L.F. COMP BALANCE OUTPUT GAIN Y AXIS

- C36
H.F. COMP

- R39
H.F. COMP

C33
H.F. COMP

TP161 TP320 TP130 TP127 TP92 R140 R73 TP25 R29 R32
H.V. OSC +102V AC GRID BIAS DCGRID BIAS GND2 GRID BIAS L.F. COMP GND H.F. COMP H.F. COMP

A1 5-VERTICAL OUTPUT/HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY, ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

@
 2336 Service

TP88
GND 1

A30-DELTA TIME LOGIC, ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS

 2336 Service

SPECIFIC NOTES
1 . Set the Instrument front-panel
controls l n l t l a l l y as follows:
TRIC SOURCE VERT MODE SET I N I T I A L
TRIG SLOPE t
TRIC MODE AUTO START CONTROL
VAR TIME I n detent POSITIONS SWITCH HORIZ MODE
A AND B SEC/DIV Ims TO A AND TRIG
HORIZ MODE A MODE TO NORM,
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0.lV LCD READOUT
CH 1 AC-GND-DC
VERTICAL MODE
DC
CH 1
tCONNECT THE
ADJUST A TRIG LEVEL

VERTICAL POSITION Mldrange POWER CORD B HORIZ MODES

HORIZONTAL POSITION Mldrange TO A SUITABLE FUNCTION?
X I 0 MAG OFF AC-POWER
INTENSITY MI drange SOURCE AND
B DELAY TIME POSITION F u l l y CCW APPLY POWER
TO THE
INSTRUMENT

I SWITCH HORIZ MODE 1

TRIGGERED
NORM? ON
I ROTATE B DELAY
TIME POSITION
CONTROL I
TO A INTEN AND B

RUN? 1 YES MODE TO AUTO

SEE HORIZONTAL AND CHECK
PERFORMANCE OPERATION OF
GENERAL NOTES CHECK TO VERIFY REMAINING
A. Always set POWER swltch to CALIBRATION VERTICAL
OFF before swapping , remov lng ACCURACY MODES

@-
)

or replacing components , and DETERMINE THE NATURE

before connect lng or PROBLEM? TROUBLESHOOT CIRCUITRY
dlsconnec t lng leads or cables. 1 YES
B . When analyzing c l r c u l t ASSOCIATED WITH THE
1 YES
I
m a l f u n c t ~ o n sconslder
~ sockets TROUBLESHOOT CHANNEL PROBLEM AREA
and cables as posslble causes SWITCHING AND LOGIC
BE CENTERED

i
o f failure. FUNCTION? CIRCUITRY ASSOCIATED
HORIZONTALLY?
VITH FAULTY FUNCTION
C. Note that some troubleshoot lng- APPLY THE AMPL
procedure boxes on each chart CAL OUTPUT TO
contaln numbers I n t h e l r bottom THE CH 1 INPUT
corners. These are the numbers VIA A 10X PROBE
o f the applicable c l r c u l t
diagram I s 1 and c l r c u l t board
i l l u s t r a t l o n s ( s l (see f l g u r e l . SEE VERTICAL
MODE TO A INTEN
Numbers shown at the s t a r t of a PERFORMANCE
AND B TRIGGER
troubleshooting path remaln CHECK TO
SOURCE TO
appl lcable to downstream VERIFY
ATIME
procedure boxes i n the path CALIBRATION
BE CENTERED ACCURACY
unt I1 the procedure spec1 f 19s a
d If feren t d lagram and/or
illustration.

ITROUBLESHOOTING 1 TROUBLESHOOTING
CHART INDEX

DIAGRAM 'NUMBER FIG'URE NUMBER

OF ASSOCIATED OF CIRCUIT BOARD
SCHEMATIC ILLUSTRATION
 2336 Service

CHECK

RT297

CHECK
FAN MOTOR
WINDING
PRESENT AT RESISTANCE
P840-331 AT P747

GENERAL NOTES

i
A. Always set POWER switch to
OFF before swapplng , removing )

or rep1 ac i ng components and TROUBLESHOOT

Q267 , Q271
)

before connect ing or

Q281 , Q282
dl sconnec t i ng 1eads or cables , POWER Q288, Q290
AT EITHER,END P747-2, AND P747-3
B. When analyzing clrcuit SUPPLY OF R2967 AND ASSOCIATED
malfunctions, conslder sockets COMPONENTS
and cables as possible causes
of failure.

REPLACE
R295 FAN
RT297 >3V WITH RESPECT MOTOR
L
R296

FAN CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

CHART @
 2336 Service

SPECIFIC NOTES
1 . Verlfy the power supplles at the
followlng test polnts:

, <
IVERIFY : I

4I I
CIRCUIT BOARD SET INTEN CONTROL

<
1, ALL LOW VOLTAGE
SUPPLY TEST POINT AND FIGURE NO. AND HV POWER FULL CW (MAXIMUM
+40V TP247 A1 0 (9-61 SUPPLIES ARE INTENSITY I AND LHtLK UUJ,
WITHIN TOLERANCE DISPLAY >YES 15 UWLN >YES
t10V TP252 Al0(9-61 I N CENTER OF MEASURE
+5V TP255 A10 (9-61 (NOTE 1 I APPEAR ON
CPP& CPD~~LIO
VOLTAGE EMITTER
OF Q93 1-I7 7 * a ?\I!
CR94) AND
ASSOCIATED
1 0 TP265 A10(9-61 2. INITIAL CONTROL I N Z-AXIS USING 1 COMPONENTS
-5V TP.262 A10 (9-6) SETTINGS
+102V TP320 A15 (9-71 (NOTE 2 1

Power supply lsola t Ion procedure

i s descr lbed qdJacent to the Power
Dlstrlbution diagram I n t h l s manual
CHECK U43 PIN 12

5
2. Set the instrument front -panel
controls l n l t l a l l y as follows:
TRIG SOURCE
TRIG SLOPE
VERT MODE
t
kk
PRESS SHORT
VERTICAL
DEFLECTION
PINS TOGETHER
AND PRESS
CENTERED?
6
FOR UNBLANKING
WAVEFORM
(120mV P-PI
E)-10
TRIG MODE AUTO BEAM FIND VERTICALLY

@+
T
VAR TIME I n detent
A AND B SEC/DIV 1 ms OK?
HORIZ MODE A
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0.1v
CH I AC-GND-DC DC
VERTICAL MODE
' CH 1
VERTICAL POSITION
HORIZONTAL POSITION
M l drange
Mldrange
+ P758-7 FOR
XI0 MAG OFF
INTENSITY Mldrange
B DELAY TIME POSITION Fully CCW

NO

VARY INTEN CONTROL

FROM MAX TO MIN
AND CHECK U43 PIN 11
GENERAL NOTES 7 FOR VOLTAGE SWING
SHORT FROM 2 +2,2V TO +3.2V
A . Always set POWER switch to HORIZONTAL
,
OFF before swapping removing, DEFLECTION
or replacing components and , PINS TOGETHER
before connect lng or AND PRESS
TROUBLESHOOT BEAM FIND
dlsconnec t ing leads or cables.
CRT BIAS
B, When analyzing c l r c u l t CIRCUIT CHECK INTEN VERIFY SUPPLY
malfunctions, conslder sockets
S218 AND AT U43 PIN 1 1 SUSPECT BAD U43.
and cables as posslble causes
of fallure. INTERCONNECTIONS REPLACE TO CHECK

CONTROL FULL CW I A
I
(MAXIMUM
INTENSITY I* TROUBLESHOOT
PRESS BEAM FIND b HORIZONTAL
AND MEASURE
VOLTAGE AT ,
CIRCUIT
.
NO VISIBLE DISPLAY TROUBLESHOOTING
 2336 Service

Fl I t.0
SEE "NO VISIBLE
DISPLAY" TROUBLE-
CHECK SHOOTING CHART

VERIFY
1 . A SEC/DIV AT
Z-AXIS Ims/DIV
CIRCUIT
9 9-8
--+ 2 , VERTICAL MODE
I S CH 1 ONLY
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
NO DISCONNECT
b ONE END OF
CR127
IS
VISIBLE?
YES
, CHECK
CR12 3 ) R123
VR123) C123

v
3 , TRIG MODE I S
I AUTO I
FULL ON
YES

CHECK SHORT Q l 0 0
VERIFY: Q l 0 0 ) CR100
"'-IBLE? EMITTER TO
COLLECTOR
1 . LOW-VOLTAGE
SET A SEC/DIV SUPPLIES I N
TOLERANCE BEAM
PROBLEM
FIND
TO 0 . 0 5 1 s AND
CHECK ADJUSTMENT [NOTE 1 I
2 . SET INTEN CHECK :
OF C101 AND C128
CONTROL CR91 900
FULL CCW
EMITTER
YES

0 I S FIRST
250ns OF TRACE
BLANKED?

CHECK
I
I

I 7
DISCONNECT CHECK

R 1 1 3 ) R120
R122
Q116) C116
REMOVE SHORT
FROM CR94
AND. DISCONNECT
ONE END OF
CR9 1 1 BLANKED?
CHECK
Q93 ) R94

PROBLEM CHECK

g-lj
Q107) CR127 WITH : Q28) R28
R42 ) CR28
/IS\ - 1 REMOVE BOTH / /IS\ I SHORT ACROSS I 1 REMOVE SHORT FROM 1
. X-Y
I1
ONLY
INTENSITY
CR29) CR47
1 6
GENERAL NOTES I1~
,2.CHOP VERTICAL
MODE ONLY
3 , BH!RZ, MODE
A. Always set POWER switch to
- OFF before swapping removing ,

3
or rep 1acing components , and
before connect ing or TROUBLESHOOT
disconnect ing leads or cables. SWEEP
TROUBLESHOOT
CHOP BLANKING UNBLANKING
B. When 'analyzing circul t
CHECK
malfunctions, consider sockets
and cables as possible causes TROUBLESHOOT
CIRCUIT
CHECK
Q209 ) CR20l
U24 ) U43 ) Q218
INTEN POT [R909 I
1 YES
of failure. B SWEEP (U24 I U l 9 6 ) U211
AND CHECK
HORIZ MODE 4 9-7 CHECK
SWITCHING Q114) 0115
CR127

Z-AXIS TROUBLESHOOTING

CHART @
 2336 Service

1 UNPLUG THE CRT 1

1
CHECK
MEASURE CRT SOCKET AND
RESISTANCE SUSPECT HV
SOCKET P I N VOLTAGES ON CHECK THE
YES YES YES BETWEEN MULTIPLIER I N
VOLTAGES PINS 4 )6 p7 )8 )9 )10 RESISTANCE THE HEATER P I N 1 AND
BETWEEN P I N BETWEEN P I N 1 AND HV MODULE.
[ WARNING-SEE NORMAL? P I N 1 4 ON P I N 14 t 0 1 REPLACE MODULE
NOTE 1 ) AND P I N 1 4 THE CRT
ON THE CRT TO CHECK
I (HEATER) I /YES
SOCKET

REPLACE
CHECK RESISTIVE
T I 6 7 AND
DIVIDERS AND
CRT WIRING
SUPPLY VOLTAGES WIRING HARNESS WIRING
FOR ANY BAD HARNESS
HARNESS
SPECIFIC NOTE VOLTAGE LEVELS
1 . A HV probe is required to measure the
voltage on pins 1 2 , 3 , 4 , and 14 of I
the crt socket. Voltage on these pins CHECK FOR
is in excess of - 1 k V . Nominal voltage CLIPPED
for the crt socket voltages are: SINE WAVE
VOLTAGE
Pin Nr. Vol t age ON U130
HV OSCILLATOR PIN 6
41 02V SUPPLY I N [ HV MODULE 1
AND +102V

t
SUSPECT
DC RESTORER
CIRCUIT I N
GENERAL NOTES HV MODULE.
CHECK FOR REPLACE
A. Always set POWER switch to SINE WAVE VOLTAGE MODULE
OFF before swapping, removing , DC RESTORER DRIVE TO CHECK
or rep 1 acing components , and VOLTAGE AT JUNCTION
before connect ing or OF R 1 3 4 ) R136
disconnect ing leads or cables.
B. When analyzing circuit YES
malfunctions, consider sockets
and cables as possible causes DEFECTIVE
of failure. COMPONENT
7
CHECK CRT
BIAS CIRCUIT
CR130) CR140
VR140 ) +40V CRT BIAS CIRCUITRY TROUBLESHOOTING
R 1 3 0 ) R140
+120v
CHART @
41 18-94
 2336 Service

1
UNPLUG CONNECT DVM TO
DELAY LINE MEASURE DC VOLTAGE
AT 5878 YES AT EITHER TP156 OR
AND PRESS TPl76, PRESS I N BEAM SEE MAINTENANCE

I I
FIND AND ROTATE TRIG REPLACE HIGH Z AND LOW Z
I N BEAM FIND SECTION OF THIS
LEVEL CONTROL FROM DEFECTIVE ATTENUATORS AND
3 9-8 FULLY CCW TO FULLY CW MANUAL FOR
ATTENUATOR SWITCHING OK
ATTENUATOR
COMPONENTS
REPAIRS
CONNECT DVM TO
MEASURE DC VOLTAGE

1
CHECK CHECK U43 AT JUNCTION OF Rl48
CENTER MEASURE
COMPONENTS SUPPLY VOLTAGES AND R169. SWITCH
VERTICAL CHECK POSITION RESISTANCE
PIN 14 2 +4,5V VERT MODE AND CHECK DOES DC
BALANCE VOLTAGE THROUGH
WITH BAD PIN 1 1 t +4.2V VOLTAGE FOR THE VARY FROM t CHANNEL SWITCH
CONTROL HIGH Z AND
SUPPLY OK? PIN 7 t +4,5V FOLLOWING : +0,16V TO CIRCUIT OF INTERMITTANT
R18 LOW Z
VOLTAGES PIN 1 t +9.1V CH 1 S +3.5V SWITCHING SETTINGS?
FAULTY CHANNEL ATTENUATORS
GENERAL NOTES YES CH 2 S +3,5V
OF FAULTY
A. Always set POWER switch to
TRIG VIEW S +6.5V
ADD S +1.4V I CHANNEL I
OFF before swapping , removing , CHECK U43 STAGE BIAS 2 9-7
o r rep l a c i n g components , and AND SIGNAL VOLTAGES
be fore connect ing or ,
PIN 13 8 t + 0 . 0 0 $ ~
CONNECT DVM TO SET VOLTS/DIV .
disconnect ing 1eads o r cab 1es . PIN 1 2 ) 9 t -0.8V
PIN 17, 18 t +7.1V MEASURE DC VOLTAGE SWITCH TO EACH
B. When analyzing c i r c u i t PIN 3 ) 4 2 +7,1V1 AT TP156 OR TP176. POSITION FOR CH 1
malfunctions, consider sockets PIN 20 5 t 7 . W ADJUST VAR BAL R22 AND CH 2 VERT MODE.
(CH 1 1 OR R83 [CH 21 LINEARILY? ADJUSTMENT CHECK DC VOLTAGE
and cables as possible causes PIN 19, 2 t +9.1V RANGE?
o f fa1 l u r e . FROM FULLY CCW TO AT TP156 OR TP176
FULLY CW FOR DC LEVEL JUMPS

0 1 < 0.3V

CHECK R10 OR CHECK U30 OR

CHECK COMPONENTS ?74 AND BUFFER
ASSOCIATED WITH BIAS AND SIGNAL U1 00 VOLTAGES
VOLTAGES PIN
BAD PIN VOLTAGE PIN VOLTAGES COMPONENTS Ql0 OR Q74 3 t +0.004V
PIN 4 ) 6 2 -0.75V
1 t +5,9v
1 TRIG I 2 t +0.8V
10, 14 t +4.7V
1 1 ) 13 t +0.002V

CHECK DELAY LINE CHECK TRIG VIEW

tCHECK CH 1 AND CH 2 CHANNEL REPLACE FAULTY
3 t 0.0V
4 5 -9.6V
5 t +3,75v
16 t -0.05V
NO CHECK
SUPPLY
U54 6 t -8.75V CHECK Q30) Q106
DRIVER COMPONENTS CIRCUIT COMPONENTS SWITCH AND POSITION CIRCUIT COMPONENTS. 7 t -8,75V
AND SICNAL AND VOLTAGES ,
Q141 Ql42, Q147
CH 1 VERT MODE :H 2 VERT MODE
CHECK CIRCUITRY Q4 OR 068
E t +5.0V
B t +4.2V
OUTPUT Q183 AND Q173 CR140, CR142) CR146 ASOCIATED WITH

eq
055 1 Q57 ) CR55 Q132, Q133 1 t -8.75V C t +4V
E t -2.2V PUSH TRIG VIEW AND INCORRECT
AND SICNAL OUTPUT
VOLTAGES CR56 , CR57 Q134, Q135 2 t -0.7V
PIN B t -1.5V CHECK VOLTAGES : VOLTAGE. I F 3 t -9.7V
CR58) U55 U125, CR132
1 t +40V C t 0.0V Q141 AND Q147 TP61 OR TP139 5 t t0.W
MEASURE DC CR134) CR138
7 t +10v Q153 AND Q170 E 2 +10mV INCORRECT ) 6 2 4.5V
VOLTAGES CR139
4,10 t E t +2.3V B t +0,75V CHECK VERTICAL 7 t 0.0v
YES +24,3V 055 AND Q57 MEASURE DC
B t +1,4V C t +1,45v SWITCHING LOGIC CR3 ) CR2
E t +5V VOLTAGES
C t -1.5v Ql42 CIRCUIT VOLTAGES
B t +4,3V 3132 AND Q134
Q149 E t 0.0V
C t +2.1v E t +5V
E t +3.6V B 5 +0,75V
TP61 t +3.7V B t +4,3V
B t +4,3v C t +40mV
U55 C t +2,1V
POSITION CONTROL
PIN
1 t +4.7v
TP139 t +3,7V
Ul25
CHECK COMPONENTS I
RANGE
2 t +5v PIN INCORRECT VOLTAGE,
5 +0,45V TO -0.45V COMPONENTS CHECK COMPONENTS
3 t +8,3V 1 t +4,7v
REPLACE FAULTY ASSOCIATED WITH
4 t +10v 2 t +5v
COMPONENTS INCORRECT PIN
5 t +8.3V 3 2 +8.3V
6 t +5V 4 2 +10v VOLTAGES.
7 t +4,7v 5 t +8,3V REPLACE FAULTY
6 t +5V COMPONENTS.
7 t +4,7V REPLACE U30 OR
U1OO TO CHECK I C

VERTICAL TROUBLESHOOTING

CHART @ 41 18-95
 ,
2336 Service
CHECK +I 02V
SUPPLY AND (7 TROUBLESHOOT
INTERCONNECTIONS A SWEEP CIRCUIT

(9@+4- HORIZONTAL
VERIFY :
1 , LOW VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLIES
I N TOLERANCE
[NOTE 1 I
2. INITIAL CONTROL
SETTINGS
(NOTE 21
-
8
MOMENTARILY
SHORT
PINS 2 AND 7
OF U128
TOGETHER
9-10
YES

i
REMOVE U128
AND CHECK
TP55 FOR A
SWEEP RAMP
6 g-10
YES POSITIVE
L

CHECK
V R ~11
Rlll
R112

NO YES NEGATIVE

tCHECK VOLTAGE ON CHECK

--
Ul28 PINS
1 ,5)8 40V

---
S -5v
15 +5V
16 0V GND
14 -3 TO
VARY HORIZ +3v POS
POSITION POT. CHECK RESISTANCE
MEASURE BETWEEN PINS 6 AND
DEFLECTION 3 ? 2 KILOHMS
VOLTAGE ON
SPECIFIC NOTES GENERAL NOTES LEFT AND
RIGHT LEADS CHECK
1 . Verify the power supplies at the A . Always set BASE AND

T P
following test points: POWER sw it ch EMITTER . CHECK CHECK
to OFF before CIRCUITRY CIRCUITRY
CIRCUIT BOARD swapping , CR 1 60
SUPPLY TEST POINT AND FIGURE NO. removing , or C160 CR 1 75
+40V TP247 A10 (9-61 replacing
+10V TP252 A10[9-61 components ,
+5V TP255 A1 0 (9-6 1 and before
- 1 TP265 A10[9-61 connect ing o r
-5V TP262 A10 (9-61 d lsconnec t ing
leads or
I I F VOLTAGE I S : I
+102V TP320 A15[9-71
cables.
Power supply i s o l a t ion procedure
i s described adJacen t to the Power
B. When analyzing
circuit
Distribut ion diagram i n t h i s manual. malfunctions,
cons ider
2 . Set the instrument front-panel sockets and
controls i n i t i a l l y as follows, cables as
TRIG SOURCE VERT MODE possible
+ causes o f
TRIG SLOPE I F VOLTAGE I S :
AUTO fai lure,
TRIG MODE 102V CHECK Rl87
VAR TIME I n detent YES DOES LEFT
A AND B SEC/DIV 1 ms - 87V CHECK Q181
5V CHECK C187
HORIZ MODE A 0V CHECK Q176
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0.1V R190 AND R173
CH 1 AC-GND-DC DC
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
VERTICAL POSITION Midrange
HORIZONTAL POSITION M idrange
XI0 MAG OFF
INTENSITY Midrange
B DELAY TIME POSITION F u l l y CCW

CHECK BASE AND

EMITTER CIRCUITRY
OF Q168
CIRCUITRY
OF Q155
CHECK
CRl6l fi
CHECK
HORIZONTAL TROUBLESHOOTING

CHART (9 41 18-98
 2336 Service

1
3
MEASURE REMOVE GROUND
CONTINUE
- TROUBLESHOOTING 4 DC LEVEL FROM TP86,
AT U43 MEASURE VOLTAGE
PROCEDURE
PIN 2 ON U87 PIN 3
A
5 t0.5V

CHECK
- .
A GATE
WHAT I S GROUND A GATE
RAMP PRESENT RAMP 'RESENT AT
6 9-10 SETTINGS AT TP551 U43 PIN 2? LEVEL AT CHECK VOLTAGE
[NOTE 1 I TP86 AT U43 PIN 2

YES

SPECIFIC NOTES
I

i
1 . Set the instrument front-panel
controls in1 t i a l l y as follows: REMOVE U24
MEASURE CHECK U87 PINS:
TRIG SOURCE VERT MODE [B SWEEP I C I PIN 2 > 2.6V
DC VOLTAGE
TRIG SLOPE t AND CHECK FOR PIN 1 t l,0V
AT U43 PIN 7
TRIG MODE AUTO SWEEP ON CRT PIN 4 2 0V
VAR TIME I n detent I

A AND B SEC/DIV 1 ms
HORIZ MODE A
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0.1v
CH 1 AC-GND-DC DC
VERTICAL MODE CH 1
t

C
VERTICAL POSITION M idrange 1 REMOVE
HORIZONTAL POSITION
XI0 MAG
INTENSITY
B DELAY TIME POSITION
Midrange
OFF
Midrange
F u l l y CCW
TROUBLESHOOT
HORIZONTAL 4
CIRCUIT
A 0 WHAT I S
VOLTAGE ON U43
PIN 71
[HORIZ
PREAMP I.
CHECK FOR
SWEEP RAMP
AT TP55
VERIFY SUPPLY
VOLTAGES TO U87,
SUSPECT BAD
I C (U87I.
REPLACE U87
TO CHECK
YES
1 REMOVE U87
CHECK VOLTAGE
AT U y I i y T

GENERAL NOTES
A . Always set
POWER sw It ch
to OFF before
swapping )
removing or
replacing
components
and before
,
,
VERIFY SUPPLY
VOLTAGES
TO U24.
SUSPECT BAD
IC [U24I.
REPLACE U24
TO CHECK
I
REMOVE U24
CHECK FOR
SWEEP RAMP
AT TP55

v
RAMP PRESENT
AT TP551
r

YES I
VERIFY SUPPLY
VOLTAGES
TO U43,
SUSPECT BAD
IC U43.
REPLACE U43
TO CHECK I
6 CHECK
R80 1 C80

connect lng or
d l sconnec t ing
leads or SWEEP
cables. RAMP PRESENT AT
TP551
B. When a n a l ~ z l n g
circuit
malfunctions,
cons Ider
sockets and
cables as
possible
causes o f
I"
CHECK HORIZ MODE
SWITCHING CIRCUIT AND
failure. X-Y SWITCHING CIRCUIT
S218) R30) R34) R35
,
R36 ) R37 R41 ) Q28 A SWEEP TROUBLESHOOTING

CHART @
 2336 Service
b CHECK
MEASURE DC LIFT ONE END
VOLTAGE AT
? + 7v + OF CR88 AND ,
CR90 CR91,
U43 PIN 10 CHECK FOR SWEEP TPSS? TROUBLESHOOT
RAMP AT TP55 TRIGGER
1 I CIRCUIT I

t
VERIFY SUPPLY
REMOVE U87 AND
GROUND TP86.
CHECK DC VOLTAGE
AT U86 PIN 10 k *
VOLTAGES
TO U87.
SUSPECT BAD
IC [U87I.
REPLACE U87
TO CHECK

VERIFY
AGD3;5yV
0 A SWEEP
CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING
b CHART 7 BEFORE
MEASURE DC
b VOLTAGE AT

7
(STLRTtC [CONT I STARTING AT U43 PIN 14
THIS POINT

0
CHECK
OTHER
VOLTAG~

oNo
tQ80,
REMOVE U43 AND
VERIFY SUPPLY
VOLTAGES
GENERAL NOTES CHECK TO U43. I 1 YES
+ CHECK

14-
DC VOLTAGE AT Ui3 SUSPECT BAD 4
A . Always set PIN 4 2 DC VOLTAGE IC [U431. COLLECTOR GO TO
,
483 R81
MEASURE
POWER switch AT TP3 '
REPLACE U43 2 9.8V? ,
R82 R83
DC VOLTAGE
to OFF before TO CHECK AT JUNCTION
swapping,
,
removing or OF R76 AND
replacing
components ,
and before

<
connecting or
disconnect ing

> 1
CHECK I S VOLTAGE \
leads or CHECK R43 AND REMOVE GROUND
A SEC/DIV SWITCH AT U43 PIN 4 , FROM Q80 GATE AND
cables. AND TIMING X-Y ENABLE SIGNAL
2 THE SAME AS VOLTAGE SHORT Q81 DRAIN
B, When analyzing RESISTORS FROM VERTICAL
AT T R ? TO SOURCE.
MODE SWITCH

4
circuit

4
7 9-1 1 CHECK DC VOLTAGE
ma1 funct ions, CHECK
consider ON Q83, COLLECTOR
sockets and
cables as
1 YES
possible
causes o f
fa1 l u r e .
GROUND 480
GATE.
CHECK DC
VOLTAGE AT
Q83 COLLECTOR t DOES Q83
COLLECTOR GO TO
REMOVE

REMOVE GROUND DOES Q83

FROM 980 GATE FALL?
A SWEEP TROUBLESHOOTING

CHART 0 ICONT I
41 18-98
 2336 Service

FROM t +2V TO -2V AS AT U 1 W P I N 1 AND . =

91a 1
U l 8 8 PIN 7
SUSPECT

AT U216 REPLACE
PIN 97 TO CHECK
VERIFY - . .-- .. - .-
INITIAL SUPPLY
SWITCH B ROTATE B
CONTROL RETURN B DELAY VOLTAGES.
B SWEEP SETTINGS TRIG MODE TO DELAY TIME
PRESENT AT CHECK
A T I M EFOR
ANDA PRESENT AT FROM
POSITION
FULLY YES TIME POSITION SUSPECT
B SWEEP RAMPS GET TO FULLY CCW, BAD U43.
8 8-18 CHECK FOS TP277 SWEEP RAMP TP277 CCW TO ROTATE ATIME REPLACE
A SWEEP POSITION FULLY CCW TO CHECK
AT TP27 FULLY CW
RAMP AT SIGNAL PRESENT
TP27 AT ANOM OF CR202
t 1 YES
MEASURE DC
VOLTAGE AT SWITCHING S2 AND
SPECIFIC NOTES
DELAYED 'VE P751 P I N 8 INTERCONNECTIONS DC VOLTAGE
AT TP55 t
VOLTAGE AT
US3 P I N 7
1 . Set the Instrument front-panel
controls l n l t l a l l y as follows: Ql08, U l 0 8
R108, R10Q

I
TRIG SOURCE VERT MODE 1 YES

I
TRIG SLOPE t
CHECK CR63 CHECK ALT SYNC
TRIG MODE AUTO R l 7 ) 0161 ON DIAGRAM 4
VAR TIME I n detent 6 ,5 g-Q ,Q-lfl CHECK U128 AND
A AND B SEC/DIV 1 ms ASSOCIATED
HORIZ MODE A COMPONENTS
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0. l V
CH 1 AC-GND-DC
VERTICAL MODE
VERTICAL POSITION
HORIZONTAL POSITION
XI0 MAG
INTENSITY
B DELAY TIME POSITION
DC
CH 1
M ldrange
M ldrange
OFF
MI drange
F u l l y CCW
pq
AND RECHECK
VOLTAGE AT U24 P I N 7

YES
t
CHECK HORIZ

S218 R30 R34

R35 ) R36 R41 0 P751 PIN 8 t
CKCK HORIZ
MODE SWITCHING

R35, R36 R4l

CHECK U24 +1v TO

GENERAL NOTES
A . Always set MEASURE DC
1 - ASSOCIATED VOLTAGE AT
CHECK U10 7 AN0
POWER swl tch B MILLER BAD U216
VOLTAGE AT
REPLACE COMPONENTS, COtlWNENTS ,
to OFF before
swapplng )
removlng , or TO CHECK
P751 PIN 8
CHECK CR1Q5
CR1Q3 AND S218
AND AT UlQ8
PIN 7 - R018A) R Q l W
NO
replacing
components ,
and before 1
connecting or
REINSTALL
d lsconnec t lng
U2S A@ REMOVE U43
leads or CHECK DC AND RECHECK
cables. VOLTAGE AT FOR t +2V
B. When analyzing U43 PIN 1 AT U43 P I N 1
circuit
YES
ma1 funct Ions,
cons 1der
sockets and
cables as B SWEEP TROUBLESHOOTIIC
posslble SUPPLY VOLTAGES.
causes o f
fallure.
SUSPECT BAD U43.
REPLACE TO CHECK CHART @
 2336 Service

VERIFY
TROUBLESHOOTINC
CIRCUIT CHART @
BEFORE R15 AND R16
STARTING HERE

1 REMOVE REMOVE GROUND

U24 AND U20 FROM 420 GATE
CHECK DC AND CHECK Q21
VOLTAGE AT U24 COLLECTOR
SOCKET P I N 4 VOLTAGE
AND TP3
GENERAL NOTES 6 9-10
A. Always set
POWER swi t ch
to OFF before
swapping, CHECK
removing , or DOES THE
replacing Q21 COLLECTOR OF U24.
CHECK Q24 AND
components , DC VOLTAGE VOLTAGE FALL? SUSPECT BAD U24.
and before AT U24 SOCKET B TIMING SWITCH
REPLACE TO CHECK
connecting or PIN 4 2 6 )7 9-1 0 ) P I 1
d lsconnec t lng
leads or 1

cables.
B. When analyzing REMOVE Q16 AND
circul t CHECK THE 421
malfunct Ions, REINSTALL Q20. COLLECTOR
consider CHECK 420 GATE
sockets and AND SOURCE
cables as VOLTAGE
posslble
causes of
failure,

1 YES

I GROUND GATE OF I B SWEEP TROUBLESHOOTINC

 VERIFY :
1 . LOW VOLTAGE
TROUBLESHOOTINC
YESeTT>N0
SICNAL PRESENT
{ CHECK Q89 ) Q95
AND ASSOCIATED
COMPONENTS
2336 Service

POWER SUPPLIES 5 9-9

WITHIN
CHECK
TOLERANCE
(NOTE I I CR346
2, INITIAL CONTROL CR347
SETTINGS
(NOTE 2 1
CHANGE A TRIC MODE TO
SPECIFIC NOTES NORM AND CHECK FOR
1 , V e r i f y the power supplles at the SICNAL AT TP 86
followlng t,est p o i n t s : t, 1 YES 6 9-1 0
CIRCUIT BOARD
CHECK
SUPPLY TEST POINT AND FIGURE NO, SEE A SWEEP CHECK DC I S +10v
A SEC/DIV
t40V TP247 A10 (9-61 TROUBLESHOOTINC VOLTAGE AT
SET TO PIN 131 SWITCHING
t10V TP252 A10(9-61 CHART 5876 PIN 13
1 ms/DIV
t5V TP255 A10(9-61

1
-10V TP265 Al0(9-61 VERIFY SUPPLY
-5V TP262 Al0(9-61 VOLTAGES TO U81.
t102V TP320 A15(9-71 SUSPECT BAD U81.
REPLACE TO CHECK
Power supply l s o l a t Ion procedure
IS described adJacent to the Power
D l s t r l b u t i o n diagram I n t h l s manual. CHECK FOR
HOLDOFF RAMP
ON TP8Q RAMP PRESENT ON
2 . Set the Instrument front-panel . 6 9-9
controls l n l t l a l l y as follows. I VARY LEVEL CONTROL I
TRIG SOURCE
TRIG SLOPE
VERT MODE
t
CHECK TRIGGER
SIGNAL PRESENT AT
YES
CHECK HF SOURCE
AND COUPLING I AND CHECK FOR A GATE
AT U81 PIN 14 I
< >1
TRIG MODE AUTO AT U30 PIN I 6 SWITCHING C63 )
VAR TIME I n detent P732 PIN 21
R56A THROUGH 0

I- I
A AND B SEC/DIV 1 ms
HORIZ MODE A
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0,lV SUSPECT
BAD U87. NO TEp6R
CH 1 AC-GND-DC DC GATE PRESENT AT A RESET GATE
VERTICAL MODE CH 1 REPLACE U87
VERTICAL POSITION Midrange TO CHECK
HORIZONTAL POSITION Mldrange

I I
oyEs
XI0 MAG OFF YES TRIGGER SIGNAL
INTENSITY MI drange AT P732 PIN 2
B DELAY TIME POSITION F u l l y CCW

GENERAL NOTES
A . Always set
I CHECK FOR A RESET
GATE AT U81 PIN 17
I CHECK SOURCE
AND COUPLINC
'
CHECK FOR LF TRIGGER
SICNAL (AT LEAST 10mV P-PI
AND DC LEVEL CHANGE AT

1-4
SWITCHING SIGNAL PRESENT AT TRIGGER SIGNAL U81 PIN Q AS LEVEL
POWER swl tch AND R56A U81 PIN 31 AT U81 PIN 19 CONTROL I S ROTATED
to OFF before THROUGH 0
swapping )
removlng or
replacing

-
components ,
and before

1
connect 1ng or CHECK CHECK DC
d lsconnec t lng Q104) Rl03 YES VARY LEVEL CONTROL
VOLTAGE ON U81 DO U81 YES b CHECK FOR DC CHANGE LEVEL CHANGE AT
leads or RIBS) R106 CATE PRESENT AT HF TRICGER
PIN 4 * 0V TO 0.2V AT U81 PIN 19
cables, Rl87 U81 PIN 171 CHECK OK? SIGNAL AT
PIN 3 , 7 ) I )d 5
B, When analyzing 5,6 9-9 )9-10
clrcul t
malfunct Ions, TRIGGER CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTINC
cons lder
sockets and
cables as
possible
CHECK LF SOURCE AND
COUPLINC SWITCHING
CHECK R913 CHART @
AND ASSOCIATED
causes of AND ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS
fa1 l u r e . COMPONENTS
 2336 Service

HV POWER CONNECT
INSTRUMENT TO SOURCE VOLTAGE CHECK
SUPPLY L I F T ONE
CIRCUIT b AC-SOURCE b AND OBSERVE
END OF R155 ASSOCIATED
USING A VARIAC. OSCILLATOR
SET TO 0V COMPONENTS

/ YES

1
CHECK SHUTDOWN CHECK
LATCH CIRCUIT ERROR AMPL
C167) Cl68 Q148, Q155 Q184) Q178
Q161 C156 AND ASSOCIATED AND ASSOCIATED
FOR SHORTS COMPONENTS COMPONENTS
I S +40V
+40V UNREG UNREG PRESENT AT
CIRCUIT P756-71

GENERAL NOTES
1 YES

1
LEAVE VARIAC

+0
A. Always set SET TO POINT INCREASE BEYOND
POWER sw i t ch THAT OSC RUNS +105V AS AC-SOURCE NATURE OF
to OFF before AND F89 DOES THE PROBLEM
swapping , NOT OPEN
removing , or OPEN?
replacing
components , 1 YES
and before
connecting or
dl sconnec t i ng
leads or
cables.
I CHECK
R176B) R176C
INCREASE UNPLUG CRT AND ASSOCIATED
B. When analyzing REPLACE
SOURCE VOLTAGE SOCKET SO THAT VOLTAGE COMPONENTS I N

0
circui t FROM CRT
malfunctions, AND OBSERVE AT TP320 I S +102V Q178 BASE CIRCUIT
consider OSCILLATOR
sockets and WAVEFORM

k0
1 YES
1 1
cables as AT TP161
possible
7
causes of
CHECK DC S< ~178> No ;:FT184
TlF
Q1
failure.
OPERATING SUSPECT VOLTAGE AT BASE VOLTAGE
CIRCUIT BAD CRT. BASE OF 4178 0 f 50mV? AND ASSOCIATED
NORMALLY? COMPONENTS
REPLACE REPLACE CRT

eyES
TO CHECK

A in
IVU I LJ
I CONNECT
I INSTRUMENT TO
AC-SOURCE USING
A VARIAC SET TO 0V
I
I
t DISCONNECT
+102v SUPPLY
BY LIFTING ONE
END OF C19 7
REMOVE HV
SHIELD AND

MULTIPLIER
DRIVE LEAD
U130 P I N 3
41- OSCILLATOR RUN

NORMALLY?
SUSPECT BAD
REPLACE HV

MODULE
TO CHECK

CHECK +102V
REGULATOR AND I REEXAMINE THE
NATURE OF
THE PROBLEM
1 HV POWER SUPPLY TROUBLESHOOTING

CHART @
 2336 Service

e
L
r

a (+/~afll -
1
i VOLTAGE AT ;TP247 CHECK VOLTAGE
AT U3 P I N 6
CHECK VOLTAGE
F
CHECK R4 AND R8
FOR CORRECT VALUE
CHECK R15 FOR
VALUE OK? -
AT U3 P I N 2 CORRECT VALUE
,
T I
+40V POWER SUPPLY AT TP247 - 1 YES
SUSPECT
BAD U3,
REPLACE

CHECK R2 AND R3 FOR

CORRECT RESISTANCE
NOTE
SOME CHECKS AND' QUESTIONS
ARE I N TWO PARTS: DO UPPER
PART FOR +10V PROBLEM i DO
LOWER PART FOR +5V PROBLEM b

CHECK REFERENCE CHECK VBE

.- CHECK REFERENCE
VOLTAGE AT U3 PIN 5 HIGH
1 - OF Q9
CHECK VBE
VOLTAGE AT U3 PIN 3

1 F250
AND F251
VOLTAG
AT U3 P I b 8
> +10VR
YES ,
CHECK DC
FAULTY
VOLTAGE AND /TC\ I ADD +4.5V TO I CHECK
SHORTED OR RIPPLE AT RESISTANCE
COMPONENTS TP252 OF R252
CHECK ~ ~ 2 5 R1
0, CHECK DC CHECK
GENERAL NOTES VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE
P I N 6 AND P I N 8 RIPPLE AT OR R253
A. Always set BLOWN? TP255
POWER sw i t ch FOR OPEN XFMR
to OFF before
swapping )

removing or
) CHECK FOR FAULTY
replacing COMPONENTS BETWEEN SUSPECT

-l C 0
components , U3 P I N 7 AND TP252 CONNECT DISCONNECT CHECK FOR OPEN EXCESSIVE
and before CHECK FOR FAULTY
INSTRUMENT TO
AC-POWER SOURCE
ONE END XFMR SECONDARY
WINDING P714 4
60 H~
FAULTY
I CHECK FOR RESISTANCE
VALUE WITHIN
connect lng or COMPONENTS BETWEEN OF VR252 Low HIGH FAULTY COMPONENTS COMPONENT
dl sconnec t lng VIA A VARIAC. P I N 3 TO PIN 8
U3 P I N 1 AND TP255 LEAVE VOLTAGE DISCONNECT CHECK C252 OR TOO LOW? BETWEEN U3 AND
leads or ONE END AND PIN 6 BAD OUTPUT VOLTAGE
AT ZERO AND
cables. OF VR263 CHECK C253
POWER OFF POWER SUPPLY
B, When analvzlng OSCILLATING
clrcul t
malfunct ions ,

H
cons i der 1 YES v I SEE POWER I CHECK VOLTAGE
DROP ACROSS R252
sockets and REPLACE FUSE. SUPPLY
cables as LEAVE VR UP. CHECK VOLTAGE
possible TURN ON POWER

-0
CHECK C15 DROP ACROSS R253
causes of AND SLOWLY TO CHECK FOR
fa1 lure. INCREASE LINE
VOLTAGE. SHORTED?
C. The power KEEP + 10V
supp 1Y < +12v.
I 1
i

isolation
procedure Is
descr i bed
adJacent to
the Power
Distribut ion
KEEP +5V
< +6V

I
I"
SHORTED I
REPLACE TO CHECK COMPONENT
CHECK Qg
I10 AND
ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS
CHECK Q16 AND
ASSOCIATED
ASSOCIATEO COMPONENTS
A
1
NO

v I
SUSPECT EXCESSIVE
LOADING,
SEE POYER SUPPLY
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
I

SHORTED COMPONENTS
diagram in I N +10V AND
this manual. VR
-1 0V UNREG +1 BV AND +5V POWER SUPPLY TROUBLESHOOTING
SUPPLY
CHART @
 2336 Service
GENERAL NOTES
A. Always set
POWER swl tch
to OFF before
swapping
removing or
,
,
C. The power
supp 1Y
l s o l a t Ion
procedure IS
descr 1bed
1
1 CHECK VOLTAGE I
AT U8 P I N 6
CHECK VOLTAGE
1 A
2 0V?
v
CHECK R3 AND R4
YES IFOR CORRECT VALUE

1
CHECK R15 AND R16
FOR CORRECT VALUE
1
I
+I&Nc3yEs
VALUE OK?
\ /
,1
replacing
components , adJacent to
the Power
and before
connect lng or Distrlbut Ion
1 YES BAD U8,

-(>
d l sconnec t 1ng dlagram i n
t h l s manual. REPLACE

P
-1 0V AND -5V leads or

t
t
CHECK DC TO CHECK
REGULATOR cables, CHECK R8 FOR
VOLTAGE REFERENCE CORRECT VALUE REPLACE
AT TP247 B, When analyzing VALUE OK?
circuit VOLTAGE CHECK R20 FOR COMPONENT
ma1 func t ions, CORRECT VALUE
cons1der
sockets and
cables as
TROUBLESHOOT
possible
+40V POWER
causes of
fa1 lure. CHECK
REFERENCE
YES VOLTAGE AT
U8 PIN 5 SUPPLY AMPLITUDE
I
7
L L
7 D
CHECK TOO HICH OR
REFERENCE TOO LOW?
VOLTAGE AT
CHECK DC VOLTAGE U8 PIN 3
AT TP252 AND TP255

T
COMPONENTS
SHORTED? CHECK
RESISTANCE
SUBTRACT 4V OF R264
CHECK DC VOLTAGE FROM VOLTAGE CHECK
VOLTAGE AND RIPPLE AT TP264 AT U8 PIN 7 RESISTANCE

POWER SUPPLY
-
AND AT TP255
+5V?
I CHECK DC VOLTAGE
AND RIPPLE AT TP265 I FAULTY
OUTPUT?
SUBTRACT 8,3V
FROM VOLTAGE
AT U8 P I N 1

1 I I
CHECK FOR FAULTY VALUE WITHIN
COMPONENTS BETWEEN EXCESSIVE LOAD COMPONENT
SOME CHECKS AND
U8 P I N 7 AND TP264 OR BAD FILTER
QUESTIONS ARE I N TWO
CHECK FOR FAULTY PARTS: DO UPPER PART AT d8 P I N 8 > +5V AT P I N 8 FREQUENCY? ICHECK FOR FE]
COMPONENTS BETWEEN FOR -5V PROBLEM, DO I COMPONENTS I
U8 P I N 1 AND TP265 LOWER PART FOR -lOV
PROBLEM
POWER SUPPLY
OSCILLATING Y
CHECK C251
LOW
AMPLITUDE TOO HIGH
HIGH
b BETWEEN U8 AND
BAD OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
I CHECK VOLTAGE
DROP ACROSS R264
I
OPEN XFMR CHECK VOLTAGE
WINDING I I
P7l4
AND F257 PIN 7 TO SUPPLY

TP264 EXCEED -5V?

DOES VOLTAGE AT
TURN ON POWER
AND SLOWLY
DISCONNECT
ONE END
OF VR264
DISCONNECT
ONE END
b

CONNECT

TO AC-POWER

VOLTAGE AT
P I N 1 AND

INSTRUMENT CHECK C15

PIN 2
ISOLATION
PROCEDURE
TO CHECK FOR
EXCESSIVE
LOADING
CHECK Qg AND
ASSOCIATED
COMPONENTS
CHECK Q21 AND
ASSOCIATED
COMPONENTS
I
NO
VOLTAGE DROP
2 0.7VP
SUSPECT EXCESSIVE
LOADING.
SEE POWER SUPPLY
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
1
OF VR265
NO KEEP -1 0V ZERO AND
POWER OFF SUSPECT
< -12V
d L
t i BAD U8.
t I CHECK FOR CHECK
CR259 R1
REPLACE
TO CHECK
COMPONENT -1 0V AND -5V POWER SUPPLY TROUBLESHOOTING
SHORTED
SHORTED
COMPONENTS
I N +5V AND
-5V UNREG
P714 PIN 7
TO PIN 1
AND P I N 2
CHART @
1 POWER SUPPLY FOR OPEN
 2336 Service

CONNECT
INSTRUMENT
CHECK FOR SHORTED
OR OPEN COMPONENTS
BETWEEN U237 P I N 6
AND REGULATOR OUTPUT
170CHECK COMPONENTS
I N U237 P I N 2 LEAD
FOR CORRECT VALUE
P I N 2 AND P I N 3
YES +

TO AC POWER
SOURCE VIA VOLTAGE AT I SET VARIAC I PUCPY nr

A VARIAC TP247 FOR

AND SET LEVEL AND
SOURCE 7 1 IPINS 2 AND 3 1
VOLTAGE AT
115 VAC

1 HIGH .
CHECK LINE
GENERAL NOTES
A. Always set
POWER swi tch CHECK VOLTAGES
to OFF before POSITION
swapping ,
remov i ng , or
replacing SEE POWER I SUSPECT I
components , SUPPLY EXCESSIVE

I 1
and before ISOLATION
connecting or PROCEDURE VOLTAGE AT
d I sconnec t I ng TO CHECK FREQUENCY? Q246CHECK
COLLECTOR
leads or FOR
cables. EXCESSIVE ITO EMITTER I
B , When analyzing LOADINC

I POWER SUPPLY

t
h
circuit OSCILLATING < 0.7V
malfunct ions, A LESS
cons ider
sockets and CHECK VOLTAGE AT
cables as C231 ) C232 U237 P I N 6 CHECK
posslble 0239 AND

+
causes of ASSOCIATED
fa1 lure. COMPONENTS Q244) Q246
VR238 AND
C. The power
supp 1Y
1 SUSPECT
ASSOCIATED
lsolat ion
CAPACITORS CHECK U237 PIN 6 PLUS EXCESSIVE
procedure IS COMPONENTS LOADING.
descr I bed 32,5V 2 TP247?
SEE POWER
adJacent to
the Power 1 YES VOLTAGE SUPPLY
ISOLATION
Oistribut ion CHECK FOR
SHORTS ON PROCEDURE
diagram in TO CHECK

U
this manual. +40V UNREG SUSPECT
FOR
OUTPUTS
I BAD,'U237.
REPLACE U237 P714 P I N 4 TO CHECK DC EXCESSIVE
TO CHECK PIN 5 FOR OPEN VOLTAGE AT - LOADINC

YES
-
VOLTAGE AT U237
P I N 7 +15V?
t48V REGULATOR CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
1 YES

REPLACE
I CHECK I WART @
SUPPLY OK
I FOR SHORTS I
 2336 Service

I B TRGIGER
SET:
SOURCE I
TO A T ) .
A SEC/DIV TO 1ms , DELAY TIME
B SEC/DIV TO 1 vs )
POSITION
HORIZ! MODE TO
CONTROL
A $TENS,
ONE TURN
B DELAY TIME AND
ATIM~ POSITION
CONTRqLS FULLY
CCW
CHECK UPRANGE
CIRCUIT YES
U22 ) U23 ) U25 CHECK

f
U32 ) U55E ) U38 INTERCONNECTIONS
REMOVE
AND ASSOCIATED AND PLUGS
COMPONENTS. FOR CONTINUITY.

n
VERIFY CORRECT CHECK R1 ) R2
IPERATION OF U38 11 9-1 3
(SEE TABLE 3-1 3

I
SUSPECT
TROUBLESHOOT BAD U10.
PRESCALING REPLACE
SEE DELTA TIME VOLTAGE CIRCUIT. TO CHECK
ATIME VOLTAGE
BETWEEN TP216 CHECK U216 ) R210
READOUT DISPLAY DIFFERENCE DIFFERENCE
GENERAL NOTES TROUBLESHOOTING R214) R215) R216
VISIBLE? U197 1 U198
CHART /
A . Always set
POWER switch
6 9-1 0 1 YES
to OFF before
swapping )
removing, or CHECK

1
ROTATE ATIME DEFECTIVE
replacing R5 ) R7 ) R8A MEASURE DC CHECK OK?
components , POSITION CONTROL CW R5 ) R7 ) R8A COMPONENTS
VOLTAGE BETWEEN R8B ) VR6 ) U2 VOLTAGE BETWEEN R8B ) VR6) U2
and before FOR AN 8-DIVISION U10 PIN 31 AND U9) C4 TP216 AND TP210
connecting or U9) C4
SEPARATION OF PIN 30 6 9-1 0
disconnec t ing INTENSIFIED ZONES
leads or
cables.
B. When a n a l ~ z i n g t OVERRANGED
OTHER
THAN 1 V

0
circuit OSCILLATOR
malfunctions, COMPONENTS
READOUT R11 ) c11,
cons ider LCD READOUT
sockets and U10 PIN 31 AND CHECK
= 800'i 1 51
cables as INTEGRATOR

1
possible COMPONENTS
causes of C15) C16) R15
fa1 l u r e . R 1 6

4
I
CHECK U25 ) U37

CORRECT?
OUTPUT DATA OF
PROM U38. 1 ADDRESS CORRECT
FOR ALL A SEC/DIV
U39 ) US0 ) AND
ASSOCIATED

I SEE TABLE 3-1 FOR

LOGIC LISTING I COMPONENTS

I I
CHECK U25,
CHECK U55. SUSPECT BAD U38.
CHECK SWITCHING DIODES REPLACE TO CHECK
AND DIODES DECODER DELTA TIME LOGIC TROUBLESHOOTING
MATRIX COMPONENTS.
CHECK A SEC/DIV POSITION
SIGNALS AT 5876
CHART @
41 18-88
 2336 Service

4 VERIFY
TROUBLESHOOTINC
CHART
CHECK U37
PIN 20 FOR
2 4v P-P
CHECK U197

TROUBLESHOOTING
VOLTAGE
AT P751 P I N 4
CHECK
INTERCONNECTING
CABLE AND PLUGS
FOR CONTINUITY.
1
CHECK OSCILLATOR
COMPONENTS R11 ) C11.
CHECK INTEGRATOR

ICHECK R5 ) R7

c
CHART 2 +2v1 CHECK U2 COMPONENTS C15 ) C l 6 R8A 1 R8B ) VR6
BEFORE STARTING SQUARE WAVE R15) R 1 6 ) UQA
SIGNAL 11 9-1 3 U2 I UQ C t l -
AT THIS POINT

MEASURE DC
PINS 35 ) 3 6 ) b 37 I S 4V P-P VOLTAGE AT
FOR A kV P-P SQUARE WAVE) P751 P I N 4
SHIFTED 180' FROM SIGNAL

DISCONNECT
INTERCONNECTING
GENERAL NOTES CABLE AT P751
MEASURE DC
MEASURE DC VOLTAGE AT
A. Always set SHIFTED SQUARE- VOLTAGE AT 6 g-10 U10 PIN 3 6
POWER swi tch
to OFF before PRESENT?
swappmg )

removing, or
replacing
components ,
and before
connect lng or MEASURE DC NO
VOLTAGE AT REMOVE MEASURE DC VOLTAGE
d i sconnec t 1 ng U10 b AT U2 P I N 6 AND
leads or U2 P I N 3 U2 P I N 3
cables. FULLY CCW

B , When analyzing
circuit
malfunct ions
cons i der MEASURE DC CHECK
sockets and VOLTAGE AT VOLTAGE U22, U23
cables as
posslble
causes of
I SI/SPECT BAD u 3 7
REPLACE TO CHECK
I U9B PIN 3
AND PIN 5
I PIN 3
- 1 ~7
VOLTAGE AT
U10 PIN 37 < +0,6V?
U 4 0 ) US2
FOR LOADING
OF U10
fa1 lure.

I SUSPECT BAD U 1 0
REPLACE TO CHECK
I
TROUBLESHOOT BACKWARDS VERIFY :
THROUCH U32B ) U55C ) U55D ) XY MODE NOT
AND THE DIODE DECODING SELECTED.
MATRIX TO DETERMINE CAUSE TIME/OIV VAR
OF THE BLANKING CONDITION, I N DETENT.
CHECK B SOURCE SWITCH A TIME
THROUCH CR51 AND CR52 B TRIGGER DELTA TIME LOGIC TROUBLESHOOTING
SOURCE SELECTED
 Section 10-2336 Service

REPLACEABLE
MECHANICAL PARTS

PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION INDENTATION SYSTEM

This mechanical parts list is indented to indicate item
Replacement parts are available from or through your local
relationships. Following is an example of the indentation system
Tektronix, Inc. Field Office or representative.
used in the description column.

Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to

Name & Description
accommodate improved components as they become available,
and to give you the benefit of the latest circuit improvements Assembly andlor Component
developed in our engineering department. It is therefore Attaching parts for Assembly andlor Component
important, when ordering parts, to include the following - - - * - - -
information in your order: Part number, instrument type or Detail Part o f Assembly andlor Component
number, serial number, and modification number if applicable. Attaching parts for Detail Part
--- *---
If a part you have ordered has been replaced with a new or Parts of Detail Part
improved part, your local Tektronix, Inc. Field Office o r Attaching parts for Parts o f Detail Part
representative will contact you concerning any change in part - - - * - - -
number.

Change information, if any, is located at the rear of this Attaching Parts always appear in the same indentation as
manual. the item it mounts, while the detail parts are indented to the right.
Indented items are part of, and included with, the next higher
SPECIAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS indentation. The separation symbol - - - * - - - indicates the end of
attaching parts.
XOOO Part first added at this serial number

OOX Part removed after this serial number Attaching parts must be purchased separately, unless otherwise
specified.

FIGURE AND INDEX NUMBERS

ITEM NAME
Items in this section are referenced by figure and index
numbers to the illustrations. In the Parts List, an ltem Name is separated from the
description by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an ltem
Name may sometimes appear as incomplete. For further Item
Name identification, the 9.S. Federal Cataloging Handbook H6-1
can be utilized where possible.

ABBREVIATIONS
INCH ELCTRN ELECTRON IN INCH SE ' SINGLE END
# NUMBER SIZE ELEC ELECTRICAL INCAND INCANDESCENT SECT SECTION
ACTR ACTUATOR ELCTLT ELECTROLYTIC INSUL INSULATOR SEMICOND SEMICONDUCTOR
ADPTR ADAPTER ELEM ELEMENT INTL INTERNAL SHLD SHIELD
ALIGN ALIGNMENT EPL ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST LPHLDR LAMPHOLDER SHLDR SHOULDERED
AL ALUMINUM EQPT EQUIPMENT MACH MACHINE SKT SOCKET
ASSEM ASSEMBLED EXT EXTERNAL MECH MECHANICAL SL SLIDE
ASSY ASSEMBLY FIL FlLLlSTER HEAD MTG MOUNTING SLFLKG SELF-LOCKING
ATT EN ATTENUATOR FLEX FLEXIBLE NIP NIPPLE SLVG SLEEVING
AWG AMERICAN WlRE GAGE FLH FLAT HEAD NON WlRE NOT WlRE WOUND SPR SPRING
BD BOARD FLTR FILTER OBD ORDER BY DESCRIPTION SQ SQUARE
BRKT BRACKET FR FRAME or FRONT 0D OUTSIDE DIAMETER SST STAINLESS STEEL
BRS BRASS FSTNR FASTENER OVH OVAL HEAD STL STEEL
BRZ BRONZE FT FOOT PH BRZ PHOSPHOR BRONZE SW SWITCH
BSHG BUSHING FXD FIXED PL PLAIN or PLATE T TUBE
CAB CABINET GSKT GASKET PLSTC PLASTIC TERM TERMINAL
CAP CAPACITOR HDL HANDLE PN PART NUMBER THD THREAD
CER CERAMIC HEX HEXAGON PNH PAN HEAD THK THICK
CHAS CHASSIS HEX H D HEXAGONAL HEAD PWR POWER TNSN TENSION
CKT CIRCUIT HEX SOC HEXAGONAL SOCKET RCPT RECEPTACLE TPG TAPPING
COMP COMPOSITION HLCPS HELICAL COMPRESSION RES RESISTOR TRH TRUSS HEAD
CONN CONNECTOR HLEXT HELICAL EXTENSION RGD . RIGID v VOLTAGE
COV COVER HV HIGH VOLTAGE RLF RELIEF VAR VARIABLE
CPLG COUPLING IC INTEGRATED CIRCUIT RTNR RETAINER W/ WITH
CRT CATHODE RAY TUBE ID INSIDE DIAMETER SCH SOCKET HEAD WSHR WASHER
DEG DEGREE IDENT IDENTIFICATION SCOPE OSCILLOSCOPE XFMR TRANSFORMER
DWR DRAWER IMPLR IMPELLER SCR SCREW XSTR TRANSISTOR
Replaceable Mechanical Parts-2336 Service

CROSS INDEX-MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER

Mfr. Code Manufacturer Address City, State, Zip

S3629 PANEL COMPONENTS CORP. 2 0 1 5 SECOND S T . BERKELEY, CA 9 4 1 7 0

OOOAQ CONNOR S P R I N G & MFG. COMPANY 1 4 2 6 S E 6TH PORTLAND, OR 9 7 2 1 4
OOOBK STAUFFER SUPPLY 1 0 5 S E TAYLOR PORTLAND, OR 9 7 2 1 4
OOODW CURRAN C O I L S P R I N G , I N C . 635 NW 1 6 T H AVENUE PORTLAND, OR 9 7 2 1 0
OOOEO ZEPHER ELECTRONIC SALES CORP. 6 4 7 INDUSTRY DRIVE SEATTLE, WA 98188
OOOIE UNITED SCREW PRODUCTS I N C . P . O . BOX 1 7 7 LAKE OSWEGO, ORE 9 7 0 3 4
00779 AMP, I N C . P 0 BOX 3608 HARRISBURG, PA 1 7 1 0 5
05006 TWENTIETH CENTURY P L A S T I C S , I N C . 415 E WASHINGTON BLVD. LOS ANGELES, CA 9 0 0 1 5
09922 BURNDY CORPORATION RICHARDS AVENUE NORWALK, CT 0 6 8 5 2
11897 P L A S T I G L I D E MFG. CORPORATION P 0 BOX 8 6 7 , 1 7 5 7 STANFORD S T . SANTA MONICA, CA 9 0 4 0 6
12327 FREEWAY CORPORATION 9 3 0 1 ALLEN DRIVE CLEVELAND, OH 4 4 1 2 5
13511 AMPHENOL CARDRE D I V . , BUNKER RAM0 CORP LOS GATOS, CA 9 5 0 3 0
16428 BELDEN CORP. P . 0. BOX 1331 RICHMOND, I N 4 7 3 7 4
17217 GORE, W. L . AND A S S O C I A T E S , I N C . 5 5 5 PAPER M I L L RD. NEWARK, DE 1 9 7 1 1
18565 CHOMERICS I N C . 7 7 DRAGON COURT WOBURN, MA 01801
22526 BERG ELECTRONICS, I N C . YOUK EXPRESSWAY NEW CUMBERLAND, P A 1 7 0 7 0
23880 STANFORD A P P L I E D ENGINEERING, I N C . 340 MARTIN AVE. SANTA CLARA, CA 9 5 0 5 0
24931 S P E C I A L I T Y CONNECTOR C O . , I N C . 2 6 2 0 ENDRESS PLACE GREENWOOD, I N 4 6 1 4 2
27264 MOLEX PRODUCTS CO. 5 2 2 4 KATRINE AVE. DOWNERS GROVE, I L 6 0 5 1 5
33096 COLORADO CRYSTAL CORPORATION 2 3 0 3 W 8 T H STREET LOVELAND, CO 8 0 5 3 7
59730 THOMAS AND BETTS COMPANY 36 BUTLER S T . ELIZABETH, NJ 0 7 2 0 7
70276 ALLEN MFG. CO. P . 0. DRAWER 5 7 0 HARTFORD, CT 0 6 1 0 1
70485 ATLANTIC I N D I A RUBBER WORKS, I N C . 5 7 1 W. POLK S T . CHICAGO, I L 6 0 6 0 7
70903 BELDEN CORP. 2 0 0 0 S BATAVIA AVENUE GENEVA, I L 60134
7 1159 B R I S T O L SOCKET SCREW, D I V . O F
AMERICAN CHAIN AND CABLE C O . , I N C . P 0 BOX 2 2 4 4 , 4 0 B R I S T O L S T . WATERBURY, CT 0 6 7 2 0
71279 CAMBRIDGE THERMIONIC CORP. 4 4 . 5 CONCORD AVE . CAMBRIDGE, MA 0 2 1 3 8
71400 BUSSMAN MFG., D I V I S I O N O F MCGRAW-
EDISON CO. 2 5 3 6 W. UNIVERSITY S T . S T . L O U I S , MO 6 3 1 0 7
71785 TRW, CINCH CONNECTORS 1 5 0 1 MORSE AVENUE ELK GROVE VILLAGE, I L 6 0 0 0 7
73743 F I S C H E R S P E C I A L MFG. CO. 446 MORGAN S T . C I N C I N N A T I , OH 4 5 2 0 6
73803 TEXAS INSTRUMENTS, I N C . , METALLURGICAL
MATERIALS D I V . 34 FOREST STREET ATTLEBORO, MA 0 2 7 0 3
7 4 4 45 HOLO-KROME CO. 31 BROOK S T . WEST HARTFORD, CT 06110
75037 MINNESOTA MINING & MFG CO. ELECTRO
PRODUCTS D I V . 3M CENTER S T . PAUL, MN 55101
75915 LITTELFUSE, INC. 800 E . NORTHWEST HWY DES P L A I N E S , I L 60016
77250 PHEOLL MANUFACTURING C O . , D I V I S I O N
O F A L L I E D PRODUCTS CORP. 5 7 0 0 W. ROOSEVELT RD. CHICAGO, I L 60650
7 81 8 9 I L L I N O I S TOOL WORKS, I N C .
SHAKEPROOF D I V I S I O N S T . CHARLES ROAD ELGIN, I L 6 0 1 2 0
80009 TEKTRONIX, I N C . P 0 BOX 5 0 0 BEAVERTON, OR 9 7 0 7 7
80033 PRESTOLE EVERLOCK, I N C . P . 0. BOX 2 7 8 , 1 3 4 5 MIAMI S T . TOLEDO, OH 43605
80126 P A C I F I C ELECTRICORD CO. 7 4 7 W. REDONDO BEACH,P 0 BOX 1 0 GARDENA, CA 9 0 2 4 7
83385 CENTRAL SCREW CO. 2 5 3 0 CRESCENT DR. BROADVIEW, I L 6 0 1 5 3
84830 L E E S P R I N G COMPANY, I N C . 30 MAIN STREET BROOKLYN, NY 1 1 2 0 1
86221 GROMAN CORP. 5 4 5 3 0 COUNTRY RD. NO 1 7 ELKHART, I N 46514
86928 SEASTROM MFG. COMPANY, I N C . . 7 0 1 SONORA AVENUE GLENDALE, CA 9 1 2 0 1
88245 L I T T O N SYSTEMS, I N C . , USECO D I V . 1 3 5 3 6 SATICOY S T . VAN NUYS, CA 9 1 4 0 9
93907 TEXTRON I N C . CAMCAR D I V 600 1 8 T H AVE ROCKFORD, I L 6 1 1 0 1

REV FEB 1982

 VI
Part No. Eff t Number

DISPLAY,LIQUID CRYSTAL:(san 1-31 n b s U I

SOCKET,PLUG-IN:40 DIP,LOW PROFILE
TERM,TEST POINT:BRASS
SOCKET,PIN CONN:W/O DIMPLE
TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:BNC,FEMALE
SPACER,POST:0.675 L Wl0.375 INT THD
CONNECTOR,RCPT,:4 CONTACT
RESISTOR,VARIABLE:(SEE R94 REPL)
SETSCREW:4-40 X 0.125 INCH,HEX SOC STL OBD
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX:0.25-32 X 0.312 INCH,BRS
WASHER,LOCK:0.261 ID,INTL,0.018 THK,BRS
---*---
CKT BOARD ASSY:B TRIGGER SW(SEE A31 REPL)
. TERM. SET,PIN:36/0.025 SQ PINYON 0.1 CTRS 65500136
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:16,28 AWG,6.275 L,RIBBON 175-3680-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL CD PL OBD
---*---
. STRAP,RETAINING:BOOT,FRONT COVER 346-0174-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
. SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.125 INCH,PNH STL OBD
---*---
. CLIP,GROUNDING:0.125 ID X 0.0126 344-0333-00
. CONN,PLUG,ELEC:2 X 8,01 SPACING 3452-7000
. CABLE,SP,ELEC:16,28 AWG,STRD GFS-909-050N16
. CONTACT,ELEC:GROUNDING STRAP 131-2569-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
. NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:6-32 X 0.25 INCH,BRS 3038-0228-402
. WASHER,FLAT:0.15 ID X 0.032 THK,STL CD PL OBD
---*---
. SHIELD,ELEC:FLAT CABLE 337-2879-00
. CONN,PLUG,ELEC:2 X 8,01 SPACING 3452-7000
CONTACT,ELEC:GROUNDING 131-2770-00
PANEL,FRONT:LID 333-2709-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.188 INCH,PNH STL OBD
---*---
LATCH,CABINET:TOP RIGHT 105-0870-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:2-56 X 0.188,FLH 82 DEG,STL OBD
---*---
LATCH,CABINET:TOP LEFT 105-0871-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:2-56 X 0.188,FLH 82 DEG,STL OBD
---*---
ACTUATOR,LATCH:CABINET TOP 214-3163-00
TRIM,COVER:HINGE,ARS 101-0057-00
PINYHINGE:9.45LX 0.0937 DIA,SST 214-3071-00
TRIM,FRONT PNL:HINGE,ABS 101-0056-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.312 INCH,PNH STL OBD
---*---

REV FEB 1982

Replaceable Mechanical Parts-2336 Service

Fig. &
Index Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr
No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qtv 1 2345 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
HANDLE,CARRYING:W/GRIP AND INDEX 367-0296-01
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,TPG,TF:8-16 X 0.562 L 225-38131-012
SPRING,HLCPS:0.342-0.826 OD X 0.531 L 214-0536-01
---*---
MARKER,IDENT: 334-4101-00
COVER,LATCH:FOOT PAD 200-2654-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.5 PNH,STL CD PL OBD
---*---
PLATE,REINF:LATCH 386-4676-00
LATCH,C@VER:FOOT 105-0902-00
SPRING,HLCPS:0.3 OD X 0.265 L LC-026D-4SS
SPRING,GROUND: 214-3251-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.188,100 DEG,ELH STL OBD
---*---
HOLDER,LATCH : 352-0630-00
SCREW,MACHINE:8-32 X 0.500 INCH,PNH STL OBD
FOOT,SCOPE:REAR 348-0681-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.438 lNCH,PNH STL OBD
---*---
MARKER,IDENT:MKD CAUTIONYEUSE DATA 334-4151-00
MARKER,IDENT:MKD CAUTION,LINE VOLTAGE SEL 334-4152-00
CLAMP,CABLE:POWER,SST 343-0896-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375,PNHySTL,CDPL OBD
SPACER,SLEEVE:0.18 ID X 0.219 L 166-0107-00
---*---
CABINET,REAR: 348-0675-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312 INCH,PNH STL OBD
---*---
CABINET,SCOPE: 437-0274-01
CABINET,SCOPE: 437-0274-05

REV FEB 1982

 Replaceable Mechanical Parts-2336 Service

Fig. &
Index Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr
No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qty 1 2 3 4 5 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
PUSH BUTTON :GRAY 80009 366-1059-00
KNOB:GRAY,0.5 OD X0.531 H,PLSTC 80009 366-1879-01
. SETSCREW:6-32 X 0.125 INCH,HEX.SOC STL 70276 OBD
KNOB:GY,VAR,0.127 ID X 0.5 OD X 0.54 H 80009 366-1866-01
KNOB:RED,VAR,O.l27ID X 0.392 OD 80009 366-1031-02
. SETSCREW:5-40 X 0.093 ITL BK OXD,HEX SKT 71159 OBD
KNOB :W/ SKIRT 80009 366-1831-01
KNOB:RED,VAR,O.O83ID X 0.45 OD X0.389 H 80009 366-1857-00
. SETSCREW:4-40 X 0.125 INCH,HEX SOC STL 74445 OBD
KNOB:GRAY,TIME DIVISION 80009 366-1881-00
COLLET,SW SHAFT:0.125 ID X 0.34 L 000IE OBD
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:lO-32 X 0.25 INCH,PL BRS 73743 OBD
WASHER,SPR TNSN:0.195 ID X 0.006 THK,STL 80009 210-1035-00
---*---
INSERT,KNOB:0.38 ID X 0.645 L 80009 377-0524-01
COLLET,SW SHAFT:0.25 X 0.7 L OOOIE OBD
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:0.375-32 X 0.50 INCH,STL 73743
---*---
BUSHING,SHAFT:0.25 ID 80009 358-0647-00
KNOB:0.248 ID X 0.392 OD 80009 366-1877-00
. SETSCREW:6-32 X 0.125 INCH,HEX.SOC STL 70276 OBD
KNOB:GRAY,TIME/DELTA TIME 0.252 ID X 0.4 OD 80009 366-1880-00
. SETSCREW:6-32 X 0.125 INCH,HEX.SOC STL 70276 OBD
PANEL,FRONT : 80009 333-2744-00
SHLD,IMPLOSION: 80009 337-2760-00
RETAINER,SHIELD:IMPLOSION 80009 343-0892-00
TRIM,FRONT PNL:SPACER,ABS,BLACK 80009 101-0059-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25,100 DEG,FLH STL 83385 OBD
---*---
SHLD GSKT,ELEK:SOLID TYPE,26.0 L 80009
REPL)
RESISTOR,VAR:(SEE ~ 9 4 2
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:0.25-32 X 0.312 INCH 80009
WASHER,LOCK:0.261 ID,INTL,0.018 THK,BRS 78189
BSHG,MACH.THD:0.25-32 X 0.159 ID X 0.24 80009
---*---
RESISTOR,VAR:(SEE R909 REPL)
SPACER,POST:1.275 L Wl0.25-32 EXT THD 80009
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:0.25-40 X 0.312 INCH,BBS 73743
---*---
RESISTOR,VAR:(SEE R945 REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:0.25-32 X 0.312 INCH 80009
WASHER,LOCK:0.261 ID,INTL,0.018 THK,BRS 78189
BSHG,MACH.THD:0.25-32 X 0.159 ID X 0.24 80009
---*---
COVER,VAR RES: 80009
RESISTOR,VAR:(SEE ~ 9 4 0REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:0.25-40 X 0.312 INCH,BBS 73743
---*---
SET SCREW:0.25-28 X 0.625 L STL CD PL 80009
FRAME,PUSH BTN:PLASTIC 80009
RESISTOR,VAR:(SEE R903,907 REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:0.25-40 X 0.312 INCH,BBS 73743 2x20224-402
TERMINAL,LUG:0.25 INCH DIA,SE,60 DEG BEND 86928 OBD
---*---
RESISTOR,VAR:(SEE R935 A & B REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:0.25-40 X 0.312 INCH,BBS 73743
---*---

REV FEB 1982

Replaceable Mechanical Parts-2336 Service

Fig. &
Index Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mfr
No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qtv 1 2 3 4 5 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:BNC,FEMALE 24931 28JR 306-1
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:PROBE TIP 24931 OBD
RETAINER,SHIELD: 80009 343-0961-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25,100 DEG,FLH STL 83385 OBD
---*---
RESISTOR,VAR:(SEE ~ 9 1 3REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,hEX.:0.25-40 X 0.312 INCH,BBS
---*---
RESISTOR,VAR:(SEE R918 A & B REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:0.375-32 X 0.438 INCH BRS 73743 OBD
---*---
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:BNC,FEMALE 13511
TERMINAL,LUG:0.391 ID,LOCKING,BRS CD PL 80009
SUBPANEL,FRONT: 80009
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL 83385 OBD
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25,100 DEG,FLH STL 83385 OBD
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL CD PL 83385 OBD
---*---
PUSH BUTTON:BLACK,YELLOW INDICATOR OOOEO
EXTENSION SHAFT:1.238 L X 0.13 OD 80009
SWITCH,PUSH:(SEE ~ 9 0 3REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:2-56 X 0.188 INCH,PNH STL 83385 OBD
---*---
SHIELD,ELEC:POWER SWITCH,TOP
SHIELD,ELEC:POWER SWITCH,BOTTOM
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL 83385 OBD
---*---
CLIP,ELECTRICAL:COMPONENT MOUNTING
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL 83385 OBD
---*---
CHASSIS,SCOPE:LEFT
DELAY LINE,ELEC:(SEE DL900 REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.5 PNH,STL CD PL 78189 OBD
---*---
----- ----- DELAY LINE ASSY INCLUDES:
200-2507-00 . COVER,HOLDER:DELAY LINE 200-2507-00
346-0175-00 . STRAP,TIE DOWN:7.0 L,PLASTIC TYB-2315M
175-1993-01 . CABLE,SP,ELEC:2,27 AWG,SHIELDED 175-1993-01
131-2571-00 . CONTACT,ELEC:MALE,BRASS GOLD PLATE 403-3099-126-410
380-0634-00 . HOUSING,CONN:BOTTOM,DELAY LINE 380-0634-00
380-0628-00 . HOUSING,CONN:TOP,DELAY LINE 380-0628-00
352-0584-00 . HLDR,DELAY L1NE:ABS 352-0584-00
337-2896-00 SHIELD,CRT: 337-2896-00
348-0705-00 SHLD GSKT,ELEK:MESH,CRT SHIELD 348-0705-00
210-0202-00 BOlOlOO B010419 TERMINAL,LUG:0.146 ID,LOCKING,BRZ TINNED 2104-06-00-2520N
210-0201-00 B010420 TERMINAL,LUG:0.12 ID,LOCKING,BRZ TIN PL OBD
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.312 INCH,PNH BRS 83385 OBD
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25,STL CD PL 83385 OBD
---*---
SHIELD,CRT :
SHAFT,DRIVE:VAR RES.,5.125 L X 0.123 OD
ATTENUATOR,VAR:(SEE ~ 1 REPL)
~ ~ 2
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL 83385 OBD
---*---
CKT BOARD ASSY:TIMING SWITCH 80009 672-0919-00

REV FEB 1982

 Replaceable Mechanical Parts-2336 Service

Fig. &
Index Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr
No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qty 1 2 3 4 5 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
SPACER,CKT BD:BRASS 80009 361-1042-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL 83385 OBD
---*---
FAN,TUBEAXIAL:(SEE B924 REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 1.125 INCH,PNH STL OBD
WASHER,LOCK:#4 INTLY0.015THK,STLCD PL OBD
---*---
SHROUDYEAN: 378-0164-00
SPACERYEAN: 361-1123-00
CHASSIS,SCOPE:RIGHT 441-1530-01
TRANSFORMER:(SEE ~ 9 0 0REPL)
COVER,LINE SEL:PLASTIC,BLACK 200-2645-00
HOLDER,XFMR : 352-0629-00
BRACKET,XFMR: 407-2542-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
S'CREW,MACHINE:~-40X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL OBD
---*---
TERMINAL,LUG:0.146 ID,LOCKING,BRZ TINNED 2104-06-00-2520N
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.312 INCH,STL OBD
---*---
SPACER,CKT BD:BRASS 361-1042-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL OBD
---*---
PLASTIC CHANNEL:12.75 X 0.175X 0.155,NYL 122-37-2500
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:BNC,FEMALE 31-279
SPACER,POST:0.675 L Wl0.375 INT THD 129-0855-00
. SETSCREW:4-40 X 0.125 INCH,HEX SOC STL OBD
BODYYFUSEHOLDER:3AG6 5 X 20MM FUSES 031.1653cMDLFEU)
CAP.,FUSEHOLDER:3AG FUSES FEK 031 1666
CAP,FUSEHOLDER:5 X 20MM FUSES FEK 031.1663
(FOR OPTION AlYA2,A3 ONLY)
SHIELD,ELEC :LINE FILTER 337-2901-00
FILTER,RFI:(SEE F L ~ O OREPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.50 INCH,PNH STL 83385 OBD
SPACER,SLEEVE:0.18 ID X 0.219 L 80009 166-0107-00
---*---
SWITCH,SLIDE :( SEE S9O 1 REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL 83385 OBD
---*---
STUD,BDG POST:0.25-28 X 1.11,BRASS 80009 355-0227-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:0.25-28 X 0.375 INCH,BRASS 73743 3089-402
WASHER,LOCK:0.261 ID,INTL,0.018 THK,BRS 78189 1214-05-00-0541C
---*---
NUT,PLAIN,KNURL:0.25-28 X 0.375" OD,BRASS 80009 200-0103-00
CHASSIS,SCOPE:REAR 80009 441-1529-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL 83385 OBD
---*---

REV FEB 1982

Replaceable Mechanical Parts-2336 Service

Fig. &
Index Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr
No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qty 1 2 3 4 5 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
CKT BOARD ASSY:SWEEP/HORIZ AMP(SEE A24 REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL OBD
---*---
----- ----- CKT BOARD ASSY INCLUDES:
131-1003-00 . CONN,RCPT,ELEC:CKT BD MT,3 PRONG
136-0252-07 . SOCKET,PIN CONN:W/O DIMPLE
131-0608-00 . TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD
214-0579-02 . TERM,TEST PO1NT:BRASS
136-0499-10 . CONNECTOR,RCPT,:lO CONTACT
136-0499-06 . CONN,RCPT,ELEC:CIRCUIT BD,6 CONTACTS
136-0260-02 BOlOlOO B010512 . SKT,PL-IN ELEK:MICROCIRCUIT,~~ DIP,LOW CLE
136-0260-02 B010513 . SKT,PL-IN ELEK:MICROCIRCUIT,~~DIP,LOW CLE
131-0787-00 . CONTACT,ELEC:0.64 INCH LONG
----- ----- CKT BOARD ASSY:A & B TRIGGER(SEE A23 REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL OBD
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25,100 DEG,FLH STL OBD
---*---
----- ----- CKT BOARD ASSY INCLUDES:
131-0787-00 CONTACT,ELEC:0.64 INCH LONG 22526
136-0514-00 BOlOlOO B010512X SKT,PL-IN ELEC:MICROCIRCUIT,8 DIP 73803
136-0499-14 CONNECTOR,RCPT,:14 CONTACT 00779
136-0499-10 CONNECTOR,RCPT,:lO CONTACT 00779
136-0252-07 SOCKET,PIN CONN:W/O DIMPLE 22526
131-1003-00 CONN,RCPT,ELEC:CKT BD MT,3 PRONG 80009
214-0579-02 TERM,TEST PO1NT:BRASS 80009
131-0608-00 TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 22526
136-0634-00 SOCKET,PLUG-IN:20 LEAD DIP,CKT BD MTG 73803
----- ----- SW LEVER ASSY:A SOURCE(SEE S67 REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.625 INCH,PNH,STL 78189 OBD
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,STL OOOBK OBD
---*---
SWITCH ASSY INCLUDES:
.
GUIDE ,SWITCH:W/SPRING AND ROLLER 80009
. SPRING,FLAT:RED COLORED 80009
. ROLLER,DETENT:0.125 DIA X 0.125,SST 80009
. LEVER,SWITCH:6 POSN,14 DEG,A SOURCE 80009
SW LEVER ASSY:A COUPLING(SEE S22 REPL)
. GUIDE ,SWITCH:W/SPRING AND ROLLER 80009
. ROLLER,DETENT:0.125 DIA X 0.125,SST 80009
. SPRING,FLAT:RED COLORED 80009
. LEVER,SWITCH:4 POSN,14 DEG,A COUPLING 80009
CKT BOARD ASSY:VERT OUT/HV PWR(SEE A15 REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL OBD
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.5 PNH,STL CD PL OBD
---*---
CKT BOARD ASSY INCLUDES:
. CLAMP,LOOP:0.062 INCH DIA
. TERMINAL,PIN:0.46 L X 0.025 SQ
. TERM. SET,PIN:36/0.025 SQ PIN,ON 0.1 CTRS
. TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD
. TERMINAL,PIN:0.46 L X 0.025 SQ
. SOCKET,PIN TERM:U/W 0.04 DIA PIN
.
CLIP,ELECTRICAL:FOR 3AG FUSE,BRS
.
CLIP,ELECTRICAL:FUSE,5 X 20MM
. TERMINAL,PIN:0.46 L X 0.025 SQ
. TERMINAL BOARD:3 NOTCH,CERAMIC,CLIP MTD
. SPACER,SLEEVE:0.250 INCH DIA,PLASTIC
. TERM,TEST POINT:BRASS
. SHIELD,ELEC:HIGH VOLTAGE

REV FEB 1982

 Replaceable Mechanical Parts-2336 Sewice

Fig. &
Index Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr
No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qty 1 2 3 4 5 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
SPACER,POST:0.90 L X 0.25HEX 129-0425-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL OBD
---*---
GROMMET,PLASTIC:U-SHAPED 348-0171-00
SHIELD,ELEC:HIGH VOLTAGE 337-2759-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.312,FLH,100 DEG OBD
---*---
WIRE,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG,BARE,1.5 L 176-0122-02
WIRE SET,ELEC: 198-4288-00
. HLDR,TERM CONN:6 WIRE BLACK 352-0202-00
. SKT,PL-IN ELEK:ELECTRON TUBE,14 CONT 136-0202-04
COVER ,CRT SKT:1.78 DIA X 0.2 D,WHITE 80009 200-0616-00
COVER ,CRT SKT:PLASTIC 80009 200-2632-00
CLAMP ,SKT SHLD:PLASTIC 80009 343-0970-00
SHIELD,DLY LINE:2.1 X 1.85 X 0.29,PLASTIC 80009 337-2905-00
CKT BOARD ASSY:VERTICAL PREAMP 80009 672-0916-00
(119-1193-00 IS A SUB-PART OF THIS ASSEMLBY
SEE FIGURE 4)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SPACER,POST:0.538 L,W/4-40 TAP 1 END 80009 129-0413-01
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL 83385 OBD
---*---
CKT BOARD ASSY INCLUDES:
, CKT BD ASSY:VERT PREAMPILV PWR(SEE A10 REPL)
TERM. SET,~1~:36/0.025SQ PINYON 0.1 CTRS
CLIP,SPR,TNSN:TRANSISTOR RETAINING
HEAT SINK,XSTR:
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL OBD
SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.5 PNH,STL CD PL OBD
NUT,PLAIN,HEX.:4-40 X 0.188 INCH,BRS 12161-50
WASHER,LOCK:0.12 ID,DISHED,0.025 THK OBD
---*---
INSULATOR,PLATE:HEAT SINK OBD
SWITCH,PUSH:(SEE ~ 2 1 0REPL)
. SPACER,SWITCH:0.4 THK
SWITCH,PUSH:(SEE ~ 2 1 8REPL)
. SPACER,SWITCH:0.4 THK
SWITCH,PUSH:(SEE S134 REPL)
. SPACER,SWITCH:0.4 THK
SWITCH,PUSH:(SEE ~ 1 9 4REPL)
. SPACER,SWITCH:0.4 THK
SWITCH,PUSH:(SEE ~ 1 9 0 ~ ~ 2REPL)
19
SHIELD,ELEC:CKT BOARD,FRONT
SHIELD,ELEC:CKT BOARD,BACK
TERMINAL,STUD:0.569 L BIFURCATED,GOLD PL
INSULATOR,BSHG:0.05 ID X 0.125" OD,W/FLGE
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:CKT BD MT,3 PRONG
TERM,TEST PO1NT:BRASS
SOCKET,PIN CONN:W/O DIMPLE
CLIP,ELECTRICAL:FUSE,5 X 20MM
TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD
TERM,SET,PIN:8 PIN,INSULATED
SWITCH~PUSH:(SEE ~ 2 1 1A & B REPL)
SPACER,SWITCH:O.l,POLYAMIDE
RETAINER,CAP:0.039 MUSIC WIRE
CONNECTOR,RCPT,:14 CONTACT
CONNECTOR,RCPT,:lO CONTACT
CLIP,ELECTRICAL:FOR 3AG FUSE,BRS
SOCKET,PIN TERM:U/W 0.04 DIA PIN
CKT BOARD ASSY:NEGATIVE REG(SEE All REPL)
. CONTACT,ELEC:0.64 INCH LONG
CKT BOARD ASSY:POSITIVE REG(SEE A12 REPL)

REV FEB 1982

Replaceable Mechanical Parts-2336 Service

Fig. &
Index Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mf r
No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qty 1 2 3 4 5 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
. . . CONTACT,ELEC:0.64 INCH LONG
PUSH,BUTTON:DIRTY GRAY,0.134 SQ X 0.480 H
EXTENSION SHAFT:0.95 INCH LONG
EXTENSION SHAFT:7.402 L X 0.187 SQ
SHIELD,ELEC:CKT BOARD
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25,100 DEG,FLH STL OBD
---*---
-99 210-0202-00 BOlOlOO B010419 TERMINAL,LUG:0.146 ID,LOCKING,BRZ TINNED " 2104-06-00-2520N
210-0201-00 B010420 TERMINAL,LUG:0.12 ID,LOCKING,BRZ TIN PL OBD
(ATTACHING PARTS)
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25 INCH,PNH,STL OBD
---*---
-101 175-3586-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:34,28 AWG,5.5 L
-102 175-3579-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:8,26 AWG,ll.OL,RIBBON
348-0667-00 . GROMMET,PLASTIC:NATURAL,OBLONG
352-0161-00 . HLDR,TERM CONN:3 WIRE,BLACK
352-0163-00 . CONN BODY,PL,EL:5 WIRE BLACK
352-0166-00 . CONN BODY,PL,EL:8 WIRE BLACK
-103 175-3580-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:6,22 AWG,9.0 L,RIBBON
352-0165-00 . CONN BODY,PL,EL:7 WIRE BLACK
-104 175-3581-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:8,26 AWG,4.0 L,RIBBON
352-0167-00 . HLDR,TERM CONN:9 WIRE BLACK
-105 175-3584-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:4,26 AWG,4.0 L,RIBBON
352-0162-00 . HLDR,TERM CONN:4 WIRE BLACK
-106 195-2013-00 LEAD,ELECTRICAL:26 AWG,5.O L
352-0171-00 . HLDR,TERM C0NN:l WIRE BLACK
-107 175-3575-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:3,22 AWG,3.0 L,RIBBON
352-0163-00 . CONN BODY,PL,EL:5 WIRE BLACK
-108 175-3710-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:3,26 AWG,4.5 L,RIBBON
348-0002-00 . GROMMET,RUBBER:
352-0161-00 . HLDR,TERM CONN:3 WIRE,BLACK
-109 175-3713-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:6,26 AWG,3.0 L,RIBBON
352-0164-00 . CONN BODY,PL,EL:6 WIRE BLACK
-110 175-3585-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:4,18 AWGY21.0L
210-0203-00 BOlOlOO B010138 TERMINAL,LUG : SE /I6
210-0307-00 B010139 TERMINAL,LUG:RING,INS,16-14 AWG,#8
-111 176-0045-00 BRAID ,WIREI
!
: 24
175-2640-00 CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM,COAX,8.0 L
175-4150-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:3,26 AWG,3.0 L,RIBBON
175-5180-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:6,26 AWG,8.0 L,RIBBON
198-2915-00 WIRE SET,ELEC:
175-3578-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:3,22 AWG,3.0 L,RIBBON
175-3709-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:2,26 AWG,G.O L,RIBBON
175-3582-00 CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:6,26 AWG,8.0 L,RIBBON

REV FEB 1982

 Replaceable Mechanical Parts-2336 Service

Fig. &
Index Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr
No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qty 1 2 3 4 5 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
----- ----- 2 ATTENUATOR,VAR:(SEE ~ 1 REPL)
9
384-1 570-00 2 . SHAFT,DRIVE:VAR RES.,5.125 L X 0.123 OD 384-1570-00
214-3063-00 2 . LEVER,SWITCH:0.6 DIA AC/GND/DC 214-3063-00
----- ----- 2 . SWITCH,CAM:(SEE A19S1,SZ REPL)
131-2661-00 BOlOlOO B010319X 2 . . CONTACT,ELEC:GROUND 131-2661-00
(ATTACHING PARTS)
211-0198-00 BOlOlOO B010319X 2 .
SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.438 PNH,STL,POZ OBD
210-1002-00 BOlOlOO B010319X 2 . WASHER,FLAT:0.125 ID X 0.25 INCH OD,BRS OBD
---*---
211-0121-00 XB010320 2 . SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.438 INCH,PNH BRS OBD
131-2472-01 2 . . CONTACT,ELEC:GROUND W/NUT BLOCK 131-2472-01
386-4358-01 2 . . PLATE,RETAINER:SIDE 386-4358-01
(ATTACHING PARTS)
211-0207-00 BOlOlOO B010512 2 . . SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.312 DOUBLE SEMS OBD
211-0207-00 B010513 1 . . SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.312 DOUBLE SEMS OBD
211-0121-00 XB010513 1 . . SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.438 INCH,PNH BRS
---*---
OBD

386-4357-01 2 . . PLATE,RETAINER:LOWER 386-4357-01

(ATTACHING PARTS)
211-0121-00 4 . . SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.438 INCH,PNH BRS OBD
---*---
----- ----- 2 . . RESISTOR,NTWK:(SEE ~ 1 9 ~ 2REPL)
0
131-1758-09 2 . . CONT ASSY,ELEC:2 CONTACTS
131-1758-10 2 . . CONT ASSY,ELEC:2 CONTACTS
386-4356-01 2 . . PLATE,RETAINER:UPPER
(ATTACHING PARTS)
211-0121-00 6 . . SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.438 INCH,PNH BRS OBD
---*---
----- ----- 2 . . RESISTOR,NTWK:(SEE ~ 1 9 ~ 3REPL)
0
131-1758-08 2 . . CONT ASSY,ELEC:5 CONTACTS
131-1758-07 2 . . CONT ASSY,ELEC:4 CONTACTS
376-0051-00 2 . CPLG,SHAFT,FLEX:0.127 ID X 0.375 ID DELRIN
407-2504-00 2 . BRACKET,CMPNT:VAR RESISTOR
(ATTACHING PARTS)
211-0101-00 2 . SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25,100 DEG,FLH STL
---*---
OBD
----- ----- 2 . RESISTOR,VAR: (SEE A19R902,R906 REPL)
(ATTACHING PARTS)
210-0583-00 2 . NUT,PLAIN,HEX:0.25-32 X 0.312 INCH,BRS
210-0046-00 2 . WASHER,LOCK:0.261 ID,INTL,0.018 THK,BRS
---*---
175-3850-00 2 . CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:2,26 AWG,3.0 L,RIBBON
352-0169-01 2 . . HLDR TERM CONN:2 WIRE,BROWN 80009 352-0169-01

REV FEB 1982

Replaceable Mechanical Parts-2336 Service

Fig. &
Index Tektronix SeriallModel No. Mfr
No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qtv 1 2345 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number
1 CKT BOARD ASSY:TIMING SWITCH 80009
1 . BEARING,RTRY SW:FRONT,0.375 DIA 80009
(ATTACHING PARTS)
3 . SCR,TPG,THD FOR:2-28 X 0.437 INCH,PNH,STL 93907 OBD
---*---
2 . LATCH,SLIDING: 80009
2 . SPRING,FLAT:0.7 X 0.125,CU BE GRN CLR 80009
1 . SHAFT,ROTARY SW:8.61 L X 0.125 OD 80009
1 . EXTENSION SHAFT:9.375 L X 0.081 OD 80009
1 . SHAFT,ROTARY SW:TIME DIV 80009
1 . HOLDER,CONTACT:PANCAKE SW,2 CONT 80009
1 . CKT BOARD ASSY:A TIMING SW(SEE A17 REPL)
8 . . TERMINAL,PIN:0.365 L X 0.025 PH BRZ GOLD 22526 47357
20 . . CONTACT,ELEC:0.64 INCH LONG 22526 47359
1 . HOLDER,CONTACT:PANCAKE SW,4 CONT 80009 352-0457-26
1 . ROTOR,ELEC SW:PULL/TURN 80009 401-0345-01
1 . STOP RTRY SW: 80009 105-0694-01
1 . RING,RETAINING:EXTERNAL,FOR 0.44 OD OOOAQ OBD
1 . SPRING,HLCPS:0.2 OD X 0.5 L,CLOSED OOODW OBD
1 . BEARING,RTRY SW:INTERMEDIATE 80009 401-0406-00
2 . ROLLER,DETENT:0.125 DIA X 0.125,SST 80009 214-1127-00
2 . SPRING,FLAT:0.7 X 0.125,CU BE GRN CLR 80009 214-1126-01
1 . DETENT,RTRY SW:24 POSITION 80009 214-3062-00
1 . HOLDER,CONTACT:PANCAKE SW,3 CONTACT 80009 352-0457-29
1 . CKT BOARD ASSY:B TIMING SW(SEE A16 REPL)
6 . . CONTACT,ELEC:0.64 INCH LONG 22526
1 . HOLDER,CONTACT:PANCAKE SW,1 CONTACT 80009
1 . BEARING,RTRY SW:REAR,0.315 ID 80009
1 . ADPT,SHAFT,CPLG:0.128 AND 0.082"DIA SHAFT 80009
1 . CPLG,SHAFT,FLEX:FOR 0.081/0.125 INCH SHAFTS 80009
1 . BRACKET,ELEC SW:TIMING 80009
(ATTACHING PARTS)
3 . SCREW,TPG,TF:2-56 X 0.5,PLASTITEyPNH,STL 93907 OBD
---*---

REV FEB 1982

REV FEB 1982 2336 OSCILLOSCOPE
2336 OSCILLOSCOPE REV NOV 1981
REV JUL 1981 2336 OSCILLOSCOPE
2336 OSCILLOSCOPE
2336 OSCILLOSCOPE
Fig. &
Index Tektronix SerialIModel No. Mfr
No. Part No. Eff Dscont Qty 1 2 3 4 5 Name & Description Code Mfr Part Number

STANDARD ACCESSORIES

POUCH,ACCESSORY: 016-0674-01
.POUCH,ACCESSORY: 016-0674-00
.PLATE,REINF: 386-461
OBD 5-00
.SCREW,MACHINE:8-32 X 0.500 INCH,PNH STL
.WASHER,SHLDR:0.156 ID X 0.094D X 0.375 0 5607-82
.PROBE,VOLTAGE:P61O8,lOX,2 METER WIACCESS 010-6108-03
.ACCESSORY PKG: 020-0646-00
.(STANDARD ONLY)
.ACCESSORY PKG:
.(OPT A1 EUROPEAN & OPT 3 AUSTRALIAN ONLY)
.ACCESSORY PKG:
.(OPT A2 UNITED KINGDOM ONLY)
.ACCESSORY PKG:
.(OPT A4 NORTH AMERICAN ONLY)
.(EACH ACCESSORY PKG CONTAINS THE FOLLOWIN
..BAG,PLASTIC:
..POUCH,ACCESSORY:VINYL,W/ZIPPER
..SHLD,IMPLOSION:
..(INSTALLED)
..SHLD,IMPLOSION:3,085 X 3.71 ,NATURAL
..(FUSES ARE DISTRIBUTED IN ACCESSORY PAC
..AS FOLLOWS)
..FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,l A,250V,FAST-BLOW AGC 1
..(STANDARD ONLY)
..FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,l A,250V,FAST-BLOW AGC 1
..(OPT A4 NORTH AMERICAN ONLY)
..FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,0.5A,250V,FAST-BLOW AGC 112
..(STANDARD ONLY)
..FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,0.5A,250V,FAST-BLOW AGC 112
..(OPT A4 NORTH AMERICAN ONLY)
..FUSE,CARTRIDGE:TYPE C,13 AMP
..(OPT A2 UNTED KINGDOM ONLY)
..FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5 X 20MM,lA,20V,FAST BLOW
..(OPT A1 EUROPEAN,A2 UNITED KINGDOM AND
..A3 AUSTRALIAN ONLY)
..FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5 X 20MM,0.5A,250V,30 MIN OBD
..(OPT A1 EUROPEAN,A2 UNITED KINGDOM AND
..A3 AUSTRALIAN ONLY)
CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3 WIRE,98.OWLONG KH8352
(STANDARD)
CABLE ASSY,PWR:3,18 AWG,240V,98.0 L OBD
(OPT A3 AUTRALIAN)
CABLE ASSY,PWR:3 X 0.75MM SQ,220V,98.OL OBD
(OPT A1 EUROPEAN)
CABLE ASSY,PWR:3 X 0.75MM SQ,240V,98.0 L OBD
(OPT A2 UNITED KINGDOM)
CABLE ASSY,PWR:3,18 AWG,240V,98.0 L OBD
(OPT A4 NORTH AMERICAN)
MANUAL,TECH:OPERATORS 070-41 17-00
MANUAL,TECH:SERVlCE 070-41 18-00

REV SEP 1983 2336 OSCILLOSCOPE

 MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
At Tektronix, we continually strive to keep up with latest electronicdevelopments
by adding circuit and component improvements to our instruments as soon as they
are developed and tested.

Sometimes, due to printing and shipping requirements, we can't get these

changes immediately into printed manuals. Hence, your manual may contain new
change information on following pages.

A single change may affect several sections. Sincethe changeinformation sheets

are carried in the manual until all changes are permanently entered, some
duplication may occur. If no such change pages appear following this page, your
manual is correct as printed.
 This Document was scanned from the original
Tektronix Service Manual
For enquiries about high quality technical manuals

[email protected]

This Document is a complete Scan from the original

Tektronix manual
For enquiries about our complete
High quality line of technical Manuals in PDF

mailto : [email protected]
 NUAL CHANG M
COMMITTED TO EXCELLENCE Date: 10/11/8 3 Change Reference: C 1/I fl 8 3
,

I Product: 2336YA SERVICE Manual Part No.: 070-5011-00

DESCRIPTION

EFF SN: BEAVERTON B010140 u n l e s s o t h e r w i s e n o t e d .

GUERNSEY 10000@ u n l e s s o t h e r w i s e n o t e d .

ELAPSED TIME METER BOARD

The E l a p s e d T i m e M e t e r b o a r d i s o r d e r a b l e a s a c o m p l e t e b o a r d
( T e k t r o n i x p a r t number 670-8368-00) a n d c o n s i s t s o f t h e f o l l o w i n g
parts:

Elapsed t i m e meter
357K, 1%r e s i s t o r

The b o a r d i s l o c a t e d a t t h e r e a r o f t h e i n s t r u m e n t n e a r t h e f a n
and is s e c u r e d t o t h e main i n s t r u m e n t w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g hardware:

2 s c r e w s (Pan machine, 8.437",

4-40 t h r e a d )
2 s p a c e r s (0.125")

A d d i t i o n a l l y , a 22 AWG s o l i d w i r e i s u s e d t o c o n n e c t t h e +5 V
s u p p l y t o t h e E l a p s e d Time M e t e r b o a r d .

S c h e m a t i c Diagram

+sv (ONE END OF ~ 8 2 )

357K

0
ETM
0
A (GROUNDED wuouai SPACER)
 2336YA SERVICE 185/11/83 Change Reference: C1/1083
Product: Date:

DESCRIPTION

REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

CHANGE: BEAV SN PN DESCRIPTION

A10C27 8010540 2814772-00 CAPIF)(DICERDI: 4700PF,l0%,100V
Al0C88 B010540 281-0772-00 CAPIFXDICERDI: 4700PFI10%,100V
A10Q246 B010655 151-0476-01 TRANSISTOR: SILICONNPN
A10R46 8010575 3174911-00 RESIFXDICMPSN:910 OHM15%18-125W
A10R47 B01CJ575 311-0634-00 RES,VAR,NONWW: TRMR,500 OHM,0.5 W
A10R48 Bg10575 317-6331-00 RESIFXDICMPSN:330 OHMf5%,0.125W
A10R114 B010575 311-0634-00 RES,VAR,NOW: TRMR,500 OHMrB.5W
AldR115 B010575 317-0911-00 RESIFXDICMPSN:910 OHMI5%,0e125W
Al0R118 B010575 317-0331-00 RES,FXD,CMPSN: 3300HM15%100125W
A15 B012228 670-5529-01 CKT BOARD ASSY: VERT OUT/HV PCWER
A15E53 B012228 276-0569-90 COREIEM:TOROIDIFERRITEI
0.12 OD X 0.87 ID X 0.06
GUERN SN 100006 to 101121 Cores a r e added a s necessary to reduce
v e r t i c a l high-f requency aberrat i-ons.
A15E55 B012228 276mg569-00 COREIEM:TOROIDIFERRITE,
0,12 OD X 0.07 ID X 0.06
GUERN SN 100000 to 101121 Cores a r e added a s necessary t o reduce
vertical high-frequency aberrations.
A23C4 CAPIFXDICERDI:2.7PFr+/-0.25PFp500V 90
A23C8 CAPIFXDICERDI: 10BPF110%1500V 90
A23R11 RESIFXDICMPSN:62 OHM15%I0.125W 90
A3QC15 CAPIFXCIPLASTIC:0.22UFI20%,l00V 71
A30C16 CAPIFXDIPLASTIC:0*22UFr20%,100V 71

ADD :
Al0C57 B0120fl0 281-0862-00
GUERN SN 101121
A10R45 B010575 317-0331-00 RES,FXD,CMPSN: 330 OHM15%,0.125W 58
A10R116 B010575 317-0331-00 RESIFXDICMPSN:330 OHMr58,4.125W 68
A10R227 315-01fl2-00 RESIFXDICMPSN:1K OHM15%.0.250W 96
A30R9 B010655 317-0824-00 RESIFXDICMPSN:820K 0HMI5%,0.125W 71
A30VR6 156-1490-00 MICROCRT I LINEAR: VOLTAGE REFEFSNCE 1 2V
I a

mow:
Al0C231

Page 2 of 5
Product: 2336YA SERVICE C1/1083

DESCRIPTION

REPLACWLE MEKlHPW1CA.L P-ARTS LIST

ADD : FN DESCRIPTIQN REF

INSULATOR 342-0615-00 Between c r t s h i e l d and A24

SWEEP/HORIZ AMP/OF?l' BOARD

INSULATOR 410-0055-73 On main c h a s s i s near f a n between c h a s s i s Mod #

and wires from t h e LINE SELECTDR switch. 49956

WASHER 210-0940-00 BEAV B011474 Mod # M46694

GUERN 101081 Mod # (22646

FIG 2. FRONT PANEL & CRT-Include washer between

potentiometer marked 27 and spacer marked 28.

2 SPACERS 361-1102-00 I n s t a l l e d a t t h e r e a r two c o r n e r s o f A15

(VERT OVT/HV W ER SUPPLY BOARD) and secured
by t h e c h a s s i s mounting screws.

CHANGE :

SOCKET 136-0729-00 Fig. & Index No. 3-9.

SOCKET 136-0752-00 Fig. & Index No. 3-28.

F i g , & Index No. 5-3. Change Name & Description t o read:

ROLLER, DETENT:0.125 D I A X 0.125,SST

FIG, 5 TIMING SWITCH For item number 5, t h e arrow should p o i n t t o

Diagram the center shaft of the 3 concentric s h a f t s
shown i n t h e lower-left corner o f t h e diagram.

FIG. 5 TIMING SWITCH For item number 1 6 , t h e arrow should p o i n t t o

Diagram t h e h e l i c i a l s p r i n g which is t o t h e l e f t o f
t h e item c u r r e n t l y shown on t h e diagram.

_ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:

DESCRIPTION

GUERNSEY 180141 The four ceramic beads (Tektronix p a r t number 361-0254-00)

on t h e 670-6526-00 board below R252, R253, R264, and R265
do n o t a f f e c t e l e c t r i c a l and mechanical performance and do
n o t need t o be replaced i f t h e r e s i s t o r s a r e replaced.

GUERNSEY 101~381 The t r a n s i s t o r holder on 4156 (Tektronix p a r t number

342-0635-00) on t h e 670-6529-00 board does n o t a f f e c t
e l e c t r i c a l and mechanical performance and does n o t have
t o be replaced i f t h e t r a n s i s t o r is replaced.
 DESCRIPTION
1

DIAGRAP'I2 CH 1 & CH 2 VERT PREAMPS & DELAY LINE DRIVER

C27 (location 3B) to a 4700PF capacitor.

C88 (location 6B) to a 4700PF capacitor.
R46 (location 3E) to a 9181 ohm resistor.
R47 (location 3E) to a 500 ohm variable resistor.
R48 (location 3E) to a 330 ohm resistor.
R114 (location 6E) to a 500 ohm var iable resistor .
R115 (location 7E) to a 910 ohm resistor.
R118 (location 7E) to a 330 ohm resistor.
ADD :
C57 (1000PF) from the +18 VB end of R56 to ground.
R45 (330 ohm) in parallel with RT46 (location 3E) .
R116 (330 ohm) in parallel with RT115 (location 6E) .
R227 (1K ohm) from the junction of R183 and C183 to +5 V (location 9N).
D I A W 3 VERT OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
ADD : BEAV SN B012228
GUER SN 100000 to 101121-cores installed as needed to reduce
vertical high-frequency aberrations.
Cores E53 & E55 to U54 pins 6 & 8 as shown below.
Product: 7 3 3 6 ~-S ~ Date: Gwl
1/a3 Change Reference: Ll..,//83 .

DESCRIPTION

DIAGRAM C m E S (cont)

DIAGRAM 4 VERTICAL SWITCHING LOGIC & CHOP BLANKING

Connect both ends of R197 and C197 together a t location 6D.

DIAGRAM 5 TRIGGER

CHANGE :

C4 (location 2B) t o a 2.7PF capacitor.

C8 (location 2B) to a 2.7PF capacitor.
R 1 1 (location 2B) t o a 62 ohm resistor.

INTERCHANGE: the + and - signs on S219 SLDPE button a t location 1J

(button out is + slope).

DIAGRAM 1 0 LQW VOLTAGE FWEX SUPPLY

CHANGE :

F257 (location 7C) t o 1.5A.

REMOVE:

C231 (location 2G) .

DIAGRAM 11 DELTA TIME LOGIC

ADD :

R9 (820K ohm) in parallel with the 1 K ohm section of R8 (location 2 C ) .

TEXT CHANGES

Page 5-18 Step 4. Check AUPO Vertical Mode Operation

CHANGE section f t o read ....with a period of approximately 4 us....

Page 5 of 5
 This Document was scanned from the original
Tektronix Service Manual
For enquiries about high quality technical manuals

[email protected]

This Document is a complete Scan from the original

Tektronix manual
For enquiries about our complete
High quality line of technical Manuals in PDF

mailto : [email protected]
 n
COMM~TTEDTO EXCELLENCE
NUAL CHAN
Date: 1 2 / 6 / 8 3
INFORMATION
Change Reference: C I l l a 8 3 ADDUM
product: 2336YA SERVICE Manual Part No.: 0'78-5011-00

DESCRIPTION

EFF SN: BEAVERTON B010140 u n l e s s o t h e r w i s e n o t e d .

GUERNSEY 100000 u n l e s s o t h e r w i s e n o t e d .

P a g e 1-1 Standard accessories list

ADD : T h e f o l l o w i n g items a s shown b e l o w :

1 Probe, 1 X
3 Adapters, Probe T i p
3 Tips, Spring

CHANGE : T h e f o l l o w i n g i t e m q u a n t i t i e s a s shown b e l o w :

2 O p e r a t o r s Manua1.s
2 S e r v i c e Manuals

ACCESSORIES t a b b e d p a g e i n t h e R e p l a c e a b l e M e c h a n i c a l P a r t s L i s t
( S e c t i o n 10)-STANDARD ACCESSORIES L i s t

ADD : T h e f o l l o w i n g items a s shown b e l o w :

1 P r o b e , l X , P6101 010-6101-03
3 Adapters, Probe T i p 103-0051-01
3 Tips, Spring 206-0060-00
CHANGE : T h e f o l l o w i n g item p a r t n u m b e r s a n d q u a n t i t i e s a s
shown b e l o w :

2 O p e r a t o r s Manuals 070-5010-00
2 S e r v i c e Manuals 070-5011-00
 This Document was scanned from the original
Tektronix Service Manual
For enquiries about high quality technical manuals

[email protected]

This Document is a complete Scan from the original

Tektronix manual
For enquiries about our complete
High quality line of technical Manuals in PDF

mailto : [email protected]